UC-NRLF 


IS    150 


- 


GIFT   OF 


Uivii  Eng.   L-ept. 


rt 

ENGINEERING    LIBRARY 
OF 

WILLIAM   B.   STOREY 

A  GRADUATE  OF 

THE    COLLEGE    OF    MECHANICS 
CLASS   OF  1881 

PRESENTED  TO  THE  UNIVERSITY 
1922 


AJPRACTICAL  SYSTEM  FOR  WRITING 
SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  BUILDINGS  ^  ^  ^ 


BY 


\V:  Fraixk  Bower 


Member  of  New  Jersey  Society  of  Architects. 


Second  Edition, 


NEW    YORK: 

WILLIAM  T.  COMSTOCK, 

23  Warren  Street. 
J8<»8. 


ENS.    DEPT> 


Copyright,   1894, 
W.   FRANK  BOWER 

d* 

Copyright.   ISilx, 
W.   FRANK  BOWER. 


Printed  by 

THE  REPUBLIC  PRESS, 
New  York. 


~f~/T 


PREFACE    TO    THE     FIRST    EDITION. 

This  work  is  the  embodiment  of  a  system  of  specification  writing  which  I  have  used  in  my 
own  practice  for  a  number  of  years.  It  is  not  a  treatise  on  specifications,  nor  instructions  in 
writing  them.  What  I  have  attempted  is  an  arrangement  of  the  matter  commonly  used  in 
specification  writing,  in  a  form  from  which  specifications  for  most  buildings  may  be  prepared 
with  more  than  usual  facility  and  with  a  reasonable  degree  of  certainty  that  nothing  has  been 
omitted,  and  also  the  insertion  in  the  shape  of  notes  of  information  essential  or  valuable  in 
specification  writing. 

To  facilitate  the  use  of  the  book,  the  specification  matter  has  been  placed  on  the  left-hand 
pages  only,  large  type  has  been  used,  and  such  matter  as  would  be  changed  to  suit  particular 
specifications  has  been  printed  in  italics,  or  otherwise  arranged,  so  as  to  readily  attract  the  eye. 
In  places  where  special  makes,  grades  and  numbers  are  commonly  specified,  it  has  seemed 
preferable  to  insert  appropriate  ones  rather  than  to  leave  blank  spaces,  always  more  or  less 
confusing. 

The  order  in  which  the  various  headings  are.placed  is,  perhaps,  as  good  as  any.  The  main 
object  in  this  respect  has  been  to  arrange  them  conveniently  for  dividing  in  the  various  usual 
ways.  Some  items,  specifying  methods  obsolete  or  suited  only  to  special  work  and  conditions, 
have  been  omitted,  as  I  believe  the  insertion  of  such  would  encumber  the  book  with  matter 
rarely  cared  for.  It  is  manifestly  impossible,  in  fact,  to  provide  here"  for  a  myriad  of  individual 
or  local  requirements,  but  in  order  that  users  might  be  able  to  supply  with  the  pen  any  needs 
of  their  own,  much  blank  space  has  been  left  throughout,  and  the  lines  on  the  left-hand  pages 
have  been  placed  sufficiently  far  apart  to  permit  of  ample  interlineations.  In  this  way  even 
exter.sive  alterations  and  enlargements  can  be  made  at  will. 

I  would  i.ot  wish  to  be  understood  as  recommending  all  the  methods  of  construction 
described  many  have  been  inserted  solely  because  they  are  in  use  in  some  localities ;  neither  do 
I  make  any  particular  claim  to  originality  in  the  matter  contained.  Material  has  been  collected 
from  many  sources,  but  I  entertain  the  hope  that  I  have,  perhaps,  compiled  a  work  which  will 
make  specification  writing  more  sure  and  systematic  and  less  arduous. 


PREFACE     TO    THE     SECOND     EDITION. 

It  is  now  about  two  years  since  this  work  was  first  issued,  and  the  almost  unexpected  favor 
with  which  it  was  received  has  necessitated  a  second  edition.  In  preparing  this  edition  no 
thorough  revision  has  been  attempted.  Considerable  matter"  has,  however,  been  added,  both 
in  the  specifications  and  in  the  shape  of  notes. 

On  the  following  page  and  on  page  23  a  new  feature  is  suggested.  It  is  obvious  that  an 
arrangement  of  this  kind  can  only  be  developed  by  the  individual  user  of  the  book  and  cannot 
be  put  into  his  hands  read}*  made. 

During  the  past  two  years  the  Author  has  received  so  many  encouraging  letters  from 
Architects,  that  he  desires  to  acknowledge  their  kindness  and  to  express  the  hope  that  the  book 
will  continue  to  meet  their  approbation. 

W.   FRANK  BOWER, 
NEWARK,  N.  J.,  May,  1898. 


NOTE. 

For  a  practical  use  of  the  book  a  system  of  supplements  similar  to  those  on  page  23 
might  be  used  extensively  to  advantage  by  having  them  typewritten  and  pasted  on  the  note 
pages  as  flaps,  one  over  the  other  in  siich  a  way  that  only  the  headings  would  show.  A  glance 
would  then  show  which  supplement  would  fit  the  case  wanted.  A  full  set  of  "  supplements" 
as  here  suggested  would  greatly  facilitate  the  preparation  of  specification  work  for  type- 
writing, making  it  necessary  in  most  cases  to  write  only  the  headings  and  the  number  of 
the  supplement  wanted,  writing  out  in  full  only  such  portions  of  the  specification  as  could 
not  be  covered  by  "supplements."  This  method  will  be  found  to  require  much  less  time 
than  dictating,  as  well  as  insuring  greater  accuracy  in  the  work. 

Cases  in  which  dimensions,  etc.,  vary  so  widely  that  it  would  be  difficult  to  prepare  a 
"supplement  "  to  cover  each  case,  might  be  arranged  with  a  letter  to  indicate  such  variations, 
as  for  instance  under  "  Cesspools,"  a  supplement  might  be  prepared  as  follows: 

Supplement  A.      One  tig/it  cesspool,  brick,  specify  X. 

CESSPOOL.     Construct  the  cesspool  X  feet  from  the  building,  etc. ,  etc. 

In  preparing  the  speci'ication  for  typewriting  it  would  only  be  necessary  to  write: 

Cesspool;  Sup.  A.  p.  41.   X=(iO'. 

And  the  typewriter  could  easily  copy  it  for  the  specification. 

In  addition  to  supplements  as  here  suggested,  the  left  hand  pages  might  be  divided 
into  sections  with  red  ink  rulings  on  the  margin  and  each  section  lettered  and  the  line  num- 
bered. Any  part  of  the  book  could  then  be  easily  referred  to  for  copying. 

For  using  the  book  in  this  way  three  or  four  copies  should  be  arranged,  fixing  the  Mason's 
Specification  matter  in  one,  the  Carpenter's  in  another,  etc.,  so  that  one  maybe  used  while 
the  other  is  being  copied. 

Whenever  a  case  occurred  that  no  "section"  or  "supplement"  would  "fit"  a  new  one 
could  be  added,  thus  increasing  the  efficiency  of  the  book. 

A  vast  amount  of  specification  work  is  needlessly  written  over  many  times.  With  a 
system  of  this  kind  properly  elaborated  a  specification  could  be  prepared  for  copying  in  a 
few  hours  which  would  require  days  to  write  out. 


Summary  of  Specifications. 


Page 

2.  General  Conditions. 

Contractor. 

Work  and  Material. 
4.        Drawings. 

Obstructions  and  Repair 

Award. 

Care  of  Building. 

Hason's  Specification. 

6.  General  Conditions,  pages 

2  and  4. 
Water. 

Fuel  and  Stoves 
Care  of  Building 
Arch  Centres 

8.  Demolition  of  Old  Build- 
ings. 

Disposition  of  Material. 
Ownership  of  Material. 
Bridge  and  Platform. 
10.   Survey. 
Location. 
Excavation. 
Trees. 

Sod  and  Top  Soil. 
Excavation. 
Tamping. 

Excavation  for  Piling. 
Disposition  of  Earth. 
Blasting. 
12.    Shoring. 

of  Excavation, 
of  Adjoining  Buildings. 
Underpinning. 

of  Adjoining  Buildings. 
Sheet  Piling. 
14.    Piling. 
Piles. 
Driving. 

Shoes  and  Rings. 
Filling. 
Concrete. 
Stone. 
Capping. 
Wood. 
16.  Platform. 

Stone. 
Pumping. 
Grading. 
Trees. 
Grading. 
Drives. 


Page 

16.       Paths. 
Con-d.    Sodding. 
Terraces. 
Lawns. 
Pits. 

18.   Lime,  Cement  and  Sand. 
Mortar. 
Concrete. 
Rosendale. 
Portland. 
Ordinary. 

For  Important  Work. 
20.    Brickwork. 

Hollow  Walls. 
Backing. 

Wall  for  Waterproofing. 
Curb. 
Floors. 
Fireproofing. 
22.  Footings. 
Concrete. 
Stone. 
Brick. 

Foundations. 
Stone. 

For  Dwellings,  etc. 
For  City  Buildings. 
Brick. 
Mortar. 
24.       Outside  Plastering. 

Foundation      above 

grade. 

Damp  Course. 
Piers. 

Inverted  Arches. 
26.  Vaults. 

Beam  Filling. 
Cellar  Area. 
Other  Areas. 
Coal  Slide. 
28    Cellar  Bottom. 
Ordinary. 

For  City  Buildings. 
Top  Coat. 
Waterproofing. 
30.  Trench  for  Drain  Pipe. 
Trap  Pits. 
Cold  Air  Duct. 
Brick  Set  Heater. 
Furnace  Pit. 
32.  Chimneys. 

Kitchen  Flue. 
Heater  Flue. 


Page 

32        Other  Flues. 
end.    Plastering  Outside. 
Facing. 
Ash  Pit. 
Thimbles. 
Rough  Fireplaces. 
34.       Fireplace  Finish. 
Facings. 
Brick. 
Tile. 
Linings. 
Brick. 
Iron. 
Frames. 
Grates. 
Gas  Logs. 
Hearths. 
Tile. 
Brick. 
Slate. 

Kitchen  Fireplace. 
For  Brickset  Range. 
For  Portable  Range. 
36.  Ventilating  Flues. 
Face  Brickwork. 
Ordinary. 

For  City  Buildings. 
Moulded  Brick. 
Terra  Cotta. 

38.  Preparation  for  Tiling. 
Floors. 
Walls. 

Fire  and  Mice  Stops. 
Brick  Paving. 
Waterproof  Floor. 
Cistern. 
Overflow. 
Vent. 
Supply. 

40.  Privy  Vault. 
40.       Discharge  Pipe. 
Cesspools. 

Two:  tight  and  loose. 
Tight. 
Loose. 
Overflow. 
Grease  Trap. 
42.  Drains. 
Dry. 
Leader. 
Sewer. 
Irrigation. 
Yard  Catch  Basins. 


Page 

44.  Ironwork. 

Anchors. 
Chimney  Rods. 
Guards. 
Gratings. 
Plastering. 
Whitewashing. 
Deafening. 
46.       Lathing. 

Plastering. 

Three  Coat  Work. 

Laid  on  Work. 

Two  Coat  Work. 
48.       Finish  of  Walls. 

Hard  Finish. 

Sand  Finish. 
King'sWindsor  Cement. 
Adamant. 
50.       Patching. 
Centres. 
Cornices. 
Beams. 
Brackets. 
Coves. 

Outside  Plastering. 
52.  Bluestone. 

Templates. 
Pier  Caps  and  Bonds. 
Bases. 

Footing  Stones. 
Cellar  Area  Stone. 
Drain  Trench  Cover. 
Kitchen  Fireplaces. 
Cistern  Cover. 
Cesspool  Cover. 
Grease  Trap  Cover. 
Terrace  Steps. 
Step  Flags. 
Flag  Sidewalk. 

Ordinary. 

54-  For  City  Work. 

Curb. 
Gutter. 

Area  Flagging. 
Cement  Sidewalk. 
56.  Cut  5tone. 

Qualityand  Description. 
Clamps. 
Carving. 
58.       Setting. 

If  included. 

If  delivered  only. 
Protection. 


tage 

58.       Kind  of  Stone. 
Con"d     Ashlar  Work. 
60.        Margins. 

Water  Table. 
Sills. 
Lintels. 
Jambs. 

Mullions,  etc. 
Quoins. 
Chimney  Caps. 
62.       Pier  Caps  and  Bonds. 
Coping. 
Steps. 
Stoops. 

Terrace  Steps. 
Belts. 

Columns  and  Pilasters. 
Platforms. 
Arches. 
Step  Stones. 
Posts. 
Ironwork. 
64.    Miscellaneous  Items. 

Mason's,  pages  20  &  44. 
Cut  Stone,  page  56. 
Carpenter's,  page  84. 
Structural  Iron  Work. 
Principle   of    Construc- 
tion. 
Tests. 
Cast  Iron. 

66.       Wrought  Iron. 
Steel. 
Setting. 

Bolting  and  Riveting. 
68.        Punching. 
Bases. 
Lintels. 

Cast  Iron  Columns. 
Wrought  Iron  and 
Steel  Columns. 
70.        Beams  and  Girders. 

Box   and    Plate   Gir- 
ders. 
Painting. 
72.       Roofs. 

Trusses. 

Riveted  Work. 
Pin     Connected 

Work. 
Expansion. 
Purlins. 

74.  Covering. 

Fire  Escapes. 
Sidewalk  Doors. 
76.   Stairs. 
Grilles. 
Shutters. 
Area  Railings. 
Fences. 
Walk  Lights. 
Coal  Covers. 


Page 

76.   Gates. 

CoavBalconies. 

Cresting. 

Wheel  Guards. 


Carpenter's 

Specification. 

78.  General  Conditions,  p.  2. 

Cutting. 

Demolition  of  Old  Build- 
ings, page  8. 
Bridge      and       Platform, 

page  8. 

Shoring,  page  12. 
80.  Timber. 
82.    Framing. 
84.       Sills,  etc. 
Ties. 

Floor  Beams. 
Sizing. 
Firecut. 

Beam  Anchors. 
Headers    and    Trim- 
mers. 

Flitch  Plates. 
Stirrups. 
Roof. 

Straps. 
86.       Partitions. 

Bridging. 

Lintels,  Arches,  etc. 
Sheathing. 
88.   Roofs. 

Shingle. 
Slate. 

Ridge  Rolls. 
Cresting. 
Flashing. 
Roof. 
Aprons. 
Counter. 
Other  Flashing. 
oo.   Scuttle. 
Skylights. 

Side  and  Gable  Shingle. 
Siding. 
92.  Outside  Finish 

Quality  of  Material. 
Cornices. 
Open. 

Gutter  on  Roof. 
Raking. 
Verge  Boards. 
Open  Timber  Work. 
Lattice  Work. 
Water  Table. 
Corner  Boards. 
Belts. 

Other  Outside  Finish. 
94.   Wood  Carving. 


Page 
94. 


96. 


98. 


100. 


102. 


104. 


106. 


108. 


no. 


Composition  Work. 
Piazzas. 

Floors. 

Steps. 

Floor  Gutters. 

Ceiling. 

Lattice. 

Columns. 

Balusters. 

Rails. 

Balconies. 

Porte  Cochere. 
Cellar  Hatchway. 

Steps. 

Louvre  Boarding. 
Window       and       Door 
Frames. 

Windows. 
Casement. 
Plank. 
Screen. 
Paneled. 

Door. 

Entrance. 

Setting. 

Temporary  Enclosing. 
Furring. 

Ceilings. 

Back  Plaster. 

Coves. 
Grounds. 
Deafening. 

Mineral  Wool. 

Sawdust  Filling. 
Preparation  for  Tiling. 
Floors. 

Sleepers. 

Under  Flooring. 

Mice  Stops. 

Hardwood. 
Protection. 
Parquet. 

Ordinary. 
Sash. 

Hardwood. 

Storm. 

Priming. 
Glazing. 

Plate  Glass. 

Stained  Glass. 

Single  Thick. 

Double  Thick. 
Mosquito  Frames. 

Windows. 

Doors. 

Material. 

Finish. 
Blinds. 

Outside. 
Hardware. 
Painting. 

Inside  Shutters. 


Page 

no. 

Con'd. 


112. 


114. 


116. 


118. 


120. 


122. 


124. 


Material. 
Finish. 
Hardware. 
Venetian  Blinds. 
Material. 
Finish. 
Hardware. 
Sliding  Blinds. 

Material. 
Finish  of  Blinds. 
Steel  Shutters. 
Rolling  Partitions. 
Doors. 

Veneering. 
Sizes. 
Hardware. 
Front. 

Dutch  Door. 
Vestibule. 
Outside. 
Inside. 

Sliding. 
Glass. 
Transom. 
Dwarf. 
Trap. 
Saddles 
Screen. 
Water  Closet. 
Trim  and  Base. 
Material. 
Description. 
Special. 
Closet. 
Ordinary. 

Boxing  of  Shutters. 
Wood  Cornices. 
Picture  Mold. 
Chair  Rail. 
Wainscoting. 
Ceiled. 
Paneled. 
Angle  Beads. 
Wood  Ceilings. 
Beam  Casing. 
Store  Front. 
Sash. 
Doors. 
Stairs. 
Main. 
Rear. 

Protection. 
Cellar. 

Winter  Steps. 
Mantels,  etc. 
Mantels. 
Sideboard. 
Hat  Rack. 
Book  Cases. 
Arches,  Seats,  etc. 
Mirrors. 
Finish  of. 


11. 


Page 

126.  Closets. . 

Butler's  Pantry. 

China  Closet. 

Kitchen  Pantry. 

Bed  Room  Closets. 
128.        Tin  Closet. 

Kitchen  Dresser. 

Wardrobes. 

Cedar  Closet. 

Linen  Closet. 

Store  Rooms. 

Medicine  Closet. 

Coat  Closet. 

Other  Closets. 
130.        Drawers  in. 

Ventilation  of. 
Work  for  Plumbing. 

Bath  Room. 

Water  Closet. 
132.        Lavatory. 

Other  Wash  Bowls. 

Kitchen  Sink. 

Wash  Trays. 

Pipe  Casing. 

Tack  Boards. 
134.        Tank. 

Conservatory. 
Clothes  Chute. 
Dumb  Waiter. 
Elevator. 

136.    Refrigerator. 
Cellar  Work. 

Partitions. 

Coal  Bins. 

Laundry  Tubs. 

Water  Closet. 

Other  Closets. 

Store  Room. 
138.        Swing  Shelves. 

Bins. 

Wine  Closet. 

Laundry. 

Cold  Air  Box. 
Storm  House. 
Clothes  Posts. 
Yard  House. 

Temporary  Privy. 
140.    Wood  Cistern. 

Cistern  Cover. 

Terrace  Steps. 
Board  Walk. 
Fences. 

Board. 

Picket. 

Iron. 

142.    Hardware. 
Sash. 

Double  Hung. 
Locks  and  Lifts. 

Single. 

Locks  and  Lifts. 

Cellar. 


Page 
142. 


144. 


146. 


148. 


Hinges,  Buttons  and 

Hooks. 
Casement. 

Hinges,        Arms, 

Hooks. 
French. 

Hinges,  Locks. 

Handles,  Bolts. 
Doors  under  Windows. 

Hinges,  Bolts. 

Catches,  Locks. 
Storm  Sash. 

Hinges,  Plates. 

Catches. 
Doors. 

Front  and  Vestibule. 

Locks,  Knobs. 

Hinges,  Push. 

Buttons,  Bell  Pulls. 

Combination   Letter 

Boxes  and  Bell  Pulls. 

Bolts. 
Storm. 

Hinges,  Handles. 
Sliding. 

Sheaves,  Track. 

Locks,  Pulls. 

Escutcheons. 
Double  Acting. 

Hinges,  Push  Plates. 
Ordinary. 

Locks,  Knobs. 

Escutcheons,  Roses. 

Hinges,  Bolts. 

Springs. 
Stops. 
Transoms. 

Hinges,  Adjusters. 
Trap. 

Hinges,  Riog  Lifts, 

Bolts. 
Scuttle. 

Hinges,     Hooks, 

Bolts. 
Cellar  Hatchway. 

Hinges,     Locks, 

Bolts. 
Water  Closet. 

Spring,  Hinges. 

Indicating  Bolts. 

Clothes  Hooks. 
Store  Doors. 

Handles  or  Knobs. 

Locks,  Bolts. 
Blinds. 
Outside. 

Hinges,  Fasteners. 

Adjusters. 

Inside  Openers. 
Shutters. 

Hinges,  Bars,  Flaps. 

Knobs. 


Page 
148. 

Con'd. 


Venetian. 

Cord       Fasteners, 

Hooks. 
Sliding. 
Lifts. 

Rolling  Partitions. 
Tracks. 
Sheaves. 

Pull   Plates  or  han- 
dles. 
Locks. 
Screen. 
Sliding. 
Lifts. 
Swinging. 

Hinges,       Hooks, 

Catches. 
Doors. 

Hinges,    Catches, 

Locks. 
Closets. 

Draw  Pulls. 
Catches,  Locks. 
Clothes  Hooks. 


Electrical 

Specification. 

150.  General  Conditions,  p.  2. 

Inspection. 
Cutting. 

Electric  Lighting. 

Tubing. 

Wiring. 
152.        Arrangement. 

Distribution  of 

Outlets,     Lights    and 
Switches. 

Cut  Outs. 

Switches. 

Fixtures. 
154.    Burglar  Alarm. 

Springs. 

Wiring. 

Batteries. 
156.    Electric  Gas  Lighting. 

Automatics. 

Pendants. 

Wiring. 

Batteries. 
158.    Electric  Bells. 

Push  Plates. 

Annunciators. 

Wiring. 

Batteries. 
Door  Openers. 

Wiring. 

Batteries. 


Page 

Painter's 

Specification. 

100.  General  Conditions. 
162.   Painted  Work. 

Exterior. 
164.  Metal. 

Interior. 
Shingles. 
Natural  Wood  Finish. 

Hardwood. 
166.        Floors  and  Stair  Treads 

Pine  and  Soft  Wood. 
Enamel  Finish. 

Gold. 

168.    Staining. 
Graining. 
Kalsomining. 
Painted  Plaster  Work. 
Finish  of  Mantels,  etc. 

Plumber's 

Specification. 

170.  General  Conditions,  p.  2. 

Excavating. 
Cutting. 
172.    Pipes. 

Earthenware. 
Cast  Iron. 
Weights. 
Hangers. 
Coating. 
Joints. 

Wrought  Iron. 
Wastes. 
Supplies. 

174.  Heating. 

Gas. 

'  Weights. 
Lead. 
Wastes. 
Supplies. 
Weights. 
Supports. 
Joints. 
Brass. 
176.        Pipe  Casing. 

Exposed  Pipes. 
Testing  of  Pipes. 
Wastes. 
Gas. 

Supplies. 

Cesspool,  page  40. 
178.   House  Sewer. 
House  Drain. 
House  Trap. 
Cleaning  Screws. 
Fresh  Air  Inlet. 
Yard  Drains. 
Leader  Drains. 


in. 


Page 

180.   Standing     Soil      and 

Waste  Lines. 
Vent  Pipes. 

Pipes  Enlarged. 
Roof  Joints. 
Baskets. 
182     Leaders. 
Inside. 

Outside  Connections. 
Traps. 
Traps. 
Ordinary. 
Grease. 
Bell. 
Safes. 
Marble. 
Lead. 

Wastes. 
184.  Tank. 

Overflow. 
Emptying  Pipe. 
Supply  to  Tank. 
City. 

Cistern  or  Well. 
Cistern  and  Well. 

Telltale  Pipe. 
Supplies  from  Tank. 
186.   Water  Supply. 

Hose  Connection. 
Hydrant. 
Boiler. 

Circulation  Pipe. 
Steam  Escape. 
Range. 
Registers. 
Brick  Set. 
100.   Fixtures. 

Kitchen  Sink. 
Iron. 
Supply. 
City. 
Cistern. 
Well  and  Cistern. 


Page 

190.        Waste. 
Con'd       Porcelain. 
Pantry  Sink. 

Copper. 

192.        Porcelain. 
Grease  Trap. 
Bath  Tubs. 
Copper. 
Porcelain. 
194.    Shower  Bath. 
Seat  Bath. 
Copper. 
Porcelain. 
196.    Wash  Bowls. 
Ordinary. 

Lavatory  Apparatus. 
Water  Closet. 
198.    Urinal. 

Supply. 
Direct. 
Tank. 

With  Pull. 
Automatic. 
Waste. 
Marble. 
Slop  Hopper. 
Iron. 

Direct  Supply. 
Porcelain. 
Supply. 
200.  Cistern. 

Waste. 
Wash  Trays. 
Cement 
Porcelain. 
202.  Gas  Fitting. 
Gas  Log. 

Street  Connection. 
204.  Metal  Work. 
Tin. 
Make. 
Painting. 
Solder. 


Page 

204.    Roofs. 

Con'd          Tin. 

Copper. 

Corrugated  Iron,  p.  74. 
206.  Gutters. 

Lined. 

Hung. 
Valleys. 

Strip. 

Pieced. 
Hips. 

Strip. 

Pieced. 

Flashing,  page  88. 
Skylights,  page  90. 
Scuttles,  page  90. 
Leaders. 
Speaking  Tubes. 
Furnace  Work,  page  212. 

Heating 

Specifications. 

208.  General  Conditions. 
210.    Hot  Air. 

Furnace. 
Casing. 
Brick  Setting. 
Foundation. 
Smoke  Pipe. 

212.        Pipes  and  Registers. 
214.        Cold  Air  Box. 

Guarantee. 
216.    Steam. 

Principle  of  Construc- 
tion. 
Heater. 
Fittings. 
Fire  Tools. 
Smoke  Pipe. 
Foundation. 
Bricking. 
218.        Radiation. 


Page 

218.  Indirept. 

Con'd  CoilS. 

Direct-Indirect. 

Valves. 
220.       Piping. 

Double  Pipe  Steam. 

Single  Pipe  Steam. 

Hot  Water. 
222.        Mains. 

Double  Pipe  Steam. 

Single  Pipe  Steam. 

Hot  Water. 

Fittings. 

Hangers. 

Plates. 

Bronzing. 

Covering. 
224.       Temporary  Heat." 

Guarantee. 
226.   Hot  Water. 

Principle  of  Construc- 
tion. 
Heater. 

Fittings. 

Fire  Tools. 

Supply  and  Draw. 

Smoke  Pipe. 

Foundation. 

Bricking. 
Expansion  Tank. 
228.       Radiation. 

Indirect. 

Coils. 

Direct. 

Direct-Indirect. 

Valves. 
Piping. 

Fittings. 

Hangers. 

Plates. 

Bronzing. 

Covering. 
Guarantee. 


IV. 


SPECIFICATIONS. 


SPECIFICATION    of    the    labor   and    material    to    be    furnished    in    the 
erection  of  a.  frame  house  to  be  constructed  for  Mr. 
at 

in  accordance  with  the  accompanying  drawings  and  this  specification  and  under 
the  supervision  of 

Architect, 


General 

Conditions. 

Contractor. 


Work  and 
flaterial. 


j  address  \ 


\ date  1 


The  Contractor  shall  furnish  all  material,  labor,  transportation,  scaffolding, 
utensils  and  so  forth  of  every  description  required  for  the  full  performance  of  the 
work  herein  specified,  except  as  otherwise  particularly  mentioned.  He  shall  lay- 
out his  work  and  be  responsible  for  its  correctness,  shall  keep  a  competent 
foreman  on  the  premises,  shall  not  sublet  any  part  of  his  work  without  the 
written  consent  of  the  Owner,  shall  obtain  all  necessary  permits  to  properly  carry 
out  his  work,  paying  the  lawful  fees  therefor ;  shall  give  to  the  proper  authorities 
all  requisite  notices  relating  to  the  work  in  his  charge,  shall  afford  the  Architect 
every  facility  for  inspection,  shall  be  responsible  for  all  violations  of  law  or 
damage  to  property  caused  by  him  or  his  employees  and  shall  properly  protect 
his  work  during  progress. 

All  the  materials  are  to  be  of  the  best  of  their  several  kinds  in  quality  as 
herein  specified ;  all  labor  to  be  performed  in  the  best  manner  by  skilled 
workmen,  and  both  to  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  Architect.  All  work  and 
material  must  conform  to  the  laws,  rules  and  regulations  in  force  in  the  locality  in 


OTHER  CLAUSES,  similar  to  the  following,  are  usually  included  in  the  Building  Contract 
though  sometimes  inserted  in  the  General  Conditions  of  the  specification. 

TIME  OF  COMPLETION. 

The  entire  work  included  in  this  contract  is  to  be  completed  on  or  before  the  first  day  of 
January,  1896,  [and  the  several  portions  thereof  on  or  before  the  following  dates  :  (Excavation 

on  or  before etc.,)] 

and  should  the  Contractor  fail  to  complete  the  work  [or  the  several  portions  thereof]  at  or  before 
the  time  agreed  upon — allowing  such  extensions  of  time,  if  any,  in  the  case  of  extra  work  as  may 
have  been  agreed  upon  and  certified  to  by  the  Architect — then  the  Contractor  shall  pay  to  the 
Owner  the  sum  of  ($10)  per  day  as  liquidated  and  ascertained  damages  for  each  and  every  day 
that  the  work  [or  the  several  portions  thereof]  shall  remain  unfinished  after  the  time  agreed  upon 
for  the  completion  of  the  same. 

[The  work  which  is  to  be  done  by  the  other  contractors  is  to  be  completed  on  or  before  the 

following  dates  :  ( )  and  should  the  work  included  in  this  contract  be  delayed  by  reason  of 

the  failure  of  such  other  contractors  to  complete  the  various  portions  of  their  work  at  or  before  the 
times  agreed  upon,  then  the  Owner  shall  allow  the  Contractor  an  extension  of  time  equal  to  the 
delay  so  caused.] 

PAYMENTS. 

(Payments  are  sometimes  made  of  specific  sums,  or  a  certain  percentage  of  the  value  of  the 
work  done  and  material  used,  when  certain  named  stages  of  the  work  are  completed,  as  for 

instance — FIRST  PAYMENT: — When  the  foundation  is  finished  complete  the  sum  of  $ (OR 

80  per  cent,  of  the  value  of  the  work  done  and  material  used.)} 

Or  sometimes 

On  the  fifth  day  of  every  month  during  the  progress  of  the  work  the  Owner  shall  pay  to  the 
Contractor  a  sum  equal  to  (80  per  cent,  of)  the  value  of  the  work  done  and  material  furnished  dur- 
ing the  preceding  month  as  assessed  by  the  Architect  and  the  balance  (30)  days  after  the 
completion  of  the  work  herein  included, 

PROVIDED  that  for  each  of  the  said  payments  the  Contractor  shall  obtain  from  the  said 
Architect  a  certificate  signed  by  him  setting  forth  that  the  said  payment  is  properly  due.  Such 
certificate,  however,  is  in  no  way  to  lesson  the  final  responsibility  of  the  Contractor  nor  exempt 
him  from  liability  to  make  good  any  work  or  material  afterward  found  to  be  defective, 

[AND  PROVIDED  FURTHER  that  for  each  of  said  payments  the  Contractor  shall  produce 
a  satisfactory  certificate  to  the  effect  that  the  building  and  the  land  whereon  the  same  is  erected  is 
free  from  all  mechanics'  liens  or  other  claims  incurred  by  the  Contractor.] 

ALTERATIONS. 

Should  the  Owner  at  any  time  during  the  progress  of  the  work  request  any  alterations  or 
additions  to  or  deviations  or  omissions  from  the  work  included  in  the  specification  such  request 
shall  be  acceded  to  by  the  Contractor  and  the  same  shall  in  no  way  effect  or  make  void  the  con- 
tract No  such  alterations,  additions,  deviations  or  omissions  which  effect  the  price  or  the  time 
for  completion  as  agreed  upon  shall  be  done,  however,  without  a  written  order  from  the  Architect. 

ARBITRATION. 

Should  any  dispute  arise  respecting  the  true  meaning  of  the  drawings  and  specification  the 
same  shall  be  decided  by  the  Architect  and  his  decision  shall  be  final,  but  should  any  dispute  arise 
as  to  the  value  of  the  extra  work  to  be  performed  or  work  to  be  omitted  or  of  any  extension  of 
time  which  is  to  be  granted  for  the  same  all  such  shall  be  valued  by  two  competent  persons,  one 
employed  by  the  Owner  and  one  by  the  Contractor,  and  these  two  shall  name  an  umpire  whose 
decision  shall  be  binding  on  all  parties. 

DELAY. 

Should  the  Contractor  at  any  time  during  the  progress  of  the  work  refuse  or  neglect  or  be 
unable  from  any  cause  to  supply  a  sufficiency  of  suitable  materials  or  workmen  to  properly  carry 
out  the  work  in  his  charge  the  Owner  shall  have  the  power  to  provide  suitable  materials  and  work- 
men at  market  rates  after  three  days  notice  in  writing  being  given  to  the  Contractor  to  finish  the 
said  work  and  the  cost  of  the  same  shall  be  deducted  from  the  amount  of  this  contract. 


which  the  building  is  to  stand,  anything  hereinafter  specified  to  the  contrary  not- 
withstanding. 

Drawings.  The  drawings  referred  to  in  this  specification  consist  of   \  mention  drawings  j 

which  will  be  supplemented  by  detailed  drawings  to  be  furnished  as  the  work 
progresses.  All  these  drawings  are  intended  to  co-operate  with  and  form  a  part 
of  the  specification  and  the  accompanying  contract.  Where  figures  are  given 
they  are  to  be  followed  in  preference  to  measurement  by  scale. 

Anything  which  is  not  shown  on  the  drawings  but  which  is  mentioned  in  the 
specification  or  vice  versa,  or  anything  not  expressly  set  forth  in  either  but  which 
is  reasonably  implied  shall  be  furnished  and  performed  the  same  as  though 
specially  shown  and  mentioned  in  both.  Should  anything  be  omitted  from  the 
drawings  or  specifications  which  is  necessary  to  a  clear  understanding  of  the  work 
or  should  any  error  appear  either  in  the  various  instruments  furnished  or  in  the 
work  done  by  other  contractors  effecting  the  work  included  in  this  specification 
it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Contractor  to  notify  the  Architect,  In  the  event  of 
the  Contractor  failing  to  give  such  notice  he  shall  make  good  any  damage  to  or 
defect  in  his  work  caused  thereby. 

The  drawings  and  specifications  furnished  for  this  work  are  to  be  considered 
instruments  of  service,  are  to  be  used  for  this  building  only,  are  the  property  of 
the  Architect  and  must  be  returned  to  him  immediately  on  completion  of  the 
work  set  forth  therein. 

At  any  time  directed  by  the  Architect,  the  Contractor  shall  clear  out  any  of 
his  rubbish  or  material  which  may  constitute  an  obstruction  to  the  progress  of  the 
work,  and  at  completion  shall  clear  out  all  rubbish  and  surplus  material  left  by 
him,  shall  repair  any  damage  to  his  work,  no  matter  by  whom  caused,  [loss  or 
damage  by  fire  excepted,]  and  leave  the  premises  broom  clean  and  in  perfect  repair 
and  order  so  far  as  his  work  is  concerned. 

Award.  The  Owner  reserves  the  right  to  accept  any  or  reject  any  or  all  proposals 

presented. 


Obstructions  and 
Repair. 


Care  of  Building. 


[The  Contractor  is  to  have  full  charge  of  the  building  until  completed,  and 
must  keep  reliable  watchmen  on  guard  both  day  and  night.  He  will  be  held  re- 
sponsible for  all  property  that  may  be  injured  or  stolen  while  the  building  is  in 
his  care.]  The  Contractor  shall  provide  all  necessary  guards,  rails  and  night  lights. 


INSURANCE. 

The  Owner  shall  insure  the  building  and  the  material  on  the  premises  covering  his  own  and 
the  Contractor's  interests  therein  against  loss  or  damage  by  fire,  such  policies  being  made  payable 
to  the  Owner  and  Contractor  as  their  interests  may  appear. 

Or  [The  Contractor  shall  effect  insurance  on  the  said  work  to  cover  his  interest  in  same  against 
loss  by  fire,  and  for  any  loss  of  the  Contractor  by  fire  the  Owner  will  not  be  answerable  or 
accountable]. 

STORED  HATERIAL. 

All  materials  delivered  on.  the  premises  which  are  to  form  a  part  of  the  works  are  to  be  con- 
sidered the  property  of  the  Owner  and  are  not  to  be  removed  without  his  consent  but  the  Contractor 
shall  have  the  right  to  remove  all  his  surplus  material  after  completion. 


Masons. 

SPECIFICATION     of    the    labor   and    material    to    be    furnished    in    the 
erection  of  a  frame  house  to  be  constructed  for  Mr. 
at 
in  accordance  with  the  accompanying  drawings  and  this  specification  and  under 

the  supervision  of 

Architect, 

\  address } 


jdatej 


General 

Conditions. 


Water. 


Fuel  and  Stoves. 


SFor  General  Conditions  see  page  2. 


The  Contractor  shall  make  application  and  pay  charge  for  the  use  of  water 
to  carry  out  his  work. 

The  Owner  is  to  furnish  fuel  and  the  Contractor  stoves  to  heat  the  building 
when  necessary  during  progress.  [Should  the  Owner  allow  the  heating  apparatus 
to  be  used  for  this  purpose  the  Contractor  shall  furnish  proper  attendance  for  and 
be  responsible  for  any  damage  to  the  same.] 


(See  oaee  4      When  mason  work  is  made  a  separate  contract  the  clause  cov- 
Care  of  Building. 

ering  Care  of  Building,  if  used,  is  usually  put  in  the  Mason's  Specification.  [ 

Arch  Centres  No  arches  are  to  be  formed  without  centres  which  will   be  made  and  set  by 

the  carpenter. 

6 


Demolition  of  Carefully  tear  down  all  the  old  buildings  at  present  on  the  site,  including 

Old  Buildings,  foundations,  footings,  vaults,  etc.  All  rubbish  and  materials  of  upper  stories  are 
to  be  lowered  in  proper  receptacles  or  chutes. 

Cut  off  and  plug  up  all  pipes  at  the  cellar  line  and  cut  off  and  remove  all 
electric  light  wires  and  other  obstructions,  leaving  the  site  clear  and  unencumbered. 

The  flag  stones  are  to  be  taken  up  and  stacked  where  directed. 

Such  of  the  materials  as  in  the  judgment  of  the  Architect  are  suitable  for 
re-use  are  to  be  well  cleaned  and  stacked  in  a  convenient  place  where  directed. 
All  rubbish  is  to  be  removed  from  the  premises  by  the  Contractor. 

Such  of  the  material  as  may  be  judged  suitable  by  the  Architect  may  be  used 
over  again  In  this  building.  All  -mason  material  not  fit  for  re-use  either  in  the 
building  or  on  the  premises  is  to  become  the  property  of  the  Contractor  and  is  to 
be  removed  from  the  premises  by  him. 


Disposition 

of 
Materials. 

Ownership. 


Bridge  and 

Platform, 


The  contractor  is  to  erect  a  wood  platform  and  bridge  at  least  (10')  wide 
across  the  street  front  [or  fronts\  of  the  building  before  any  work  is  begun. 

All  timber,  including  floors,  is  to  be  of  good,  yellow  pine. 
Uprights  (12"  x  12")  placed  (8')  on  centres. 

Sills  and  cross  beams   (12"  x   12")   properly  braced  to  the  sills  and  beams  with 
(2"  x  6")  braces  well  spiked. 
Cross  timbers  (10"  x  12")  placed  4'  on  centres. 

Form  the  floor  of  the  platform  with  (4"  x  12")  timbers,  and  the  floor  of  the  bridge 
with  (3"    x  12")  timbers  laid  flat  and  well  spiked. 

Put  up  the  proper  supports  for  and  construct  a  roof  over  the  bridge  of  i"  x  9" 
boards  well  nailed  and  securely -braced,  laid  double  with  12"  pitch. 

Construct  suitable,  well  supported  steps  of  (3")  plank  with  strong  hand  rail. 

Construct  a  fence  on  the  "inside  of  the  platform  extending  from  the  street 
level  to  the  roof  over  the  platform  of  |"  tongued  and  grooved  surfaced  boards 
and  provide  the  necessary  doors  and  gates  as  directed  with  suitable  hinges  and 
fastenings.  Paint  the  fence  with  two  coats  of  white  paint  and  keep  free  from 
signs,  etc. 

The  bridge,  fence  and  platform  are  to  be  kept  in  repair  and  altered  by  the 
Contractor  as  required  during  the  progress  of  the  work. 

The  other  contractors  are  to  be  allowed  the  use  of  the  platform  for  the  hand- 
ling of  materials  but  it  shall  not  be  used  for  storage  purposes. 

8 


Survey.  [The  Owner  will  have  the  site  surveyed  and  furnish  the  usual  lines  and  levels.] 

Or 

[The  Contractor  shall  have  the  site  surveyed  by  a  competent  surveyor  and  pay 
•all  expense  connected  therewith.] 

Location.  The  Contractor  shall  lay  out  the  building  from  the  drawings  and  under  the 

direction  of  the  Architect  and  furnish  and  put  in  stakes  or  batter  boards  as  may 
be  necessary.  He  shall  be  responsible  for  any  damage  which  may  arise  to  the 
Owner  or  to  adjacent  property  owners  or  to  other  contractors  from  incorrectly 
locating  the  building. 

Excavation.  'Clear  away  all  rock,  dirt  or  rubbish  necessary  to  leave  the  site  of  the  build- 

ing clear. 

For  country  work.  Cut  down  the  trees  where  the  building  is  to  stand,  cutting  the  wood  in  4'  lengths  and  stack 

Trees.  where  directed. 


Sod  and  Top  Soil. 


Excavation. 


Tamping. 
For  Piling. 


Disposition  of 
Earth. 


Blasting. 


On  the  site  where  the  building  is  to  stand  and  for  (8')  additional  all  round  cut  the  sod  in 
strips  3'  wide,  roll  in  lengths  as  long  as  possible  and  stack  in  a  moist  place.  Remove  the  top 
soil  to  a  depth  of  (10")  and  stack  where  directed. 

Excavate  for  the  cellar,  vaults,  footings,  drains,  cistern,  etc.,  of  the  dimensions 
and  to  the  depth  as  shown  on  the  drawings  and  required  by  the  grade,  and  do  any  other 
excavating  required  to  fully  carry  out  the  work  herein  specified.  [The  excavation 
is  to  be  (12")  larger  all  round  than  is  shown  on  the  cellar  plan.] 

The  bottom  of  all  trenches  for  walls  and  piers  is  to  be  made  wet  and  thoroughly  tamped. 

After  the  piles  have  been  driven  and  cut  off  the  soil  between  them  and  (12")  outside  is  to  be 
excavated  (18")  below  their  tops. 

All  earth  taken  from  the  excavation  and  not  needed  for  filling  in  and  grading 
is  to  be  [removed from  the  premises  by  the  Contractor]  and  all  boulders  removed  or 
sunk  where  directed. 

The  grade  line  shown  on  the  drawings  is  the  established  grade  or  line  to 
which  the  ground  will  be  graded  at  completion  and  is  not  to  be  taken  for  the 
present  grade  of  the  lot. 

2  Do  all  blasting  required  in  a  proper  manner.  After  blasting,  all  beds  must 
be  chiseled  off  level. 


10 


'Is  also  under  Demolition  of  .Old  Buildings. 

j!In  important  work  where  considerable  blasting  may  be  required  often  specified  as  follows:} 
Should  any  blasting  be  necessary  in  making  the  excavation  it  shall  be  done  by  the  Contractor 
and  such  of  the  stone  so  obtained  which  is  judged  suitable  by  the  Architect  may  be  used  in  the 
works.  All  stone  from  blasting  not  so  used  shall  be  removed  from  the  premises  by  the  Contractor 
and  the  Owner  shall  pay  (7)  cents  per  cubic  foot  extra  for  blasting,  breaking  up  and  removing 
such  as  is  not  used. 


1 1 


Shoring 

of  Excavation. 


1  Shore  the  sides  of  the  excavation  where  necessary  in  a  substantial  manner 
with  2"  spruce  plank  and  heavy  inclined  shores  wedged  to  a  solid  bearing. 


Shoring  and  The  Contractor  shall  shore  up  and  underpin  the  adjoining  buildings  in  such  a 

Underpinning     manner  that  they  will  be  in  as  good  condition  as  they  were  before  the  excavation 


of  Adjoining 
Buildings. 


Sheet  Piling. 


was  begun. 

Drive  temporary  piles  where  necessary  to  support  the  shores  and  needles. 

Brace  the  walls  with  proper  inclined  shores  resting  on  timber  cribs  and  wedged 
to  a  solid  bearing,  and  put  in  heavy  timbers  not  over  8'  on  centers,  jacked  to  a 
solid  bearing,  to  support  the  walls  while  being  underpinned. 

The  underpinning  is  to  consist  of 

[brick  work  laid   in    Portland   cement   as  hereinafter  specified  (and  wedged  to  a 
solid  bearing  with  steel  wedges  driven  between  6"  blue  stone  caps.)] 
Or 

[square  granite  posts,  the  thickness  of  the  wall  in  size,  spaced  not  over  twice  their 
width  apart  with  their  beds  resting  on  (8")  granite  footings  (12")  larger  on  all 
sides  than  the  posts.  Cap  with  6"  granite  caps  wedged  up  with  steel  wedges  to 
a  solid  bearing.  Fill  in  the  spaces  between  the  posts  with  brick  work  laid-  in 
Portland  cement  as  hereinafter  specified  and  wedge  up  the  last  joint  with  slate.] 

Underpin  and  properly  protect  all  pipe  lines. 

The  Contractor  must  sheet  pile  {specify  where [  to  protect  the  adjoining  prop- 
erty, using  good  sound  2"  tongued  and  grooved  spruce  plank,  set  edge  to  edge, 
provided  with  wedges,  breast  pieces  and  foot  blocks  and  strongly  braced. 

Drive  the  sheet  piling  down -at  least  2'  below  the  bottom  of  the  trenches  and 
leave  in  until  the  foundations  have  been  built. 


12 


1  This  is  seldom  required  where  excavation  does  not  exceed  8'  in  depth. 


Piling 

Piles. 


Driving. 


Shoes  and  Rings. 


Filling. 


Concrete. 


Stone. 


Capping 

Wood. 


Do  all  piling  as  sJimvn  on  the  piling  plan.  The  piles  are  to  be  of  sound  ''spruce 
[with  the  bark  removed]  free  from  all  imperfections,  perfectly  straight  from  end 
to  end  and  properly  sharpened  to  a  point  at  the  lower  end. 

All  piles  are  to  be  not  less  than  2(8")  in  diameter  at  the  small  end,  (12")  at 
the  butt  when  cut  off  and  of  Sufficient  length  to  reach. solid  bottom. 

All  piles  are  to  be  driven  vertically  to  a  solid  bearing  until  they  do  not  move 
more  than  [i"  under  five  blows  of  a  hammer  weighing  1,200  Ibs.  with  a  fall  of 
30  feet  delivered  in  quick  succession.]  All  split  or  shattered  piles  are  to  be 
removed  if  possible  and  a  good  one  driven  in  place  of  each  imperfect  one.  In 
cases  where  such  piles  cannot  be  removed  an  additional  one  must  be  driven  for 
each  imperfect  one. 

All  piles  after  being  driven  are  to  be  sawed  [Or  adzed]  off  perfectly  square  on 
top  to  a  line  below  the  lowest  water  line. 

4  Protect  the  points  of  all  piles  with  a  (16)  Ib.  cast  iron  shoe  and  the  heads 
with  a  wrought  iron  ring  2i"  wide  and  i"  thick. 

Fill  in  between  the  heads  of  the  piles  and  (12")  in  width  outside  of  the  lines 
of  the  same  to  a  depth  of  (18")  below  the  tops  with 
[concrete ;  composed,  mixed  and  put  down   in   the  same  manner  as    hereinafter 

1  specified  for  Concrete  and  Footings  (pages  18  and  22),  made  smooth  and  flush  with 

• 

the  tops  of  the  piles.   (Or  carried  up  to  a  line  2'  above  the  tops  of  the  piles.)] 

Or 

[broken  stone,  crushed  to  pass  through  a  2"  ring,  well  rammed  and  finished  flush 

with  the  tops  of  the  piles.] 

On  top  of  the  piles  form  a  grillage  and  platform  of  seasoned  yellow  pine  timber, 
free  from  any  imperfections  materially  impairing  its  durability  or  strength. 

Lay  a  (6"  x  12")  string  course  over  each  row  of  piles  throughout  the  full 

* 

length,  of  pieces  20'  long,  spliced  with  halved  joints  and  laid  so  as  to  break 
joints.  The  strings  must  in  all  cases  have  a  solid  bearing  on  the  piles  and  are  to 
be  well  spiked  to  each  pile  with  two  16"  galvanized  wrought  iron  spikes. 

Lay  (6"  x  12")  cross  pieces,  crossing  the  strings  at  right  angles,  one  row 
over  each  cross  row  of  piles  [Or  si"  apart  to  form  a  platform]  and  well  spiked  to 
the  strings. 

[6  Where  the  cross  pieces  cross  the  strings,  both  are  to  be  notched  one-half 
their  depth  so  that  they  will  be  flush  on  top.] 


'Spruce  and  Hemlock  are  used  for  easy  driving  and  where  piles  will  be  continuously  wet, 
Yellow  Pine  or  Oak  for  hard  driving,  and  Oak  where  tops  are  subject  to  alternate  wetting  and 
drying.  Straight  grained  Elm  and  Beech  are  also  used. 

•Bearing  Piles  range  from  9  inches  to  18  inches  in  top  diameter. 

3If  a  single  pile  is  not  long  enough  to  reach  solid  bearing  it  is  often  spliced  by  being  sawed 
off  square  and  having  a  2  inch  hole  bored  12  inches  deep  in  the  head.  Another  pile  of  which  the 
lower  diameter  is  the  same  size  as  the  upper  diameter  of  the  first  is  similarly  squared  and  bored 
and  a  2  inch  x  23  inch  hard  wood  pin  inserted  between,  after  which  the  driving  is  continued. 

4The  piles  are  sharpened  to  a  distance  of  about  one  and  one- half  diameters  and  for  hard  driv- 
ing protected  at  the  foot  by  two  heavy  iron  straps  placed  at  right  angles  to  each  other  or  by  sheet 
iron,  cast  iron  or  wrought  iron  shoes.  Wrought  iron  shoes  weigh  from  18  to  30  pounds.  The 
heads  are  protected  by  a  wrought  iron  ring  to  prevent  brooming.  Piles  are  not  usually  placed 
closer  than  2  feet  apart  to  prevent  crowding. 

Pneumatic  Piles:  hollow  cylinders  of  wrought  iron  or  steel  and  Pneumatic  Cassions  of  the 
same  character  as  pneumatic  piles  but  square  in  cross  section,  are  used  only  for  extraordinarily 
heavy  loads. 

SUSTAINING  WEIGHT  OF  PILES. 
Rankin's  Rule — for  safe  load- 
In  case  of  piles  transmitting  weight  to  solid  ground,  1,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  of  section  of  head. 
In  case  of  piles  resisting  entirely  by  friction  on  sides,  200  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  of  section  of  head. 

From  Trautwine : 


V  Last  fall  of  hammer  in  feet  X  weight  of  hammer  in  Ibs.  X  5 1. 5 

,  „.. — : — : — r ,   t  v  .. —          c  c-  r —  — =Safe  load  in  pounds. 

Last  set  of  Pile  in  inches  +  1  X  t  actor  of  Safety,  2  to  4 

Sanders : 

Last  fall  of  hammer  in  inches  X  weight  of  hammer  in  pounds. 

— TT-JS —  — =Safe  load  in  pounds. 

Last  set  of  Pile  in  inches  X  8 

'Often  the  platform  is  formed  by  laying  the  cross  pieces  i  inch  apart. 

'Sometimes  when  cross  pieces  are  laid  apart  in  rows  they  are  notched  over  the  string  pieces 
so  that  both  will  be  flush  on  top. 


Platform. 


Stone. 


Pumping. 


Grading. 


Additional  Grading. 
Trees. 

Grading. 


Drives. 


Paths. 


Sod. 


Terraces. 


Lawns. 


Pits. 


Form  a  platform  on  top  of  the  grillage  with  (2"  x  12")  timber  laid  flat,  placed 
i"  apart,  each  plank  nailed  to  each  cross  timber  with  two  6"  galvanized  wrought 
iron  spikes. 

Cap  the  piles  with  sound  granite  caps,  (16")  thick,  with  fine  hammered  beds 
and  faces  and  pointed  sides  and  ends.  Bed  and  joint  properly  in  Portland 
cement  mortar. 

These  caps  are  to  be  not  less  than  4'  wide  and  of  a  sufficient  length  to 
extend  across  the  full  width  of  the  piling,  except  where  the  piling  exceeds  8' 
in  width,  in  which  case  stones  not  less  than  4'  long  may  be  used,  when  care  must' 
be  taken  to  break  the  joints.  [One  inch  cubes  of  the  granite  to  be  used  must 
show  an  ultimate  compressive  strength  of  (12,000)  Ihs.] 

The  Contractor  is  to  furnish  pumps  with  all  appurtenances  and  power  for  the 
same,  including  all  necessary  fuel  and  attendance  to  do  all  the  pumping  required 
to  enable  the  piles  to  be  driven,  cut  off  and  capped  and  to  keep  the  foundations 
dry  as  long  as  necessary.  The  pumps  are  to  be  kept  working  day  and  night. 

Fill  in  around  the  cellar  walls  after  the  cement  is  dry  and  around  all  areas, 
cisterns,  vaults,  etc.,  and  fill  in  all  drains  herein  specified. 

All  filling  to  be  well-  rammed  or  puddled  every  foot  in  height.  Grade  all 
surplus  earth  neatly  away  from  the  building. 

Cut  down  such  trees  on  the  lot  as  are  so  marked,  cutting  the  wood  in  (4')  lengths  and 
stack  where  directed.  Haul  out  the  stumps  and  remove  them  from  the  premises. 

Grade  the  earth  as  shown  by  the  stakes  and  grading  plan,  removing  the  top  soil  to  a  depth  of 
(10")  before  filling,  and  covering  all  parts  where  the  grade  has  been  changed  with  (6")  of  top  soil. 
Remove  all  surplus  earth  from  the  premises  [Or  furnish  all  additional  earth  required]. 

Form  the  drives  as  shown  on  the  drawings  as  follows  :  Excavate  (15")  deep  and  fill  in  with 
large  stone  to  a  depth  of  (10"),  cover  with  (3")  of  small  stone  and  over  this  put  (2")  of  fine  cracked 
stone  well  wet  and  rolled.  Make  all  drives  crowning  (6").  Pave  the  gutters  at  each  side  of 
drives  with  cobble  stones  well  bedded  in  sand  and  formed  concave  on  top. 

Form  the  paths  as  shown  by  excavating  (12")  deep  and  fill  in  with  coal  ashes  [Or  with 
gravel]  well  wet  and  tamped  and  made  crowning  (2"). 

Furnish  and  properly  put  down  sod  (2')  in  width  around  all  drives  and  paths  and  (3')  in  width 
around  the  house  and  piazzas. 

Form  all  terraces  and  slopes  as  shown.  Furnish  and  put  down  sod  on  all  terrace  slopes  and 
(2')  wide  on  top.  All  sod  on  the  slope  to  be  well  batted  and  pinned  with  wooden  pins. 

Form  and  level  all  lawns,  rake  clear  of  stones  and  sow  with  best  blue  grass  seed  using  (3^) 
bushels  to  the  acre.  Roll  properly  and  keep  all  lawns  and  sodding  properly  wet  and  cared  for 
until  delivered. 

Where  filling  in  is  done  around  trees  a  pit  must  be  built  (12")  clear  of  the  trees  with  (4") 
brick  [Or  loose  stone]  walls  to  keep  the  earth  from  the  trees. 


16 


17 


Lime,  Cement 
and  Sand. 


j  For  Important 
Work. } 


Mortar. 


{For  Important 
Work  ; 


Concrete. 

Rosendale. 

j  Ordinary.  [ 

Portland. 

{ Ordinary. } 
Portland. 

•  Important  Work.  • 


All  lime,  cement  and  sand  for  the  various  works  herein  mentioned,  unless 
otherwise  particularly  specified,  are  to  be  as  follows  : 

LIME  :  Extra  No.  i  Rockland,  freshly  burned  and  thoroughly  slaked. 

ROSENDALE  CEMENT  :   Fresh  '"Hoffman"  brand  Rosendale  Hydraulic  cement. 

PORTLAND  CEMENT  :  '(J.  B.  White  &  Brothers  English  Portland  Cement?)  or 

(^'Dragon"  Brand  Domestic  Portland  Cement.} 

[All  cement  must  be  finely  ground  and  free  from  lumps,  so  that  at  least  (90?) 
will  pass  through  a  sieve  with  (2,500)  meshes  to  the  square  inch.  The  cement 
when  tested  by  the  Architect  must  show  a  minimum  tensile  strength  per  square 
inch  as  follows : 

Portland  :  One  day — i  hour  or  until  set  in  air,  the  rest  of  the  24  hours  in 
water:  (230)  Ibs.  One  week — i  day  in  air,  6  days  in  water:  (650)  Ibs. 

Rosenclale :  One  day — */£  hour  or  until  set  in  air,  the  rest  of  the  24  hours  in 
water  :  (90)  Ibs.  One  week — i  day  in  air,  6  days  in  water  :  (120)  Ibs.] 

SAND  :  Clean,  sharp,  free  from  loam  and  salt,  properly  screened  and  tcashedt 
[and  not  finer  than  the  approved  samples  in  the  Building  Inspectors'  officc^\ 

All  the  mortar  for  the  various  works  herein  specified,  except  for  plastering 
and  except  where  otherwise  particularly  mentioned,  is  to  be  as  follows  : 

LIME   MORTAR:     One  part  of  lime  to  "three  of  sand. 

LIME-ROSENDALE  CEMENT  MORTAR  :  One  part  Rosendale  cement,  one  part 
lime,  jive  parts  sand. 

LIME-PORTLAND  CEMENT  MORTAR:  One  part  Portland  cement,  3oue  part  lime, 
six  parts  sand. 

ROSENDALE  CEMENT  MORTAR  :      One  part  Rosendale  cement,  to  two  of  sand. 

[PORTLAND  CEMENT  MORTAR  :  One  part  of  Portland  cement,  to  three  of  sand.] 

Or  [PORTLAND  CEMENT  MORTAR:  One  part  of  Portland  Cement  to  two  of  sand,  care- 
fully and  thoroughly  mixed  dry,  adding  only  enough  water  to  render  the  mortar  of  good  working 
consistency.  The  mortar  is  not  to  be  made  up  in  greater  quantities  than  will  be  required  for 
the  work  on  hand,  and  no  excess  that  may  have  been  leftover  night  is  to  be  used  in  any  way.] 

4A11  concrete,  unless  otherwise  specified,  is  to  be  made  as  follows  : 

[One  part  of  Rosendale  cement,   ttuo  parts  of  sand,  and  three  parts  of  clean, 

broken  stone,  all  thoroughly  mixed.] 

Or  [5One  part  of  Portland  cement,  three  parts  of  sand,  andyfcr  parts  of  clean, 

broken  stone,  all  thoroughly  mixed.] 

Or  [5One  part  of  Portland  cement  and  two  parts  of  sand,  mixed  as  specified  for  mortar,  to  which 
add  four  (or  five)  parts  of  clean  washed  stone,  broken  so  as  to  pass  through  a  2"  ring,  all  meas. 
ured  in  barrels.  All  concrete  must  be  mixed  in  boxes  holding  not  over  ten  barrels  atone  time.] 


18 


The  tensil  strength  in  pounds  per  square  inch  of  these  cements  is  as  follows  : 

J.  B.  White  &  Bros.  English  Portland  Cement. 
Fineness  :     11?  residue  on  a  sieve  with  10,000  meshes  to  the  square  inch. 


Day 
One  Week 


One  Month  j 


One  Day 
One  Week 
One  Month 


water 


Neat 
18V2V,  Water. 


1  Cement,  1  Sand, 
9',  Water. 


Fineness  : 


*  ^  hour  in  air 


"  Hoffman  "  Brand  Rosendale  Cement. 

5>  residue  on  a  sieve  with  2,500  meshes  to  the  square  inch. 


hours  jn  water 


' 


Neat 
27?  Water. 

96 
125 
240 


1  Cement,  2  Sand, 
13-,  Water. 


168 


1  Cement,  3  Sand, 
?i-2?  Water. 


1  Cement,  3  Sand. 
9;  Water. 


'The  New  York  building  law  allows  one  part  of  lime  to  four  of  sand,  but  unless  the  lime  is 
known  to  be  of  the  best  quality  less  sand  —  two  or  three  parts  to  one  of  lime  —  should  be  used. 
3New  York  building  law  :     One-cement,  one  lime,  six  sand. 
4For  cement  sidewalk  see  page  54. 
5New  York  building  law  :     One  cement,  two  sand,  five  stone. 


19 


Brickwork.  All  [walls,  piers,  chimneys,  footings,  cisterns,  cesspools,  etc.]  where  brick  work  is 

shown  on  the  drawings  and  unless  otherwise  specified,  are  to  be  laid  up  in  dimen- 
sions as  shown,  with  sound,  hard,  well  burned  brick  in  lime  motar,  [except  where 
cement  is  specified,]  with  all  joints  neatly  struck,  [except  on  such  walls  as  are  to  be 
plastered  on  the  brick  work.]  All  brick  is  to  be  laid  wet  in  dry,  warm  weather  and 
dry  in  damp  or  ' 'freezing  weather. 

All  brick  work  is  to  be  well  bedded,  tied  in  every  sixth  course,  and  worked  in 
regular  bond  with  full  flushed  joints,  leaving  no  interstices.  [The  height  of  any 
nine  courses  is  not  to  exceed  (23").] 

All  walls  and  piers  are  to  be  made  level,  to  come  to  the  exact  height,  and  to 
have  all  necessary  flues,  channels  and  openings,  as  shown  or  directed.  The  offsets 
to  bring  the  walls  to  the  proper  thickness  on  each  story  are  to  be  made  at  the  tops 
of  the  beams. 

Point  close  to  all  sills,  copings  and  projections.  Bed  all  frames  solidly. 
Underpin  all  sills  after  the  walls  have  set.  Build  brick  discharging  arches  with  one 
course  of  rowlocks  for  each  18"  of  span,  over  all  openings. 

Hollow  walls  where  shown  are  to  have  (2")  air  spaces,  and  the  brick  work  is  to 
be  tied  together  with  proper  iron  cramps,  well  tarred  (or  galvanized)  set  in  every 
sixth  course  2(2'-6")  apart. 

Fill  in  and  back  up  all  face  stone  work  as  shown,  [attending  and  working  with 
the  stone  setter.]  The  brick  work  is  to  be  carried  up  simultaneously  with  the  face 
work.  [Back  up  a\\/ace  and  glazed  brick  work  of  elevator  s/iaft.~\  [Back  up  all  terra 
eotta  work  by  turning  brick  relieving  arches  laid  in  Portland  cement  mortar,  over 
and  back  of  such  terra  cotta  work,  wherever  possible  to  relieve  the  weight. 

Wall  for  water  proof injr.  The  retaining  wall  around  the  sidewalk  vault  is  to  be  lined  outside  with  4"  of  brickwork. 

Back  up  the  curb  with  (12")  of  brickwork  of  the  proper  height. 


Hollow  Walls. 


Backing. 


Curb. 


Floors. 


Fire  proofing. 


Construct  (8")  flat  brick  arches  between  the  iron  beams  of  the  floors,  [using  hollow  fire 
brick  with  skew  backs  and  keys  moulded  to  shape,]  laid  in  Portland  cement  mortar. 

All  exposed  walls,  [including  vault  walls  and  window  returns,]  are  to  be  lined  with  hollow 
furring  brick,  covering  at  least  (6")  beyond  the  exposed  portion.  The  furring  brick  are  to  be 
the  same  size  as  the  common  brick,  and  are  to  be  bonded  to  the  masonry  in  every  sixth  course. 


20 


'Or  no  brick  to  be  laid  in  freezing  weather.  When  brickwork  is  allowed  to  be  laid  in 
freezing  weather  often  the  following  is  added : 

All  bricks  laid  in  freezing  weather  are  to  be  warmed  sufficiently  to  remove  the  ice,  and  the 
mortar  in  which  they  are  laid  is  to  be  hot  and  is  to  contain  enough  salt  to  prevent  freezing. 
Such  brickwork  is  not  to  be  pointed  up  until  Spring. 

'The  New  York  building  law  requires  such  cramps  to  be  set  2'  apart. 

WEIGHT  OF  BRICKWORK  : 

Ordinary  brickwork  weighs  about  112  Ibs.  per  cubic  foot.  Pressed  brickwork  with  fine 
joints,  up  to  140  Ibs.  per  cubic  foot. 

QUANTITY  REQUIRED: 

The  usual  method  of  estimating  the  number  of  common  bricks  required  for  ordinary  brick- 
work is  to  allow  for  each  superficial  foot  of  wall  as  follows: 

THICKNESS  OF  WALL.  NUMBER  OF  BRICKS. 

4'or%  brick 7 

8%' or  1  brick 14 

\Z%"  or  \Yi  brick 21 

17'  or  2  bricks 28 

21H"  or  2K  bricks 35 

25%'  or  3  bricks 42 

The  Crushing  Strength  of  Brickwork  varies  greatly.  The  usual  allowance  per  square 
foot  for  a  safe  load  is  about  as  follows : 

For  pressed  brick  in  good  cement  motar,  12  tons. 

For  good,  hard  brick  in  cement  motar,  8  tons. 

For  good  brick  in  lime  motar,  4  to  6  tons. 

These  allowances  are  not  to  be  taken  for  piers  in  which  the  height  exceeds  eight  times  the 
least  diameter  in  which  case  they  must  be  calculated  as  columns  of  masonry. 


21 


Footings.  Put  down   footings  under  all  walls,  chimneys,  piers,  etc.      The  size  of  footings 

[to  be  as  shown  on  the  plans.] 

Or 

[to  be  as  follows  :     Under  main  walls  (40")  wide  and  (12")  deep.      Under  all  piers 

(12")  larger  all  around  than  the  piers  above  and  (12")  deep.      Under  all  chimneys 

(15")  larger  all  around  and  (12")  deep,] 

!  Vault  walls,  Retaining  walls,  Bearing  partition   walls,  Tower  1 

Concrete.  All  footings  are  to  be  of  concrete  dumped  into  the  trenches  between  plank 

curbs,  [in  layers  not  over  12"  deep,]  and  rammed  until  the  mortar  is  flushed  to  the 
top.      Level  off  and  leave  undisturbed  until  set. 

Stone.  'All  footings  are  to  be  of  large,  flat  stones,  each  stone  filling  the  course  in 

width   and  height,  close  fitted   and  flushed   up   with  spawls  and  Roscndalc  cement 
mortar,  laid  on  natural  undisturbed  earth. 

Brick.  All  footings  are  to  be  of  brick  as  specified  under  "  Brickwork,"  stepped  up  as 

shown  on  the  drawings,  and  laid  up  in  Portland  cement  mortar. 


Foundations. 

Stone. 

{ For  Dwellings,  etc. 


The  foundation  walls  up  to  the  grade  are  to  be  (18")  thick,  of  good,  large, 
sound  building  stone  well  2bonded  by  building  in  bond  stones  every  (6')  in  length 
and  every  (3')  in  height.  All  stones  are  to  be  laid  on  their  natural  beds  to  a  line 
on  both  sides,  the  joints  well  filled  with  mortar  and  well  trowel  pointed  both  inside 
and  outside,  [with  joints  3weathered  outside.] 


{ For  City  Buildings. 


Brick. 


The  foundation  walls,  [vault  walls,  retaining  walls,  etc.J  are  to  be  of  the  dimensions  shown 
on  the  drawings,  built  of  good,  sound  granite  coursed  rubble  stone  work,  each  stone  not  less  than 
(2'-6"  x  l'-6"  x8")  in  size;  all  rough  pointed  with  parallel  builds  and  beds  so  that  no  inequalities 
of  surface  will  exceed  %",  each  stone  is  to  be  laid  on  the  largest  surface  which  must  be  the 
natural  quarry  bed.  The  walls  are  to  be  levelled  horizontally  every  (30")  in  height  and  are  to 
have  a  header  in  every  *five  superficial  feet  extending  entirely  through  the  wall.  All  this  work 
is  to  be  laid  with  full  flushed  joints  neatly  pointed  [inside  and  'weathered  outside.] 

The   foundation  walls  are  to  be  (16")  thick,   of   hard    burned    brick  as  specified 
under  "  Brickwork." 


Mortar. 


All  stone  and  brick  work  of  foundations  below  grade,  and  all  piers  in  cellar  are 
to  be  laid  in  Rosendalc  cement  mortar. 


22 


'For  stone  footings  in  important  work  see  under  "  Piling,"  page  16. 

sThe  New  York  building  law  requires  bonds  every  4'  in  length  and  3'  in  height,  and  if  the 
wall  is  over  24"  thick,  one  header  for  every  six  superficial  feet. 

'It  is  not  necessary  to  weather  the  joints  outside  if  the  walls  are  to  be  plastered  outside. 


Supplement  A.5     Brick  for  Dwellings,  Plastered  Outside. 

Foundations.  Construct  the  foundation  walls  of  brickwork  as  shown.  Leave  all  necessary 
openings  in  the  foundation  for  pipe  lines  and  stop  around  them  afterward.  Cover  the  founda- 
tion walls  below  the  grade  with  %"  of  cement  motar:  one  part  Portland  cement  to  one  of  sand 
and  float  the  cement.  Put  down  concrete  foundations  4'  deep  for  all  steps,  etc. 

Supplement  B.5     Brick  for  Dwellings.     Cement  Mortar  Below  Grade.     Plastered  Outside. 

Foundations.  Construct  the  foundation  walls  of  brickwork  as  shown,  laid  below  the  grade 
in  Rosendale  cement  mortar.  Leave  all  necessary  openings  in  the  foundation  for  pipe  lines 
and  stop  around  them  afterward.  Cover  the  foundation  walls  below  the  grade  with  %"  of 
cement  motar:  one  part  Portland  cement  to  one  of  sand  and  float  the  cement.  Put  down  con- 
crete foundations  4'  deep  for  all  steps,  etc. 


23 


Outside  Plastering. 


Put  in  foundations  for  all  dwarf  walls,  outside  steps,  and  piazza  and  other  out- 
side piers  of  concrete  same  as  footings. 

All  foundations  are  to  go  down  at  least  (4')  below  the  established  grade  shown 
on  the  drawings,  and  deeper  if  necessary  to  reach  firm  and  solid  ground. 

Leave  all  necessary  openings  in  the  foundations  for  all  pipes,  etc.,  and  stop 
and  fill  up  around  them  afterwards.  Level  up  the  top  of  the  foundation  [and  bed 
the  wood  sill  in  cement].  Bed  and  point  around  the  frames  of  the  cellar  windows. 

Put  down  dry  stone  foundations  (3')  deep  and  level  up  with  (2")  of  concrete  for 
all  step  flags. 

Cover  [the  retaining  wall  and]  all  foundation  walls  below  the  ground  surface 
on  the  outside' with  (%"}  of  cement  mortar:   'one  part  Portland  cement  to  one  part 
sand,    and  float  the  cement.     [Give  a  coat  of  coal  tar  applied  hot.] 
Or 

{  For  waterproofing  of  retaining  walls  and  foundations  see  page  28.  ' 


Foundation  above 
grade. 

I  For  Dwellings,  etc.} 


The  walls  from  the  grade  level  to  the  wood  sill  are  to  be  (18")  thick,  faced  with 
[good  hammer  dressed  building  stone  laid  up  in  Limc-Rosendale  cement  mortar 
The  joints  are  to  be  raked  out  and  pointed  with  Portland  cement  mortar.  Back 
up  with  stone  (or  brickwork)  laid  in  lime  mortar.  ] 


Or 


!For  brick  facing  see  under  "  Face  Brickwork  "  \ 


Damp  Course. 


On  a  line  (6")  above  the  grade,  form  a  damp  course  [by  giving  the  top  of  the 
wall  a  coat  of  coal  tar  applied  hot  and  covering  with  tarred  paper  with  a  coat  of  coal 
tar  on  top  of  the  paper]  or  [by  laying  a  course  of  slate  entirely  through  the  wall.] 


Piers. 


)  Material,  Mortar,  Caps  and  Bonds  are  usually  specified  under  other  general  headings. 


Inverted  Arches.  Construct  the  inverted  arches  under  the  piers  as  shown  on  the  drawings ;  to  be 

of  brick  as  specified  under    "  Brickwork,"  and  laid  up  in  Portland  cement  mortar  : 
equal  parts  of  cement  and  sand  [with  one  rowlock  to  each  (12")  span.] 


24 


'Often  plastered  as  follows:  Plaster  a  coat  f"  thick  with  one  part  Rosendale  cement  to  three 
of  sand,  cover  with  a  light  coat  of  Portland,  one  part  cement  to  three  of  sand,  and  when  dry 
give  a  wash  coat  of  clear  Portland  cement. . 

Sometimes  half  Rosendale,  half  Portland  is  used  :  One  part  Portland,  one  Rosendale, 
two  sand. 

A  barrel  of  mortar  will  cover  about  85  square  feet  i"  thick. 


Vaults.  Construct  the  vaults  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  with  (8")  brick  arches  over  the 

top;  the  arches  to  have  a  rise  of  (ii')  for  each  foot  of  span,  (with  skewbacks 
moulded  to  fit  the  iron  beams.]  Cover  the  top  with  Portland  cement  concrete  (4") 
deep,  well  rammed,  and  cover  with  a  good  coat  of  asphalt.  [The  arches  are  to  be 
plastered  on  the  underside  with  (i")  of  Portland  cement  mortar:  cement  and  sand 
in  equal  proportions.] 

j  For  Iron  Work  for  Vaults  see  Iron  Specifications,  j- 


Beam  Filling. 


Fill  in  between  the  beams  of  first  story  and  up  to  the  top  of  the  same,  on  top 
of  the  outside,  foundation  walls  and  [cellar  brick  partitions,]  with  brick  properly 
laid  in  lime  mortar. 


Cellar  Area. 


Construct  the  cellar  area  as  shown  with  (18")  walls  laid  up  with  stone  in  the 
same  manner  as  foundations,  and  coped  with  (3 ")  rubbed  blue  stone  ;  steps  to  be  of 
rubbed  blue  stone  [(3")  thick  set  on  brick  risers]  or  [in  one  piece,  (7")  rise  and 
(i  i ")  tread,  covering  in  i  and  rounded  (or  moulded)  on  the  front  edge.]  The 
bottom  of  the  area  to  be  of  [(3 ")  rubbed  blue  stone  with  holes  drilled  through  and 
loose  stone  pit  under.] 
Or 

| Specify  a  brick  paved  bottom  or  concrete  same  as  the  cellar  bottom. 


Other  Areas. 


Construct  the  cellar  window  areas  as  shown,  with  (8")  lbrick  walls,  in  Rosendale 
cement  mortar  coped  with  (3")  rubbed  blue  stone. 

Form  the  bottom  of  [(3 ")  blue.stone  with  holes  drilled  through  and  loose  stone 
pit  under,] 


Or 


j  Specify  a  brick  paved  bottom  or  concrete  same  as  the  cellar  bottom.; 

Set  the  iron  grating  as  specified  under  "Iron  Work." 


Coal  Slide. 


Form  a  coal  slide  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  using  (12")  vitrified  tile  pipe 
laid  in  cement  and  filled  around  with  cement  where  it  enters  the  wall ;  to  have  a 
tightly  fitting  iron  cover  with  iron  frame,  and  grooves  cut  in  the  flag  stone  to  keep 
out  the  water.  Let  the  frame  into  the  flag  stone  and  cement  tightly. 


26 


Sometimes  of  4"  flag  stone  with  iron  cramps. 


Cellar  Bottom. 

{Ordinary. } 


Level  off  the  cellar  bottom  (8')  from  the  underside  of  the  first  floor  beams, 
settle  it  thoroughly  and  put  down  a  concrete  bottom  (4")  deep  of  one  part  Rosendale 
cement,  two  parts  sand  and  three  parts  of  clean,  coarse,  sharp  gravel  (or  broken 
stone)  well  tamped  ;  cover  this  with  a  coat  of  one  part  Portland  cement  to  two  of 
sand  (i")  thick  ;  all  flushed  up  smooth  with  a  true  and  even  surface  graded  to  the 
outside  cellar  door  so  that  the  cellar  will  drain  dry. 

'Fill  in  between  the  sleepers  in  [specify  where J  with  the  same  concrete. 


:For  City  Buildings.} 


Top  Coat. 


Water  Proofing. 

|  For  City  Buildings. 


Level  and  grade  off  the  entire  cellar  floor,  [including  Vaults,  Area  and  — ]  and  put  down  a 
concrete  bottom  (4")  deep,  [the  concrete  to  be  as  specified  under  "Concrete."]  Or 

[of  one  part  Portland  cement,  two  of  sand  and  four  of  clean,  coarse  gravel.] 

Cover  this  with  the  water  proofing  hereinafter  specified,  carried  under  the  bases  of  the 
columns  and  joined  to  the  water  proofing  on  the  walls.  Over  this  lay  a  layer  of  concrete  (12") 
deep. 

In  the  {specify  where|  put  down  a  top  coat  (i-J")  thick,  of  one  part  Portland  cement  to  two 
of  sand  flushed  up  smooth  to  a  true,  even,  finished  surface,  and  graded  to  the  drain  catcli  basin. 

The  Contractor  shall  water-proof  the  cellar 

[with  three  layers  of  the  best  felt   laid  between   four   layers  of  Trinidad   asphaltum,    each   course 
being  made  tight  at  the  joints  by  overlapping  and  asphalting.] 
Or 

[with  a  layer  of  liquid  asphaltum  (£")  thick  applied  with    a   trowel   while   hot,] 
to  be  put  down  over  the  entire  cellar  floor,  carried  across  the  concrete,  through  the  brickwork 
and  up  on  the  side  walls  (2')  above  the  grade,   and    turned  6"    into   the  brickwork  ;   also  to  be 
carried  up   the  walls  of  the  vault,   6"  over  the  concrete  at  the  top,  [applied  on  the  inner  face  of 
a  4"  brick  "wall  built  outside  the  vault  for  that  purpose.] 


28 


'A  better  way  is  to  lay  the  sleepers  over  the  concrete. 
•This  wall  specified  under  "Brickwork." 


29 


Trench  for 
Drain   Pipe. 


Construct  a  trench  for  the  drain  pipe  where  shown  on  the  drawings,  with  a 
cement  bottom  formed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  cellar  bottom  ;  (4")  brick  sides  in 
lime- Rosend ale  cement  mortar,  and  the  top  covered  with  [a  proper  iron  grating  the 
full  length  of  the  trench,  made  in  sections  and  easily  removable,]  or  [a  3"  flag  stone.  ] 


Trap  Pits.  Construct  trap  pits  around  all  traps  or  cleaning  screws  in  the   cellar  bottom 

with  cement  bottoms  and  brick  sides.      Cover  with  a  square  flag  stone  top. 


Cold  Air  Duct. 


Construct  the  cold  air  duct  'below  the  cellar  bottom  2(i2"  x  20 ")  in  size  inside, 
to  run  from  the  opening  in  the  wall  to  the  furnace.  The  bottom  to  be  of  -cement 
the  same  as  the  cellar  bottom,  the  sides  (4")  thick  of  brick,  and  the  top  covered 
with  3"  flag  stones,  with  close  axed  joints  laid  [flush  with  the  cellar  bottom,]  or 
[i  below  the  cellar  bottom  and  cemented  over.] 


Brick  set 
Heater. 


Brick-set  the  ^furnace,  size  to  be  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  the  walls  to  be 
(10")  in  thickness,  [built  hollow  with  a  2"  air  space  and  tied  with  tarred  iron  cramps 
set  in  every  sixth  course,  and  (2-6")  apart]  Set  the  doors,  etc.,  furnished  by  the 
Heating  Contractor.  Form  the  flues  and  draft  holes  as  required.  [Furnish  and 
set  (i"  x  2")  wrought  iron  bars  across  the  top,  placed  8"  on  centres.]  Lay  over  the 
[bars  at]  top,  two  courses  of  brick  laid  flat,  the  upper  course  crossing  the  lower. 
Cover  with  2"  of  Rosendale  cement  mortar  and  over  this  with  (3")  of  sand. 

[Plaster  the  brickwork  inside  as  laid  with  a  good  coat  composed  of  half  brown 
mortar  and  half  Plaster  of  Parish] 


Furnace  Pit. 


Construct  the  furnace  pit  '(12")  deep  with  a  cement  bottom,  same  as  cellar 
bottom,  with  (8")  brick  walls  at  sides.  The  size  and  shape  of  the  furnace  pit  are 
to  be  obtained  from  the  Heating  Contractor. 


'Neither  the  cold  air  duct  nor  furnace  pit  should  be  deeper  than  the  dry  drain  around  the 
cellar  walls. 

The  size  should  be  suited  to  the  furnace  to  be  used.  A  sectional  area  for  the  cold  air  duct 
of  A  of  the  total  sectional  area  of  the  heater  pipes  is  usually  considered  the  minimum.  * 

SA  steam  or  hot  water  heater  would  be  set  in  the  same  manner,  except  that  the  top  bars  are 
not  usually  necessary. 


Chimneys. 


Construct  the  chimneys  as  shown  on  the  drawings.  In  all  cases  there  must  be 
(8 ")  of  brickwork  between  the  inside  of  any  smoke  flue  and  any  timber  or  wood 
work.  The  chimneys  must  be  built  entirely  clear  of  the  framing,  all  flues  to  run 
to  the  top  independently. 

Run  the  kitchen  flue  of  (8")  round  tile  pipe  [inside  of  a  (12"  x  12")  square  flue,  leaving  the 
space  around  the  tile  pipe  for  vent  flue  and  setting  out  bricks  from  the  sides  to  support  the  tile 
pipe.] 

Run  the  heater  flue  of  (10")  round  tile  pipe  with  the  opening  (6")  below  the  under  side  of  the 
floor  joist  and  with  a  horizontal  piece  of  pipe  from  the  upright  flue  to  the  face  of  the  chimney. 

All  [other]  flues  to  be  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  and  [lined  with  tile  pipe, 
sizes  as  follows:  (—  — )]  Or  [pointed  smooth  on  the  inside  with  partitions  at  least 
(4")  thick.] 

All  tile  for  flues  are  to  have  joints  bedded  in  mortar,  to  extend  at  least  i" 
above  the  chimney  caps  and  to  be  made  tight  at  the  top. 


Plastering  Outside.  'Plaster  all  chimneys  outside  before  the  furring  is  done,  covering  all  brickwork 

completely  from  the  basement  floor  to  the  underside  of  the  roof  boards  with  mortar 
same  as  the  scratch  coat. 


Kitchen  Flue. 

Heater  Fue. 
Other  Flues. 


Facing. 


Ash  Pits. 


Thimbles. 


Rough  Fireplaces. 


Lay  up  the  chimneys  above  the  roof  in  design  as  shown,  [and  lay  up  the 
outside  chimneys]  with  the  brick  as  called  for  under  "  Facing"  "  Moulded  Brick" 
"  Terra  Cotta,"  etc, 

Form  the  ash  pits  as  shown  and  furnish  and  set  for  each  a  (12"  x  14") 
wrought  iron  frame  with  lugs  to  build  into  the  brickwork  and  with  sheet  iron 
doors  properly  hung  and  fastened. 

Set  a  (si")  iron  stove  pipe  thimble  in  laundry  Bother  rooms  j-  and  set  earthen- 
ware stove  pipe  thimbles  in  partitions  of  J  specify  where  \. 

Form  the  fireplaces  with  flat  arches  on  2(i£"  x  f")  wrought  iron  bars  turned  up 
at  each  end,  with  openings  (30")  high  from  the  top  of  the  finished  floors.  Con- 
struct proper  ledges  in  the  throats  of  fireplaces,  and  put  in  adjustable  iron  damp- 
ers. Turn  trimmer  arches  to  all  hearths,  including  kitchen,  and  level  up  all  hearths 
except  kitchen,  to  the  top  of  the  floor  beams  with  Portland  cement  for  tiling.  Run 
(4"  x  8")  ash  flues  from  all  fireplaces  in  the  bidlding  to  the  ash  pits. 

32 


'This  is  often  done  as  a  protection  against  fire. 

'Fireplace  openings  over  3'  6''  and  not  over  5'  wide  should  have  bars  2"  x  i"  in  size 


33 


Fireplace  Finish. 

Brick. 


Tile,  etc. 

Linings. 

Brick. 
Iron. 

Frames. 

Orates. 
Ventilating  Grates. 

(ias  Logs. 
Hearths. 

Tile. 
Slate. 


Face  the  [sides,  back,]  jambs,  and  (12")  high  over  the  top  of  the  fireplace  openings  in 
{mention  rooms}  with  buff  brick  laid  with  mortar  to  match  colored  with  Pecora  mortar  stain.  This 
work  is  to  be  properly  protected  until  completion  and  then  cleaned  down  with  acid  ['and  given  a 
coat  of  raw  linseed  oil.] 

Lay  the  hearths  with  the  same  brick,  bedded  in  cement,  in  herring  bone  pattern,  with  a  course 
of  stretchers  on  the  edges. 

Face  the  jambs  (6")  wide  and  (12")  high  over  the  top  of  the  fireplace  openings  in  j  mention 
rooms}  with  [W.  H.  Jackson  and  Company' s  new  antique  green  tile]  or  [{describe}  onyx]  or  [{describe} 
marble]  properly  put  up  in  2cement. 


Line  the  sides  and  backs  of  fireplaces  in 
Line  the  sides  and  backs  of  fireplaces  in 
No.  36  ornamental  iron  linings. 


mention  rooms} 
{mention  rooms 


with  fire  brick, 
with  W.  H.  Jackson  and  Company's 


Furnish  and   set  in    {mention  room}  a  No. 

room}  a  No.  765  W.  H.  Jackson  iron  frame. 


W.  H.  Jackson  brass  frame  and   in   { mention 


Furnish  and  set  in  {mention  rooms}  No.  884  W.  H.  Jackson  grates. 

Furnish  and  set  a  No.  683  W.  H.  Jackson  &>  Company's  ventilating  grate.  Also  construct  a 
special  8"  x  8"  ventilating  flue  from  the  side  of  the  chimney  in  the  cellar  to  the  hearth.  The  fire- 
place is  to  be  constructed  with  openings,  etc  ,  according  to  diagram  accompanying  the  grate. 

Furnish  and  set  in  {mention  room}  a  No.  562  W.  H.  Jachson  gas  log  and  make  all  necessary 
connections  to  the  pipes  as  left  by  the  plumber. 

Furnish  and  put  down  tile  hearths  in  {mention  rooms}  (16"  x  60")  in  size,  laid  with  enamelled 
tile,  color  to  be  selected  by  the  Owner,  [back  hearths  to  be  laid  with  the  same  tile,  borders  to  be  laid 
with  relief  patterns. 

All  tile  of  hearths  is  to  be  laid  in  Portland  cement  and  gravel  i"  thick  and  properly  protected 
until  completion,  finished  hearths  to  be  (£")  above  the  finished  floor. 

Furnish  and  set  to  the  fireplaces  in  {mention  rooms}  a  smooth  polished  slate  hearth  (16"  x  60") 
in  size  and  laid  -")  above  the  finished  floor. 


Kitchen  Fireplace. 

[  For  Brickset  Range. 


Construct  the  kitchen  fireplace  as  required  for  the  range  in  size  to  fit  the 
same  and  face  the  throat,  breast  and  jambs  with  white  enameled  brick  laid  up  in 
mortar  to  match,  colored  with  Pecora,  mortar  stain.  Properly  clean  down  the  brick 
work  at  completion,  [3and  give  a  coat  of  linseed  oil.] 

Furnish  and  set  the  [shelf]  or  [lintel]  of  bluestone,  with  rubbed  front,  [ends, 
bottom  and  top,]  (8 ")  thick,  set  (5-6")  from  the  floor,  and  a  rubbed  bluestone 
hearth  (3  thick  x  2-6"  wide),  the  shelf  and  hearth  to  be  as  long  as  the  breast  is 
wide.  Furnish  the  necessary  brick  and  mortar  for  setting  the  range  [and  also  set 
the  ventilating  register  furnished  by  the  Plumber.} 


Kitchen  Hearth,  etc.  Furnish  and  put  down  in  the  kitchen  a  rubbed  bluestone  hearth  (3 "  x  4  x  5 '_)  in 

{ For  Portable  Range. }     size,  laid  in  cement.      Furnish  and  put  in  a  thimble  for  the  range,  4(7')  in  size  [and 

also  set  the  ventilating  register  furnished  by  the  Plumber^ 


'"""If  red  brick  are  used. 
"Cement  £"  thick,  tile  about  f". 

4This  is  for  a  6"  pipe  which  is  used  for  a  single  oven  range.      For  a  double  oven  ranee 
thimble  should  be  8"  for  a  7"  pipe. 


35 


Ventilating  Build  the  ventilating  flues  in  the  walls  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  and  furnish 

Flues.  and   set   (12"   x   14")  white  enameled  double   cord  registers  where  marked  on  the 

drawings. 


Face  Brick 
Work. 

{Ordinary. } 


Face  all  [walls  and  outside  chimneys  abpve  the  grade  and  all  chimneys  above 
the  roof]  with^z/^brick  laid  in  mortar  to  match,  using  Pecora  mortar  stain.  Clean 
down  the  brick  with  acid  at  completion  ['and  give  a  good  coat  of  raw  linseed  oil]. 

[Other  Facings^. 


[For  City  Buildings. 


The  [front  wall  of  the  building  from  the  base  course  to  the  underside  ff  the 
cornice,  and  the  walls  of  the  courts,  including  the  sills,  jambs,  heads  and  reveals  of 
windows]  are  to  be  faced  with  buff  pressed  brick,  sliade  A,  laid  in  cement  mortar 
with  well  filled  (i")  joints,  all  well  bonded  to  the  wall  in  every  sixth  course  by  [a 
row  of  headers  laid  diagonally  into  the  backing],  all  arches  to  be  [moulded]  or 
[cut  and  rubbed]  to  the  required  shape  and  properly  bonded  to  the  backing. 

Face  the  walls  of  the  elevator  shaft  from  top  to  bottom  with  best  quality  white 
glazed  brick  bonded  to  the  backing  in  the  same  manner. 

All  face  brick  are  to  be  laid  in  cement  mortar  and  to  have  the  joints  raked 
out  at  completion  and  re-pointed  with  cement  mortar  colored  with  Pecora  mortar 
stain  to  match  the  color  of  the  brick.  All  face  brick  are  to  be  cleaned  down  with 
[a  weak  solution  of  muriatic  acid]  °r  [a  solution  of  common  lye  in  water]  [2and 
given  a  coat  of  raw  linseed  oil.] 

|  For  other  press  brick  see  under  "Chimneys"  (fireplace  finish,  hearths,  kitchen  fireplaces,  etc.)} 


floulded  Brick. 


Furnish  and  put  in  the  moulded  brick  as  shown  on  the  scale  and  detail  draw- 
ings.      !  Color,  description,  and  numbers  if  stock  patterns.  J- 


Terra  Cotta. 


Furnish  and  set  the  terra  cotta  work  as  shown  on  the  scale  and  detail  draw- 
ings.      -!  Color,  description,  and  numbers  if  stock  patterns.]- 


'""12If  red  brick  are  used. 


37 


Preparation   for  Lay  a  course  of  brick  on  edge  in  Portland  cement  between  the  beams   of 

Tiling.  j  mention  rooms [  filling  in  the  joints  with   Portland   cement.      Level  up  to  within 

Floors-  (i")  of  the  top  of  the  adjoining  floors  with  Portland  cement. 

Walls.  'Furnish  and  put  on  York  patent  metal  -lath,  (4)  high,  well  nailed  on  the  walls 

of  |  mention  rooms  j-  for  tiling. 


Stops  for  Mice. 


2Lay  a  course  of  brick  flat  in  mortar  between  the  studs  of  all  walls  and  partitions  on  top  of 
the  floor  in  each  story,  [and  a  course  on  top  of  partition  bridging  in  first  story]  to  prevent  mice 
circulating  through  the  building. 


Brick  Paving. 

|  For  Yards,  etc. } 


Pave  the  |  mention  where  f.  Ram  the  earth  properly,  put  down  (2")  of  Rosen- 
dale  cement  concrete,  pave  with  common  brick  laid  [flat]  or  [on  edge]  and  grout  the 
joints  with  [clear  Portland  cement]  or  [sand.] 


Water= proof 
Floor. 


Construct  a  waterproof  floor  in  the  conservatory  as  follows  :  Furnish  and  put 
in  two  light  (9")  steel  I  beams  with  (8")  brick  arches  between  laid  in  Portland 
cement.  Over  this  level  up  the  arches  with  Rosendale  cement  concrete  same  as 
cellar  bottom,  and  allow  it  to  dry.  Apply  over  this  a  coat  of  hot  asphalt  and 
cover  with  tarred  paper.  Cover  over  the  paper  a  coat  of  hot  asphalt  and  (3 ")  of 
concrete :  one  part  Portland  cement  to  one  part  of  crushed  stone  dust.  Trowel 
down  to  a  smooth  surface  and  grade  to  the  drain  in  the  centre. 


Cistern.  Construct  the  cistern  where  shown,  3(6')  in  diameter  inside  and  (10')  deep.     Lay  up  the  walls 

(8")  thick  of  brick  in  Rosendale  cement  mortar.  Lay  two  courses  of  brick  on  the  bottom,  dome 
over  on  top  and  leave  a  man  hole'  with  a  (3")  flag  stone  cover.  Plaster  the  inside,  sides  and 
bottom,  with  a  coat  of  [mortar  (f" )  thick:  one  part  Rosendale  cement  to  three  of  sand.  Cover  this 
with  a  coat  of  Portland  cement  mortar:  one  cement  to  three  of  sand,  and  when  dry,  give  a  wash 
coat  of  clear  Portland  cement.] 

Overflow.  Lay  a  (5")  vitrified  tile  pipe  overflow  connected  to  the  cistern  near  the  top,   laid  on  a  proper 

grade.     Trap  the  overflow  with  a  (5")  running  trap  and  connect  to  the  drain  to  cesspool. 

Vent.  Run  a  (4")  cast  iron  vent  pipe  from  the  top  of  the  cistern  up  (12")  above  the  ground  and  cap 

with  a  perforated  iron  cover. 

Supply.  | Specify  the  drains  from  the  leaders  to  the  cistern  either  here  or  under  "Drains."} 


'This  lathe  comes  in  8"  lengths  and  in  two  widths,  12  and  24'. 

2This  is  also  a  preventative  against  fire.     For  another  way  of  doing  this  see  Carpenter's 
Specification. 

5For  capacity  see  under  "Tanks"  in  Plumber's  Specification. 


39 


Privy  Vault. 


Construct  a  privy  vault  (4'  x  4')  in  size  inside,  and  (6')  deep;  the  walls  laid  up  (8")  thick  of 
brick  in  Rosendale  cement  mortar  with  a  cement  bottom  the  same  as  the  cellar  bottom.  Plaster  the 
sides  inside  [with  (-J-")  of  cement  mortar:  one  part  of  Portland  cement  to  one  of  sand]  or  fin  the 
manner  specified  for  plastering  cistern]  and  make  water  tight. 


Discharge  Pipe. 


Run  a  (5")  vitrified  tile  discharge  pipe  to  the  cesspool,  from  one  foot  above  the  bottom  of 
the  vault,  with  a  bend  turned  down  into  the  vault  for  the  purpose  of  allowing  the  liquid  contents 
of  the  vault  only  to  escape. 


Cesspools. 

For  Two.    (One  tight, 
one  loose.) 


Construct  Hwo  cesspools,  (8')  in  diameter  and  (8')  deep,  the  first  located  (6or)  from  the  build- 
ing, laid  up  tight  in  'Rosendale  cement  mortar  with  (8")  brick  walls,  plastered  inside  in  the  manner 
specified  for  plastering  the  cistern,  and  to  have  a  cement  bottom  sain',  as  the  ^cellar  bottom;  the  second 
located  (10')  from  the  first  and  laid  up  loose  with  (18")  stone  walls,  both  domed  over  on  top  with 
(20")  man  holes  and  (3")  4flag  stone  covers.  Lay  a  (4")  vitrified  tile  pipe  connecting  the  two 
cesspools,  connected  to  the  first  cesspool  (6")  below  the  inlet  to  the  same,  with  an  elbow  turned 
downward. 


For  One.      (Tight.) 


Construct  the  cesspool  (60')  from  the  building  where  directed,  (8')  in  diameter  and  (8')  deep 
with  (8")  brick  walls  laid  up  in  'lRosendale  cement  mortar,  plastered  inside  with  (^")  of  cement 
mortar:  one  part  Portland  cement  to  one  part  sand,  and  with  a  cement  bottom  the  same  as  the  ^cellar 
bottom.  Dome  over  on  top  and  form  a  (20")  man  hole  with  a  (3")  4flag  stone  cover. 


For  One.      (Loose.) 


Construct  the  cesspool  (60')  from  the  building  where  directed,  (8')  in  diameter  and  (8')  deep 
with  (18")  stone  walls  laid  up  dry.  Dome  over  the  top  and  form  a  (20")  man  hole  with  a  3"  flag 
stone  cover. 


Overflow.  The  {second}  cesspool  is  to  have  a  (4")  vitrified  tile  overflow  taken  out  (3 ")  below  the  outlet 

pipe  with  an  elbow  turned  down  into  the  cesspool,  and  discharging  on  the  surface  of  the  ground. 


Grease  Trap. 


'Construct  in  the  cellar  on  the  house  drain  a  grease  trap  (2'  x  2')  in  size,  and  (3')  deep  laid  up 
with  brick  in  cement  mortar,  with  a  brick  paved  bottom.  Cement  the  sides  and  bottom  inside  and 
cover  with  a  flag  stone  tightly  cemented  in  place.  The  outlet  pipe  is  to  have  a  quarter  bend 
turned  down. 


4° 


'Where  it  is  necessary  to  use  a  cesspool,  the  least  objectionable  way  is  to  provide  a  tight 
cesspool  and  lay  from  it  subsoil  irrigation  drains,  in  which  case,  of  course,  no  other  overflow  is 
needed.  This  method  works  well  where  there  is  considerable  yard  space  with  a  slight  fall  from 
the  building.  The  next  best  method  is  to  provide  a  tight  cesspool  with  overflow,  cleaning  it  out 
as  often  as  necessary.  A  method  often  employed  in  the  country  is  to  construct  two  cesspools,  one 
tight  and  one  loose,  with  an  overflow  from  the  latter.  This,  while  less  objectionable  than  a  loose 
cesspool  alone,  has  little  to  recommend  it. 

"Proportions,  page  18." 

3Cellar  bottom,  page  28. 

*The  flag  stone  cover  sometimes  has  an  iron  grating  for  ventilation.  If  the  house  drain  is 
provided  with  a  fresh  air  inlet  or  foot  ventilation  this  grating  is  not  usually  put  in.  In  cases, 
however,  where  no  foot  ventilation  is  provided  and  the  soil  pipe  runs  to  the  roof,  the  grating  is 
usually  provided. 

5This  is  not  a  good  or  usual  way  to  form  a  grease  trap.  A  much  better  way  is  to  provide 
metal  grease  traps  under  the  proper  fixtures,  omitting  this  arrangement  entirely. 


Drains. 

Dry. 


Leader. 


Sewer. 


Form  a  dry  drain  around  the  cellar  walls  and  lower  than  the  cellar  bottom, 
about  (12")  deep  of  [loose  stone]  or  [(2")  sole  tile  with  loose  joints.]  Care  must 
be  taken  that  this  drain  shall  continue  unbroken  around  all  area  ways,  etc.  Cover 
with  paper  before  filling  in.  Lay  a  (4")  vitrified  tile  drain  from  the  dry  drain  to 
the  curb. 

Lay  a  (4")  vitrified  tile  drain  from  each  leader  [(12')  out  from  the  building 
and  run  into  loose  stone  drains  or  pits,]  or  [to  the  main  house  drain]  or  [to  the 
cistern],  extending  (2')  above  the  ground  to  connect  with  the  leaders. 

Lay  a  (5")  vitrified  tile  drain  from  a  point  (6')  outside  of  the  building  to  the 
[cesspool]  or  [sewer  in  the  street.  Tap  and  pay  for  tapping  the  sewer  and  connect 
therewith.] 

[The  building  is  to  be  located  (50')  from  the  street  line.] 

All  earthenware  pipes  are  to  be  smooth,  salt  glazed  and  cylindrical,  J(f ")  in 
thickness,  free  from  defects,  each  length  perfectly  straight.  The  ends  of  the  pipes 
are  to  be  wet  before  applying  the  cement  and  the  space  between  each  hub  and  the 
small  end  of  the  next  section  is  to  be  completely  filled  with  Portland  cement  with 
joints  clean  inside.  Lay  with  a  uniform  fall  on  boards  and  use  Y  branches  for  all 
connections. 


Irrigation. 

:  Used  with  Cesspool. 


Lay  from  the  cesspool,  (3")  below  the  inlet  pipe  in  the  same,  a  '(4 ")  vitrified 
tile  drain  with  an  elbow  turned  down  into  the  cesspool,  and  between  each  joint  of 
pipe  lay  a  (2"  x  4")  Y  reducer.  From  each  Y  branch  lay  a  line  of  (2")  agricultural 
sole  tile,  with  joints  open  (i"),  laying  (200')  in  all.  Cover  the  joints  with  pieces 
of  paper  before  filling  in  to  keep  out  the  earth.  These  pipes  are  to  be  laid  [3on 
boards]  (10")  below  the  surface  of  the  ground  and  to  have  a  fall  from  the  cesspool 
of  (3")  to  100'.  The  end  of  the  main  line  pipe  is  to  have  a  2"  x  4"  reducer  and  to  be 
continued  with  agricultural  tile  the  same  as  the  branches. 


Yard  Catch 
Basins. 


Construct  brick  catch  basins  in  the  yards  where  so  marked  on  the  drawings, 
(16"  x  1 6"  x  12")  in  size,  with  (4")  brick  walls  and  cement  bottoms,  with  a  perfor- 
ated iron  strainer  in  the  outlet. 

| Specify  a  drain  for  this  under  "  Drains."! 


'For  table  of  thicknesses  see  note  opposite  "Earthenware  Pipe"  in  Plumber's  Specification. 
'Should  be  the  same  size  as  the  inlet  pipe  to  the  cesspool. 

3it  is  important  that  these  pipes  should  have  a  perfectly  uniform  fall  and  while  somewhat 
expensive,  this  is  much  better  accomplished  by  laying  on  boards. 


43 


Iron  Work. 

Anchors. 


Chimney  Rods. 


Guards. 


Gratings. 


Anchor  the  front  wall  to  the  side  walls  with  iron  T  anchors  every  six  feet 
in  height ;  anchors  to  be  (if"  x  f"  x  24")  in  size,  turned  up  at  the  back  end  (4"), 
with  f"  x  8"  cross  bars  in  front. 

Anchor  the  ends  of  every  fourth  beam  into  the  side  walls  with  (i£"  x  f") 
wrought  iron  anchors,  (16")  long,  turned  up  into  the  brick  work  and  spiked  to 
the  beams. 

Anchor  the  walls  running  parallel  with  the  beams  every  (6)  with  (i£"  x  f") 
wrought  iron  anchors  turned  down  over  the  second  beam. 

Furnish  and  build  in  f"  wrought  iron  anchors  at  the  top  of  the  walls,  placed 
6'  apart  and  extending  24"  into  the  walls  with  washers  and  nuts  on  top. 

Furnish  and  put  up  for  each  chimney  an  iron  rod  (i")  in  diameter,  turned 
up  (3")  on  the  roof  and  well  spiked  to  the  timber ;  to  extend  [into  the  chimney 
width  (8")  and  turned  up  (4')  at  the  endj,  or  [clear  through  the  chimney  with  a 
washer  on  each  side.] 

Furnish  and  put  in  guards  to  all  basement  windows  with  (f")  round,  upright 
bars,  placed  (4")  apart  [and  secured  to  two  (3"  x  f")  cross  bars  let  into  the  stone 
work  and  fitted  tightly],  or  [with  iron  frames  hung  to  open  and  fitted  with  suit- 
able locks.] 

Cover  the  cellar  window  areas  with  iron  gratings  formed  of  (f"  x  i£")  bars, 
placed  (ii")  apart,  with  suitable  frames  secured  to  the  stone  coping,  with  iron 
lugs  leaded  in. 

|  For  other  iron  work  see  "  Iron  Specification."  [ 


Plastering. 


Whitewashing. 


Deafening. 


Whitewash  all  brick  or  stone  work  visible  in  the  cellar  with  two  good  coats, 
using  Rockland  lime  and  plaster-of-Paris. 

'Deafen  the  floors  of  \ mention  rooms \  by  pugging  between  the  beams,  on 
boarding  prepared  by  the  carpenter,  with  mortar  (2")  thick,  well  packed. 

Back  plaster  on  lath  between  the  studs  of  partitions  between  ]  mention  rooms  j- 
and  in  the  outside  walls  of  the  building,  with  one  coat  of  scratch  coat  mortar. 

44 


'Boarding  for  this  is  called  for  in  Carpenter's  Specification. 


45 


Lathing.  [The  side  walls  of  the  cellar  and   the  walls  and  ceilings  of  {mention  rooms [ 

are  not  to  be  lathed  and  plastered.] 

[The  walls  of  |  mention  where}  are  to  be  plastered  directly  on  the  brickwork.] 
All  other  walls,  ceilings,  partitions  and  work  that  is  furred  off  throughout  the 

building,  [including  the  cellar  ceiling,]  are  to  be  lathed  with 

[sound,  dry  spruce  lath  put  on  (f")  apart  with  four  nailings  to   each  lath  and 

joints  broken  every  tenth  lath  ;  no  lath  to  be  put  on  vertically  nor  to  run  from  one 

room  to  another.]     Or  [York  metal  lath  with  the  rough  side  in.] 


Plast  ring. 


Three  Coat. 


Two  Coat. 


'Plaster  all  work  which  is  lathed  [and  plaster  {mention  where [  directly  on  the 

brickwork]  with 

two  coats  of  mortar,  a  scratch  and  brown,  composed  of  thoroughly 
slacked  pure  lime  strained  through  a  J"  mesh  screen,  and  clean,  sharp 
sand,  free  from  loam  and  salt ;  the  scratch  composed  of  one  half  bushel 
of  goat  hair  and  one  barrel  of  lime  to  three  barrels  of  sand,  and  the 
brown  of  one-quarter  bushel  of  cattle  hair  and  one  barrel  of  lime  to  six 
barrels  of  sand.  All  hair  is  to  be  well  beaten,  soaked  and  thoroughly 
mixed  in.  Stack  the  brown  mortar  at  least  ten  days  and  the  scratch 
three  days  before  using. 

[The  scratch  coat  is  to  be  well  scratched  and  half  dried  before  the 
brown  is  applied.]  Or  [2The  brown  coat  is  to  be  laid  on  over  the 
scratch  immediately  after  the  scratch  is  applied.] 

The  brown  coat  is  to  be  thoroughly  dry  before  the  finished  coat  is 
applied. 

3a  first  coat  of  mortar  composed  of  one  barrel  of  pure  lime,  thoroughly 
slacked  and  strained,  to  three  barrels  of  clean,  sharp  sand,  free  from  loam 
and  salt,  adding  one-half  bushel  of  goat  hair,  well  beaten,  soaked  and 
thoroughly  mixed  in.  Stack  the  mortar  three  days  before  using.  This 
coat  is  to  be  thorougly  dry  before  the  finished  coat  is  applied. 

All  ceilings  are  to  be  made  perfectly  level,  all  walls  true,  straight  and  plumb, 
and  all  angles  sharp  and  true.  The  scratch  and  brown  coats  are  to  be  carried  back 
of  all  trim,  base,  wainscoting,  etc. 

46 


'The  thickness  of  grounds  is  usually  f"  for  three  coat,  f "  for  laid  on  work,  and  £ "  for  two 
coat  work. 

*A  method  called  ''laid  on  "  work  is  employed  in  some  localities.  This  is  specified  precisely 
in  the  same  manner  as  three  coat  work  except  that  the  brown  coat  is  laid  on  immediately  after  the 
scratch  is  applied.  It  is  somewhat  cheaper  than  three  coat  work  and  finishes  about  f-"  thick 
instead  of  £". 

'This  coat  not  scratched. 


47 


Finish  of  Walls. 
Hard  Finish. 


Finish  ;  mention  where  j  with  a  coat   of  hard  finish,  composed  of  lime  putty, 
white  sand  or  marble  dust,  and  plaster-of-Paris  finished  and  troweled  to  a  smooth 

V 

and  polished  surface,  free  from  defects  or  brush  marks. 


Sand  Finish. 


Finish  j  mention  where  j  with  a  coat  of  sand  finish  composed  of  one  part  white 
lime  putty  to  ''three  parts  of  white  sand,  floated  up  with  cork  floats. 


King's  Windsor 
Cement. 

Three  Coat  Work. 


Two  Coat. 


Hard  Finish. 


Sand  Finish. 


Plaster  {specify  where}  with  two  coats  of  2 King's  Windsor  Cement,  using  [the  Neat  Windsor 
Cement,  adding -by  measure  two  parts  of  clean,  sharp  bank  sand  to  one  part  of  cement  and 
mixing  dry,  then  adding  a  proper  amount  of  water],  or  [Windsor  Cement  Dry  Mortar,  adding 
only  enough  water  to  wet  it  up  ]  The  first  coat  is  to  be  well  scratched  and  the  second  coat 
applied  so  that  the  finish  will  come  flush  to  £"  grounds. 

Plaster  {specify  where}  with  a  coat  of  King's  Windsor  Cement,  using  [the  Neat  Windsor 
Cement,  adding  by  measure  two  parts  of  clean,  sharp  bank  sand  to  one  part  of  cement  and 
mixing  dry,  then  adding  a  proper  amount  of  water]  or  [Windsor  Cement  Dry  Mortar,  adding 
only  enough  water  to  wet  it  up.]  The  walls  are  to  be  left  rough,  but  even  and  true,  and  th,e 
plaster  applied  so  that  the  finishing  coat  will  come  flush  to  f-"  grounds. 

All  ceilings  are  to  be  made  perfectly  level,  all  walls  true,  straight  and  plumb,  and  all  angles 
sharp  and  true.  The  plastering  is  to  be  carried  back  of  all  trim,  base,  wainscoting,  etc.  The 
walls  are  to  be  two-thirds  dry  before  the  finishing  coat  is  applied. 

Finish  {mention  where}  with  a  coat  of  King's  Windsor  hard  finish,  composed  of  equal  parts 
Superfine  Windsor  Cement  and  well  screened  and  seasoned  lime  putty,  finished  and  trowelled 
to  a  smooth  and  polished  surface,  free  from  defects  or  brush  marks. 

Finish  {mention  where}  with  a  coat  of  King's  Windsor  sand  finish,  mixed  with  water  as 
directed,  and  floated  up  with  soft  pine  or  cork  floats. 


Adamant. 

Three  Coat. 

Two  Coat. 
Two  Coat. 

{On  Brickwork. } 


Finishing. 
Hard  Finish. 

Float  Work. 


Plaster  {specify  where}  with  a  coat  of  No.  i  3Adamant  wall  plaster  as  a  scratch  coat,  and 
as  soon  as  it  sets  hard,  apply  a  coat  of  No.  B  Adamant  wall  plaster  as  a  brown  coat;  these  two 
coats  to  be  not  less  than  (£")  thick. 

Plaster  {specify  where}  with  a  coat  of  No.  i  Adamant  wall  plaster  not  less  than  (^")  thick. 

Plaster  {specify  where}  with  a  coat  of  Adamant  B  or  Browning  Adamant  wall  plaster  (£")  in 
thickness.  All  brick  walls,  tile  or  fire  proofing  must  first  be  wet  to  reduce  suction. 

All  Adamant  wall  plaster  is  to  be  mixed  and  applied  according  to  the  printed  instructions  for 
the  same,  to  be  filled  out  flush  with  the  grounds,  to  be  straightened  and  brought  to  an  even, 
surface,  and  all  walls  made  plumb,  ceilings  level,  and  corners  and  angles  sharp  and  true. 

Finish  {specify  where}  with  a  finishing  coat  of  Adamant  No.  3,  gauged  with  two-thirds  lime 
putty.  This  is  not  to  be  applied  until  the  under  coat  is  bone  dry.  Finish  with  a  smooth  and 
polished  surface. 

Finish  {specify  where}  with  a  finishing  coat  of  Adamant  No.  2,  gauged  with  two-thirds  sand 
finish.  The  floating  is  to  be  done  with  as  little  water  as  possible,  to  avoid  killing  the  surface. 


48 


'Sometimes  two  parts  white  lime  to  five  white  sand. 

2This  cement  is  made  in  two  forms,  King's  Neat  Windsor  Cement,  without  sand;  and  King's 
Windsor  Cement  Dry  Mortar,  with  sand  mixed  in,  ready  for  use  by  adding  water.  The  grounds 
should  be  for  three  coat  work,  £";  for  two  coat  work,  f";  and  on  brick  walls  of  sufficient  thickness 
to  straighten  out  the  walls.  Any  metallic  or  best  pine  or  spruce  lath  may  be  used.  Lath  should 
be  y3^"  apart  for  side  walls  and  £"  for  ceilings.  Lath  must  be  thoroughly  swelled  at  least  24  hours 
before  plastering. 

For  plastering  directly  on  the  brick  work  specify  in  the  same  manner,  except  for  Neat  Cement 
use  three  parts  of  sand  to  one  of  cement  or  call  for  Brick  Dry  Mortar  in  place  of  Cement  Dry 
Mortar. 

'For  Adamant  plastering  lath  should  be  placed  ^-"  apart  and  nailed  with  common  wire  nails. 
The  grounds  should  be  J"  thick  for  three  coat  work  and  f "  for  two  coat.  Lath  is  to  be  wet  two 
or  three  hours  before  applying  Adamant. 


49 


Patching.  Do  all  patching  of  plaster  work  required  after  other  mechanics  have  finished, 

repairing  all  cracks  and  broken  places,  and  leave   the  plastering  in  a  first  class 
condition. 


Centres. 


Furnish  and  put  up  plaster  centre  pieces  in    j  mention  rooms  j    to  cost  $- 
net  each,  and  to  be  in  pattern  as  may  be  selected  by  the  Owner. 


Cornices.  Run  a  plaster  cornice  in  the  ceiling  angle  of  {mention  rooms  [  (6")  on  side  walls 

and  (4")  on  the  ceiling  [as  shown  by  detail  drawings]  or  [to  cost  $—     -  per  running 
foot,  in  pattern  as  may  be  selected.] 


Beams. 


Run  beads  or  moulds  to  all  angles  of  beam  soffits  or  arrises. 


Brackets.  Furnish  and  put  up  the  plaster  brackets  [as  shown  on   the  scale  and  detail 

drawings.] 


Coves. 


Run  a   plaster   cove,   on   'furring  put   up  by  the  Carpenter,    in  the  ceiling 
angle  of  j  mention  rooms  J  [with  mould  on  the  walls  and  ceiling.] 


Outside  Where  shown  on  the  drawings,  over  the  boarding  put  on  by  the  Carpenter, 

Plastering.          furr  off  with  spruce  lath  put.  on  vertically  12"  apart  and  well  nailed.     Cover  over 
this  furring  with  "York  metal  lath  well  nailed,  with  the  rough  side  turned  in. 

Apply  a  coat  i"  in  thickness  of  Rosendale  cement  and  washed  sand  in  equal 
proportions,  and  cover  this  with  a  coat  of  Portland  cement  and  washed  sand  in 
equal  proportions,  i"  thick,  [floated  with  cork  floats]  or  [trowled.] 


'This  furring  is  in  Carpenter's  Specification. 

2This  lath  comes  in  8'  lengths  and  in  two  witdths,  12"  and  24" 


5' 


Bluestone. 

]  If  the  bluestone  work  is  made  a  separate  contract  this  specification  should  be  preceded  by  a 
Heading  and  Qeneral  Conditions.  • 

All  bluestone  is  to  be  of  the  best  stock,  free  from  imperfections  and,  where 
exposed  to  view,  of  an  even  and  uniform  color.  All  stones  are  to  be  set  on  their 
natural  quarry  beds  and  cut  to  the  proper  shape  with  parallel  builds  and  beds. 

1  If  any  finishing  stone  is  to  be  of  blue  stone,  see  Cut  Stone  specification 

Templates.  Provide  [and  set]  fine  axed  templates  under  all  iron  work;  under  beams  and 

lintels  (12"  x  12"  x  5"),  under  girders  (20"  x  20"  x  8"). 


Pier  Caps  and  Bonds. 


Bases. 


All  piers  in  the  cellar  are  to  have  ($'}fine  axed  blue  stone  caps  and  one 
axed  blue  stone  bond  in  each,  the  same  size  as  piers. 


All  iron  columns  are  to  rest  on 


Footing  Stones. 

Cellar   Areas. 

Other  Areas. 

Drain  Trench  Cover. 

Trap  Pit  Cover. 


See  page  16. 
See  page  26. 
See  page  26. 
See  page  30. 
See  page  30. 


e  axed  bluestone  bases,  -|  specify  sizes.  \ 
Cold  Air  Duct  Cover.       See  page  30. 


Kitchen  Fireplaces. 

Cistern  Cover. 

Cesspool  Cover. 
(irease  Trap  Cover. 


See  page  34. 
See  page  38. 
See  page  40. 
See  page  40. 


\  See  under  Cut  Stone  specification  for  the  following  items :  \ 

Water  table,  sills,  lintels,  jambs,  mullions,  quoins,  steps,  stoops,  belts,  columns  and  pilasters, 
platforms,  posts,  brackets,  chimney  caps  and  coping. 


Terrace  Steps. 


Furnish  and  set  rubbed  bluestone  terrace  steps  as  shown  on  the  drawings. 
Steps  are  to  be  (6"  x  12")  and  to  cover  in  i";  cheek  pieces  (6"  x  14").  [The  steps 
and  cheek  pieces  are  to  be  moulded  as  shown  on  the  detail  drawings.] 

[Put  down  a  cement  concrete  foundation  18"  deep  for  steps.] 


Step  Flags.  Furnish  and  put  down  rubbed  bluestone  step  stones  under  and  at  the  foot  of  all 

outside  steps  in  size  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  each  in  one  piece  and  (4")  thick. 


Flag  Sidewalk. 

Ordinary. 


Lay  a  flag  stone  side  walk  J(6')  wide  \  specify  where  j  of  bluestone  flags  (3") 
thick,  each  stone  the  full  width  of  the  walk,  well  bedded  in  sand,  with  a  pitch  of 
(i")  to  the  foot  in  the  width  of  the  walk.  [The  stones  are  to  be  (planed)  or 
(rubbed)  on  the  face.] 


'Walks  over  5'  wide  are  usually  laid  in  two  or  more  widths.     If  laid  in  one  width  the  stones 
should  be  4"  thick. 


Stone  Sidewalk. 
City  Work. 


Curb. 


Gutter. 


Area  Flagging. 

Cement 
Sidewalk. 


Lay  a  [bluestone]  or  [granite]  sidewalk  across  the  front  of  the  building,  each 
stone  (8")  thick,  not  less  than  (6')  wide,  and  of  a  sufficient  length  to  reach  from 
the  [building]  or  [walk  lights]  to  [a  line  i"  beyond]  the  curb.  The  stones  are  to 
be  [planed]  or  [rubbed]  or  [fine  axed]  on  the  upper  faces  [and  outer  edges,]  with 
perfectly  straight  joints,  trimmed  square  (2")  below  the  upper  faces.  Do  all 
cutting  and  grooving  to  fit  to  the  coal  covers,  light  frames,  etc.  Set  the  stones 
over  a  bed  of  (12")  of  [sand]  or  [concrete]  or  [cinders]  solidly  rammed  flush  with 
the  underside  of  the  stones.  Lay  to  the  proper  grade  [cutting  the  corner  stones 
to  the  grade  on  both  streets]  and  joint  with  Portland  cement. 

Furnish  [and  set]  the  curbing,  using  (4"  x  8")  fine  axed  blue  stone  (8')  long, 
[set  on  the  retaining  wall]  [i"  back  of  the  curb  line.] 

Furnish  and  set  the  gutter  of  (4"  x  18")  fine  axed  bluestone  (8')  long,  hol- 
lowed out  (-J-")  in  the  centre. 

The  curb  and  gutter  are  to  be  cut  with  square  joints  and  edges,  are  to  be 
well  bedded  in  Portland  cement,  and  the  joints  to  be  [filled  with  Portland  cement] 
or  [run  with  asphaltum  and  pointed  with  Portland  cement] 

|  Specify  where,  thickness,  etc.  ( 

Put  down  a  cement  sidewalk  \  specify  where  and  width. } 

Excavate  to  a  depth  of  (15 ")  and  fill  in  with  [factory  cinders  (i  i ")  deep]  or 
[(8")  of  broken  stone  and  (3")  of  cinders,]  made  wet  and  thoroughly  rammed 
until  there  can  be  no  subsidence.  Over  this  put  down  (3")  of  the  following  mix- 
ture, viz.:  one  part  of  J.  B.  White  &  Brother s  English  Portland  cement,  two 
parts  of  clean,  sharp  sand,  and  four  parts  of  clean  washed  stone,  broken  to  pass 
through  a  (i")  ring. 

Put  down  a  top  coat  (i")  thick,  composed  of  one  part  of  the  same  cement 
and  two  parts  of  [clean  stone,  crushed  to  (i")  in  size],  or  [sea  washed  grit] 

Finish  with  a  smooth  and  even  surface  in  a  uniform  color  as  directed,  with  a 
fall  of  (i")  to  the  foot  in  the  width  of  the  walk. 

Lay  out  in  squares  or  uniform  figures  with  joints  cut  entirely  through  the 
walk  from  top  to  bottom,  [and  rib  to  imitate  lo-cut  tooled  work.] 

Form  the  curb  of  the  same  material  with  a  rounded  edge. 

Leave  all  the  necessary  holes  and  grooves  for  coal  covers,  light  frames,  etc., 
and  after  the  fixtures  are  set,  point  up  around  them. 

[The  Contractor  hereby  agrees  to  repair  at  his  own  expense  any  damage 
to  this  work  not  arising  from  accident,  for  a  period  of  two  years  from  the  time 
of  completion.] 


54 


55 


Quality  and  Descrip- 
tion. 


Clamps,  etc. 


Carving. 


Cut  Stone. 

|  If  the  Cut  Stone  work  is  made  a  separate  contract,  this  specification  should  be  preceded 
by  a  Heading  and  General  Conditions. 

All  cut  stone  of  the  various  kinds  is  to  be  of  an  even  and  uniform  color, 
free  from  spawl  holes,  seams,  sand  holes  or  other  defects  that  would  materially 
impair  its  strength,  durability  or  appearance.  [Samples  in  6"  cubes  of  each  kind 
of  stone,  showing  the  cutting  and  polishing  specified  and  proposed  to  be  furnished, 
must  be  submitted  to  the  Architect  for  his  approval,  and  the  work  must  be  per- 
formed equal  in  every  respect  to  the  samples  approved.] 

All  rock  faced  work  is  to  be  fresh  faced  and  free  from  tool  marks.  All  beds 
and  builds  are  to  be  cut  full  to  the  square,  all  arrises  sharp,  and  all  side  joints 
vertical,  extending  so  to  the  back  of  the  stones.  All  side  joints  are  to  be  [sawed 
| in  limestone  or  sandstone '  |  or  [fine  pointed  -Jin  granite.  | 

All  stones  are  to  be  set  on  their  natural  quarry  beds.  All  projecting  courses 
are  to  rest  on  the  wall  a  distance  at  least  equal  to  i"  more  than  their  projection, 
and  not  less  than  12"  in  any  case.  All  projecting  stones  are  to  be  cut  with  a  drip. 

All  stones  are  to  be  cut  to  receive  the  iron  and  wood  work  and  are  to  be 
provided  with  the  necessary  anchor,  clamp,  dowel  and  lewis  holes.  All  cornice 
and  coping  stones  are  to  have  the  proper  reglets  cut  in  them  for  flashing,  and  the 
Contractor  is  to  do  any  other  cutting  of  the  stone  work  required. 

All  copings  and  horizontal  courses  and  all  chimney  caps  are  to  be  clamped 
together  with  galvanized  wrought  iron  countersunk  clamps.  All  vertical  stones 
are  to  be  dowelled.  [Every  piece  of  stone  is  to  be  anchored  to  the  backing  with 
two  galvanized  wrought  iron  anchors  properly  built  in.]  All  clamps  and  dowels 
are  to  be  set  in  [moulten  lead]  or  [Portland  cement.] 

[The  iron  clamps  and  dowels  are  to  be  furnished  by  the  Iron  Contractor, 
and  set  by  the  Mason.~\ 

All  limestone  is  to  be  plastered  on  the  back  and  sides  with  a  thick  coat  of  La 
Farge  Portland  Cement. 

Execute  all  carving  in  the  best  manner  from  detail  drawings  furnished  for  the 
same.  [The  Contractor  shall  have  full  sized  plaster  models  made  of  all  carved  work 
and  submit  (photographs  of)  the  same  to  the  Architect  for  approval  before  exe- 
cuting.] 


57 


Setting. 

[If  included  in  this 
Specification. } 


{If  delivered  for 
Mason  to  set. } 


Protection. 


Kind  of  Stone. 


Ashlar  Work. 


Set  all  work  herein  specified  in  [La  Farge  cement  mortar]  or  [lime  putty]  with 
uniform  bed  and  side  joints  not  more  than  -jV'  wide.  Rake  out  the  joints  (f")  deep, 
clean  the  stone  off  carefully  with  ['acid,  and  point  at  completion  with  Portland 
cement.] 

All  the  work  herein  specified  is  to  be  delivered  to  the  building  and  properly 
piled  up  on  boards  by  the  Contractor,  ready  for  setting  by  the  Mason,  [and  the 
Contractor  shall  keep  a  sufficient  number  of  fitters  on  the  premises  while  the  stone 
is  being  set,  to  do  any  fitting  required.] 

All  stone  sills,  steps,  copings,  jambs  and  other  parts  of  the  work  likely  to  be 
injured,  must  be  protected  by  the  Contractor  by  covering  with  boards  properly 
secured  and  maintained  until  the  building  is  completed,  when  the  coverings  are  to 
be  removed  by  the  Contractor.  All  stone  work  must  be  protected  while  the  face 
brick  is  being  oiled. 

All  steps  are  to  be  of  the  best  Connecticut  granite,  all  other  work  of  light  Indiana 
limestone. 

The  walls  where  SO  shown  jor  specify  where — front,  sides,  tower,  dormers,  gables,  porch, 

etc.,  [  are  to  be  faced  with  coursed  ashlar  in  (10")  courses  and  the  stones  are  to  be 
[not  over  30"  nor  less  than  20"]  in  length,  breaking  joints  in  every  course.  The 
ashler  is  to  be 

[rock  faced  with  (2")  of  rock  face  beyond  the  wall  line]  or 

[rubbed]  or 

[crandelled]  or 

[tooled  in  parallel  lines  six  to  the  inch]  or 

[random  pointed  with  li"  rubbed  drafts]  or 

[rough  pointed  on  the  face  and  to  project  (3")  beyond  the  wall  line  with 
rounded  edges  and  i-J"  pointed  drafts.] 

All  ashler  is  to  have  not  less  than  (4")  beds. 

All  joints  are  to  be  [pitched]  or  [pointed  (i")]  or  [tooled  (i")]. 

The  ashlar  is  to  be  bonded  to  the  backing  by  six  (10")  horizontal  courses  ex- 
tending entirely  throiigh  the  backing  and  is  to  be  [built  with  a  slip  joint,  bonding  into 
the  side  walls  as  shown,]  or  [returned  on  the  side  walls  with  block  toothings  (2  and 
3')  deep  and  (10")  high.] 


5« 


'If  limestone,  clean  off  with  a  stiff  steel  brush,  use  no  acid,  and  point  with  Lafarge  Portland 
cement.  In  all  important  work  Lafarge  Cement  mortar — one  part  cement  to  two  parts  of 
sand — is  used  in  setting  the  brick  backing  and  for  setting  and  poinitng  the  stone. 


59 


Margins. 


Water  Table. 


All  jambs,  corners  and  angles  to  have  a  (i")  fine  tooled  margins.  [Also  cut 
a  i"  margin  at  the  top  of  the  stone  work  all  around  the  building.  ] 

The  water  table  is  to  be  (6")  in  height,  to  extend  at  least -(4")  into  the  wall, 
and  to  project  (  i")  beyond  the  wall  line  with  a  drip.  It  is  to  be  fine  tooled  on  the 
face  with  a  ( i")  tooled  wash. 


Sills. 


Lintels. 


;  Special.  I 
'Ordinary.' 


Furnish  [and  set)  sills  for  all 


windows  as  shown.      The  sills 


are  to  be  (5")  thick  for  all  openings  5'  wide  or  less  and  (8")  thick  for  openings 
exceeding  5'.  All  sills  are  to  extend  at  least  (3")  under  the  wood  subsills,  to  be 
(2")  longer  at  each  end  than  the  openings,  to  project  ( i  *^")  beyond  the  wall  line,  to 
be  [fine  tooled)  or  [rubbed)  on  the  face  and  top,  and  cut  with  wash,  lugs  and  drip. 


|  Door  Sills.  |- 


;  Special. ; 

[Ordinary. [      Furnish  [and  set]  lintels  for  all 


windows  as  shown,   to    be 


( 10")  high  for  openings  5'  or  less  and  (12")  for  openings  exceeding  5'.     The  lintels 
are  to  rest  on  the  wall  (4")  at  each  end,  to  extend  at  least  (i")  over  the  frame,  to 
be  placed  flush  with  the  wall,  to  be  fine  tooled  on  the  face,  fine  tooled  on  the  under- 
side [and  cut  to  fit  the  iron  lintel.  | 
'  Door  Lintels. ' 


Jambs. 
Mullions,  etc. 

Quoins. 
Chimney  Caps. 


All  jambs  are  to  be  in  blocks,  of  the  sizes  as  shown,  rock  faced,  fine  tooled  on 
the  reveals  [and  cut  out  for  the  window  boxes.  J 

The  mullions  and  transoms  are  to  be  cut  with  moulded,  panelled  faces  with 
tooled  sides,  and  back  jointed  for  the  frames. 

The  quoins  are  to  be  \i'ock  faced  with  ( i")  tooled  drafts.] 

The  chimney  caps  are  to  be  (4")  thick,  fine  tooled  on  the  face,  with  holes 
cut  through  for  each  Hue.  These  caps  are  to  project  (i")  beyond  the  brick  work 
all  around,  and  each  is  to  be  in  [  one  piece)  or  \two  pieces  clamped  |. 

i  Chimney  offsets.  '- 


eo 


61 


Pier  Caps  and  Bonds. 


Coping. 


|  See  under  "  Bluestone  "  page  52.  [ 

The  copings  for  J  specify  where— area  walls,  retaining  walls,  firewalls,  gables,  porches, 
etc.,  |  are  to  be  ("5")  thick,  in  [length  as  shown,]  or  [(6')  lengths],  fine  tooled  on  the 
face  and  top,  and  to  project  (2")  on  each  side  of  the  wall  with  a  wash  and  drip  on 
both  sides.  [On  the  gable  walls,  every  tliird  coping  stone  is  to  extend  into  the 
wall.] 

]  Moulded  edges.  J 

'Clamps  for  Copings  specified  on  page  56.  ' 


Steps. 


The   Steps    -J  specify    where— front,    rear,    porte-cochere,    terrace,    basement,    etc.,J   are   to 

have  (6")  rise  and  (i  i")  tread  covering  in  (t")  rubbed  on  the  rise  and  tread,   [each  in 
one  piece  and  with  nosing  and  cove  moulding  on  the  edges.] 


Stoops. 


Platform;  thickness,  finish,  pieces,  joints. 

Steps:   size,  finish,  mouldings. 

Buttresses:  size,  finish,  mouldings,  carvings. 


Terrace  Steps. 


Steps:  size,  finish,  mouldings. 

Cheeks  or  Buttresses:  size,  finish,  mouldings.    '.Specified  under  "Bluestone,"  page  52 


Belts. 


Belts:  size,  finish,  mouldings,  projection,  beds. 


Columns  and 
Pilasters. 


Shafts :  size,  finish,  flutings,  carvings,  one  piece,  checked. 
Base:  mouldings,  carved. 
Caps:  mouldings,  carved. 


Platforms.  Platforms:  thickness,  finish,  pieces,  joints.       \  Stoop  platform  specified  under   "Stoops," 

above. ' 


Arches. 


Arches:  face,  reveals,  carvings,  margins. 


Step  Stones. 


Step  Stones  :   size,  motildings,  finish,  carvings. 


Posts. 


Posts :  size,  moulding,  cap,  base,  finish. 


Structural   Iron 
Work. 

Principle   of 
Construction. 


Tests. 


IRON  WORK. 

{if  the  Iron  Work  is  made  a  separate  contract,  this  specification  should  be  preceded  by  a 
Heading  and  General  Conditions.  >. 

|  For  Anchors,  chimney  Rods,  Guards  and  Gratings  see  in  Mason's  Specification, 
page  44  ;  for  Tie  anchors  for  hollow  walls  see  in  Mason's  Specification,  page  20.  For 
Clamps,  Dowels  and  Anchors  for  stone  work,  see  in  Cut  Stone  Specification,  page  56. 

For  Truss  iron,  Beam  straps,  Flitch  plates,  Bridle  irons  and  Rafter  straps,  see    in    Carpenter's 

Specification  under  "  Framing."     For  other  miscellaneous  items,  see  at  the  end  of 
this  specification,  \ 


The  building  is  to  be  constructed  on  the  skeleton  plan,  the  supporting  system 
being  entirely  independent  of  the  side  walls,  and  all  the  work  is  to  be  of  the  sizes 
and  weights  as  shown  and  figured  on  the  drawings  and  as  hereinafter  specified. 

The  several  parts  of  the  structure  are  lo  be  proportioned  to  carry  safely  the  following  loads, 
exclusive  of  the  weight  of  the  structure  : 

Floors,  X100)  pounds  per  superficial  foot. 

Roofs,  ["(5°)  pounds  per  superficial  foot]  or  [a  wind  load  of  "(24)  pounds,  vertically,  and  a 
snow  load  of  4(j)  pounds  per  superficial  foot]  and  the  calculation  for  strength  shall  also  be  based 
on  the  assumption  that  the  common  brickwork  'weighs  112  pounds,  pressed  brickwork  (140) 
pounds,  stone  (170)  pounds,  concrete  (140)  pounds,  and  timber  (54)  pounds  per  cubic  foot  ;  and 
that  the  double  flooring  weighs  (8)  pounds,  the  plastering  (8)  pounds,  the  roof  sheathing  (3) 
pounds,  and  the  slate  covering  (9)  pounds  per  square  foot. 

All  work  is  to  be  accurately  made  and  fitted  with  standard  [wrought  iron]  or  [steel]  con- 
nections. 

The  Contractor  is  to  do  all  necessary  drilling  or  Cutting  for  the  proper  fastening  of  all  other 
work  to  the  ironwork. 

All  material  used  shall  be  subject  to 'inspection  and  test  by  the  Architect.  Said  tests  and  in- 
spection are  to  be  made  at  the  time  of  rolling,  and  the  quality  determined  before  it  leaves  the 
rolling  mill.  All  necessary  facilities  for  this  purpose  shall  be  furnished  by  the  manufacturer.  A 
variation  in  cross  section  or  weight  of  rolled  material  of  more  than  3^  from  that  specified,  may  be 
cause  for  rejection. 


Cast  Iron,  All  castings  shall  be  of  tough  grey  iron,  free  from  injurious  cold   shuts  or 

blow  holes,  true  to  pattern  and  of  workmanlike  finish. 

Sample  pieces  i"  square  from  the  same  heat  of  metal  in  sand  moulds  shall  be  capable  of  sus- 
taining on  a  clear  span  of  4-6",  a  central  load  of  500  pounds  when  tested  in  the  rough  bar. 

64 


'The  allowance  in  the  New  York  Building  Law  for  floor  loads  is  as  follows: 

For  dwellings,  tenements  and  hotels,  70  Ibs.  per  square  foot. 

For  offices,  100  Ibs   per  square  foot. 

For  places  of  public  assembly,  120  Ibs.  per  square  foot. 

For  stores,  factories  and  warehouses,  not  less  than  150  Ibs.  per  square  foot. 


Pitch. 
=  45", 
=  33°-4'' 
=  260-34' 

=  2 1 0-48' 
=  180-26' 


Normal. 
35 
3° 
*5 

20 


'This  allowance  of  fifty  pounds-per  square  foot  is  for  a  flat  roof.     For  pitched  roofs  the  loads 
are  usually  taken  as  follows: 

'Wind  Loads. 
In  pounds  per  superficial  foot. 

Vertical.  Horizontal. 

25  25 

24  16 

20  10 

,8  7 

'6  5 

4Snow  Loads. 

In  pounds  per  superficial  foot. 

Pitch  of  roof 

Location. 

Southern  States, 
Central  States, 
Rocky  Mountain  States, 
New  England  States, 
Northwest  States, 


\f 

,, 

^ 

1 

~7 

/% 

/3 

^T 

-g 

/o 

45° 

33°-4i' 

26°-34' 

i8°-26' 

o 

0 

o 

0 

0 

o 

7 

15 

22 

30 

o 

10 

20 

27 

35 

0 

IO 

20 

35 

45 

0 

12 

25 

37 

5° 

TABLE  OF  WEIGHTS. 


Woods. 


Ash,  45 

Cherry,  50.4 

Chestnut,  49.2 
Hemlock,  30 

Oak,  72 

Pine,  white,  30 

Pine,  yellow,  54 

Spruce,  30 

Brick  and  Cement. 

Common  brickwork,  112 

Terra  cotta  work,  112 
Pressed  brickwork,                       up  to  142 

Cement,  Rosendale,  56 

Cement,  Portland,  90 

Concrete,  Rosendale,  140 

Concrete,  Portland,  150 

Stonework. 

Dressed  limestone  or  granite,  160 

Rubble,  150 

Stone. 

Granite,  170    • 

Limestone,  170 

Bluestone,  160 

Sandstone,  150 


Average  weight  of  a  cubic    Average  weight  of  a  board 
foot  in  Ibs.  foot  in  Ibs. 


Other  Materials. 

Slate, 
Plaster, 

No.  27. 

Corrugated  iron  (laid)       .88 


3-75 

4-2 

4-i 

2-5 

6 

2-5 

4-5 
2.5 


No.  26. 

•  97 


No.  24. 

1.18 


NO.  22. 


about  9  pounds  per  square  foot 
about  8  pounds  per  square  foot 

No.  20.        No.  18.       No.  16. 

1.88       2.64       3.50     pounds  per  square  foot 


Wrought  Iron. 


All  wrought  iron  must  be  ductile  and  fibrous,  straight  and  smooth,  free  from 
buckles,  blisters,  cracks  or  cinder  pockets. 

The  tensile  strength,  limit  of  elasticity  and  ductility  shall  be  determined  from  a  standard  test 
piece  not  less  than  £"  thick,  and  cut  from  a  full  sized  bar.  All  wrought  iron  shall  have  an  elastic 
limit  of  at  least  26,000  pounds  per  square  inch,  a  tensile  strength  of  50,000  pounds  per  square 
inch,  and  an  elongation  of  at  least  15$  in  8".  All  wrought  iron  when  bent  at  a  working  heat,  must 
be  capable  of  bending  sharply  to  a  right  angle,  without  sign  of  fracture.  When  bent  cold  it 
must  bend  180°  without  sign  of  fracture  to  a  curve  the  inner  radius  of  which  equals  the  thickness 
of  the  piece  tested,  and  when  nicked  and  broken  cold,  the  fracture  must  be  mostly  fibrous. 

Rivet  iron  shall  be  capable  of  bending  cold  180°  to  a  curve  the  diameter  of  which  shall  not 
exceed  the  thickness  of  the  bar  tested,  without  a  sign  of  fracture 


Steel. 


No  specific  process  or  provision  of  manufacture  will  be  demanded,  provided 
the  material  fulfills  the  requirements  of  this  specification. 

Test  pieces  shall  have  a  diameter  of  f"  and  a  length  of  12"  and  shall  show  an  ultimate  tensile 
strength  of  64,000  pounds  per  square  inch,  an  elastic  limit  of  32,000  pounds,  and  an  elongation  of 
20%  in  8"  with  a  40$  minimum  reduction  of  area  at  the  point  of  fracture.  All  steel  must  bend  cold 
180°  to  a  curve  the  inner  diameter  of  which  shall  not  exceed  the  thickness  of  the  piece  tested, 
without  sign  of  fracture. 


Setting.  T/he  Contractor  shall  furnish  all  false  work,   rigging,   etc.,  required  for  the 

erection  of  all  work  herein  specified,  as  the  building  progresses,  and  shall  be 
responsible  for  all  accident  to  men  and  material  caused  by  him  or  his  employees. 
He  shall  set  all  work  herein  specified  plumb  and  true  and  fasten  the  same  as  soon 
as  it  is  in  position. 


Bolting  and 
Rivetting. 


All  bolt  holes  in  cast  iron  are  to  be  bored  of  such  sizes  as  will  fit  the  bolts 
closely.  The  bolts  must  be  provided  with  wrought  iron  washers  and  standard 
threads  and  nuts,  and  must  be  of  such  length  that  the  entire  threads  of  the  nuts 
will  be  engaged.  When  bolts  are  used  in  place  of  rivets,  the  number  shall  be  in- 
creased by  2O#.  All  rivets  must  completely  fill  the  holes  and  have  full  hemispheri- 
cal heads  concentric  with  the  shanks  of  the  rivet,  to  be  countersunk  where 
required  and  machine  driven  where  practicable. 

The  rivets  must  be  so  spaced  that  the  shearing  strain  shall  not  exceed  7,500  pounds  per 
square  inch,  nor  the  pressure  upon  the  bearing  surface  exceed  15,000  pounds  per  square  inch  of 
the  projected  semi-intrados  (/.  e. :  the  diameter  X  the  thickness  of  the  piece)  of  the  rivet.  The 
pitch  of  the  rivets  shall  not  exceed  6"  nor  twenty  time.s  the  thickness  of  the  thinnest  plate,  nor  be 
less  than  three  diameters  of  the  rivet.  Wherever  possible,  the  centre  of  the  rivets  shall  be  two 
diameters  away  from  the  edge  of  the  iron,  and  never  less  than  i-J"  except  in  bars  less  than  2-J" 
wide. 

66 


Punching.  The  diameter  of  the  punch  shall  not  exceed  the  diameter  of  the  rivet,  nor  the 

diameter  of  the  die  exceed  the  diameter  of  the  punch  by  more  than  TV". 

Holes  must  be  so  carefully  punched  that  when  the  several  parts  forming  one  member  are 
assembled,  a  rivet  -fa"  less  in  diameter  than  the  hole  can  be  entered  hot  into  any  hole  without 
reaming  or  straining  the  iron  by  means  of  drift  pins  All  joints  in  riveted  work  shall  be  ful.ly 
spliced,  as  no  reliance  will  be  placed  upon  abutting  joints. 


Bases. 


The  bearings  of  beams,  girders,  etc.,  and  the  bases  of  all  columns  shall  be 
proportioned  so  that  the  load  on  the  masonry  shall  not  exceed  300  pounds  per 
square  inch.  All  bases,  etc.,  are  to  be  bedded  solidly  in  Portland  Cement. 


Lintels. 


Furnish  and  set  lintels  [as  shown  on  the  drawings]  or  [as  follows :  \  number, 

sizes,  material,  discription. '         Or 

Furnish  and  set  cast  iron  lintels  over  all  openings  in  the  masonry  greater  than  (24")  with 
flanges  the  full  width  of  the  wall,  the  webs  4"  high  at  the  ends,  and  increasing  in  height  by  i£"  for 
every  12"  increase  of  span.  All  lintels  are  to  have  skew  backs  cast  on  where  required.  No  lintels 
are  to  have  a  breadth  of  over  16"  without  a  double  web.  All  lintels  are  to  have  a  bearing  on  the 
wall  of  at  least  "6"  at  each  end.  No  cast  iron  lintel  shall  be  less  than  £ "  thick  in  any  of  its  parts. 


Cast  Iron  Columns. 


Furnish  and  set  the  cast  iron  columns  [as  shown  and  figured  on  the  drawings] 

or  [as  follows  :    ^number,  sizes,  thickness,  etc.  |] 

All  cast  iron  columns  must  be  true  and  straight  and  of  full  and  uniform  thickness  for  the 
entire  length.  All  necessary  lugs,  flanges,  connections,  etc.,  are  to  be  cast  on.  All  bearing 
surfaces  are  to  be  turned  or  planed  smooth  and  at  right  angles  to  the  line  of  the  strain  to  be 
carried.  All  bolt  holes  are  to  be  drilled.  All  corners,  mouldings,  flutings,  etc.,  are  to  be  smooth 
and  straight  with  sharp,  clean  corners.  The  ornamental  work,  where  possible,  is  to  be  cast 
separately  and  put  on  with  screws,  with  joints  made  close  by  filing.  Every  closed  cast  iron 
column  is  to  have  a  hole  •§•"  in  diameter  drilled  in  the  shaft  to  exhibit  its  thickness.  Every  cast 
iron  column  is  to  have  an  average  thickness  of  shaft  of  at  least  £".  No  cast  iron  column  shall 
have  an  unsupported  length  exceeding  twenty  times  its  least  diameter. 


Wrought  Iron  and 
Steel  Columns. 


Furnish  and  set  the  wrought  iron  and  steel  columns  [as  shown  on  the  draw- 
ings] or  [as  follows  :    ^number,  sizes,  discription,  etc.  ^] 

All  wrought  iron  and  steel  columns  shall  be  in  lengths  of  two  or  three  stories  and  shall  be  of 
[angles  and  plates]  or  [channels  and  plates]  or  [Z  bars  and  plates]  so  arranged  as  to  form  a 
symmetrical  column.  They  shall  be  so  riveted  that  the  distance  between  the  rivets  in  the  line  of 
the  strain  shall  not  exceed  twenty  times  the  thickness  of  the  parts  joined. 

Caps  and  bases  are  to  be  built  up  of  [plates  and  angles  of  such  sizes  as  will  allow  of  sufficient 
rivets  to  carry  the  loads.  No  plates  nor  angles,  however,  are  to  be  less  than  ^"  thick  unless  for 
filling.]  Where  one  column  rests  on  top  of  another,  the  splice  is  to  be  made  with  [plates  of  such 
thickness  and  size  as  will  allow  of  sufficient  number  of  rivets.]  Unless  the  ends  of  the  columns 
are  turned  to  a  true  bearing,  the  joint  must  be  fully  spliced.  Make  the  connections  for  beams 
and  girders  of  [heavy  angles  and  plates.]  Where  necessary  to  carry  heavy  concentrated  loads, 

68 


'New  York  Building  Law  requires  that  all  lintels  with  a  span  of  over   10'  shall  have  at  least 
12"  bearing  on  walls  or  at  least  6"  bearings  on  iron  posts. 


69 


Beams  and  Girders. 


Box  and  Plate 
Girders. 


Painting. 


the  angle  brackets  are  to  be  strengthened  with  a  pair  of  vertical  angles  underneath,  which  must 
have  their  upper  ends  milled  off  to  secure  a  perfect  bearing  against  the  brackets.  At  the  ends  of 
the  columns  or  where  they  receive  concentrated  loads,  they  shall  have  additional  {specify  size! 
stiffening  plates,  and  the  pitch  of  the  rivets  for  a  length  equal  to  twice  the  diameter  of  the 
columns  shall  not  exceed  four  diameters  of  the  rivet.  The  open  sides  of  all  columns  shall  be 
stayed  by  {specify  size}  tie  plates  at  the  ends  and  diagonal  '{specify  size}  lacing  bars  between. 
The  tie  plates  shall  have  a  length  at  least  equal  to  the  diameter  of  the  column,  and  the  lacing  bars 
shall  generally  be  inclined  45°  to  the  axis  of  the  column.  No  column  shall  have  a  length  exceeding 
"60  times  its  least  width  without  a  corresponding  reduction  in  the  unit  strain,  as  approved  by  the 
Architect. 

Furnish  and  set  [rolled  iron]  or  [steel]  beams  and  girders  [as  shown  and 
figured  on  the  drawings]  or  [as  follows:  \ specify  number,  location,  size,  weights,  des- 
cription, etc.  [ 

All  beams  and  channels  shall  be  of  standard  make  and  have  a  bearing  of  at  least  38"  on  the 
walls.  [The  beams  {specify  which}  are  to  have  a  bearing  of —  -  and  to  set  on  {specify  size} 
bearing  plates.]  All  floor  beams  shall  have  (£")  wrought  iron  tie  rods  spaced  in  rows  about  '6' 
apart.  Where  two  or  more  beams  are  used  as  a  single  girder,  provide  heavy  standard  separators 
and  bolts  about  every  6'. 

All  connections  between  beams  and  girders  shall  be  neatly  coped  and  fastened  with  standard 
connection  angles.  [In  cases  where  beams  of  relatively  short  lengths  are  loaded  to  their  full 
capacity,]  make  provision  for  additional  strength  {specify  what}  in  the  connections. 

Provide  and  set  box  or  single  web  riveted  girders  [where  rolled  beams  are  not 
sufficiently  strong  to  carry  the  loads]  or  [where  shown  on  the  drawings]  or  \  specify 
where.  \ 

The  webs  of  such  girders  are  to  be  {specify  sizes  and  weights}  or  [proportioned  so  that  the 
maximum  shearing  strain  shall  not  exceed  10,000  Ibs.  per  square  inch.]  The  webs  must  be 
stiffened  at  the  ends  and  at  the  points  of  application  of  concentrated  loads  by  means  of  {specify 
size}  vertical  angle  stiffenersTiveted  on  in  pairs.  These  stiffeners  should  be  spaced  [at  distances 
less  than  the  depth  of  the  girders  near  the  ends,  and  may  be  placed  farther  apart  or  omitted  near 
the  centre]  or  [as  shown  on  the  drawings.] 

The  flanges  of  all  girders  are  to  be  proportioned  on  the  supposition  that  the  bending  or  chord 
strains  are  resisted  by  the  upper  and  lower  flanges  and  one-sixth  of  the  web  plate  area.  The 
compression  flanges  of  beams  and  girders  shall  be  stayed  against  transverse  crippling  when  their 
length  is  more  than  fifteen  times  their  width.  In  every  case  at  least  one  flange  plate  shall  extend 
from  end  to  end  of  the  girder  to  give  lateral  stiffness.  The  web  of  plate  girders  where  spliced, 
must  be  spliced  by  means  of  a  plate  on  both  sides.  All  angle  stiffeners  are  to  have  milled  ends  to 
fit  closely  between  the  flange  angles.  Provide  packing  bars  back  of  every  set  of  stiffeners,  the 
same  width  as  the  stiffener  angle  and  as  thick  as  the  chord  angle. 

6[A11  iron  work  is  to  be  painted]  or 

[All  parts  of  columns,  girders,  etc.,  which  will  be  inaccessible  after  assembling, 
and  all  grilles,  fire  escapes,  etc.,  are  to  be  painted]  with  two  coats,  composed  of  7 
Ibs.  Prince's  metallic  paint  dry  to  one  gallon  pure  linseed  oil,  £  boiled  and  £  raw. 
[All  other  iron  work  is  to  be  oiled.] 

70 


'The  size  of  the  lacing  bars  should  be  as  follows: 
For  a  distance  between  gauge  lines  of  6"  or  less        i"  x  1^." 
over  6"  but  not  exceeding  8"     i^''  x  ^" 
8"  10"     i%"  x  i 

10"  12"     if"  x  i" 

12"  16"     2"    x  ^." 

16"  20"     2^"  x  f" 

-20"  lacing  bars  should  be  made  of  angles. 

"New  York  Building  Law: — No  wrought  iron  or  rolled  steel  column  shall  have  an  unsupported 
length  of  more  than  thirty  times  its  least  lateral  dimension  or  diameter,  nor  shall  its  metal  be  less 
than  £"  in  thickness. 

'New  York  Building  Law: — All  wrought  iron  or  rolled  steel  beams  8"  deep  and  under  shall 
have  bearings  equal  to  their  depth,  if  resting  on  a  wall;  9"  to  12"  beams  shall  have  a  bearing  of 
10",  and  all  beams  more  than  12"  in  depth  shall  have  bearings  of  not  less  than  12"  if  resting  on  a 
wall.  Where  beams  rest  on  iron  supports  and  are  properly  tied  to  the  same,  no  greater  bearings 
shall  be  required  than  one-third  of  the  depth  of  the  beams. 

'Where  the  strain  on  the  masonry  would  exceed  300  pounds  per  square  inch,  the  bearing 
surface  should  be  made  larger  to  bring  the  strain  within  this  limit. 

'New  York  Building  Law  requires  such  tie  rods  to  be  spaced  at  intervals  of  not  more  than 
eight  times  the  depth  of  the  beam. 

'In  structural  ironwork  sometimes  the  entire  work  is  painted;  sometimes  only  such  parts  as 
would  be  inaccessible  after  assembly,  and  the  rest  oiled.  The  finished  ironwork,  such  as  grilles, 
fire  escapes,  etc.,  are  usually  painted  by  the  Iron  Contractor  with  a  coat  of  mineral  paint  and  the 
finishing  coats  are  put  on  by  the  painter. 


Roofs. 

Trusses. 


iFor  Riveted  Work. 


{For  Pin  Connected 
Work.} 


Construct  and  set  the  trusses  as  shown  on  the  drawings.  The  form  of  the 
trusses  shall  be  such  that  the  stress  in  every  member  admits  of  exact  calculation. 

The  trusses  are  to  be  spaced  [as  shown  on  the  drawings]  or  [at  such  distances 
apart  as  to  allow  of  single  pieces  of  shape  iron  being  used  for  purlins.] 

[The  sizes  and  sections  are  to  be  as  shown  on  the  strain  sheet.] 
Or 

[All  tension  members  shall  preferably  be  composed  of  angles  with  the  object  of  stiffness.  All 
main  members  shall  preferably  be  made  of  two  angles  back  to  back,  of  two  angles  and  one  plate, 
or  of  four  angles  laced.  The  secondary  members  may  be  formed  of  one  angle,  and  long  laterals 
or  sways  may  be  formed  of  bars  with  a  sleeve  nut  adjustment,  to  facilitate  erection.  All  members 
having  such  a  length  as  to  render  sagging  probable,  shall  be  held  up  by  sag  ties  properly  spaced. 
The  rafters  shall  preferably  be  made  of  two  angles,  two  angles  and  one  plate,  or  of  such  other 
approved  form  as  to  allow  of  easy  connection  for  the  web  members.  Sub-struts  may  be  formed 
of  one  angle.  Sway  bracing  shall  be  introduced  where  necessary  to  insure  ease  of  erection  and 
sufficient  transverse  strength  ;  such  strains  shall  preferably  be  carried  to  the  foundation  direct, 
but  may  be  accounted  for  by  bending  in  the  columns.] 
Or 

[All  tension  members  shall  be  composed  of  eye-bars  or  loop  rods.  All  pin  holes  are  to  be 
accurately  bored  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  members,  unless  otherwise  shown.  In  pieces  not 
adjustable  for  length,  no  variation  of  more  than  ^."  will  be  allowed  in  the  length  between  the 
centre  of  pin  holes.  The  diameter  of  the  pin  holes  shall  not  exceed  that  of  the  pins  by  more  than 
-jJg-"  nor  by  more  than  -^"  for  pins  under  3^-"  in  diameter.  All  eye-bars  must  be  straight  before 
boring  and  the  holes  must  be  in  the  centre  of  the  heads  and  on  the  centre  line  of  the  bars.  All 
links  belonging  to  the  same  panel  when  placed  in  a  pile,  must  allow  the  pin  at  each  end  to  pass 
through  at  the  same  time  without  forcing.  No  welds  will  be  allowed  in  the  body  of  the  bar  of 
eye-bars,  laterals  or  counters,  except  to  form  the  loops  of  the  laterals,  counters  and  sway  rods. 
The  eyes  of  all  laterals,  stirrups,  sway  rods  and  counters  must  be  bored.  All  pins  and  lateral 
bolts  must  be  finished  perfectly  round  and  straight.  Provide  pilot  nuts  where  necessary  to  pre- 
serve the  threads  while  the  pins  are  being  driven.  Thimbles  or  washers  must  be  used  where  re- 
quired to  fill  the  vacant  spaces  on  the  pins  and  bolts.] 


Expansion.  The  trusses  are  to  be  arranged  to  allow  for  the  expansion  and  contraction 

which  would  take  place  in  a  difference  of  temperature  of  150°  and  the  bearing 
plates  shall  be  provided  with  two  anchor  bolts  not  less  than  f"  in  diameter  [bolted 
fast  to  the  tops  of  the  columns]  or  [extending  3'  down  into  the  masonry.] 


Purlins.  Single  pieces  of  shape  iron  are  to  be  used  for  purlins,  avoiding  the  use  of 

trussed  purlins.  Purlins  shall  preferably  be  composed  of  single  angles,  with  the 
long  leg  vertical  and  the  back  towards  the  peak  of  the  roof.  All  purlins  are  to  be 
attached  to  the  rafters  by  clips  with  at  least  two  rivets  in  the  rafter  and  one  bolt 
hole  for  each  end  of  each  purlin.  The  purlins  are  to  be  spaced  '(3')  on  centres, 

72 


'For  a  corrugated  iron  roof  the  purlins  should  not  be  spaced  at  a  greater  distance  from  the 
centres  than  the  distances  in  the  following  table: 

27  gauge  2'-o" 

26      "  2'-6" 

24      "  3-0" 

22          "  4'-o" 

20       "  4'-6" 

1 8       "  5--o" 

16       "  5'-6" 


73 


Covering. 

Corrugated   Iron. 


Cover  the  roof  with  (24)  gauge  corrugated  iron  with  2\'  corrugations,  all  laid 
with  one  corrugation  side  lap  and  not  less  than  3"  end  lap.  All  valleys  are  to  have 
a  flashing  of  [3  Ibs.  sheet  lead]  or  [12  oz.  copper]  extending  at  least  6"  under  the 
corrugated  iron  and  all  ridges  are  to  have  a  galvanized  iron  roll  cap- fastened  over 
the  corrugated  iron.  The  corrugated  iron  is  to  be  secured  to  the  purlins  by  '[No. 
9^  annealed  wire  nails,  having  a  washer  under  the  heads  next  to  the  iron.  These 
nails  are  to  be  of  a  sufficient  length  to  clinch  around  the  purlins  not  less  than  i"]or 
'[straps  not  less  than  $•"  x  No.  18  gauge  passed  completely  around  the  purlin  and 
riveted  at  each  end  to  the  sheet.]  Each  sheet  is  to  have  at  least  two  fastenings 
to  each  purlin.  The  side  laps  are  to  be  riveted  with  6  Ib.  rivets  about  every  18". 
At  the  gable  ends,  the  corrugated  iron  shall  be  securely  fastened  down  on  the  roof 
to  a  finish  angle  connected  to  the  ends  of  the  roof  purlin. 


Fire  Escapes. 


Furnish  and  put  up  fire  escapes  | specify  where |  made  entirely  of  wrought 
iron,  with  all  parts  strongly  riveted  and  bolted  together.  Support  the  balconies 
with  brackets  placed  (4)  apart,  formed  of  2"  x  2"  x  i"  angles  riveted  together, 
extending  through  the  brick  wall  and  with  a  bolt  and  washer  on  the  inside.  Form 
the  balcony  floors  of  i£"  x  f"  bars  laid  flat  i"  apart  with  battens  riveted  together 
and  fastened  to  the  brackets.  Form  the  railing  (3')  high  with  a  ii"  oval  top  and 
with  f"  [round]  or  [square]  balusters  placed  6"  on  centres.  Lead  the  returns  into 
the  walls.  Form  the  ladders  with  2^"  x  f"  sides,  and  f"  round  rungs  riveted  in. 
Fasten  the  ladders  securely  to  the  walls.  [The  lower  leaf  of  the  ladder  is  to  be 
hinged  to  raise  out  of  reach.] 


Sidewalk  Doors. 


Furnish  and  set  iron  side  walk  doors  with  a  (2!"  x  2i"  x  i")  angle  iron  frame 
fastened  to  the  walk  with  expansion  bolts.  Construct  the  door  of  No.  10  iron  on 
a  2"  x  •§-"  bar  iron  frame  with  the  edges  turned  down  over  the  frame.  Form  a 
rebated  joint  in  the  centre  by  bending  the  iron  to  lap  i ".  Hang  the  doors  with 
heavy  wrought  iron  hinges  and  provide  them  with  a  hasp  and  lock  and  lifting 
rings.  Also  provide  a  check  to  prevent  the  doors  from  opening  too  far. 

74 


'Where  the  corrugated  iron  is  put  on  over  wood  sheathing. 
'Where  the  corrugated  iron  is  fastened  directly  on  the  iron  beams. 


75 


Stairs. 


Construct  the  stairs  with  strings  made  of  (2^"  x  f")  iron  placed  double  with 
(ii"  x  ii"  x  i")  angle  lattice  bars  to  support  the  treads.  The  treads  are  to  be  of 
[if"  yellow  pine]  or  [cast  iron  with  checkered  tops  and  nosing  on  the  edge.]  The 
risers  are  to  be  of  [-£"  surfaced  pine]  or  [cast  iron  with  open  work.]  Form  the 

railing  -j  specify  height,  rails  and  balusters.' 


Grilles. 


The  grilles  are  to  be  made  of  wrought  iron  in  accordance  to  the  design  and 
details  for  the  same,  filing  down  all  intersections,  so  that  the  scrolls  come  flush. 
All  parts  are  to  be  [brazed]  or  [riveted  with  the  rivets  countersunk\  or  [welded 
together.]  The  frame  is  to  be  of  (•§•"  x  ii")  iron  and  the  scrolls  of  '(TV  x  i"). 
The  ornaments  are  to  be  [cast]  or  [hammered]  and  are  to  be  [riveted]  or  [welded] 
on.  The  frame  is  to  have  [lugs  to  build  into  the  masonry]  or  [screw  holes  to 
screw  to  the  wood  work.] 


Shutters.  Furnish  and  hang  in  position,   iron    shutters    for  \  mention  [   windows.     The 

frame  is  to  be  constructed  of  2"  x  f"  iron  and  covered  with  No.  18  [crimped]  or 
[plain  sheet]  iron  riveted  to  the  frame  and  left  projecting  i".  Build  proper  cast 
iron  shutter  eyes  into  the  wall  and  hang  the  shutters  with  wrought  iron  hinges. 
Provide  each  shutter  with  a  [sliding  bolt]  or  [2"  x  f"  cross  bar]  fastening. 


Area  Railings. 


Rails :    height,  size,  balusters,  ornaments. 
Gate:    size,  lock,  hinges. 
Posts:    size,  fastening. 


Fences. 


Fences.    Iron  and  Wire  :     See  under  "Fences"  in  Carpenter's  Specification. 


Walk  Lights. 

Coal  Covers. 

Gates. 

Balconies. 

Cresting. 

Wheel  Guards. 


Frame. 
Glass. 


76 


1  The  sizes  of  the  iron  used  in  grilles  range  from  light  band  iron  for  small  grilles,  up  to 
x  1 1",  and  grilles  are  sometimes  constructed  of  square  iron  as  large  as  i"  square. 


77 


Carpenter's 


SPECIFICATION  of  the  labor  and  material  to  be  furnished  in  the  erection 
of  a  frame  house  to  be  constructed  for  Mr. 
at 

in  accordance  with  the  accompanying  drawings  and  this  specification  and  under 
the  supervision  of 

Architect, 

\ address  j- 
|  date  \ 


General 
Conditions. 

Cutting. 


Demolition  of 
Old  Buildings. 

Disposition  of 
flaterials. 

Ownership. 


{ For  General  Conditions  see  page  2. } 

The  Carpenter  shall  do  all  cutting  of  timber  and  wood  work  required  by  the 
other  contractors  to  properly  carry  out  their  work,  but  he  shall  not  do  any  cutting 
which  may  weaken  the  work,  without  the  consent  of  the  Architect. 

• 

The  Contractor  is  to  carefully  remove  all  [sash,  glass,  frames,  doors  and  other 
wood  work\  from  the  old  buildings  at  present  on  the  site. 
|  See  page  8.} 

|  See  page  8.  j 


Bridge  and 
Platform. 

Shoring 

of  Excavation. 


{See  page  8. J 


{See  page  12. 


79 


Timber.  All  timber,  except  where  otherwise  particularly  specified,  is  to  be  as  follow.-.  : 

Girders:     '(6"  x  10")  yellow  pine. 
Sills  :     (6"  x  6"). 

The  underside  of  the  sills  and  the  ends  of  the  girders  are  to  be  painted  two  coats  of  Atlantic 
white  lead  and  linseed  oil  before  being  set  in  place. 

Sleepers  :  'round,  (6")  in  diameter,  of  chestnut,  set  (20")  on  centres. 

Sleepers  :     ]See  under  heading  "  Floors."  [ 

Basement  joist  (2    x  10"),  set  16"  on  centres. 

First  floor  joist  3(2"  x  12"),  set  16"  on  centres. 

j  Other  floor  joist. } 

Ceiling  beams  (2"  x  6"),  set  16"  on  centres. 

Cellar  beams  (i "  x  10")  placed  on  each  pair  of  rafters. 

Headers  and  trimmers  (4")  x  the  depth  of  the  beams. 

Posts  [under  girders,  etc.,]  4(8"  x  8")  of  yellow  pi ne. 

Posts  [4"  x  8"  in  size  with  a  2"  x  4"  spiked  on  the  side,  extending  in  one  piece 

from  the  sill  to  plate,  are  to  be  placed  at  all   corners  and  angles  and   at 

the  ends  of  all  main  partitions.] 
Braces  :     (4    x  4 ")  slong  braces  having  a  run  of  not  less  than  6'  are  to  be  set  at  all 

corners  of  the  frame  in  each  story,  and  are  to  be  framed  into  the  timber 

at  each  end  and  pinned. 
Plates  and  Ties  :     (4 '  x  6"). 
Girts  :     (4"  x  8"). 

Wall  6plates :     (4"  x  8"),  anchored  to  the  wall  with  bolts  built  in  by  the  Mason 
Ledger  7boards :     (i "  x  6 ")  notched  i"  into  the  studs  and  posts  and  well  spiked. 
Studs  :  outside,  (2"  x  4")  hemlock  set  (16")  on  centres. 
j  Inside  and  bearing  partition  studs.  { 
Door  and  window  studs,  both  in  outside  walls  and  partitions,  are  to  be  formed  of 

(two  2"  x  4"s)  from  the  floor  to  the  head,  hemlock, 
Door  and  window  heads :    ordinary  (4"  x  4"),  hemlock. 

Over  the  \ specify  where [  8door  heads  frame  a  (4    x  12")  timber. 
Partition  plates  and  sills :   "(3"  x  4"). 
{Specify  any  special  girders,  trusses  over  wide  openings,  etc.) 


'The  usual  formulae  for  ascertaining  the  transverse  strength  of  rectangular  section  wooden 
beams  supported  at  both  ends  are  as  follows: 
Rupture : 
For  a  safe,  uniformly  distributed  load 

Breadth  in  inches  x  sq  uare  of  depth  in  inches  x  constant  x  2 

Safe  distributed  load  m  pounds= -=—  r 

Span  in  feet  x  factor  of  safety. 

In  which  the  constants  are  usually  (and  in  the  New  York  Building  Law  are  required  to  be) 
as  follows:  Hemlock,  400;  White  Pine,  450;  Spruce,  450;  Pitch  or  Georgia  Pine,  550;  American 
Oak,  550  pounds. 

The  factor  of  safety  is  usually  from  4  to  10.     The  New  York  Building  Law  requires  4. 
EXAMPLE. 

Find  the  safe  dfstributtd\oa.A  of  a  6"  x  10"  Georgia  Pine  girder  20'  in  clear  span,  with  a  factor  of  safety  of  8 

SOLUTION  (by  formula): 

6  x  100  x  550  x  2     . 

20x8 

4125  pounds  is  therefore  the  safe  distributed  load  for  such  a  beam.     From  this  deduct  the  weight  of  the  beam, 
to  find  the  safe  neat  load.     For  table  of  Weights  see  page  65. 

For  a  safe  concentrated  load 

Safe  distributed  load  x  distance  in  feet  from  load  to  farther  bearing. 
Safe  concentrated  load=—  — : — -e — 

Span  in  feet. 
EXAMPLE. 

Find  the  safe  concentrated  load  placed  5'  from  one  end.  on  the  same  girder. 
SOLUTION  (by  formula): 

«"^-»_aOM  pounds. 

For  a  concentrated  load  at  the  center  the  first  formula  may  be  used  alone  by  omitting  the 
factor  2  above  the  line. 

For  a  cylindrical  beam  use  the  same  formulae  taking  the  diameter  for  the  breadth  and  depth, 
and  multiply  the  result  by  .6.  • 

Deflection  : 

With  a  safe  load  a  beam  may  bend  too  much.  In  practice  a  deflection  of  -fa"  per  foot  is 
usually  regarded  as  the  allowable  maximum.  Thus  a  beam  15'  in  length  should  not  bend 
more  than  15  x  -fa"  or  %". 

Formula  for  deflection 

Equivalent  of  centre  load  in  pounds  x  cube  of  span  in  feet  x  constant. 

Deflection  in  inches = — =- r-r-. — : — — ; -=—, .    .     . — - 

Breadth  in  inches  x  cube  of  depth  in  inches. 

In  which  the  "  Equivalent  of  Centre  load  "  is 

Centre  load  -+-  (weight  of  beam  x  .  G25). 
or 

(Distributed  load  -|-  weight  of  beam)  x  .02-5. 
And  in  which  the  constant  for  white  or  yellow  pine,  spruce,  oak  or  hemlock  is  usually  .  00032. 

-For  a  basement  or  similar  floor  over  concrete,  round  sleepers  are  often  bedded  in  the  cement 
on  which  to  lay  a  wood  floor.  These  sleepers  are  usually  of  chestnut,  but  locust  is  better 
although  scarce  and  expensive.  A  better  way  probably  to  form  such  a  floor  is  to  lay  4"  x  6" 
sleepers  over  the  concrete.  In  some  cases  these  sleepers  are  placed  about  20'  apart  and  the 
floor  is  nailed  directly  to  them.  In  other  cases  they  are  placed  about  8'  apart  and  joist  are  laid 
over  them  for  the  floor.  For  sleepers  for  fire-proof  floors,  see  under  heading  "  Floors. " 

'The  New  York  Building  Law  permits  no  floor  beams  less  than  3"  thick. 

JA  formula  for  ascertaining  the  safe  load  for  rectangular  wooden  posts  with  their  ends 
firmly  fixed  and  equally  loaded,  is  as  follows  : 

Area  of  section  in  square  inches  x  constant 
Safe  load  in  pounds=  —  — ^-j —    .    . — : — = • 

/square  of  length  in  inches      \  ,,      ,  , 

fl  -f  I  -  —TT      —53— — —      -  I  x  .004]  x  factor  of  safety. 

Vsquare  of  least  side  in  inches/ 

In  which  the  constants  are  usually:  American  Oak,  6,000;  Pitch  or  Georgia  Pine,  5,000; 
White  Pine  or  Spruce,  3,500  pounds. 

And  in  which  the  factor  of  safety  usually  is  from  5  to  8.  The  New  York  Building  Law 
requires  5. 

If  posts  are  sufficiently  supported  against  yielding  sideways,  the  length  is  taken  between 
such  supports.  For  a  cylindrical  column  take  .6  of  the  result  given  by  the  formula,  using  the 
diameter  for  the  "least  side." 

'The  frame  is  usually  braced  in  this  manner  when  the  sheathing  is  not  put  on  diagonally. 

6These  wall  plates  are  for  a  stone  or  brick  building. 

^Ledger  boards  are  used  only  for  a  baloon  frame. 

"Sometimes  instead  of  trussing  over  the  wide  openings  a  heavy  timber  is  put  in  as  a  plate. 
This  is  perhaps  better  than  the  ordinary  trussing  and  unless  the  trussing  is  carried  by  means  of 
braces  to  the  floor. 

'Partition  sills  for  a  4"  stud  partition  are  often  3"  x  5%"  to  provide  a  better  nailing  for  the  base. 

81 


Rafters:     Hips,    (2"  x  9");   Valleys,   (3"  x  9");     Ridge,   (Txg");     Intermediates, 

(2"  x  8")  placed  (24")  on  centres. 
Purlins:     (6"  x  8")  yellow  pine. 
Deck  plates  :     (3"  x  9"). 
Trusses. 

The  trusses  are  to  be  constructed  of  yellow  pine  timber  and  framed  together  as 
shown  on  the  drawings.  The  principal  rafters  are  to  be  (8"  x  10"),  struts  (8"  x  8")  and 
tie  beams  (8"  x  8").  The  keys  are  to  be  of  white  oak  cut  so  that  the  fibres  shall  run 
parallel  with  the  tie  beams.  Furnish  and  pxit  in  the  iron  bolts  and  rods  in  size  as 
shown  and  with  proper  washers  and  nuts.  The  rods  are  to  have  expansion  clips. 


The  Piazza  and  Porch  timber  is  to  be  as  follows  : 
Girders,  (4"  x  i  o" )  yellow  pine. 
Sills  and  Cross  sills,  (4"  x  8"). 

Floor  beams  (2"  x  8"),  cut  in  between,  and  set  (20")  on  centres. 
Ceiling  'beams,  (2"  x  6"),  set  (20")  on  centres. 
Rafters,  (2"  x  6"),  set  (20")  on  centres. 
Hips  and  Valleys,  (3"  x  8"). 
Plates,  |  (6"  x  io")|  or  [size  as  shown  on  the  detail  drawings]  hemlock. 


Furnish  and  put  in  any  other  timber  required  to  fully  carry  out  the  work  in  a 
proper  manner.  All  of  the  timber,  except  as  otherwise  specified,  is  to  be  of  spruce. 
All  timber  is  to  be  sound,  well  seasoned,  and  free  from  any  imperfections 
materially  imparing  its  durability  or  strength,  and  is  to  be  set  with  the  crowning 
edge  up. 


Framing.  The  Carpenter  shall  level  and  measure  all  walls,  before  framing  and   report 

any  deviation  from  the  drawings  to  the  Architect.  He  shall  exercise  care  in  fram- 
ing so  that  important  timbers  will  not  require  cutting  for  pipes,  chimneys,  etc. 
All  framing  must  be  kept  2"  from*the  outside  of  the  chimneys,  and  in  no  case  will 
the  timber  be  allowed  to  rest  on  the  chimneys. 


82 


Ceiling  beams  are  needed  where  a  piazza,  ceiling  is  to  be  formed  level. 


Sizing. 

Firecut. 
Beam  Anchors. 


sills,  etc.  The   sills  and   plates  are  to  be  halved  at  the  corners  and  spliced  with  a  scarf 

joint. 
Ties.  The  ties  are  to  be  mortised  and  tenoned  into  the  posts  and  pinned  with   hard 

wood  pins. 

Floor  Beams.  Double  the   floor  beams   under  all  partitions  running  the   same   way.     All 

beams  are  to  rest  at  least  (4")  on  the  walls  and  [girders]  or  [are  to  be  framed  into 
the  girders  with  a  tusk  and  tenon]  or  [are  to  be  notched  4"  on  the  hanging  strip 
at  the  girders.] 

All  girders  and  beams  must  be  [sized  to  their  bearings  and  not  wedged  up] 
or  [wedged  up  with  slate  chips.] 

All  beams  and  girders  entering  masonry  walls  are  to  have  a  '(4")  firecut. 
The  beams  running  parallel  to  the  walls  are  to  be  anchored  every  (6')  and 
every  fourth  beam  is  to  be  anchored  to  the  side  walls  with  wrought  iron  anchors 
built  in  by  the  "mason.  The  same  beams  where  they  cross  the  girders  are  to  be 
tied  together  [with  (i£"  x  f"  x  24")  wrought  iron  straps]  or  [by  lapping  12"  well 
(spiked)  or  (boltedj].  All  these  anchors  and  straps  are  to  be  spiked  to  the  beams. 

Each  tier  of  beams,  front  and  rear,  opposite  each  pier  shall  have  [i"  x  4"  hardwood  or 
Georgia  pine  3anchor  strips,  dovetailed  into  the  beams  diagonally.  These  strips  shall  cover  at 
least  four  beams  and  are  not  to  be  let  in  within  4'  of  the  centre  of  the  beams]  or  [wooden  strips 
nailed  on  top  of  the  beams  and  kept  in  place  until  the  floors  are  laid.] 

Frame  headers  and  trimmers  with  tusk  and  tenon  for  all  stair,  hearth  and 
other  openings  [and  frame  with  headers  and  trimmers  over  all  openings  in  the 
cellar  walls  and  8"  away  from  the  inside  of  all  flues.] 

All  headers  over  4(i 5')  in   span   are   to  have  a  (i")  wrought  iron  flitch  plate 
of  the  depth  of  the  beams  inserted  between  the  two  beams  and  bolted  to  them  with 
f"  bolts,  1 8"  apart,  placed  alternately  2"  from  the  top  and  bottom  with  a  washer  at 
each  end. 
stirrups.  All  headers  over  5(8')  in  span  are  to  be  hung  in  (f"  x  3")  wrought  iron  stirrup 

irons. 
Roof.  The  rafters  are  to  be  doubled  at  all  roof  openings  and  where  practicable  studs 

are  to  be  carried  up  to  support  the  roofs. 

straps.  The  hips  and  valleys  are  to  be  strapped  to  the  ridge  and  to  each  other  with 

(i£"  x  f"  x  24")  wrought  iron  straps. 


Headers  and  Trimmers. 


Flitch  Plates. 


.  84 


'The  New  York  Building  Law  requires  a  3"  firecut  for  beams  built  into  a  wall. 
"These  anchors  are  usually  put  in  the  Mason's  Specifications,  see  page  44. 
'These  anchor  strips  are  required  by  the  New  York  building  law. 

*The  New  York  Building  Law  requires  all  headers  over  15'  in  span  to  be  formed  with  flitch 
plates  or  of  wrought  iron  or  steel  beams. 

'The  New  York  Building  Law  requires  all  headers  over  4'  in  span  to  be  hung  with  stirrup  irons. 


Partitions.  Set  the  partitions  as  shown  on  the  plans  [with  2"  x  4"  hemlock  studs,  set  16" 

on  centres]  straight  and  plumb.  Partitions  directly  over  walls  or  girders  in  the 
cellar  or  partition  plates  below  are  to  be  run  down  to  them  and  are  not  to  rest  on 
the  floors.  All  others  are  to  have  sills,  and  all  partitions  are  to  have  plates  in  size 
as  before  specified.  Truss  over  all  openings  exceeding  (4')  in  span  and  strongly 
truss  all  partitions  not  supported  from  below  to  take  the  weight  off  from  the  centre 
of  the  beams.  Form  all  corners  and  angles  solid  by  spiking  two  studs  together. 
All  round  corners  are  to  be  furred  for  horizontal  lathing.  Line  the  sliding  door 
pockets  with  ($•"  x  4^")  tongued  and  grooved  boards  painted  both  sides  before 
being  put  on. 

{Specify  any  special  bracing  or  trussing  in  partitions.} 


Bridging.  Bridge  all  floor  beams  with  one  row  of  (2"  x  4")  cross  bridging  to  each  span  of 

beams  exceeding  (8')  and  two  rows  to  all  spans  exceeding  (16'),  properly  cut  in 
and  nailed  at  each  end  with  two  8d.  nails.  Bridge  all  [outside  walls  and  'partitions 
in  first  story]  once  in  their  height  with  (2"  x  4")  hemlock  cut  [diagonally]  or 
[horizontally]  and  nailed  at  each  end  with  two  lod.  nails. 


Lintels, 
Arches,  etc. 


Provide  all  brick  or  stone  openings  with  rough  wood  lintels  not  less  than  (5") 
thick  and  resting  at  least  3"  on  the  wall.  Make  and  set  all  forms  for  arches  and 
also  any  templates  required.  Furnish  all  bond  timber  and  wood  brick  for  insertion 
in  the  walls  as  necessary. 


Sheathing. 


Cover  the  entire  frame  [except  on  such  roofs  as  are  to  be  shingled]  with 
(|"x  10")  3[rebated]  or  [tongued  and  grooved]  hemlock  sheathing,  surfaced  one  side 
to  an  even  thickness,  put  on  '[diagonally]  or  [horizontally]  and  nailed  to  every 
bearing  with  two  8d.  nails. 

Cover  over  the  sheathing  [except  roofs]  with  H.  W.  Johns  'medium  weight 
Asbestos  Building  Felt  laid  with  not  less  than  2"  lap.  Line  with  the  same  felt 
under  all  corner  boards,  casings,  etc. 

86 


'Partitions  over  10'  high  are  usually  bridged. 

"Tongued  and  grooved  hemlock  sheathing  put  on  costs  about  $5.00  per  M.  more  than  square 
jointed.  Rebated  sheathing,  which  is  probably  better  than  tongued  and  grooved,  costs  about 
$1.25  per  M.  more  than  square  jointed. 

*If  the  sheathing  is  put  on  horizontally,  the  frame  should  be  braced. 

*This  building  felt  is  made  in  three  thicknesses:  thin,  6  Ibs. ;  medium,  10  Ibs.,  and  heavy,  14 
Ibs.  per  100  square  feet. 


Roofs. 

Shingle. 


Slate. 


Asphalt. 


Ridge   Roll. 

Crestings  and  Finlals. 

Flashing. 

Roof. 


Aprons. 


Counter  Plashing. 


Other  Flashing. 


Cover  the  l  roofs  where  marked  shingle,  with  XXXX  sawed  pine  shingles,  (18") 
long,  laid  (sX")  to  the  weather,  with  narrow  open  valleys  and  with  a  capping 
course,  [commonly  known  as  the  Boston  hip]  run  up  the  hips  over  the  other  shingle. 
All  roof  shingle  are  to  be  laid  on  i"  x  2"  spruce  'lath,  and  all  shingle  over  3"  wide 
are  to  have  at  least  two  nails.  [All  shingle  are  to  be  dipped  by  the  Painter  before 
being  put  on.] 

Cover  the  roof  where  marked  slate  on  the  drawings,  with  best  No.  i  North  Bangor  roofing 
slate  3(8"  x  16")  in  size,  laid  with  a  lap  of  (3")  of  the  third  over  the  first,  each  slate  drilled  and  trimmed 
and  nailed  with  two  nails.  The  slate  at  the  hips,  valleys,  etc. ,  are  to  be  cut  so  that  their  bond  will 
be  uniform  with  the  rest.  All  hips  are  to  be  mitred  and  put  together  in  slaters'  cement.  The 
top  ends  of  all  upper  courses  tinder  the  ridge  coverings  are  to  be  bedded  in  slaters'  cement. 
Cover  the  roofs  under  the  slates  with  No.  2  Carbolized  tarred  roofing  felt,  lapped  2"  and  tacked. 

Cover  the  roof  with  two  thicknesses  of  Warren's  Composite  roofing  felt,  laying  the  felt  with 
the  manilla  paper  side  down,  and  securing  it  with  nails  through  tin  discs  about  two  and  one-half 
feet  apart.  Mop  between  the  layers  of  felt  thus  laid,  and  over  its  entire  surface,  a  coating  of 
Warren's  Anchor  Brand  natural  asphalt  roofing  cement.  L,ay  into  this  cement,  as  a  cap  sheet,  one 
thickness  of  Warren' s  Anchor  Brand  natural  asphalt  roofing  felt,  securing  same  at  the  upper  edges 
by  nails  through  tin  discs  about  two  feet  apart,  and  lapping  each  successive  sheet  one  inch  over  the 
preceding  one.  Over  the  entire  surface  of  the  felt  thus  laid,  spread  an  even  coating  of  fa&  Anchor 
Brand  cement,  and  cover  the  same  immediately  in  the  usual  way  with  a  sufficient  body  of  well- 
screened  dry  gravel.  If  the  roofing  is  laid  in  cold  weather  the  gravel  is  to  be  warmed 

Put  up  2"  galvanized  iron  ridge  rolls  furnished  by  the  tinner  at  all  ridges  of 
the  roof. 

Furnish  and  set  {specify  where}  galvanised  iron  cresting  and  finials  {describe}. 

Furnish  material  for  and  put  on  the  following  ''flashing  : 

Flash  as  required  around  all  scuttles,  skylights,  dormers,  and  masonry  coming 
in  connection  with  the  roof,  with  \_N.  &  G.  Taylor  Co  ^s  Old  Style  brand,  IX 
thickness  extra  coated  tin,  painted  both  sides]  or  [3  lb.  sheet  lead]  or  [16  oz.  cop- 
per] 5"  in  width,  turned  up  2^2". 

Put  on  aprons  of  the  same  material  10"  wide  at  the  top  end  of  lower  sections 
of  roof  coming  against  walls  or  roofs  of  a  different  pitch. 

Counter  flash  against  all  masonry  coming  in  connection  with  the  roof,  with 
\_N.  &  G.  Taylor  CoSs  Old  Style  brand,  IX  thickness,  extra  coated  tin,  painted 
both  sides]  or  [3  lb.  sheet  lead]  or  [16  oz.  copper]  worked  2"  into  the  joints  of  the 
masonry,  cemented  in  with  slaters'  cement,  and  brought  down  to  within  y2"  of  the 
slate.  Such  flashing  is  to  be  stepped  on  the  rakes. 

Flash  over  and  at  the  sides  of  all  window,  frames  with  N.  &  G.  Taylor  Cols 
Old  Style  brand  IX  thickness  extra  coated  tin,  painted  both  sides,  furnished  by 
tinner.  Run  the  flashing  2"  under  the  clapboards. 


88 


'Roofs  less  than  15°  in  pitch  or  less  than  n"  run  to  4"  rise,  should  not  be  shingled,  and 
roofs  less  than  30°  pitch,  or  less  than  12"  run  to  8"  rise  should  not  be  shingled  over  a  plastered 
ceiling. 

"Roof  shingle  are  usually  laid  over  lath  placed  the  proper  distance  apart  for  nailing,  rather 
than  over  boards. 

'The  following  table  gives  the  regular  sizes  of  most  slates  with  the  usual  exposure  and  the 
number  required  to  lay  a  square  for  each  size. 

Exposed        No.  in 

No.  i  Slate.     No.  i  Ribb.     laid  3"  lap.     square. 
24  x  14  io£"  98 

24  x  12  24  x  12  I0i'  114 

22  X  12         22  X  12  g\"         126 

22  X  II         22  X  II  9-J-"         138 

20  X  12  8£"         142 

20  x  10  20  x  10  8V  170 

18  x  12  7!"  160 

18  x  10  18  x  10  ;•£"  192 

18  x  9  18  x  9  7^"  214 

16  x  10  16  x  10  6-£"  222 

16  x  8  16  x  8  6£"  277 

14  x  10  14  x  10  5^"  262 

14x8  14x8  5^"  328 

'4  *  7  Si"  375 

12x8  4^"  400 

12  x  7  4|"  457 

12  x  6  4f  534 

4In  shingle  roofing  it  is  usual  for  the  roofer  to  do  all  flashing,  except  counter  flashing  and  the 
material  is  ordinarily  furnished  by  the  tinner.  In  slate  roofing  the  roofer  usually  furnishes  mate- 
rial for  and  does  all  flashing,  including  counter  flashing.  In  either  case,  the  tinner  usually  puts  in 
the  valleys  and  gutters. 


89 


Scuttle.  Construct  a  scuttle  door  where  shown,  (2-6"  x  4)  in  size,  with  a  rebated  joint 

to  render  it  weather  tight.  Cover  the  door  with  Taylor 's  Old  Style  tin,  and  flash 
properly  around  the  upper  sides  of  the  frame  and  on  the  roof.  Construct  a  door 
in  the  ceiling  (2-6"  x  4')  in  size,  [made  of  (-£"  x  2^")  beaded,  tongued  and  grooved 
yellow  pine  with  battens  screwed  on]  or  [panelled]. 

{Hardware:     Hooks  or  Bolts.    Hinges.    See  Hardware  List.} 

Construct  a  rough  boarded  footway  2'  wide  on  the  attic  ceiling  beams  from 
the  ceiling  door  to  the  scuttle.  Construct  a  stepladder  with  $"  x  4"  surfaced  pine 
treads  and  strings.  The  treads  are  to  be  housed  into  the  strings  i". 


Skylights.  [Construct  the  skylights  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  (3'-6"  x  6')  in  size,  with 

l£"  X  l£"  rebated  wood  bars  and  lights  (10")  wide]  or  j  Specify  galvanized  iron  skylights,  j 

Glaze  the  skylight  with  ribbed  glass  TV  thick.  Box  down  to  the  ceiling  with 
($"  x  2$'")  beaded  first  quality  North  Carolina  pine. 

Place  a  sash  in  the  ceiling  if"  thick,  glazed  with  [stained  glass  furnished  by 
the  Owner}  or  [tinted  ribbed  glass,  etc.]  Make  a  door  in  the  side  of  the  enclosed 
space  above  the  ceiling  to  get  at  the  sash  for  cleaning. 


Side  and   Gable 
Shingle. 


All  the  shingle  on  the  sides  and  in  gables  are  to  be  of  pine  of  Uniform  width, 
^smooth  on  the  face,  cut  where  shown,  and  laid  3(si")  to  the  weather. 

These  shingles  are  to  be  dipped  by  the  Painter  before  being  put  on. 


Siding.  Cover  the  frame  where  so  marked  on  the  drawings  with  the  best  ''clear  white 

pine  clapboards,  (6")  wide,  laid  with  a  ii"  lap  and  well  nailed  to  every  bearing  with 
6d.  nails  set  in  for  puttying. 

[The  clapboards  are  to  be  mitred  on. the  corners.] 
[Block  solid  with  a  bevelled  piece  back  of  all  butt  joints.] 
[In  panels  12"  long  and  under,  no  butt  joints  will  be  allowed.] 
No  butt  joints  are  to  come  over  window  openings  in  the  first  course  above 
such  openings. 

9° 


'Cut  shingle  should  be  uniform  in  width. 
'Rough  shingle  are  sometimes  used  for  staining. 
'Shingle  on  side  walls  are  often  laid  as  much  as  6£"  to  the  weather. 

'The  ordinary  grades  of  clapboards  and  novelty  siding  are  Clear,  No.  i  and  No.  2.     The  dif- 
ference in  price  is  about  $2.00  per  M  between  each. 


Outside    Finish.  All  outside  finishing  work  is  to  be  as  shown  on  the  scale  and  detail  drawings. 

Quality  of  Material.  All  mouldings  and  lumber  of  outside  finishing  work  [except  as  otherwise 

specified]  are  to  be  of  well  seasoned  white  pine,  free  from  'sap,  shakes  and  large  or 
black  knots.  The  Carpenter  must  call  on  the  Painter  to  prime  all  finished  work 
before  or  immediately  after  putting  it  up. 


Cornices. 


Open  Cornice. 

Gutter  on  Roof. 

Raking  Cornice. 
Verge  Boards. 


Form  the  cornice  with  (i"  x  3")  crown  mould,  ($"  x  2")  facia,  (i"  x  2^")  bed 
mould,  I-J"  frieze,  j  dentils,  carved  mouldings,  brackets,  frieze  ornaments,  etc.  | 

Support  the  cornice  with  (ij")  rough  brackets  placed  (2')  on  centres,  and 
form  the  gutters  in  the  cornice  and  line  with  £"  surfaced  boards  graded  to  the 
points  indicated  for  the  leaders. 

Place  (i£"  x  f")  iron  straps  (6')  apart  from  the  roof  to  the  outer  edge  of  the 
gutters. 

Form  the  open  cornice  on  dressed  rafter  feet  (2"  x  6")  in  size  sawed  as  shown  and  spiked  to 
the  rafters  at  the  plate  with  soffits  formed  by  laying  [£•"  x  2^"  beaded  white  pine]  face  down  on 
the  rafters. 

Form  the  gutters  on  the  roof  with  (i-J-"  x  4")  strips  set  on  .edge  and  nailed  to  the  roof.  Put 
up  (i£"  x  3"  x  5")  sawed  pine  brackets  set  3'  apart. 

Form  the  raking  cornice  with  [i"  x  3"  crown  mould]  {facia,  bed  mould,  etc.} 

Finish  the  gable  ends  with  (i"  x  10")  verge  boards  placed  (12")  from  the  wall  with  {brackets, 
plancier,  bed  mould,  carving,  scroll  sawing,  etc.  • 

{ Specify  any  special  gable  finish.    Panels,  Carving,  etc. ! 


Open  Timber  Work.  Form  the  open  timber  work  with  "(2"  x  4")  pine  ribs.     The  horizontal  ribs  are 

to  be  bevelled  on  the  top  edge.     All  the  ribs  are  to  be  nailed  on  over  the  sheath- 
ing, and  are  to  have  a  moulding  on  the  edges  to.cover  the  plaster  joint. 


Lattice  Work. 


{See  under  Piazzas,  page  94.} 


Water  Table. 


Corner  Boards  and 
Belts. 


The  water  table  is  to  be  (i-J-"  x  8")  and  is  to  have  a  (i-J"  x  2^-")  cap  with 
tongue.  Run  a  (i"  x  i|-")  moulding  under  the  cap. 

The  corner  boards  are  to  be  (ii"  x  3").  The  belts  are  to  be  (:£"  x  4")  and 
are  to  have  a  (i£"  x  2^")  cap  with  tongue.  Run  a  (i"  x  i£")  moulding  under 
the  cap. 


Other  Outside  Finish. 


j  Specify  any  special  outside  finish,  Pilasters,  Architraves,  etc.  j 

92 


'In  cheap  work  larger  red  knots  and  very  small  black  knots  might  be  admissible,  but  sappy  or 
shaky  lumber' should  never  be  used. 

'Outside  furring,  lathing  and  plastering  is  about  i-J"  thick.     For  outside  plastering,  see  page  50. 


93 


Wood  Carving. 


Composition 
Work. 


Furnish  and  put  up  all  carved  work  shown  on  the  drawings.  This  work  must 
be  executed  by  a  skilled  carver  in  strict  accordance  with  the  detail  drawings. 
Where  carved  panels  and  ornaments  are  shown,  they  must  be  carved  from  the 
solid  and  not  sawed  out  or  planted  on.  [Before  any  carving  is  done,  the  Con- 
tractor must  submit  a  full  sized  plaster  model  to  the  Architect  for  approval.] 

Furnish  and  put  up  the  ornamental  composition  work  as  shown  on  the  draw- 
ings [including  capitols,  brackets,  etc.]  This  work  must  be  executed  by  a  skilled 
modeller  in  the  best  manner  and  in  strict  accordance  with  the  details  for  the  same. 


Piazzas,  etc. 


Floors. 


Steps. 


Floor  Gutters. 


Ceiling. 


Lattice. 


Columns  or  Posts. 


Balusters. 


Rails. 


The  porches,  piazzas  and  balconies  are  to  be  as  shown  on  the  scale  and  detail 
drawings  and  are  to  be  well  secured  in  position.  The  short  posts  are  to  be  secured 
to  the  floor  with  1iron  braces. 

Lay  the  floors  with  (i-J"  x  3")  2tongued  and  grooved  ze>^z'te  pine,  blind  nailed  to 
every  bearing  with  8d.  nails  and  the  joints  run  in  white  lead. 

Construct  the  steps  with  ij-"  treads  and  £"  risers.  The  edges  of  the  treads 
and  floor  are  to  have  a  nosing  and  cove.  The  nosing  on  the  ends  of  the  floor 
must  be  worked  on  the  solid. 

[Run  a  i-J"  x  2^"  strip  around  the  outside  edge  of  the  floor,  with  a  groove 
worked  in  and  graded  for  a  3gutter  and  with  holes  bored  through  to  let  out  the 
water.] 

Form  the  ceiling  level  with  ($•"  x  2-J-")  tongued,  grooved  and  beaded  clear 
North  Carolina  pine. 

Fill  in  with  [diagonal]  or  [square]  lattice  work  between  the  piers  under 
front  piazza.  The  lattice  strips  are  to  be  (£"  x  i-J-")  in  size  with  (i-J-")  openings. 
The  frame  is  to  be  -J-"  thick  ;  bottom  rail  7"  high  and  stiles  and  top  rail  4"  wide. 

The  columns  are  to  be  [turned  with  shafts  (12")  in  diameter  and  fluted.  In 
fluting  the  columns,  the  flutings  are  to  diminish,  leaving  the  fillets  the  same 
width  throughout  their  length.  The  bases  of  the  columns  are  to  be  moulded 
and  the  caps  carvedJ] 

The  balusters  are  to  be  [i-J-"  turned  and  set  3^"  on  centres]  or  [square, 
$"  x  i-J-",  set  i"  apart.] 

The  top  rail  is  to  be  built  up  and  moulded  and  the  bottom  rail  is  to  be  (2"  x  3") 
solid  and  bevelled. 


94 


'In  cases  where  the  posts  are  made  hollow,  they  are  usually  secured  by  means  of  a  wood  piece 
extending  down  into  the  sill  through  the  floor  and  up  inside  of  the  post,  instead  of  with  iron  braces. 

"The  piazza  floors  are  sometimes  formed  of  i^"  x  3"  strips,  not  tongued  and  grooved,  laid  %' 
apart  and  painted  on  the  edges  and  underside  before  they  are  put  down.  This  makes  a  better 
floor,  but  costs  more  and  is  objectionable  on  account  of  its  appearance.  Steps  are  sometimes  made 
in  the  same  way,  using  4"  strips  for  a  ia£"  tread.  This  prevents  their  warping  and  holding  water. 

'This  gutter  is  usually  necessary  where  a  wall  is  carried  up  above  the  piazza  floor. 


95 


Balconies. 


The  balcony  top  rail  is  to  be  built  up  and  moulded  and  the  bottom  rail  is 
to  be  solid  in  the  same  manner  as  for  piazza.  The  posts  are  to  be  built  up 
with  turnings  on  top  and  are  to  be  secured  by  means  of  [pieces  running  up 
from  the  plate  inside  of  the  posts,  which  pieces  must  be  put  ip  before  the  tinning 
is  done.]  The  balusters  are  to  be  (•§•"  x  i^')  square,  set  3'  on  centres.  The  floor  of 
the  balcony  will  be  covered  with  tin  by  the  tinner.  Over  the  tin  floor  construct  a 
slat  floor  of  (ii"  x  2")  white  pine  slats  laid  £"  apart  and  made  level  on  top  and 
movable  in  convenient  sections. 

{ Specify  any  balconies  constructed  in  a  different  manner. } 


Porte-Cochere. 


Cellar 
Hatchway-. 


Construct  a  strong  frame,  bolt  the  same  to  the  stone  coping,  and  ceil  up  the 
sides  with  (-&"  x  2-J-")  tongued  and  grooved  beaded  white  pine.  Construct  double 
doors  of  (i"  x  6")  matched  pine  boards  secured  with  two  i"  x  6"  bevelled  cross 
battens  screwed  on  the  underside.  The  joints  are  to  be  battened  and  the  hatch- 
way rendered  water  tight.  Form  a  drip  at  the  top  and  project  the  doors  i"  at  the 
bottom  over  the  frame.  Hang  the  doors  with  two  heavy  wrought-iron  strap 
hinges  to  each  and  provide  with  suitable  handles  and  a  pivoted  hardwood  bar  fast- 
ening. The  door  at  the  foot  of  the  steps  is  to  be  [formed  of  two  thicknesses  of 
i"  x  2-J-"  tongued  and  grooved  white  pine  run  diagonally,  one  side  crossing  the 
other,]  or  [a  batten  door  the  same  as  the  outside  doors]  or  [a  panelled  door  the 
same  as  the  other  cellar  doors.]  Hang  with  three  heavy  wrought-iron  strap 
hinges  and  secure  with  [an  iron  bar  and  two  wrought-iron  holdfasts  screwed  to 
the  frame  on  the  inside]  or  [a  suitable  lock.]  Furnish  and  put  on  a  handle  with 
a  thumb  latch. 


Steps. 


Construct  the  'steps  of  2"  mill  dressed  plank  strings  and  treads.  .  The  treads 
are  to  be  housed  into  the  strings  i". 


Louvre 
Boarding. 


Construct  the  louvre  boarding  in  the  ventilator  of  (ii"  x  9")  surfaced  pine, 
placed  2"  apart  and  at  an  angle  of  60°. 


96 


'Stone  steps  for  this  are  specified  under  heading  "  Cellar  Area,"  page  26. 


»7 


Window  and 
Door  Frames. 


Make  all  window  and  door  frames  in  accordance  with  the  scale  i:-d  detail 
drawings. 

All  window  frames,  unless  otherwise  shown,  are  to  be  made  for  double 
hanging  the  sashes,  using  the  Bolles  Revolving  sash  attachment,  No.  Q  Samson  ^Spot 
cord,  and  the  Queen  overhead  pulleys  with  [brass]  or  [iron]  faces.  Use  lead  weights 
for  all  plate  glass  sash  and  iron  weights  for  all  others.  All  jambs  and  heads  are 
to  be  \y*"  thick  and  all  parting  strips  %''  x  *-£".  [Both  are  to  be  of  clear  yellow 
pine  primed  with  oil  before  being  brougt  to  the  building.] 

The  frames  for  frame  work  are  to  have  2"  sills  and  %'  snbsills.  '( r  V*"  x  2/4") 
moulded  outside  casings  and  (2")  moulded  caps  with  a  tongue  on  top. 

The  frames  for  brickwork  are  to  have  2"  sills,  to  be  boxed,  and  to  have 
%"  back  linings. 

All  frames  for  double  hung  sashes  are  to  have  parting  strips  of  [wood  T\" 
thick  hung  with  wires]  or  [sheet  iron]  placed  between  the  weights. 


Casement.  All   casement,  French   and  stationary  sash   frames  are  to  have   i^"  rebated 

jambs.     The  casement  sashes  are  to  be  hung  at  the  top   and  the  sashes  are  to 
swing  out.       {Hardware:  Arms,  Hooks,  etc.} 

The  stationary  sashes  are  to  be  screwed  in. 


Plank 


Screen  Frames. 


Paneled. 


Box. 


Door  Frames. 


The'f  rames  in  the  cellar  and  the  basement,  except  where  shown  double  hung 
are  to  be  of  (i^"  x  6")  pine,  with  rebated  jatribs  and  with  sash  hung  at  the  top  to 
swing  in  {Hardware}  with  two  iron  hooks  and  staples  and  two  iron  buttons  to  each 
sash,  furnised  by  the  Contractor. 


Construct  screen  frames  for  the  cellar   windows  of 
cover  with  heavy  galvanized  y2"  mesh  wire  screen. 


"  x  2}4")  pine,  and 


The  windows  {specify  where}  are  to  have  two  paneled  doors  below  the  lower  sash,  with  a 
rebated  joint  in  the  centre  and  with  a  tongue  on  the  top  The  lower  sash  is  to  be  grooved  to  fit 
over  the  tongue  and  both  sashes  are  to  slide  up  into  a  box  head. 

The  frames  {specify  where}  are  to  have  box  heads  with  the  jambs  extending  up. 
The  sashes  are  to  slide  into  the  head  with  a  follower. 

All  door  frames  are  to  be  blocked  solid  for  the  hinges  and  locks.  All 
frames  for  masonry  are  to  have  2"  jambs  with  provisions  for  anchoring  the 

98 


'The  Samson  Spot  Cord  is  made  in  the  following  sizes  : 


No 

DIAMETER  IN 
INCHES. 

FEET  PER  lt>. 
(about.) 

SUITABLE  FOR  WEIGHTS 

OF 

6 

i 

TTT 

66 

o  to  10  Ibs. 

7 

A 

55 

10  to  15  Ibs. 

8 

i 

44 

15  to  25  Ibs. 

9 

9 
-£? 

36 

25  to  35  Ibs. 

10 

A 

30 

35  to  45  Ibs. 

12 

3 

- 

21 

over  45  Ibs. 

99. 


Entrance. 


Setting. 


frames  to  the  walls.     All  other  frames  are  to  have  (iJ-O  jambs.      All  door  jambs 
[are  to  be  rebated]  or  [are  to  have  a  Y*"  x  i^"  moulded  stop.] 

The  entrance  is  to  be  of  strictly  clear,  kiln-dried,  quartered  white  oak,  with 
[columns,  pilasters,  carvings,  frieze,  cornice,  panels,  etc.,]  as  shown.  The  jambs 
are  to  be  of  [quartered  white  oak,  i^"  thick,  with  moulded  panels.] 

{Specify  any  other  special  frames.} 

The  Carpenter  is  to  set  all  frames  for  brick  or  stone  walls  and  plumb  them 
from  time  to  time  as  the  work  progresses. 


Temporary 
Enclosing. 


The  Contractor  is  to  temporarily  enclose  the  building  before  the  mason  starts 
plastering,  furnishing  and  hanging  temporary  doors  with  locks,  and  enclosing  the 
windows  with  muslin  or  temporary  sash,  as  required  by  the  season  or  as  directed. 


Furring.  Furr  all  chimney  breasts  [with  2"  x  4"  spruce  studs  set  flatways,  i"  clear  of  the 

brick  work,]  or  [with  i"  x  2"  spruce  strips]  set  16"  on  centres. 

Furr  the  outside  brick  or  stone  walls  in    (specify  where}    with  [2"  x  4"  spruce 
studs    set   flatways]  or  [i"  x  2"   spruce    strips]    placed    vertically,    16"  on    centres, 
straight  and  plumb  and  well  nailed  to  the  walls. 
CeiHng.  Cross  furr  the  ceilings  in  {specify  where}  with  i"  x  2"  spruce  furring  strips  set 

16"  on  centres  and  nailed  to  the  underside  of  every  floor  beam. 
Back  Piaster.  Furr  the  walls  of  {specify  where}  for  back  plastering  by  nailing  i"  x  2"  spruce 

strips  on  the  sides  of  the  studs  for  lathing. 

Coves,  Etc.  Furr  for  a  plaster  cove  in  {mention  rooms}  with  brackets    set  16"  on    centres, 

extending  (10")  on  the  side  walls  and  ceilings. 

Furr   off   for   arches,  cornices,  etc.  [as   shown  on  the  drawings]  or  {describe.} 

Grounds.  Set  'grounds  for  (%"}  plastering  for  all   window  and  door  openings,  wain- 

scoting, bases,  etc.,  before  the  plastering  is  done,  all  grounds  to  be  set  straight  and 
plumb.  All  the  plaster  work  is  to  be  finished  and  dried  before  the  interior  finished 
wood  work  is  brought  to  the  building. 


100 


'For  ordinary  plastering  the  grounds  should  be  $"  for  three  coat  work,  f"  for  two  coat  work 
and  J"  for  laid  on  work.  For  Adamant  plastering  the  grounds  should  be  £ "  for  three  coat  work  and 
f"  for  two  coat  work.  For  King's  Windsor  Cement  the  grounds  should  be  £"  for  three  coat  work 
and  J"  for  two  coat  work. 


roi 


Deafening. 


Mineral  Wool. 
Sawdust  Filling. 


The  spaces  between  the  joists  of  the  floors  in  ,  \ specify  rooms j-  are  to  be 
filled  with  sound  boarding  £"  thick  on  i"  x  2"  cleats  nailed  to  the  centre  of  the 
sides  of  the  joist  for  the  mason  to  cover  with  'pugging.  No  finished  floors  are 

to  be  laid  over  such  pugging  until  it  is  perfectly  dry. 
]  Deafening  for  Walls    See  Purring  for  Back  Plastering.  ( 

Pack  with  mineral  wool    {specify  where. ( 

Fill  in  with  sawdust  around  all  plumbing  pipes  which  run  under  floors,  filling  up  solid 
between  the  beams.  Also  fill  with  sawdust  between  the  beams  {specify  where.} 


Preparation    for  Prepare  the  floors  of  \  specify  where  [  for  tiling  by  nailing  f  boards2  on  cleats 

Tiling.  nailed  to  the  sides  of  the  beams.     The  tops  of  the  boards  are  to  be  (5")  below 

the  top  of  the  adjoining  floor.      Bevel  the  beams  on  both  sides  to  a  point  on 
top. 

Prepare  the  side  walls  of   j  specify  where j-   for  tiling  by  nailing  2"  x  4"  pieces3 
horizontally  between  the  studs,  about   12"  apart,  to  a  height  of  (4'.) 


Floors. 

Sleepers. 


Under  Flooring. 


Place  in  position  on  all  floors  3"  x  4"  mill-planed  spruce  sleepers,  dove-tailed 
in  section.  The  sleepers  are  to  bedded  2"  in  the  cement,  set  i"  above  the  top  of 
the  I  beams,  and  notched  over  the  flanges. 

Lay  an  4under  floor  in  [all  rooms  where  hardwood  or  parquet  floors  are  here- 
inafter specified,]  with  [-§-"  x  6'  hemlock?  tongued  and  grooved]  boards,  surfaced  one 
side  to  an  even  thickness,  [laid  diagonally  on  the  beams]  and  nailed  through  the 
top  to  every  bearing  with  two  8d.  nails. 

Put  suitable  nailing  pieces  at  the  sides  of  the  walls  between  the  joists.  The 
entire  rough  floor  is  to  be  swept  clean,  repaired,  leveled,  and  covered  with  one 
thickness  of  H.  W.  Johns  heavy  weight  asbestos  building  felt  before  the  finished 
floor  is  laid.  The  flooring  must  be  run  closely  around  all  studs  and  up  to  the 
sheathing  outside.  Where  no  rough  flooring  is  used,  this  must  be  done  with  the 
finished  floor. 


Stops  for  Mice. 


Furnish  and  put  down  a  strip  of  'tin  formed  to  a  right  angle,  between  the  studs  of  all  outside 
walls  on  each  floor.  This  tin  is  to  be  well  nailed  to  the  floor  and  the  sheathing  to  prevent  the 
circulation  of  mice.  All  holes  around  the  studs  at  partitions  are  to  be  filled  up  in  the  same 
manner. 


'This  deafening  is  in  the  Mason's  Specification,  page  44. 

JThese  boards  are  to  be  covered  with  brick  set  on  edge  4"  high  between  the  beams,  leaving  i 
for  cement  and  tile.     If  the  brick  are  set  flat,  3"  from  the  top  of  the  beams  to  the  top  of  boarding 
is  sufficient.     See  in  Mason's  Specification,  page  38. 

'These  pieces  are  to  form  a  nailing  for  the  metal  lath.     See  in  Mason's  Specification,  page  38. 

4Where  an  underfloor  is  used  for  part  of  the  rooms  in  a  story,  and  the  ceilings  underneath  are  to 
be  level,  beams  of  i"  less  in  depth  should  be  used  in  such  rooms.  If  this  is  not  done,  the  double 
floor  will  be  higher  than  the  adjoining  single  floor  leaving  the  difference  to  be  made  up  in  the 
saddles. 

'It  is  unnecessary  to  use  tongued  and  grooved  underflooring  if  it  is  to  be  covered  with  paper. 
Rebated  boards  are  sometimes  used  for  this  purpose.  Tongued  and  grooved  flooring  costs  laid 
about  $2.00  and  rebated  about  $1.00  per  M  more  than  plain. 

"For  another  way  of  forming  mice  stops,  see  in  Mason's  Specification,  page  38. 


103 


tJ»^  floor*    ^MwtMy  where'-    with  <        x  21  ;  quartered  -mlutf  oak  flooring 
>i,v;swtUy  on  the  I/earns,  with  a  border  2   wide.    iimnlM(,  to  the  drawing 

Jl  tJm  flooring  i*  to  be  strictly  dear,  thoroughly  seasoned  and  kiln  dried, 
*-A  and  grooved,  blind  nailed  to  every  bearing  with  8d.  nails,   laid  over  a 

h  floor,  and  is  to  be  planed  off,  scraped   and  sand  papered  at  completion 

J^ft  in  a  first  da*s  condition  for  finishing. 

jS^le/A  the  wood  *o  that  flooring  of  the  same  color  wfll  be  pat  in  each 
room  a*  far  as  possible.] 

[All  hard  wood  flooring  is  to  be  painted  on  the  underside  £p  the  Painter 
with  a  coat  of  white  lead  and  oil  before  laying.] 

The  Contractor  shall    cover   all    of   these    finished    floors   with   two  thick 
nr,**v%  of  sheathing  paper,  the  under  thickness  water  proof,  properly  put  down. 
The  Contractor  shall  maintain  this  covering  until  the  painter  starts  filling  am 
Ix-  responsible  for  the  condition  of  these  floors  until  that  time. 

Lay  a  parquet  floor  in  the    ]  mention  rooms  and  describe.  J 

Ordinary.  Lay  all  other  first  and  second  story    floors    with  [£"  x  4^"  first  quality]    an< 

third  story  floors  with  [  I"  x  6"  second  quality]  white  pine  flooring,  tongued  am 
grooved,  and  [blind  nailed]  or  [nailed  through  the  top]  to  every  bearing  with  8c! 
nails. 

Cut  hard  wood  borders  around  all  hearths,  including  the  kitchen,  and  cu 
out  for  all  registers,  providing  hardwood  borders  for  them. 


S/ihh.  All  sash  are  to   be   made  of  strictly  clear,  well  seasoned,  white  pine,  unles 

Otherwise  specified,  and  with  acorn  mould  sash  bar  and  weather-lipped  meetin 
rails.  All  sash  are  to  be  rebated  for  the  glass,  and  divided  in  lights  as  showi 
All  large  one  light  sash  are  to  have  if  meeting  rails. 

All  cellar  sash  are  to  be  ii"  thick;  all  for  casement  and  French  windows,  am 
for  leaded  or  plate  glass  if",  all  others  if  thick. 

|  In  (he  main  rooms  of  the  first  story,  the  meeting  rails  are  to  be  '(5-8")  froi 
the  floor.] 

104 


'When  the  meeting  rails  if  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  windows  would  be  directly  in  front  of 
oe's  eyes  they  are  sometimes  placed  out  of  centre. 


105 


Hardwood.  All  sash  in    -j  specify   rooms  [   are  to  be  of  hardwood  to  match  the  trim  in  the 

rooms. 

Storm  Sash.  Provide  outside  sash  for  all  exterior  windows,  made  of  clear,  seasoned  white  pine  i|"  thick, 

[divided  in  lights  to  correspond  to  the  inner  sash,]  packed  with  listing  around  the  edges  and 
secured  to  the  frame  [with  round  headed  screws  put  on  from  the  inside,  to  six  small  permanent 
brass  plates  for  each  window.  The  plates  are  to  be  set  in  flush  with  the  outside  of  the  casing  and 
screwed  on.  For  convenience  in  putting  up,  projecting  screws  are  to  be  provided,  by  which  the 
sash  can  be  hung  from  the  edge  of  the  upper  plates  while  the  screws  are  adjusted,]  or  [with  three 
suitable  hinges  to  each  sash  and  with  a  suitable  catch  at  the  side,]  or  [by  being  firmly  screwed  on 
from  the  outside  with  round  headed  screws.] 

All  storm  sash  are  to  be  glazed   with   double  thick  American  glass,  and  are  to  be  fitted  and 
marked  complete  by  the  Contractor,  and  stored  where  directed. 

Priming.  All    sash  are  to  be  primed  on   both   sides  by    the  Contractor  before  being 

brought  to  the  building.  Sash  for  rooms  which  are  to  have  a  natural  wood  finish 
must  be  primed  inside  with  oil. 


Glazing. 

Plate. 
Stained. 


Single  Thick. 


Double  Thick. 


[All  sash  are  to  be  delivered  by  the  Contractor  to  the  glazier,  and  after  being 
glazed  are  to  be  returned  by  the  Contractor  to  the  building.]     Or 

All  sash  in    \ specify  windows  |    (20)  windows  total,  are  to  be  glazed  with  the 
best  French  plate  glass.     [The  lights  in   -|  specify  windows  \   are  to  be  beveled  i". 

Leaded  or  stained  glass  [where  shown  on  the  drawings]  or  \ specify  windows; 
[will  be  furnished  by  the  Owner,  and  the  Contractor  shall  box  such  sash  and 
ship  and  deliver  to  the  address  directed,  the  Owner  paying  express  charges]  or 
[shall  be  furnished  by  the  Contractor,  to  cost  ($2.50)  per  square  foot]  or  [shall 
be  furnished  by  the  Contractor  according  to  the  designs  furnished  for  the 
same.] 

All  sash  in  the  cellar  and  all  storm  sash  are   to   be  glazed  with  first  quality 
American  glass. 

All   other  sash    in    the    building  are  to  be  glazed   with  first  quality  double 
thick  French  sheet  glass. 

All.  glass  is  to  be  well  bedded,  tacked  and  puttied. 

\  For  other  glazing  s«e  Skylights,  Conservatory,  Sash  Doors.  Storm  Sash. 


106 


107 


Mosquito 
Frames. 

Windows. 


Doors. 


Material. 


Finish. 


Blinds. 

Outside. 


Hardware. 


Painting. 


Fit  up  all  windows  in  the  house  [except  cellar  and  such  windows  as  will 
have  stationery  sash]  with  mosquito  guards.  Those  for  double  hung  windows 
are  to  be  [as  large  as  the  lower  sash,  put  on  the  outside  and  grooved  to  slide 
on  a  bead  put  in  for  that  purpose]  or  [as  large  as  the  entire  window  (screwed 
on  from  the  outside  with  round  headed  screws)  or  (hung  with  suitable  hinges 
and  fastened  with  suitable  hooks  and  staples.)  ]  Those  for  casement  sash  are 
to  be  as  large  as  the  window  opening,  hung  inside  to  swing  in  with  suitable 
hinges  and  catches  furnished  by  the  Owner.  All  the  wire  is  to  be  rustless  and 

o  •/ 

14  mesh  to  the  inch. 

Fit  up  all  outside  doors,  except  cellar,  with  outside  wire  screen  doors  with 
extra  heavy  rustless  wire  12  mesh  to  the  inch,  and  with  a  double  thickness  of 
wire  in  the  lower  panels.  All  stiles  are  to  be  ii"  x  2^".  The  doors  are  to  have 
a  rail  in  the  centre. 

The  screen  frame  for  the  front  door  is  to  be  of  clear  quartered  white  oak. 
All  inside  window  screen  frames  in  rooms  which  are.  to  be  trimmed  in  hard- 
wood are  to  be  of  wood  to  correspond  with  the  trim.  All  other  door  and 
window  screen  frames  are  to  be  of  clear  white  pine. 

All  pine  screens  which  are  to  be  placed  outside  are  to  be  painted  two 
coats  of  pure  white  lead  and  pure  linseed  oil,  in  color  as  directed.  All  such 
as  are  to  be  placed  inside  and  all  hard  wood  frames  outside,  are  to  be  filled 
and  have  one  coat  of  hard  oil, 

\  Hardware :  Lifts  for  sliding  screens,  Hinges  and  Hooks  for  hanging  screens,  Hinges,  Springs 
and  Locks  for  door  screens.  See  Hardware  List. 

All  these  mosquito  frames  are  to  be  fitted  and  marked  by  the  Contractor 
and  left  in  the  windows,  or  stored  where  directed. 

Provide  and  hang  outside  blinds  for  )  mention  windows[  made  of  first 
quality  white  pine,  i£"  thick,  with  rolling  slats,  and  cut  in  [four  folds  with 
Zimmerman's  adjustable  fastenings  for  ]  mention  |  windows,  and  two  folds  for 
all  others.] 

All  blinds  are  to  be  hung  with  wrought  iron  L  hinges,  and  fastened  with 
ring  fasts. 

All  blinds  are  to  be  painted  two  good  coats  of  pure  white  lead  and  pure 
linseed  oil,  in  colors  as  directed.  All  are  to  be  marked  and  a  corresponding 

mark  is  to  be  put  on  the  frames. 

108 


109 


Inside  Shutters. 


Material. 

Finish. 

Hardware. 


Provide  and  hang  inside  blinds  for  -mention  windows  j  \y8"  in  thickness, 
made  in  two  sections,  under  and  lower,  and  in  |^/,i'  folds  for  all  windows  exceed- 
ing 3 '-6"  wide,  and  in  four  folds  for  all  others.]  The  central  folds  are  to  be  fitted 
with  rolling  slats  and  the  side  folds  with  panels. 

|  Specify  woods  for  shutters.  [ 

;  See  under  "  Finish  of  Blinds."  [- 

All  hardware  is  to  be  [furnished  and  put  on  by  the  Contractor  j  Hinges  and 
Fasteners— See  Hardware  List- J]  or  [furnished  by  the  Owner  and  put  on  by  the  Con- 
tractor.] 


Venetian. 

Material. 

Finish. 

Sliding. 

Material. 
Finish  of  Blinds. 


Furnish  and  put  up  complete  Wilsons  Venetian  blinds  for  )  mention  windows.  ( 
with  '(2")  slats,  '"imported  linen  tapes,  braided  linen  cords  and  bronze  fixtures. 

-)  Specify  woods,  j- 

-jSee  under  "Finish  of  Blinds."  J 

Furnish  and  put  up  complete  in  a  proper  manner  Wilsons  patent  inside 
sliding  blinds  for  -|  mention  windows  J  with  suitable  pockets  lined  with  >^"  matched 
boards,  painted  both  sides  before  being  put  on. 

-)  Specify  woods,  j 

All  [inside  shutters,  Venetian  and  sliding  blinds  |  are  to-be  finished  by  the 
[Contractor  to  correspond  with  the  finish  of  the  rooms  in  which  they  are 
located  and  in  the  manner  specified  for  such  finish  in  the  Painter 's  Specifica- 
tion, matching  to  a  finished  sample  to  be  obtained  from  the  Finis  her  ^\ 


Rolling   Partitions. 


3Furnish  and  set  up,  where  shou>'n  on  tlie  drawings,  Flexifold  side  coiling  parti- 
tions of  wood,  ;*4"  in  thickness,  set  up  with  the  necessary  attachments  complete  and 
with  the  proper  overhead  guideways,  and  hardwood  grooved  tracks  set  flush  with 
the  finished  floor.  Stud  up,  lath  and  plaster  (or  panel)  the  pockets  and  soffit  as 
shown.  Furnish  and  set  up  face  jambs  for  soffit  and  pockets  with  round  headed 
brass  screws.  Put  up  a  cornice  of  suitable  kind  of  wood  to  match  the  trim  ;  all 
made  according  to  the  detailed  drawings. 

The  Flexifold  Partitions  are  to  be  of  first  quality  lumber  finished  natural  or 
to  match  trim  in  a  first-class  manner.  Provide  with  bronze  hardware,  pulls  and 
locks,  complete. 

no 


'The  slats  are  made  !£',  2*  and  2f.     The  narrow  slats  are  higher  priced. 

:The  tapes  are  made  of  bronzed  metal,  oxidized  silver,  silk  stitched  on  linen  and  imported 
linen. 

"This  specification  is  for  doors  which  slide  sideways;  if  a  partition  is  required  to  slide  up 
specify  as  follows: 

ROLLING  PARTITIONS :  Furnish  and  put  up  (specify  where)  Flexifold  Rolling  Parti- 
tions of  wood  I"  in  thickness.  Set  up  complete  with  the  proper  guides,  shafts,  barrels, 
brackets,  etc.  Put  up  a  cornice  of  suitable  kind  of  wood  to  match  the  trim,  made  according  to 
the  detail  drawings,  and  panel  the  boxes.  The  rolling  partitions  are  to  be  of  first-class  quality 
lumber,  finished  natural  or  to  match  trim  in  a  first-class  manner. 

Where  a  sliding  door  is  required  and  it  is  desirable  to  save  pocket  room,  the  flexifold  slid- 
ing partitions  are  used  and  are  specified  as  follows: 

FLEXIFOLD  SLIDING  PARTITIONS:  Furnish  and  put  up  complete  Flexifold  Sliding 
Partitions  of  wood  \"  in  thickness,  one  half  paneled,  with  all  guideways,  brass  track  and 
paneled  (or  studded)  pockets,  and  cornice,  all  made  according  to  detail  drawings. 

Where  fire-proof  partitions  are  required,  specify  as  follows: 

Furnish  and  set  up  where  shown  on  the  drawings  Flexifold  vertical  coiling  steel-clad  lock- 
seamed  partitions  with  wood  cores,  J-"  in  thickness,  set  up  with  the  necessary  attachments 
complete,  with  proper  steel  guideways.  (Form  the  box  pocket  of  angle  irons)  or  (build  brick 
piers)  to  form  a  complete  fire  closure. 

This  flexifold  partition  work  is  also  made  up  in  wardrobe  fronts,  suitable  for  school-house 
or  department  store  work,  etc.,  also  desirable  for  shallow  closets  in  flats,  etc.  Where  such 
wardrobes  are  desired  specify  as  follows : 

WARDROBES :  Furnish  and  put  up  complete  in  hallways  and  where  shown  on  the  plans. 
Flexifold  Wardrobes,  f  vertical  double  fold  doors  with  pulls,  locks,  etc.,  complete.  The 
material  is  to  be  of  first  quality  yellow  pine  finished  natural  in  a  first-class  manner.  The 
backs  are  to  have  panels  of  18  guage  wire,  J"  mesh,  [and  the  ends  black  japanned  register 
faces  set  in  the  exterior  front  or  end  panels*]  or  [construct  a  raised,  false,  slatted  floor  so  that 
under  and  through  the  floor,  ventilation  for  the  wardrobe  may  be  secured,  f]  Each  ward- 
robe is  to  be  fitted  up  with  fifty  three-pronged  wardrobe  hooks  and  with  shelves,  brackets,  etc., 
all  as  shown  on  detail  drawings. 

*Where  the  warm  air  is  taken  directly  from  the  hallway  or  class  room  and  withdrawn 
through  a  register  connecting  with  a  vent  duct  at  one  end  of  the  wardrobe. 

t  Where  no  separate  duct  for  ventilation  is  provided. 

These  wardrobes  are  made  with  sliding  blackboard  fronts  of  real  slate  or  composition  for 
school  work. 


Ill 


Doors. 


Veneering. 


Sizes. 
Hardware. 

Front. 

For  Dutch  Door. 


Vestibule. 
Other  Outside  Doors. 


All  doors  are  to  be  paneled  and  moulded  in  accordance  with  the  scale  and 
detail  drawings  furnished  for  the  same.  All  wood  in  the  doors  is  to  be  well  kiln 
dried.  All  doors  are  to  be  blind  tenoned. 

All  veneered  doors  are  to  be  on  staved-up  white  pine  centres  with  solid 
mouldings,  and  I/^"  veneering  of  strictly  clear  kiln-dried  wood,  well  glued  on  both 
sides.  Doors  which  are  veneered  on  one  side  to  correspond  with  the  wood  in  the 
rooms,  and  which  open  into  such  rooms  from  clos'ets  or  inferior  rooms  must  be 
veneered  both  sides  with  the  same  kind  of  wood. 

|  The  sizes  of  all  doors  are  to  be  taken  from  the  plans]  or  [specify  sizes.  | 

J  See  Hardware  List.  (- 

The  front  door  is  to  be  (2")  thick,  [veneered  with  strictly  clear  quartered 
white  oak,\  paneled  and  moulded,  [with  raised  panels,  and  with  raised  and  pearl 
and  bead  mouldings  cut  in  the  panels.  | 

The  front  door  is  to  have  a  horizontal  rebated  joint  in  the  centre,  the  upper 
half  of  the  door  to  swing  in  first. 

The  front  door  is  to  be  glazed  with  [stained  glass  furnished  by  the  Contractor 
to  cost — |  or  [French  plate  glass  beveled  i". ) 

-J  See  Front  Door.  J- 

\  Specify  thickness,  veneering,  paneling,  glass. ' 


Inside  Doors.  -j  Specify  number  of  panels,  raised  panels,  raised  mouldings,  veneering,  kinds  of  wood.  ( 

Sliding.  The  sliding  doors  are  to  have  an  astragal  joint  in  the  centre  and  y%"  x   \y4" 

friction  mould  on  the  |  front  edges]  or  [jambs.  | 


Glass. 


Transom. 


Dwarf. 


|  For  Front,  Vestibule,  Sliding,  j 

Glaze  the  door  to  the  conservatory  with  beveled  French  plate  glass.  All 
other  inside  doors  which  are  marked  sash  doors,  are  to  be  glazed  with  [  ribbed]  or 
[obscure]  glass  with  proper  rebates,  beads,  etc.,  as  required. 

Over  the  doors  marked  transom  on  the  plans  provide  headlights  with  (\l/2")  sash 
glazed  with  obscure  glass  and  arranged  to  Open.  -)  Hardware  :  Hinges,  Transom  Openers. 
See  Hardware  List.  [ 

Construct    all    the    necessary    dwarf    doors    for   fitting   up   the   pantries   and 

113 


II' 


Trap. 


closets  and   for  the  casing  of  plumbing  pipes  ;  also  for  dumb  waiter,  clothes  chute, 
etc. 

Construct  the  trap  doors  where  shown  \ describe}. 

-|  Hardware :    Hinges,  Bolts,  Flush  Ring  Lifts.      See  Hardware  List. ; 


Saddles. 


All  outside  doors  are  to  have  2"  beveled  and  rebated  ash  saddles.  All 
other  doors  throughout  are  to  have  £"  moulded  ash  saddles  finished  by  the 
Pointer  before  being  put  down. 


Screen. 


Form  the    screen    doors    j  specify    where  j-  with  (i-J"  x  2-J-")    frame,  cross  and 

diagonal  pieces,  and  cover  both  sides  and  edges  with,  best  quality  Morocco  leather. 
|  Hardware  :  Double  Acting  Spring  Hinges,  Handles-  \ 


Water  Closet  Doors. 


{See  under  ««  Water  Closet. "[ 


Trim  and  Base. 


Material. 


All  windows  and  doors  and  rooms  throughout  the  buildings  [except  cellar 
and  where  marked  unfinished  on  the  plans,]  are  to  be  provided  with  trim  and 
base  made  of  kiln-dried  wood  in  strict  accordance  with  the  scale  and  detail 
drawings  for  the  same.  All  hard  wood  and  wood  for  natural  finish  is  to  be. 
strictly  clear.  No  door  or  window  trim  is  to  be  spliced.  No  base  mouldings 
are  to  be  returned  down  to  the  floor,  but  in  cases  where  there  is  nothing  for 
such  mouldings  to  strike  against,  they  shall  be  turned  back  against  the  wall. 
All  interior  woodwork  is  to  be  finished  up  perfectly  clean,  is  to  be  hand- 
-smoothed,  scraped  and  sandpapered,  and  at  completion  such  work  as  is  to  have 
a  natural  finish,  is  to  be  properly  cleaned,  and  have  all  stains  ,and  finger  marks 
removed. 

•j  Specify  material  and  quality  of  Trim,  Base,  etc.  I 


Description. 
Special. 

Closet. 

Ordinary, 


All  trim  and  base  in  {mention  rooms}  is  to  be  [made  in  accordance  with  the  special  scale 
drawings  made  for  the  same]  or  {describe.} 

All  trim  in  closets  is  to  be  [$"  x  4"  plain,  and  the  base  is  to  be  |"  x  7"  plain  beveled.] 

All  other  trim  in  the  building  is  to  be  [$•"  x  5",  with  a  mould  worked  on  the  face  and  with  a 
i"  x  f"  wall  mould  (mitred)  or  (with  turned  corner  blocks)  at  the  top.  All  door  casings  are  to 
have  i£"  plinth  blocks.] 

AH  base  not  otherwise  specified  is  to  be  [£"  thick  and  8"  high  in  the  first  story  and  7"  high  in 

"4 


IJ5 


Boxing. 


the  second  and  third  stories,  all  with  a  mould  worked  on  the  face  and  with  a  (i"  x  f")  wall   mould 
at  the  top.] 

All  base  except is  to  have  a  £"  quarter  round  nailed  to  the  floor  and  not  to  the  base. 

[In  rooms  where  wainscoting  is  specified,  no  base  will  be  required.] 

[The  windows  in  {mention  rooms}  are  to  have  the  casings  run  to  the  floor  with  moulded 
panels  under  the  windows.] 

All  other  windows  are  to  be  finished  with  a  rebated  and  moulded  stool  with  a  (f"  x  f")  mould 
under  it,  and  with  a  (§")  moulded  apron  (4")  wide.  All  door  jambs  are  to  have  moulded  edges 
and  are  to  be  of  the  same  material  as  the  trim. 

The  {mention  windows}  are  to  be  boxed  for  inside  shutters  with  boxes  of  the  same  material 
as  the  trim,  of  ample  size  to  allow  the  shutters  to  swing  freely,  and  with  rubber  stops  for  the 
shutters  to  strike  against. 

All  windows  are  to  have  $"  inside  stops  of  the  same  material  as  the  trim,  with  a  bead  on  the 
inner  edge.  Where  the  stops  are  of  a  hardwood,  they  are  to  be  put  on  with  [nickel  plated]  or 
[blued]  round  headed  screws. 

[In  all  rooms  trimmed  with  hardwood,  the  back  edges  of  the  window  frames  are  to  be 
veneered  with  the  same  wood.] 

{  Specify  any  paneled  jambs  required. ' 


Wood    Cornices.  The  \  mention  rooms  j-   are  to  have  a  moulded  wood  cornice  [as  shown  on  the 

detail  drawings]  or  {describe}  of  wood  to  correspond  with  the  trim  in  such  rooms. 


Picture  Hould. 


The  {mention  rooms  f  are  to  have  a  ($"  x  i|")  picture  mould  [of  wood  to 
correspond  with  the  wood  in  the  rooms]  or  {describe — gilt,  enamel,  pearl  and  bead,  etc.  j- 
finished  by  the  Painter,  except  the  last  coat,  before  being  put  up.  [The  pic- 
ture mould  is  to  be  coped  over  the  wall  mould  of  the  trim.] 


Chair  Rail. 
Wainscoting. 

Ceiled. 


Paneled. 


Furnish  and  put  a  (£"  x  4^")  moulded  ash  chair  rail  in   {specify  rooms  [    the 
top  to  be  (3')  from  the  floor. 


Wainscot  the  {specify  where — bath  room,  water  closets,  kitchen,  pantries,  store  rooms, 
linen  closets,  etc.  [  (4')  high  with  (•§•"  x  2i")  tongued  and  grooved  and  beaded 
clear  kiln-dried  quartered  zvhite  oak,  with  a  [beveled]  or  [moulded]  cap  at  the 
top. 

Wainscot  the  {specify  where  [  (4-6")  high,  with  clear,  kiln-dried  quartered 
white  oak  with  moulded  and  raised  panels  about  (12"  square).  The  rails  and 

116 


117 


Angle  Beads. 
Wood  Ceilings. 

Material. 

Beam  Casing. 
Steel  Ceilings. 


Finish  of  Trim, 
etc. 

Store  Front. 

Sash. 


Doors. 
Hardware. 


stiles  are  to  be  i  y±"  thick  ;  panels  7/&".  All  are  to  be  made  as  shown  on  the  scale 
and  detail  drawings  for  the  same. 

[The  wainscoting  in  the  hall  is  to  be  run  up  the  stairs,  rail  high  to  the  second 
story,  and  also  around  the  landings.] 

All  wainscoting  is  to  be  painted  on  the  back  by  the  Painter,  with  a  coat  of 
pure  linseed  oil  paint  before  being  put  up. 

Protect  all  plaster  corners  in  the.  building  with  (4-6"  x  1}")  neatly  turned  angle  beads 
with  turned  ornaments  at  the  ends.  Those  in  rooms  where  hardwood  trim  is  used  are  to  be  of 
wood  to  correspond.  All  others  are  to  be  of  ash. 

Form  wood  ceilings  in  [specify  where J-  with  [%"  x  2£"  tongued  and  grooved  beaded  strips 
nailed  to  the  underside  of  the  beams.  Run  the  false  beams  as  shown  and  form  the  panels 
between  them]. 

j  Specify  woods.; 

; Specify  casing  of  girders,  with  mouldings,  etc.,  and  kinds  of  wood.; 

All  ceilings  of  ; specify  where!  are  to  be  furred  off  with  pine  or  spruce  strips  J"  thick  x  H" 
or  other  widths  as  required  for  the  ceiling  work  and  spaced  so  as  to  accommodate  the  metal  plates. 
All  surfaces  above  named  are  then  to  be  covered  with  stamped  steel  ceiling  plates  similar  to 
j  mention  number  of  plate  in  the  catalogue  selected  from  \ .  Along  the  side  wall  and  girders  a  neat 
-"  x  -  -"  moulded  cornice  is  to  be  used  of  style  to  correspond  with  the  panel.  All  joints  and 
laps  are  to  be  well  nailed  up  leaving  no  openings.  All  metal  ceiling  work  is  to  have  one  coat  of 
paint  on  each  side  before  delivery  to  the  building.  \Side  walls  that  are  to  be  covered  with  metal 
work,  should  first  be  sheathed  solid  with  rough  |"  fine  or  spruce  boards.  \ 

The  Contractor  is  lo  finish  all  trim,  base,  wainscoating,  doors,  wood  cornices,  picture 
mouldings,  wood  ceilings,  etc.,  before  putting  up  as  follows:  |See  Painter's  Specification.; 

Construct  the  store  front  as  shown  on  the  scale  and  detail  drawings.  Provide  the  necessary 
timber,  and  support  the  work  in  a  proper  manner. 

The  sash  are  to  be  (2|-")  thick,  moulded  and  rebated  for  the  glass,  and  glazed  with  the  best 
French  plate  glass,  secured  in  place  with  a  stop  bead,  screwed  on  with  nickel  plated  round  headed 
screws.  The  sash  are  to  be  properly  screwed  in  position  and  the  transom  sash  are  to  be 
arranged  to  open  with  suitable  hinges  and  transom  adjusters. 

The  doors  are  to  be  (2y)  thick  with  moulded  panels  in  the  lower  part  and  the  upper  part 
glazed  with  best  French  plate  glass.  The  doors  are  to  be  veneered  on  staved  up  white  pine  cores. 

;  Hardware  :  Store  Door  Handles,  Locks,  Hinges,  Bolts,  Transom  Hinges  and  Adjusters.  See 
Hardware  List. 

Tin-  mullions  and  transom  bars  are  to  be  moulded  on  both  sides  and  a  moulded  cornice  is  to 
be  cut  around  at  the  top  of  the  sash  both  outside  and  inside.  Form  a  (2")  beveled  sill  under  the 
sash  with  a  moulding  under  it.  Form  the  moulded  panels  below  the  sill  and  finish  with  a  (!£") 
moulded  base  scribed  at  the  bottom.  Form  the  ceiling  of  the  entrance  with  (•$"  x  2£")  beaded 
tongued  and  grooved  boards. 

| Columns,  Pilasters,  etc.; 

All  the  front  work  is  to  be  of  clear  quartered  white  oak. 

Form  the  platform  inside  (of  |"  x  2£")  tongued  and  grooved  quartered  white  oak  blind  nailed 
to  (2"  x  (i")  timber,  set  (16")  on  centres.  Form  a  moulded  stool  and  apron  on  the  inside  and 
form  moulded  panels  from  the  apron  to  the  floor. 


118 


Stairs. 

Main. 


Construct  the  main  stairs  as  shown  on  the  scale  and  detail  drawings. 
Support  properly  and  secure  in  position.  All  risers  are  to  be  £"  and  treads 
ii",  tongued  and  grooved  together,  and  both  housed  into  the  wall  strings  with 
wedges  glued  in.  The  treads  are  to  have  a  nosing  on  the  edge,  with  a  cove 
under.  The  wall  strings  are  to  be  i-J"  thick,  moulded  on  the  top  edge  to  cor- 
respond with  the  adjoining  base.  The  front  strings  are  to  be  i-J-"  thick  [with  a 
mould  on  the  face  and  a  moulded  cap  as  shown]  or  [open]  and  with  a  mould- 
ing on  the  lower  edge  to  cover  the  joint  with  the  plaster.  The  front  string 
is  to  be  carried  around  all  well  holes. 


The  rail  is  to  be  (2^"  x  3^")  double  moulded,  bolted  together  and  to  all  posts. 

The  balusters  are  to  be  (i£"  x  i£")  turned  and  set  [3"  apart]  or  [three  to  each  tread  and 
dovetailed  at  the  bottom.] 

[The  main  newel  post  is  to  be  (6"  x  6")  in  size,  boxed,  carved,  paneled,  etc.,  and  is  to  extend 
to  the  ceiling  as  shown.]  All  other  newels  are  to  be  (4"  x  4")  in  size,  turned  as  shown.  All  drop 
newels  are  to  have  [turned]  or  [carved]  drops. 

[Panel  up  under  the  rake  of  the  first  flight  and  on  all  soffits  with  moulded  panels  about  (12"  wide) 
as  shown.  The  panels  are  to  be  £"  thick,  rails  and  stiles  i-J"]  or  [Set  studding  up  under  the  rake 
and  furr  off  the  underside  of  the  stairs  for  plastering.] 

{For  Wainscoting  on. Stairs,  see  under   "Wainscoting,"  page  118. } 

Form  the  landings  with  (2"  x  8")  beams  set  (16")  on  centres  and  lay  the  floors  with  (f"x  2^") 
tongued  and  grooved  flooring. 

The  front  strings,  posts,  rails,  balusters,  paneling,  wainscoting,  etc.,  are  to  be 
of  clear,  kiln-dried  quartered  white  oak.  The  treads,  risers  and  landings  are  to 
be  of  quartered  white  oak. 

{Specify  any  arches,  seats,  etc.,  coming  in  connection  with  the  stairs.} 


Rear  Stairs.  The  kitchen  and  attic  stairs  are  to  have  treads  and  risers,  tongued  and 

grooved  together  and  housed  into  the  strings  in  the  same  manner  as  main  stairs. 
The  treads  are  to  have  a  nosing  on  the  edge  with  a  cove  under.  The  wall  strings 
are  to  be  i-J-"  thick,  moulded  on  the  top  to  correspond  with  the  adjoining  base. 
The  treads,  risers,  and  platforms  are  to  be  of  clear  yellow  pine  for  a  natural 
finish.  The  stairs  are  to  be  furred  off  on  the  underside  for  plastering. 

The  box  stairs  are  to  have  a  2"  round  ash  hand  rail  on  one  side,  secured 
with  iron  brackets. 

The    open    stairs    are    to    have    (4"  x  4")    turned   posts,    (2"  x  3")    double 


120 


121 


moulded  hand  rail  bolted  together  and  to  the  posts,  (i^"  x  ij")  turned  balus- 
ters set  [3"  apart]  or  [three  to  each  tread]  and  dovetailed  at  the  bottom,  and 
i-J-"  front  strings  [moulded  on  the  face  with  a  moulded  cap]  or  [open]  with  a 
moulding  on  the  lower  edge  to  cover  the  joint  with  the  plaster.  All  work  of 
open  stairs  except  the  treads  and  risers  is  to  be  of  good  clear  ash.  The  front 
string  is  to  be  carried  around  all  well  holes. 

Protection.  All  treads,  risers  and  platforms  of  all  stairs  must  be  protected  [as  specified 

for  hardwood  floors,  and  the  Contractor  is  to  be  responsible  for  their  condition 
at  completion  in  the  same  manner.]  All  newels,  rails,  etc.,  must  be  properly 
protected. 


Cellar  Stairs. 


Construct  the  cellar  stairs  with  ii"  mill  dressed  pine  treads  and  strings, 
and  $"  risers.  [Provide  a  slat  rail  on  one  side]  or  [Box  in  with  (2!"  x'$") 
tongued  and  grooved  white  pine.~\ 


Winter  Steps. 


Construct  winter  steps  for  the  steps  of  front  stoop,  with  (§"  x  i")  iron  strings  screwed  on 
top  of  the  treads.  Form  the  treads  of  (4"  x  i^")  fine  strips  Provide  a  handrail  strongly  secured 
at  the  side.  These  steps  are  to  be  made  removable  and  in  convenient  sections  for  taking  down 
and  stowing  away. 


122 


I23 


flantels,  etc. 


Furnish  and  set  the  six  wood  mantels  and  the  side  board,  book  cases  and  hat- 
rack,  as  shown  on  the  scale  and  detail  drawings.  All  are  to  be  made  in  the  best 
manner,  glued,  screwed,  dovetailed  and  mortised  together.  All  parts  not  over  16" 
wide  are  to  be  in  one  piece.  No  staving  up  of  pieces  is  to  be  done.  The  meas- 
urements are  to  be  taken  by  the  Contractor  from  the  finished  plaster  work,  and  the 
work  executed  in  accordance  therewith.  All  wood  is  to  be  strictly  clear,  well 
seasoned  and  kiln  dried,  and  all  mirrors  are  to  be  best  French  plate  glass 
[beveled  i"]. 

I  Carving,  see  page   94.  [ 


Mantels.  All    mantels  are  to  be  secured  to  the  breasts  with  concealed  iron  holdfasts, 

hooks  and  screws. 

Specify  kinds  of  wood  for  each,  and  description  of  any  special  carving,  composition  work,  etc. 


Sideboard. 


Hatrack. 
Book  Cases. 


Arches,  Seats,  etc. 


Mirrors. 


Finish. 


The  sideboard  is  to  be  of  quartered  white  oak  [paneled  back  of  the  shelves  and  at  the  ends, 
with  mouldings  cut  in  the  panels.  The  shelves  are  to  be  made  adjustable.  Put  in  two  shelves 
in  each  lower  closet  back  of  the  doors.]  The  drawers  are  to  be  dovetailed  together  and  are  to 
have  a  groove  in  the  bottom  run  on  hardwood  strips.  [The  doors  in  the  upper  section  are  to 
be  i£"  thick,  glazed  with  leaded  glass  in  design  as  shown.] 

jHirror.J 

|  Hardware  :  Drawer  Pulls,  Locks,  Hinges  and  Catches.    See  Hardware  List. : 

|  Kind  of  Wood,  Seat,  Mirror,  Hardware :   Hooks,  Seat  Hinges.  [• 

The  book  cases  are  to  be  of  quartered  white  oak.  Form  the  back  with  surfaced  fine.  Panel 
the  ends  with  mouldings  cut  in  the  panels.  The  shelves  are  to  be  made  adjustable.  [The 
doors  in  the  upper  section  are  to  be  i-J"  thick,  glazed  with  French  plate  glass]  or  [Supply  with  a  brass 
rod  and  curtain  rings.] 

j  Drawers.  | 

]  Hardware  :   Drawer  Pulls  and  Locks,  and  Hinges  and  Locks  or  Catches  for  Doors. ' 

Construct  and  properly  secure  in  position  the  seats,  arches,  etc.  [as  shown  on  the  scale  and 
detail  drawings.]  The  seats  are  to  be  hinged  to  raise,  with  bronze  butts.  The  risers  are  to  be 
paneled.  {Specify  woods.} 

Furnish  and  put  up  the  two  mirrors  where  shown  of  best  French  plate  glass  [beveled  i".] 
Form  the  frames  of  quartered  white  oak  as  shown  on  the  drawings. 

For  Finish  of  Hantels,  etc.,  see  Painter's  Specification. 


124 


I25 


Closets. 

Butler's  Pantry. 


Fit  up  the  butler's  pantry  with  a  counter  shelf  (2-4")  wide  and  2  -8"  high. 
Put  in  f"  shelves  above  the  counter  shelf,  14"  wide  in  the  clear,  extending  to  the- 
ceiling.  Enclose  the  shelves  with  i^"  sash  doors,  glazed  with  first  quality  double 
thick  American  glass,  divided  \i\four  lights  each,  and  [arranged  to  slide  on  brass 
tracks]  or  [hung  with  suitable  locks  and  secured  with  suitable  catches.]  Provide 
below  the  counter  shelf,  six  drawers  with  beveled  fronts,  with  one  drawer  divided 
for  knives,  etc.  Also  put  in  the  required  number  of  shelves  enclosed  with 
ij"  moulded  paneled  doors.  The  cases  are  to  have  a  neat  moulded  cornice  aj;  the 
top.  Fit  up  the  sink  with  doors  under  and  with  a  i£"  grooved  drip  board  and 
frame  of  ash,  with  an  apron  under  the  frame.  All  this  work,  except  the  sink  top, 
is  to  be  of  clear  white  pine  for  a  natural  finish. 

•j  Hardware:   Drawer  Pulls,   Hinges,  Brass  Tracks,  Catches  and   Locks.     See  Hardware  List.  \ 


China  Closet. 


See  Butler's  Pantry. 


Kitchen  Pantry. 


Fit  up  the  kitchen  pantry  in  clear  white  pine  for  a  natural  finish.  Provide 
a  counter  shelf  (2')  wide  and  2'-8"  from  the  floor.  Put  up  five  $"  shelves,  run  on 
the  sides  on  neat  cleats,  with  a  standard  in  the  centre  from  bottom"  to  top,  neatly 
let  in  and  chamfered.  Provide  two  drawers,  and  two  closets  with  i  J"  paneled  doors 
under  the  counter  shelf,  one  for  barrel  of  flour  with  a  lid  to  take  out  the  flour. 
Furnish  and  put  up  twelve  pot  hooks  where  directed. 

Hardware:    Drawer  Pulls,  Hinges,  Hooks,  Catches  and  Locks.     See  Hardware  List,  i 


Bed  Room  Closets. 


[The  closets  for  \  mention  |  bedrooms  are  to  have  three  drawers  (14")  deep, 
with  paneled  fronts,  and  two  suitable  pulls  for  each.  Provide  one  shelf  (2)  wide 
with  a  moulded  edge  above  the  drawers,  and  above  this  put  up  shelves  (14")  wide 
and  (16")  apart,  on  neat  cleats  to  the  ceiling.  Enclose  the  shelves  with  ii"  pan- 
eled doors  with  hinges  and  locks,  and  put  up  a  moulded  cornice  at  the  top.] 

All  other  bed  room  closets  are  to  have  one  shelf  put  up  on  neat  cleats. 

All  bedroom  closets  are  to  have  twelve  large  double  bronze  clothes  hooks  put 
up  on  neatly  beaded  strips  cut  around  three  sides.  All  the  work  in  bed  room 
closets  is  to  be  of  first  quality  white  pine  for  painting. 

126 


Tin  Closet. 


|  Describe.  J 


Kitchen  Dresser. 


Construct  and  set  up  the  dresser  in  the  kitchen  (5'  wide  and  8'  high)  made  according  to  the 
drawings,  of  clear  yellow  pine  for  a  natural  finish.  Provide  two  closets  in  the  lower  section  with  a 
shelf  in  each,  enclosed  with  i^-"  moulded  paneled  doors,  and  two  drawers  with  paneled  fronts. 
Provide  four  shelves  in  the  upper  section,  enclosed  with  i£"  sash  doors,  glazed  with  first  quality 
double  thick  American  glass  divided  \nfour  lights  each,  and  [arranged  to  slide  on  brass  tracks] 
or  [hung  with  suitable  hinges  and  secured  with  suitable  catches.] 

|  Hardware :   Drawer  Pulls,  Hinges,  Brass  Tracks,  Catches  and  Locks.    See  Hardware  List.  [ 


Wardrobes.  Construct  and  set  up  the  four  wardrobes  in  the  bed  rooms,  of  dear  quartered  white  oak.     The 

wardrobes  are  to  be  [the  width  shown  on  the  drawings  and  8'  high],  with  a  moulded  cornice  at  the 
top.  Provide  with  paneled  ends  and  with  two  moulded  paneled  swinging  doors.  Put  in  a  shelf 
across  the  top,  back  of  the  doors.  Provide  tivo  drawers  below  with  moulded  paneled  fronts. 

J  Hardware  :   Drawer  Pulls,  Hinges,  Catches,  Locks  and  Clothes  Hooks.     See  Hardware  List.  {• 

Cedar  Closet.  Furr  the  cedar  closet  with  i"  x  2"  furring  strips  and  after  the  plastering   is  done   line  the 

entire  closet,  floors,  walls  and  ceiling  and  the  inside  of  the  door  with  (£"  x  2^")  tongued  and 
grooved  red  cedar.  Put  up  {describe!  shelves,  doors  and  drawers,  all  of  red  cedar. 

\  Hardware:  Drawer  Pulls,  Brass  Tracks,  Hinges,  Catches,  Locks  and  Hooks.   See  Hardware  List. ! 


Linen  Closet. 


Store  Rooms. 
Medicine  Closet. 


Fit  up  the  linen  closet  in  clear  white  pine  for  a  natural  finish.  Provide  six  drawers  (14")  deep 
with  beveled  fronts,  the  lower  one  set  (3")  above  the  floor,  with  a  beveled  base  below. 

Put  in  shelves  over  the  drawers  (16"  wide  and  16"  apart)  to  extend  to  the  ceiling,  with  a 
standard  in  the  centre  neatly  let  in  and  chamfered.  Enclose  the  shelves  with  [i^"  moulded 
paneled  doors,  arranged  to  slide  on  brass  tracks]  and  put  up  a  neatly  moulded  cornice  at  the 
top. 

Hardware:  Drawer  Pulls,  Brass  Tracks,  Hinges,  Catches  and  Locks.    See  Hardware  List. 


|  See  Kitchen,  Pantry  or  Linen  Closet.  j- 

Fit   up   the  medicine  closet  in   clear  white  pine  for  a  natural  finish. 
enclosed  with  two  i^"  moulded  paneled  doors. 
Hardware:   Hinges,  Catches  and  Locks. 


Provide  four  shelves 


Coat  Closet.  Fit  up  the  coat  closet  in  clear  white  pine  for  a  natural  finish.     Provide  four  drawers  and  two 

rows  of  hooks  around  the  sides.    Also  provide  a  shoe  rack  with  eight  compartments,  each  8"  square. 


Other  Closets. 


Fit  up  all  other  closets,  not  particularly  specified,  with  shelves  and  drawers  as 
shown  or  marked  on  the  plans. 


128 


Drawers.  All  drawers  are  to  be  dovetailed  and  are  to  be  grooved  on  the  bottom  and  run 

on  a  hard  wood  strip  from  the  front  to  the  back.     The   \  mention  \   drawers  are  to 
roll  on  lignum  vitae  trunk  rollers. 


Ventilation  of 
Closets. 


The  J mention!  closets  are  to  be  ventilated  by  means  of  a  (4"  x  10")  tin  tube 
from  each,  placed  in  the  partition  and  run  to  the  air  space  above  the  third  story 
and  there  covered  with  a  wire  netting.  These  closets  are  to  have  (8"  x  8")  [black 
japanned]  or  [white  enameled]  registers  in  the  wall. 


Bath  Room 

and 
Work  for  Plumbing. 


|  Wainscoting,  see  page  116.    Preparation   for  Tiling,  see  page  102.' 

[The  fixtures  in  the  bath  room  are  to  be  left  open  with  no  fitting  by  the 
Carpenter]  or 

[Fit  up  around  the  tub  and  bowl  with  the  same  material  as  the  wainscoting, 
making  the  front  of  the  tub  removable  and  forming  a  door  below  the  bowl  with 
suitable  hinges  and  catch.] 

Furnish  and  put  a  cherry  cap  on  the  tub.  Furnish  and  put  up  six  large 
double  bronze  clothes  hooks  in  the  bath  room,  on  a  neatly  moulded  oak  strip. 


Water  Closet. 


|  Wainscoting.    Preparation  for  Tiling.  | 

Run  (i"  x  2-J-")  oak  strips  from  the  closet  to  the  cistern  on  which  to  run  the 
pipes.  Case  in  the  cistern  with  [a  i-J"  paneled  quartered  oak  casing]  or  [i"  x  2-£" 
quartered  oak  with  a  mould  on  the  top.] 

[Hang  the  closet  seat  and  lid  furnished  by  the  Plumber]  or  [Form  the  seat, 
lid  and  riser  of  ash.  The  seat  and  lid  are  to  be  ij"  thick,  hung  with  brass  hinges 
and  hollowed  out  at  the  front  edges.  The  riser  is  to  be  of  (£"  x  2$")  ash  with 
cleats  screwed  on  the  back,  made  removable  and  secured  with  two  iron  buttons.] 

Form  the  partitions  around  and  between  the  closets  (7')  high  of  as/i,  paneled  with 
i-J"  x  2-J-"  stiles,  i^"  rails  and  $"  moulded  panels.  Form  the  screen  doors  to  the  closets  with 
i-J"  x  2%"  stiles,  i£"  rails  and  fixed  slat  panels. 

|  Hardware:    Spring  Hinges,  Indicating  Bolts,  Clothes  Hooks.  | 


130 


'3' 


Lavatory.  (  Wainscoting.    Preparation  for  Tiling.     For  fitting  up  of  wash  bowl  and  closet,  see  under  Bath 

Room  and  Water  Closet.  [ 

Other  Wash  Bowls.  put  up  proper  cleats  to  support  the  slabs  for  all  other  wash  bowls  [and  leave 

the  space  underneath  open]  or  [and  close  in  the  space  underneath  as  specified  for 
the  bowl  in  the  bath  room.] 


Kitchen  Sink.  Fit  up  the  sink   in   the   kitchen  with  a  grooved  drip  top  il"  thick  and  with  a 

frame  and  4"  apron,  all  of  ash.  Form  a  splash  back  of  the  same  material  as  wain- 
scoting, (18")  high  over  the  sink,  and  put  on  a  moulded  cap..  [Leave  the  space 
under  the  sink  open,  put  up  proper  cleats  to  rest  the  sink  on,  and  provide  two 
turned  Megs  to  support  the  sink  and  drip  board]  or  [Ceil  up  under  the  sink  with 
the  same  material  as  the  wainscoting.  Form  a  closet  with  a  (paneled)  or  (bat- 
tened) door  hung  with  brass  hinges  and  furnished  with  a  suitable  catch.] 


Wash  Trays.  Provide    and  set    i£"   ash    frame  and  covers  for  the    wash  trays.       Hang  the 

covers    with    brass    hinges.        Construct    a    raised    platform    for    the    tubs    of 
[i    x  3i    tongued  and  grooved  pine  flooring.] 


Pipe  Casing.  Case  in  all  plumbing  pipes  above  the  cellar  with   [£"  x  2^"  tongued,  grooved 

and  beaded  strips  of  the  same  material  as  the  wood  in  the  rooms.]  Also  form 
pockets  in  the  walls  and  partitions  around  all  pipes,  and  provide  with  removable 
fronts,  let  flush  into  rebated  strips  each  side  and  secured  with  iron  buttons. 


Tack  Boards.  Where  lead  pipes  run  under  floors  they  are  to  be  run  on  suitable  tack  boards 

put  up  and  graded  by  the   Contractor.     The  Contractor  shall   also   provide  and 

,  put  up  suitable  tack  boards  on  the  walls  and  ceilings  on  which  to  run   all  exposed 

pipes.     These  tack  boards  are  to  be  of  the  same  kind  of  wood  as  the  wood  in  the 

rooms,  and  are  to  have  moulded  edges. 


132 


'The  legs  are  often  of -galvanized  iron  furnished  by  the  plumber. 


Tank. 


Construct  a  tank  in  the  attic  where  shown  (2'  wide,  4'  long  and  3'  deep.) 
Form  the  bottom  of  two  thicknesses  of  ii"  surfaced  pine  plank-,  the  top  course 
crossing  the  course  below.  Construct  the  sides  of  i^"  surfaced  pine  plank,  lapping 
at  the  corners.  The  tank  is  to  be  strongly  spiked  together.  Construct  a  cover 
of  matched  and  beaded  pine  boards,  with  i"  x  6"  battens  screwed  on  the  underside. 
Provide  a  hasp  and  padlock  for  the  cover. 


Conservatory. 


Construct  the  conservatory  as  shown  on  the  drawings. 

Form  the  roof  [with  a  galvanized  iron  ventilating  skylight  of  the  full  size  of  the  conserva- 
tory, with  all  cords  and  attachments  complete]  or  [with  (2"  x  2")  white  pine  bars  rebated  for 
the  glass]  glazed  with  ribbed  glass  TV  thick. 

The  sash  in  the  sides  are  to  be  i-J-"  thick  divided  in  lights  as  shown.  The  transoms  are  to 
be  hung  at  the  top  and  are  to  swing  out  with  suitable  hinges  and  transom  adjusters.  The  sash 
below  the  transoms  are  to  be  [stationary]  or  [double  hung  with  weights,  etc.,  the  same  as  for 
other  windows.] 

The  windows  are  to  be  trimmed  inside  with  surfaced  white  pine  and  the  side  walls  ceiled  up  to 
the  sill  and  wherever  required  with  first  quality  ($•"  x  2^")  tongued,  grooved  and  beaded  white  pine. 

[Form  a  slat  floor  over  the  cement  floor  of  i^"  x  2"  while  pine  slats  placed  %"  apart,  made  in 
convenient  sections  and  readily  removable"]  or  J specify  a  wood  floor. }  Provide  five  white  pine 
shelves  on  the  sides  with  standards  neatly  let  in  and  chamfered. 


Clothes  Chute. 


Construct  a  clothes  chute  to  run  from  the  bath  room  to  the  laundry,  as  shown  on  the  drawings. 
Ceil  up  vertically  with  $•"  x  2^"  matched  North  Carolina  pine  ceiling.  Hang  proper  panel  doors 
at  each  floor,  with  suitable  catches.  The  doors  are  to  be  of  wood  to  correspond  with  the  wood  in 
the  rooms. 


Dumb  Waiter.  Line  the  dumb  waiter  'shaft  with  (|"  x  3")  tongued  and  grooved  good  quality 

North  Carolina  pine.     Arrange  a  pocket  for  the  weight  with  pocket  pieces  secured 
with  screws. 

Provide  and    put    up    a  suitable   dumb    waiter   with   all    guides,    ropes    and 
appliances   complete. 

The   lift  is  to  be  strongly    braced    and    is   to    have  a  comb  grained  yellow 
pine  platform. 


Elevator. 


j  Shaft,  Lining,   Doors,  Annunciators,   Indicators,  Safety  Appliances,  Elevator  and  Motor. ' 


'34 


'In  New  York  and  most  cities,  the  shaft  is  required  to  be  fireproof. 


'35 


Refrigerator. 


Construct  the  refrigerator  in  size  [as  shown  on  the  drawings  and  4-6"  high.]  Set  the 
bottom  6"  from  the  floor.  Form  the  outside  casing  of  ash  $"  thick  with  moulded  panels  as  shown. 
Form  the  inside  case  of  $"  surfaced  narrow  matched  pine  boards,  leaving  a  2"  space  filled  with 
[powdered  charcoal]  or  [mineral  wool]  or  [saw  dust.]  Line  the  inside  case  with  zinc  and  form 
two  shelves  of  the  same  material.  Form  the  ice  Box  in  the  top  with  a  [wood  bottom]  or  [zinc 
bottom  covered  with  slats]  and  with  zinc  sides,  and  provide  a  i"  tin  waste  through  to  the  bottom 
of  the  refrigerator. 

Construct  the  door  in  the  side  formed  and  lined  in  the  same  manner  as  the  sides,  and  furnish 
with  suitable  nickel  plated  refrigerator  hinges  and  handle.  Form  the  door  for  putting  in  the  ice 
[on  the  top]  or  [in  the  side]  and  panel  and  line  in  the  same  manner  as  the  sides,  and  furnish  with 
[suitable  nickel  plated  hinges  and  handle]  or  [lifts  to  raise.] 


Cellar  Work. 

Partitions. 


Put  up  the  partitions  where  shown  of  [-£"  x  6"  tongued  and  grooved  good 
quality  white  pine-  run  from  the  floor  to  the  ceiling  vertically,  set  in  a  shoe  at  the 
bottom  and  properly  secured  at  the  top.] 


Coal  Bins.  Construct   the  coal  bins,  with.  3"  x  4"   studs  set  inside,  3'  apart.      Form  the 

sides  with  |"  tongued  and  grooved  surfaced  liemlock,  extending  to  the  ceiling.  The 
fronts  of  the  bins  are  to  have  slides  made  removable  and  doors  hung  and  locked 
complete. 


Laundry  Tubs. 


]See   page    132.' 


Water  Closet. 


Enclose  the  cellar  water  closet  with  material  same  as  the  partitions.  Construct  a  raised  plat- 
form of  [$"  x  3|-"  tongued  and  grooved  good  quality  white  pine  flooring.]  {For  fitting  around  the 
closet,  see  under  Water  Closet,  page  130.] 


Other  Closets. 


Construct  and  fit  up  a  closet  (16"  deep  and  3'  wide)  for  the  electric  batteries.     Provide   with 
two  shelves  and  furnish  and  hang  a  dwarf  panel  door  complete. 

{ Heter  Closet :  door,  etc.}      j Laundry  Closet:  shelves,  door,  etc.  j 


Store  Rooms. 


Fit  up  the  store  room  in  the  cellar  and  enclose  with  the  same  material  as  the  partitions. 
Provide  four  shelves  on  two  sides,  supported  on  cleats  and  with  a  standard  in  the  centre,  all  of 
good  quality  white  pine. 


Drying  Room, 


Provide  and  put  up  six  large  galvanized  iron  line  hooks  irf'the  walls  of  the  drying  room. 

136 


'37 


Swing  Shelves. 


Construct  and  put  up  two  swing  shelves  where  shown  (2'-6"  x  6')  in  size,  hung  from  the 
ceiling  with  [£"  x  i|"  iron  straps  with  a  wood  cross  piece.]  Form  the  bottom  of  surfaced  pine 
boards. 


Bins. 


Construct  two  bins  in  the  vegetable  cellar,  one  above  the  other,  in  size  as  shown,  made  of 
3"  slats  £"  apart  with  a  4"  piece  at  the  front  edge,  all  to  be  of  good  quality  white  pine  properly 
put  up  and  supported. 


Wine  Cellar.  Fit  up  the  wine  cellar  with  shelves  10"  deep  and  9"  apart,  extending  from   the  floor  to  the 

ceiling.  Place  a  •£•"  piece  4"  high  at  the  front  edges  of  the  shelves,  sawed  out  for  the  bottles  with 
half  round  cuts  i£"  wide  and  4"  on  centres. 

Laundry.  Enclose  the  laundry  with  the  same  material  as  the  cellar  partitions.      Construct  a   raised 

platform  for  the  tubs  of  [•£"  x  3^-"  tongued  and  grooved  white  pine  flooring.]  Put  on  the  frame 
and  ewers  furnished  by  the  Plumber. 

Cold  Air  Box.  Construct  and  place  in  the  wall  opening  a  frame  of   i-J-"  pine  plank,  and  pro- 

vide with  a  strong  wire  screen.  Construct  to  the  furnace  from  this  opening  a  box 
of  the  ''size  required,  made  of  •£"  x  10"  matched  pine  boards.  Provide  the  box  with 
a  slide  clamper  and  a  door  opening  into  the  cellar,  hung  with  proper  hinges  and 
secured  with  two  iron  buttons. 


Storm  House. 


Construct  the  storm  house  of  $"  x  2^"  tongued  and  grooved  clear  pine  run  vertically,  screwed 
together  in  sections  with  beveled  cleats  and  made  easily  removable.  [Form  the  door  of  the 
same  material  with  beveled  cleats  screwed  on]  or  [Furnish  a  paneled  door]  with  suitable  spring 
hinges,  handles  and  lock.  Provide  a  four  light  sash  arranged  to  slide. 


Clothes  Posts. 


Furnish  and  set  four  4"  turned  chestnut  clothes  posts  in  the  yard  where  directed.      The  posts 
are  to  stand  8'  out  of  the  ground  and  have  neatly  turned  tops. 


Yard  House. 


Construct  a  yard  house  (4'  x  4')  in  size.  Ceil  up  with  (£•"  x  10")  matched  pine  boards  planed  on 
both  sides.  Construct  a  seat  with  two  large  holes  and  a  low  seat  with  one  small  hole.  Form  the 
risers  f"  thick  and  the  seats  ij".  Provide  lids  over  the  holes  hollowed  out  at  the  front  and  hung 
with  brass  hinges.  Lay  the  floor  with  £"  x  6"  matched  pine  flooring.  Form  the  ceiling  level  7'  highed 
with  £"  x  3-J-"  beaded  pine  ceiling  boards.  Provide  a  four  light  sash  in  the  side  arranged  to  slide 
and  provide  and  hang  a  batten  door  with  a  thumb  latch,  handle  and  lock  complete.  Run  a  vent 
flue  from  the  seat  to  the  roof  with  a  box  at  the  top.  All  this  work  is  to  be  of  good  quality  white 
pine.  Form  the  roof  [with  18"  XXX  sawed  pine  shingle  laid  with  a  5"  lap  on  i"  x  2"  spruce  lath] 
or  [of  boards  the  same  as  the  sides  with  i"  x  2"  strips  nailed  over  the  joints.] 


Temporary  Privy. 


Construct  a  temporary  privy  for  the  workmen, 
and  fill  up  with  earth. 

138 


At  completion,  remove  this  privy,  clean  out 


'The  sectional  area  of  the  cold  air  box  should  be  at  least  f  of  the  total  sectional  area  of  the 
pipes  taken  from  the  furnace. 


'39 


Wood  Cistern. 
Cistern  Cover. 


Construct  a  cistern  cover  for  the  brick  cistern.     The  cover  is  to  be  2-6"  square  of  6"  x 
matched  spruce  boards,  with  two  cleats  beveled  and  screwed  on. 


Terrace  Steps. 


Construct  the  terrace  steps  of  surfaced  white  pine  with  2"  treads  and  strings,  and  f"  risers. 


Board  Walks. 


•  Lay  a  board  walk  {specify  where  and  width}.  [Put  down  2"  x  4"  chestnut  string  pieces  laid 
on  edge,  and  over  them  lay  2"  x  10"  surfaced  hemlock  boards  well  spiked]  or  [Put  down  three 
2"  x  4"  chestnut  string  pieces  laid  on  edge  and  over  them  lay  i"  x  10"  surfaced  hemlock  boards 
well  nailed]. 


Fences. 

Board. 


Construct  a  board  fence  (6')  high  {specify  where}.  Set  up  (5")  squared  chestnut  posts  (6') 
apart.  Put  up  £"  matched  spruce  boards,  surfaced  both  sides,  [run  vertically  and  nailed  t6  three 
2"  x  4"  planed  spruce  string  pieces]  or  [run  horizontally].  Place  a  beveled  cap  at  the  top.  Form 
the  gate  in  the  same  manner  as  the  fence,  with  i"  x  6'  beveled  cleats  screwed  on.  Provide  with 
large  wrought  iron  T  hinges,  handle,  thumb  latch  and  lock  complete. 


Picket. 


Construct  a  picket  fence  (4')  high  {specify  where}.  Set  up  5"  squared  and  tapered  chestnut 
posts  (6')  apart.  Put  up  two  2"  x  4"  surfaced  Norway  pine  rails.  Put  on  the  pickets  [i^"  square, 
pointed  at  the  top]  or  [•£•"  x  2%"  sawed  at  the  top]  and  set  2\"  apart.  Construct  the  gates  in  the 
same  manner  with  2"  x  4"  stiles  and  rails,  framed  together  and  properly  braced.  Provide  with 
gate  hinges  and  latches  complete. 


Iron. 


Furnish  and  put  in  {specify  where}  a  [wire  fence  3 '-6"  high  with  Anchor  Post  Company's  No.  2 
wrought  iron  Anchor  posts  set  6'  apart  with  three  heavy  lNo.  p  posts  at  the  ends,  corners  and  all 
gates.  The  fence  is  to  have  a  top  rail  of  wrought  iron  pipe,  if"  outside  diameter,  and  four 
strands  of  galvanized  ribbon  wire,]  or  [pipe  fence  3'  high  ^\\.\\- Anchor  Post  Company's  No.  5 
Anchor  posts  set  6'  apart  with  heavy  No.  9  posts  at  ends,  corners  and  all  gates.  The  fence  is  to 
consist  of  three  rows  of  wrought  iron  pipe,  if"  outside  diameter,  set  12"  on  centres.] 

Furnish  and  put  in  where  directed  one  Anchor  Post  Company's  single  [gate  No.  i]  or  [pipe  gate 
to  match]  and  also  where  directed  a  double  drive  [gate  No.  i]  or  [pipe  gate  to  match.] 


146 


'These  fences  are  used  in  a  variety  of  combinations  from  simple  pipe  fences  to  elaborate 
ornamental  patterns.     The  posts  are  made  to  suit  the  different  designs. 


Hardware. 

All  the  following  hardware  is  to  be  ^furnished  and  put  on  by 
the  Contractor.     The  goods  are  to  be  Russell  &  Erwin  Manu- 
facturing Company's    make,    unless    otherwise    specified,   and    the 
numbers  here  given  refer  to  their  'catalogue.     All  hardware  is  to 
be  properly  put  on  with  screws  in  finish  to  match. 


Sash  Hardware. 

Double  Hung. 


Locks. 
Lifts. 


All  double  hung  sash  in  -J  mention  rooms j  -are  to  have  bronze 
sash  locks  No.  (320)  and  two  bronze  flush  lifts  No.  (054)  to  each 
sash.  All  other  double  hung  sash — 


Single. 


Locks. 
Lifts. 


All  single  sliding  sash  are  to  have  lifts  and  locks  combined 
No.  (oioo)  in  finish  to  match  the  other  hardware  in  the  rooms. 


Cellar. 


Hinges. 

Buttons. 

Hooks. 


All  single  cellar  sash  are  to  have  two  iron  hinges  (2 
two  iron  buttons  and  two  iron  hooks  and  staples. 


Casement. 


Hinges. 
Adjusters. 


All  casement  windows  are  to  have  two  bronze  hinges  (3^"  x 
No.   (60)    and  casement  adjusters  No.  20,  15". 


French. 


Hinges. 

Locks. 
Handles. 

Bolts. 


All  French  casement  windows  are  to  have  bronze  hinges  (4" 
x  4")  No.  (60),  lock  No.  (057)  and  bronze  lever  handles  and 
escutcheons  No.  (708).  The  standing  door  is  to  have  bronze 
mortise  bolts  No.  (20)  12"  long  [one  at  top  and  one  at  bottom]. 


Doors  under 
Windows. 


Storm  Sash, 


Hinges. 

Bolts. 
Catches. 

Locks. 


Hinges. 

Adjusting  plates. 
Catches. 


Where  there  are  doors  below  the  sash,  the  doors  are  to  be 
hung  with  (3^'  x  3^")  bronze  butts.  Provide  for  such  doors  (3") 
mortise  bolts  No.  (6£)  to  go  into  the  floor,  a  catch  at  the  side,  No. 
(0120),  and  a  lift  and  catch  combined,  No.  (oioo),  to  go  on  the 
lower  sash.  All  are  to  be  in  finish  to  match  the  other  hardware 
in  the  rooms. 


142 


'When  the  finishing  hardware  is  not  included  in  the  Carpenter's  Specification,  the  specifica- 
tion might  read  as  follows  : 

"The  Contractor  is  to  furnish  all  rough  hardware,  including  all  sash  cords,  weights  and 
pulleys  :  also  all  door  stops  and  all  finishing  cellar  hardware.  All  other  finishing  hardware  is  to 
be  furnished  by  the  Owner  and  put  in  by  the  Contractor.  The  Contractor  is  to  furnish  a  list  of 
such  hardware  for  the  convenience  of  the  Owner  in  ordering." 

'Hardware  can,  perhaps.,  be  more  definitely  specified  by  numbers  than  in  any  other  way. 
Tables  might  be  prepared  of  the  hardware  most  used,  which  would  be  convenient  for  reference  and 
from  which  the  numbers  could  be  obtained  for  ordinary  work,  without  the  trouble  of  referring  to 
the  catalogues.  As  an  example  of  how  such  tables  might  be  arranged  the  following  has  been 
inserted: 


RUSSELL  &  ERWIN  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY. 


Front  Door  Locks 

Vestibule  Door  Locks 

Knobs,  Front  Door 

Escutcheons,  Front  Door 

Escutcheons,  Vestibule  Door 

Push  Buttons 

Locks,  Mortise,  inside   

Knobs,   inside    , 

Escutcheons,  inside 

Locks,  Sliding  Door,  Single 

Locks,  Sliding  Door,  Double   , 

Locks,  Sliding  Doors,  Astragal 

Escutcheons,  Sliding  Door 

Butts 

Sash  Fasts 

Sash  Lifts,  Flush ... 

Sash  Lifts,  Hook 

Cupboard   Turns 

Drawer  Pulls 

Shutter  Butts 

Shutter  Bars 

Shutter  Knobs 

Flush  Bolts 

Mortise  Door  Bolts.  . 


FINISH. 

2  Dark   Bronze. 

4  Nickel  Plated. 

6  Dark  Copper. 

7  Old  Copper. 

7$  Mottled  Old  Copper. 


C1230 
CI232 

1806 
1919 
1919 

96^ 

01764 
1805 
1920 
0034^ 

0034 

0034 3/ 

1336 

bo 

320 

054 

"79 

OI2O 
041 

107 
160 

055 
28 


ROCOCO. 

CI23O 
CI232 

6O2 

720 

721 

720 
01704 

601 

721 

0034^ 

0034 

0034^ 

425 
60 

320 

724 
722 

OI20 

725 

107 
160 
728 
726 
6)4 


ROPE  EDGE. 

CI23O 
CI232 

388 

075 

075 

75)4 
01764 

387 

077^ 
003  41A 
0034 
0034^ 

038 
60 

320 

074 

'79 

0120 
041 
107 

160 

055 


DESCRIPTION  OF  FINISHES. 

FINISH. 

8  Oxidized  Silver. 

S£  Oxidized  Silver,  Mottled. 

9  Dull  Brass. 

10  Polished   Brass. 

1 1  Polished  Bronze. 


PLAIN 

BRONZE. 

CI23O 

CI232 

378 

014-1 

0144 

65)4 
01764 

377 

0147^ 
0034)4 
0034 


0346 

60 

320 

054 

I7<J 

0120 
041 
107 
If  0 

055 
28 

6)4 


BRONZE 

PLATED. 

OI24 

0124^ 

989 

521)4 

522)4 

64)4 

7710 
7989 

7528)4 
01330)4 
01330 
01330% 

01333 
7004 

73" 
154 
7179 
7»5 
7141 

I2O 

7l6o 

7008 

2O 


KAHALA. 

724 

724)4 


S512)4 

^62 
1724 
S985 
8538)4 
8034)^ 
8034 
803  J% 
8334)4 
8004 
8315 
8ot2 
8077 
8414 
8141 
8007 
8032 
8032 
8106 


FINISH. 

1 8  Satin  Silver. 

19  Gold. 

28  Satin  Silver,  Sand  finish. 

29  Gold,   Sand  finish. 


'43 


Door  Hardware. 


Front  and  Vestibule. 


The  front  and  vestibule  doors  are  to  have  mortise  locks  with 
bronze  faces   Nos.  (01230  and  ci232)  with  night  latches  and   keys 


Locks. 
Knobs. 
Hinges. 

Pushbuttons.       complete  ;  knobs,  bronze  No.  (378)  ;  hinges,  bronze  No.  (60)  5"  x  5" 
Bells.  three  to  each  door;  [push  buttons,  bronze  No.  (65!)]  or  [bell  pull, 

Combination  letter      bronze  No>  ^fi  and  beu  No.   (38)]. 
boxesand  bell  pulls. 


For  double  doors. 


Bolts.  The  vestibule  door  is  to  have  a  safety  chain  door  fastener  of 

bronze  No.  (15). 

The  front  standing  door  is  to  have  bronze  mortise  bolts   No. 
(28),  (18")  long  at  top  and  (12")  at  bottom. 


For  single  door. 
For  Dutch  door. 


The  front  door  is  to  have  a  (3")  bronze  mortise  bolt   No.  (o6|). 

The  vestibule  door  is  to  have  two  (3")  bronze  mortise  bolts,  one 
on  each  section  of  the  door  into  the  jamb ;  also,  one  Dutch  door 
bolt  No.  (055)  between  the  sections. 


Check. 


The  front  door  is  to  have  a  Bardsley  Liquid  door  spring  and 
check,  size  C. 


Storm. 


Spring  hinges. 
Handles. 


The  storm  doors  are  to    have   Bommer's  (6")  spring   hinges 
with  one  bronze  handle  No.  (0765)  on  each  door. 


Sliding. 


Sheaves. 

Track. 

Locks. 

Pulls. 

Escutcheons. 


All  sliding  doors  are    to    have    Climax  sheaves  and  tracks ; 
mortise  locks  No.  (0034!) ;  bronze  escutcheons  No.  (0346). 


Double  Acting. 


Hinges. 
Push  plates. 


All  double  acting  doors  are  to  have  Bardsley  double   acting 
checking  spring  hinges  No.  (i^)and  bronze  push  plates  No.  (052). 


144 


'45 


Ordinary. 


Locks. 

Knobs. 

Escutcheons. 

Roses. 

Hinges. 


All  doors  in  \ mention  rooms [  are  to  have  mortise  locks  No. 
(01764);  ^Bardsley  ball  hardwood  knobs  No.  (ill);  bronze 
escutcheons  and  roses  No.  (0147^);  and  bronze  hinges  No.  (60) 
4"  x  4"  in  size. 

All  other  doors — 


Bolts. 


All  | mention |  doors  are  to  have  (3")  mortise  bolts  No. 


Springs. 


All  | mention!  doors  are  to  have  Bardsley  single  check  spring 
hinges  No.  (i£). 


All  doors  opening  into  a  main  room  from  closets  or  inferior 
rooms  must  have  hardware  on  both  sides  to  correspond  with  the 
hardware  in  the  main  rooms.  All  doors  over  7'  high  are  to  have 


three  hinges  to  each  door. 


Stops. 


Transoms. 


Trap. 


Hinges. 
Adjusters. 


Hinges. 

Ring  lifts. 

Bolts. 


All  doors  throughout  are  to  have  Bardsley  hardwood  turned 
stops  with  rubber  tips  No.  (131)  for  walls  and  No.  134  for  floors. 
Where  rooms  are  trimmed  with  hardwood  they  are  to  match  the 
trim.  In  other  cases  they  are  to  be  of  oak. 

Hang  all  transoms  over  doors  with  3"  x  3"  hinges  and  provide 
with  bronze  lifts  No.  (33). 


Scuttle. 


Hinges. 
Hooks. 
Bolts. 


Cellar  Hatchway. 


Hinges. 
Lock,  bolt  or  bar. 


Water  Closet. 


Spring  hinges. 

Indicating  bolts. 

Clothes  hooks. 


146 


'BARDSLEY'S  WOOD  DOOR  KNOBS. 

PATTERNS.  CLASS  B. 


Box.  Round.  Ball.         Egg.        Oval.      Fluted.  Box.      Round.       Ball. 

Bronze  Rose 100          102  no          113          114 

Wood  Rose  with  Plate 101  103  in  115 

Wood  Rose 116          104  112  n6B       1048       112  B 


"47 


Store  Doors. 


Blind 
Hardware. 

Outside. 


Handles  or  knobs. 
Locks. 
Bolts. 


Hinges. 

Fasteners. 

Adjusters. 

Inside  openers. 


Shutters. 


Hinges. 

Bars. 

Flaps. 
Knobs. 


Venetian. 


Cord  Fasteners. 
Hooks. 


Sliding. 
Rolling  Partitions. 


Lifts. 


Tracks. 
Sheaves. 

Pull  plates  or  handles. 
Locks. 


Screens.  Lifts  for  sliding  frames. 

Hinges,  hooks,  catches,  for  swinging  frames. 
Hinges,  catches  or  locks  for  doors. 


Closets. 


Drawer  pulls. 

Catches. 

Locks. 

Clothes  hooks. 


148 


'49 


Electrical 

SPECIFICATION    of    the   labor    and    material    to    be    furnished    in    the 
installation    of    the    electric    work    in    the  frame  house   to    be    constructed    for 
Mr. 
at 

in  accordance  with  the  accompanying  drawings  and  this  specification  and  under 
the  supervision  of 

Architect, 


General 
Conditions. 

Inspection. 


Cutting. 


|  address  [ 


•)  date  \ 


For  General  Conditions  see  page  2.  J- 


All  the  work  herein  included  is  to  be  done  according  to  the  rules  and 
regulations  of  the  National  Board  of  Fire  Underwriters  and  also  is  to  be  subject 
to  the  inspection  and  approval  of  the  Local  Board  of  Fire  Underwriters,  and  is  to 
be  inspected  by  their  Inspectors.  The  Contractor  is  to  pay  all  charges  for  such 
inspection  and  is  to  obtain  satisfactory  certificates  from  the  Inspectors  and  deliver 
them  to  the  Architect.  The  system  must  test  free  from  all  grounds. 

The  Contractor  is  to  do  all  necessary  cutting  and  boring  of  beams. 

T5° 


Standard  Rules 

Adopted  by 

The  National    Electric  Light  Association 

At  Washington,    1894. 

Class  A Central  Stations  and  Isolated  Plants 

for  Light  or  Power.    (Omitted.) 


electric  light  or  power  wires,  and  should  not 
be  placed  on  the  same  structure  or  pole. 


Class  B Arc  (Series)  Systems. 

Outside  Conductors. 

All  outside  overhead  conductors  (including 
services) : 

1.  Must  be  covered    with    some   insulating 
material,  not  easily  abraded. 

2.  Must  be  firmly  secured  to  properly  insu- 
lated and  substantially  built  supports,  all  the 
wires  having  an  insulation  equal  to  that  of  the 
conductors  they  confine. 

3.  Must  be  so  placed  that  moisture  cannot 
form  a  cross-connection    between    them,    not 
less  than  a  foot  apart,  and  not  in  contact  with 
any   substance    other   than    proper   insulating 
supports. 

4.  Must  be  at  least    seven    feet  above  the 
highest  point  of  flat  roofs  and  at  least  one  foot 
above  the  ridge  of  pitched   roofs  over  which 
they  pass  or  to  which  they  are  attached. 

5.  Must  be  protected,  whenever  necessary,  in 
view  of  possible  accidents  to   conductors   or 
supports,    from    possibility    of    contact    with 
other  conducting  wires  or  substances  to  which 
current    may  leak,    by    dead    insulated    guard 
irons    or    wires.      Special    precautions    of    this 
kind  must  be  taken  where  sharp  angles  occur, 
or  where  any  wires  might    possibly  come  in 
contact  with  electric  light  or  power  wires. 

6.  Must  be  provided  with  petticoat  insula- 
tors of   glass  or  porcelain.      Porcelain  knobs, 
cleats  and  rubber  hooks  are  prohibited. 

7.  Must  be  so  spliced  or  joined  as  to  be  both 
mechanically  and  electrically   secure    without 
solder.     They  must  then  be  soldered  to  insure 
preservation  and  covered  with   an    insulation 
equal  to  that  on  the  conductors. 

8.  The  following  formula  for  soldering  fluid 
is  approved: 

Saturated  Solution  of  Zinc.  .   5  parts. 

Alcohol 4  parts. 

Glycerine i  part. 

9.  Conductors  should  not  be  run  over,    or 
attached    to,    buildings   other  than    those   in 
which   light  or  power  is  being,    or  is  to  be, 
used,    but    on    separate    poles   or   structures 
always  easily  inspected. 

Service  Blocks. 

1.  Must  be  covered  over  their  entire  surface 
with  at  least  two  coats  of  waterproof  paint  and 
so  maintained. 

2.  Telegraph,   telephone   and   similar  wires 
must   not   be   placed  on   the  same  arm  with 


Interior  Conductors. 

All   Interior  Conductors. 

1.  Must  be,  where  they  enter  buildings  from 
outside  terminal  insulators  to  and  through  the 
walls,  covered   with   extra  waterproof  insula- 
tion, and  must  have  drip  loops  outside,  prefer- 
ably  slanting   upward  toward   the  inside,  and 
bushed  with  waterproof  and  non-combustible 
insulating  tube. 

2.  Must  be  arranged  to  enter  and  leave  the 
building   through    a    double    contact    service 
switch,   which  will  effectually  close  the  main 
circuit  and  disconnect  the  interior  wires  when 
it  is  turned    "off."     The  switch  must  be  so 
constructed  that  it  shall  be  automatic  in  its 
action,    not    stopping    between    points    when 
started,  and  prevent  an  arc  between  the  points 
under  all  circumstances  ;  it  must  indicate  on 
inspection  whether  the  current  be    "on"  or 
"off,"  and  be  mounted  on  a  non-combustible 
base  in  a  position  where  it  can  be  kept  free 
from  moisture  and  easy  of  access  to  police  or 
firemen. 

3.  Must    be    always    in    plain    sight,    never 
covered,    except    in    special    cases,   where    an 
armored  tube  may  be  necessary. 

4.  Must  be  covered  in  all  cases  with  a  water- 
proof non  combustible  material  that  will  adhere 
to  the  wire,  not  fray  by  friction,  and  bear  a 
temperature  of  150°  F.  without  softening. 

5.  Must  be  in  dry  places  kept  rigidly  apart 
at  least  ten  inches,  except  when  covered  (in 
addition  to  insulation)  by  waterproof  non-con- 
ducting  and    non-inflammable    tubing,    which 
must  be  strong  enough  to  protect  the  insulating 
covering  from  injury.    Conductors  thus  placed 
may  be  run  not  less  than  three  inches  apart, 
and  be  fastened  with  staples,  under  which  are 
placed  mechanically  rigid  insulating  strips  or 
saddles  of  greater  width  than  the  metal  of  the 
staple,   by  which   possibility  of  injury  to  the 
tube  may  be  prevented. 

6.  Must  be  in  damp  places  attached  to  glass 
or    porcelain    insulators,    and    separated    ten 
inches  or  more. 

7.  Must   be,    when    passing   through  walls, 
floors,  timbers  or  partitions,  treated  as  in  cen- 
tral stations  under  like  conditions. 


Lamps  and  Other  Devices. 

Arc  Lamps. 

i.   Must  be  carefully  isolated  from   inflam- 
mable material. 


Electric  Light- 
ing. 

Tubing. 


Wiring. 


Arrangement. 


The  building  is  to  be  equipped  for  continuous  wiring  from  the  source  of 
supply  to  each  outlet  to  be  wired,  with  ^approved  tubing  providing  a  continuous  and 
perfectly  tight  channel  from  end  to  end  for  the  wires.  All  tubes  are  to  be  of 
sufficient  size  to  allow  the  wires  to  be  readily  drawn  in,  withdrawn  or  re-instated 
at  will.  All  tubes  must  be  secured  in  position  with  metal  or  wire  clips. 

All  wires  for  electric  lighting  are  to  be  rubber  covered,  insulated,  white  core 
approved  wire,  98-''  pure  copper.  The  wires  are  to  be  run  complete  ready  for  the 
attachment  of  the  fixtures  and  service  wires.  The  sizes  of  wires  are  to  be  deter- 
mined on  the  basis  of  each  lamp  requiring  '(50)  volts  and  2(i)  ampere.  No  wire, 
however,  is  to  be  smaller  than  No.  14  B.  and  S.  gauge,  increasing  the  3size  as  the 
number  of  lights  and  length  of  circuits  require.  In  all  cases  the  size  of  wires  is 
to  be  (5*)  in  excess  of  their  possible  load.  The  wires  are  not  to  be  drawn  in  the 
tubes  until  after  the  building  is  dry.  [No  two  wires  of  opposite  polarity  are  to 
be  run  in  4one  tube.] 

There  is  to  be  one  group  of  risers  throughout  the  building.  The  wiring 
on  each  floor  must  radiate  from  one  central  point  of  distribution,  taking  in  all 
the  outlets.  All  wiring  is  to  be  Continuous  from  the  sectional  switch  to  the 
last  outlet  on  such  circuit.  A  loop  is  to  be  left  for  the  metre  just  inside  of 
the  main  line  switch. 


Distribution 

of  Outlets,  Lights  and 

Switches. 


The    building    is    to  contain   the   following    number    of    outlets,    lights    and 
switches,  distributed  as  follows : 


BRACKETS. 


CHANDELIERS.        SWITCHES. 


TOTALS. 


FLOOR.  ROOM.  Number.     Lights  each.  Number.     Lights  each. 

First.      Parlor 4  2  i 

First.      Dining  Room.  ...      2  3  i 

Second.  Front  Chamber..      22  i 

[Etc.  | 


hts  each. 

Outlets. 

Lights. 

Switches. 

6                i 

5 

14 

i 

6                i 

3 

12 

I 

4                 i 

3 

8 

I 

1 1 


34 


Cut  Outs.  The  Contractor  will  provide  an  approved  cut    out   box  on   the  main  line  at 

the  point  of  entrance  and  also  one  on  each  floor  [of  slate]  or  [the  Contractor  is 
to  line  these  boxes  with  10  Ib.  sheet  asbestos.]  The  Owner  is  to  provide  the 
trim  and  door  for  the  same. 


'52 


'Iron  or  brass  armored  conduit  tubing  is  required  in  New  York. 

"The  voltage  and  ampere  capacity  should  be  governed  by  the  public  supply.  Thus  in  New 
York  115  volts  and  about  £  ampere  would  be  all  that  would  be  required.  The  lower  the  voltage 
the  larger  the  wires  required. 

'The  area  of  wires  should  be  governed  by  the  amount  of  current  which  will  be  required  in  the 
building. 

4The  rules  in  most  localities  now  require  this  double  tubing.  If  iron  armored  conduits  are 
used,  two  wires  are  allowed  tQ  be  run  in  one  tube  up  to  5  amperes. 

'Electric  light  wiring  should  always  be  "continuous,"  that  is,  both  wires  of  a  circuit  should  be 
run  so  as  to  take  in  all  outlets  on  the  circuit  instead  of  branching  off  to  some  of  the  outlets.  This 
continuous  wiring  leaves  but  one  end  to  each  circuit  instead  of  several  ends. 


2.  Must  be  provided  at  all  times  with  a  glass 
globe  surrounding  the  arc,  securely  fastened 
upon  a  closed  base.     No  broken  or  cracked 
globes  may  be  used. 

3.  Must  be  provided  with   a  hand  switch, 
also  an  automatic  switch,  that  will  shunt  the 
current  around  the  carbons  should  they  fail  to 
feed  properly. 

4.  Must  be  provided  with  reliable  stops  to 
prevent  carbons  from  falling  out  in  case  the 
clamps  become  loose. 

5.  Must  be  carefully  insulated  from  the  cir- 
cuit in  all  their  exposed  parts. 

6.  Must  be,  where  inflammable  material,  is 
near  or  under  the  lamps,  provided  with  a  wire 
netting  around  the  globe  and  a  spark-arrester 
above,    to    prevent   escape  of  sparks,    melted 
copper  or  carbon. 

7.  Incandescent  lamps  in  series  circuits,  hav- 
ing a  maximum  potential  of  350  volts  or  over, 
must  be  governed  by  the  same  rules  as  for  arc 
lights,  and  each   series  lamp  provided  with  a 
hand    switch    and    automatic    cut-out  switch; 
when  lights  are  in  multiple  series,  such  switches 
and  cut-outs  must  not  control  less  than  a  single 
group  of  lights.     Electro- magnetic  devices  for 
switches  are  not  approved. 

8.  Under  no  circumstances  will  incandescent 
lamps  on  series  circuits  be  allowed  to  be  at- 
tached to  gas  fixtures. 


Class    C.    Overhead    Conductors,    Incandescent 
(Low  Pressure)  Systems. 

300  Voits  or  Less. 
Outside  Overhead  Conductors. 

1.  Must    be    erected    in    accordance    with 
general  rules  for  Arc  (Series)  Circuit  Conduc- 
tors. 

2.  Must  be  separated  not  less  than  six  inches 
where  they  enter  buildings  as  service  conduc- 
tors, and  be  provided  with  a  double  pole  fusi- 
ble cut-out,  as  near  as  possible  to  the  point  of 
entrance  to  the  building,  and  outside  the  walls 
when  practicable. 

Underground  Conductors, 
i.   Must  be  provided  with  suitable  protect- 


ing devices  at  the  ends  of  tube  or  conduit 
services  inside  the  walls  of  buildings,  as  a 
guard  against  moisture  and  injury. 

2.  Must  be  terminated  at  a  properly  placed 
double  pole  house  cut-out. 

3.  Must  be  of  specially  insulated  conductors 
after  leaving  the  tube  or  conduit,  and  separated 
by  at  least  ten  inches,  until  the  double  pole  cut- 
out is  reached. 

Inside  Wiring. 

1.  Where    practicable    wire    should    be   so 
placed  that  in  the  event  of  the  failure  or  dete- 
rioration of  their  insulating  covering  the  con- 
ductors under  this  condition  will  still  remain 
insulated. 

2.  At  the  entrance  of  every  building  there 
shall  be   a  double  pole  switch  placed  in  the 
service  conductors,  whereby  the  current  may 
be  entirely  cut  off. 

Conductors. 

1.  Must  not  be  of  sizes  smaller  than  No.  16 
B.  &  S.,  No.  18  B.  W.  G.,  or  No.  3  E.  S.  G. 

2.  Must  not  be  paraffin  covered. 

3    Must  not  be   covered    with   soft   rubber 
tube. 

4.  Must  not  be  laid    in  mouldings  of   any 
kind  in  damp  places. 

5.  Must  not  be  laid  in  mouldings  with  open 
grooves  against  the  wall  or  ceiling. 

6.  Must  not  be  laid  in  mouldings  where  less 
than  half  an  inch  of  solid  insulation  is  between 
parallel  wire,  and   between  wires  and  walls  or 
ceilings. 

7.  Must   not  be  laid  in  plaster,  cement  JOT 
similar  finish,  without  an  exterior  metallic  pro- 
tection. 

8.  Mouldings,  where  admissible,  must  have 
at  least  two  coatings  of  waterproof  paint,  to 
be  impregnated  with  a  moisture  repellent. 

Cleatwork. 

1.  Cleatwork    is   not   desirable,   and   cleats 
must  not  be  used  unless  in  a  very  dry  place. 

2.  Must  not  be  used  unless  in  a  place  per- 
fectly open  for  inspection  at  any  time. 

3.  Must  not  be  used  unless  they  are  of  por- 
celain, or  well-seasoned  wood,  filled,  to  prevent 
absorption  of  moisture. 


Switches. 


The  Contractor  is  to  provide  and  put  in  a  double  pole  covered  main  line  cut 
out  block  at  the  point  of  entrance,  fused  for  the  entire  number  of  lights  in  the 
building.  He  is  also  to  put  in  on  each  floor  the  necessary  number  of  [double  pole 
branch  cut  out  blocks]  or  [fuse  tablets]  fused  to  the  proper  number  of  lights  and 
placed  in  the  cut  out  boxes. 

The  Contractor  is  to  provide  a  double  pole  main  line  "knife"  switch  of 
approved  pattern  and  'place  it  just  inside  of  the  main  line  cut  out.  Each  circuit  is 
to  be  provided  with  a  double  pole  snap  switch  of  approved  make,  located  as 
specified  in  the  schedule  and  connected  with  the  circuits. 


Fixtures.  All  fixtures  are  to  be  put  up   and  connected  complete  with  mica   insulating 

joints  and  porcelain  covered  double  pole  porcelain  cut  outs. 


Burglar  Alarm. 


The  Contractor  is  to  provide  and  place  in  the  second  story  where  directed,  one 
six  drop  automatic  burglar  alarm  indicator  of  wood  to  match  the  trim.  A  (6") 
nickle  plated  bell  is  to  be  placed  where  directed.  The  indicator  is  to  have  bell  and 
battery  test,  silent  test,  continuous  ring,  and  night  set  switches  and  six  sectional 
switches  controlling  the  following  sections : 

[Section  No.    i.      Hall.      2   Windows,      i    Door.] 

I  Etc.! 


Springs.  All  these  windows  and  doors  are  to   be  provided  with  suitable  springs  cut  in 

and  connected,  protecting  both  sashes  on  all  windows  and  allowing  a  (6")  opening 
of  the  top  sashes  in  second  story  only.  All  springs  on  doors  are  to  have  broad 
faces. 


Wiring. 


Batteries. 


All  wiring  for  the  burglar  alarm  is  to  be  done  with  No.  18  B.  and  S. 
gauge  damp  proof  office  wires,  running  them  through  and  between  the  beams 
and  partitions  and  using  no  tacks  nor  staples.  This  wiring  is  to  be  protected 
by  tubing  against  all  brick  walls  and  iron  work.  All  joints  and  splices  are  to 
be  covered  with  rubber  tape. 

Provide  and  place  in  position  approved  carbon  cylinder  batteries  of  sufficient 
power  to  insure  the  satisfactory  working  of  the  burglar  alarm  system. 


'For  city  work  this  switch  should  be  placed  close  to  the  building  line  where  it  can  easily  be 
operated  by  firemen  in  case  of  fire. 


4.  Must  not   be   used    unless   they   are   so 
arranged  that  wires  of  opposite  polarity,  with 
a  difference  of  potential  of  ijo  volts  or  less, 
will  be  kept  at  least  two  and  one-half  inches 
apart,  and  that  where  a  higher  voltage  is  used 
this  distance  be  increased  proportionately. 

5.  Must  not  be  used  unless  there  is  a  back- 
ing provided,  of  wood  at  least   half   an  inch 
thick,    well    seasoned   and    filled,    to   prevent 
absorption  of  moisture. 

Metal  Staples. 

1.  Metal    staples   must    never    be   used  to 
fasten  conductors  unless  provided  with   an  in- 
sulating sleeve  or  saddle  rigidly  attached  to 
the    metal    of    the  staple,   and    having    such 
strength  and  surface  as  to  prevent  mechanical 
injury  to  the  insulation  of  the  conductor. 

2.  Must  never  be  used  to  fasten  conductors 
unless   under   conditions    in    which   cleatwork 
would  be  acceptable,  or  where  driven  into  a 
moulding  specially  adapted  for  open  work. 

Special  Wiring. 

1.  Wherever  conductors  cross  gas,  water,  or 
other  metallic  pipes,  or  any  other  conductors 
or  conducting  material  (except  arc  light  wires), 
they  should  be  separated  therefrom  by  some 
continuous    non-conductor  at  least  one  inch. 
In  crossing  arc  light  wires  the  low  tension  con- 
ductors must  be  placed    at   a  distance  of  at 
least  six  inches.     In   wet  places  an   air  space 
must  be  left  between  conductors  and  pipes  in 
crossing,  and  the  former  must  be  run  in  such  a 
way  that  they  cannot  come  in  contact  with  the 
pipe  accidentally.     Wires  should  be  run  over 
all  pipes  upon    which  condensed    moisture   is 
likely  to  gather,  or  which  by  leakage  might 
cause  trouble  on  a  circuit. 

2.  In  rooms  where  inflammable  gases  may 
exist,  or  where  the  atmosphere  is  damp,  the 
incandescent  lamp  and  socket  should  be  en- 
closed in  a  vapor-tight  globe.     This  is  not  to 
be  understood  to  include  rooms  where  illumin- 
ating gases  are  used  in  the  ordinary  manner. 

3.  In   breweries,  stables,  dye-houses,  paper 
and   pulp   mills   or   other   buildings   specially 
liable  to  moisture,  all  conductors,  except  where 
used  for  pendants: 

4.  Must  be  separated  at  least  six  inches. 

5.  Must  be  provided  with  a  durable,  mois- 
ture-proof covering. 

6.  Must  be  carefully  put  up. 

7.  Must  be  supported  by  porcelain  or  glass 
insulators. 

8.  Moisture-proof  and  non-inflammable  tub- 
ing may  be  accepted  in  lieu  of  such  construc- 
tion. 


9.   No  switches  or  fusible  cut-outs  will  be 
allowed  in  such  places. 

Interior  Conduits. 

1.  Must  not  be  combustible. 

2.  Must  not  be  of  such  material  or  construc- 
tion that  will  be  injured  by  plaster,  cement, 
or  other  surrounding  material,  or  that  the  in- 
sulation of  the  conductor  will   ultimately   be 
injured  or  destroyed  by  the  elements  of  its 
composition. 

3.  Must  not   be   so   constructed   or  placed 
that  difficulty  will  be  experienced  in  removing 
or  replacing  the  conductors. 

4.  Must  be  continuous   from    one  junction 
box  to  another  or  to  fixtures,  and  of  non-in- 
flammable   material,    and     of    a    substantial 
character  as  in  the  case  of  the  existing  gas 
and  water  pipes,  in  order  to  afford  mechanical 
protection  from  injury  by  saws,  chisels  or  nails. 

5.  Whenever  practicable,  pipes  for  all  pur- 
poses must  be  kept  from  the  conduits  or  wire- 
ways  and  under  no  circumstances  must  steam 
pipes  be  placed  therein. 

6.  Architects   and    builders   should  provide 
suitable  wire-ways  or  openings  in  all  buildings 
at  the   time   of  their   construction,    in  which 
could  be  placed  electric   wires  and  conduits 
according  to  the  requirements  of  the  building. 

7.  Prior   to    the    insulation    of    the    wires, 
powdered  soapstone  should   be  blown  through 
the  conduit  tubes  to  facilitate  the  drawing  in 
of  the  same. 

8.  Must  not  be  depended   upon  for  insula- 
tion.    The  conductors  should  be  covered  with 
moisture-proof  material. 

9.  The  object   of   a  tube   or  conduit  is  to 
facilitate   the  insertion  or  extraction   of   the 
conductors,  to  protect  them  from  mechanical 
injury  and,  as  far  as  possible,  from  moisture. 

10.  Conductors   passing    through    walls   or 
ceilings  must  be  encased  in  a  suitable  tubing, 
which  must  extend  at  least  one  inch  beyond 
the  finished  surface  until  the  mortar,  or  other 
similar  material,  be  entirely  dry,  when  the  pro- 
jection may  be  reduced  to  half  an  inch. 

Double  Pole  Safety  Cut-Outs. 

1.  Must  be  placed  where  the  overhead  or 
underground  conductors  enter  a  building  and 
join  the  inside  wires. 

2.  Must  be  placed  at  every  point  where  a 
change  is  made  in  the  size  of  the  wire   (unless 
the  cut-out  in  the  larger  wire  will  protect  the 
smaller).   This  includes  all  flexible  conductors. 
All  such  junctions  must  be  in  plain  sight. 

3.  Must  be  constructed  with  bases  of  non- 
combustible  and  moisture-proof  material. 


Electric  Gas 
Lighting. 


Provide  and  place  in  position  the  following  automatic  and  pendent  burners 
with  all  the  necessary  wiring  to  the  various  outlets,  the  fixtures  to  be  wired 
inside  the  shell  of  the  chandelier  wherever  possible  : 


FLOOR. 

First. 
Second. 


ROOM. 
Hall. 
Hall. 


PENDANTS. 
3 


AUTOMATIC. 

I 
I 


Automatics.  The  control  of  the  various  automatic  burners  is  to  be  as  follows  : 

One  /zw-light  key  placed  in  the  first  story  hall  to  control  the  first  and  second  story  hall  lights. 
One  /zw-light  key  placed  in  the  second  story  hall  to  control  the  first  and  second  story  hall  lights. 

All  push  plates  are  to  be  of  bronze  with  pearl  buttons.     All  plates  are  to  be 
lettered  and  placed  where  directed. 

Pendants.  Provide  and  put  up  the  number  of  [plain  pendants  with  chains  complete]  or 

[ratchet  pendants]  as  specified  in  the  schedule. 

Wiring.  All  wiring  for  gas  lighting  is  to   be  done  with  No.  18  B.  and  S.  ga  ige  damp 

proof  office  wires,  running  them  through  and  between  the  beams  and  partitions 
and  using  no  tacks  nor  staples.  This  wiring  is  to  be  protected  by  tubing  against 
all  brick  walls  and  iron  work.  All  joints  and  splices  are  to  be  covered  with 
rubber  tapes.  Where  electric  lighting  is  connected  to  the  fixtures,  there  must  be 
a  return  ground  wire  run  for  gas  lighting.  The  building  is  to  be  wired  in  six 
sections  to  [a  sectional  switch-board  and  main  line  alarm  cut  out  placed  in  the 
partition  and  enclosed  with  a  paneled  oak  door]  or  [an  'automatic  sectional  cut 
out  placed  where  directed.] 

Batteries.  Provide  and  place  in   position  approved  carbon  cylinder  batteries  of  sufficient 

power  to  operate  the  system  through  a  (9")  spark  coil. 


156 


'An  automatic  sectional  cut  out  works  automatically,  cutting  off  any  faulty  section  and  indi- 
cating it  without  interfering  with  any  other  section.  This  is  more  expensive  than  a  main  line  cut 
out,  which  cuts  off  the  whole  system  at  once. 


4.  Must  be  so  constructed  and  placed  that 
an  arc  cannot  be  maintained  -between  the  ter- 
minals by  the  fusing  of  the  metal. 

5.  Must  be  so  placed  that  on  any  combina- 
tion fixture  no  group  of  lamps  requiring  a  cur 
rent  of  six  amperes  or  more  shall  be  ultimate- 
ly dependent  upon  one  cut-out. 

6.  Must  be,  wherever  used   for  more  than 
six  amperes,  or  (where  the  plug  or  equivalent 
device  is  not  used)  equipped  with  fusible  strips 
or  wires,  provided  with  contact  surfaces  or  tips 
of  harder  metal,  soldered  or  otherwise,  having 
perfect  electrical  connection  with  the  fusible 
part  of  the  strip. 

Safety  Fuses. 

1.  Safety  fuses  must  be  so  proportioned  to 
the  conductors  they  are  intended  to  protect 
that  they  will   melt  before  the  maximum  safe 
carrying  capacity  of  the  wire  is  exceeded. 

2.  All  fuses,  where  possible,  must  be  stamped, 
or    otherwise   marked,    with    the    number    of 
amperes  equal  to  the  safe  carrying  capacity  of 
the  wire  they  protect 

3.  All  cut-out  blocks  when  installed  must  be 
similarly  marked. 

4.  The    safe    carrying    capacity    of    a    wire 
changes  under  different  circumstances,  being 
about  forty  per  cent,    less  when    the  wire  is 
closed  in  a  tube  or  piece  of  moulding  than 
when  bare  and  exposed  to  the  air,  when  the 
heat  is  rapidly   radiated.     It  must  be  clearly 
understood  that  the  size  of  the  fuse  depends 
upon  the  size  oT  the  smallest  conductor  it  pro- 
tects, and  not  upon  the  amount  of  current  to 
be  used  on  the  circuit.     Below  is  a  table  show- 
ing the  safe  carrying  capacity  of  conductors  of 
different  sizes  in  Birmingham,  Brown  &  Sharpe 
and  Edison  gauges,  which  must  be  followed  in 
the  placing  of  interior  conductors: 

BROWN  &  SHARPE.  BIRMINGHAM.  EDISON  STANDARD. 

Gauge  Gauge  Gauge 

No.  Amperes.  No.  Amperes.       No.  Amperes, 

oooo  175  oooo  175  200  175 

ooo  145  coo  150  180  160 

oo  120  oo  130  140  135 

0  100  o  no  no  no 

1  95  I  95  90  95 

2  70  2  85  80  85 

3  60  3  75  65  75 

4  50  4  65  55  65 

5  45  60  50  60 

6  35  6  50  40  50 

73°  7  45  3°  40 

8  25  8          35  25  35 

10  20  10          30  20  30 

12  15  12  2O  12  20 

14  10  14          15  8  15 

16  5  16  10  5  10 

18  5  35 


Switches. 

1.  Must  be  mounted  on  moisture-proof  and 
incombustible  bases,   such  as  slate  or  porce- 
lain. 

2.  Must  be  double  pole  when  the  circuits 
which  they  control  are  connected  to  the  fix- 
tures attached  to  gas  pipes,  and  when  six  am- 
peres or  more  are  to  pass  through  them. 

3.  Must   have  a   firm   and  secure  contact, 
must  make  and  break  readily,  and  not  stick 
when  motion  has  once  been  imparted  by  the 
handle. 

4.  Must  have  carrying  capacity  sufficient  to 
prevent  heating  above  the  surrounding  atmos- 
phere. 

5.  Must  be  placed  in  dry  accessible  places 
and    be   grouped,    as   far   as   possible,    being 
mounted,    when    practicable,    upon    slate    or 
equally  indestructible  back-boards. 

Motors. 

i.  In  wiring  for  motive  power,  the  same 
precautions  must  be  taken  as  with  the  current 
of  the  same  volume  and  potential  for  lighting. 
The  motor  and  resistance  box  must  be .  pro- 
tected by  a  double  pole  cut-out,  and  controlled 
by  a  double  pole  switch. 

Arc  Lights  on  Low  Potential  Circuits. 

1.  Must  be  supplied  by  branch  conductors, 
not  smaller  than  No.  128    &  S.  gauge. 

2.  Must  be  connected  with  main  conductors 
only  through  double  pole  cut  outs. 

3.  Must  be  furnished  only  with  such  resist- 
ances or  regulators  as  are  enclosed    in    non- 
combustible   material,   such   resistances   being 
treated  as  sources  of  heat. 

4  Must  be  supplied  with  globes  protected 
as  in  the  cases  of  arc  lights  on  high  potential 
circuits. 

Fixture  Work. 

1.  In  all  cases  where  conductors  are  con- 
cealed within,  or  attached  to,  fixtures,  the  lat- 
ter must  be  insulated  from  the  gas  pipe  system 
of   the   building   by  an    insulating   joint,   the 
material  of  which  shall  not  be  affected  by  gas 
or  changes  of  temperature. 

2.  When  wired  outside,  the  conductors  must 
be  so  secured  as  not  to  be  cut  or  abraded  by 
the  pressure  of  the  fastenings  or  motion  of  the 
fixtures. 

3.  All  conductors  for  fixture  work  must  have 
a  waterproof  insulation  that  is  durable  and  not 
easily  abraded,  and  must  not  in  any  case  be 
smaller  than  No.  16  B.  &  S.,  No.  18  B.  W.  G., 
or  No.  3  E.  S.  G. 


Electric  Bells. 


Provide  and  install  in  complete  working  order,  electric  bells  as  follows 

Push  at  front  door  to  ring  in  kitchen. 

Push  in  dining  room  to  ring  in  kitchen. 

Push  in  main  bed  room  to  ring  in  servant's  room. 

One  taw-drop  annunciator  placed  in  the  kitchen  with  a  3"  bell  on  top. 

One  3"  bell  in  servant's  room. 


Push  Plates. 


All  push  plates  are  to  match  other  hardware  and  are  to  have  pearl  buttons. 


Annunciators.  All  annunciators  are  to  have  oak  cases  and  are  to  be  lettered  to  indicate  the 

stations. 


Wiring. 


{'See  "Wiring"  under  "Burglar  Alarms."] 


Batteries. 


I 'See  "Batteries"  under  "Burglar  Alarms. 


Door  Openers, 
Etc. 


Provide  one  approved  electric  door  opener  to  open  the  front  door  with  a 
push  button  in  each  kitchen. 

Provide  three  combination  letter  boxes,  mouth  pieces  and  push  buttons 
combined,  of  approved  pattern  and  finish  and  place  near  the  front  door. 

Run  i"  speaking  tubes  with  round  elbows  from  the  mouthpieces  to  each 
kitchen  and  provide  a  porcelain  mouthpiece  and  3"  bell  in  each  kitchen. 


Wiring. 


I'See  "Wiring"  under  "Burglar  Alarms.' 


Batteries. 


'See  "Batteries"   under  "Burglar  Alarms.' 


'58 


'Where  there  are  gas  lighting,  bell  and  door  opener  systems  in  the  same  building,  it  is  better 
to  keep  the  systems  separate  with  their  separate  wiring  and  batteries  rather  than  to  connect  them. 


4.  All  burrs  or  fins  must  be  removed  before 
the  conductors  are  drawn  into  a  fixture. 

5.  The  tendency  to  condensation  within  the 
pipes  must  be  guarded  against  by  sealing  the 
upper  end  of  the  fixture. 

6.  No  combination  fixture  in  which  the  con- 
ductors are  concealed  in  a  space  less  than  one- 
fourth  inch  between  the  inside  pipe  and  the 
outside  casing  will  be  approved. 

7.  Each  fixture  must  be  tested  for  possible 
"contacts"  between  conductors  and  fixture, 
and  for  "short  circuits,"  before  the  fixture  is 
connected  to  its  supply  conductors. 

8.  The  ceiling  blocks  of  fixtures  should  be 
made  of  insulating  material. 

Electric  Gas  Lighting. 

Where  electric  gas  lighting  is  to  be  used  on 
the  same  fixture  with  the  electric  light: 

1.  No  part  of  the  gas  piping  or  fixture  shall 
be  in  electrical  connection  with  the  gas  light- 
ing circuit. 

2.  The  wires   used   with    the    fixture   must 
have  a  non-inflammable  insulation,  or,  where 
concealed  between   the  pipe  and   shell  of  the 
fixture,    the    insulation    must    be   such   as   is 
required    for    fixture    wiring    for    the    electric 
light. 

3.  The   whole    installation    must   test   free 
from  "  grounds." 

4.  The  two  installations  must  test  perfectly 
free  of  connection  with  each  other. 

Pendants  and  Sockets. 

i.  No  portion  of  the  lamp  socket  exposed 
to  contact  with  outside  objects  must  be  allowed 
to  come  into  electrical  contact  with  either  of 
the  conductors. 

Cord  Pendants. 

1.  Must   be    made   of   conductors,  each  of 
which  is  composed  of  several  strands  insulated 
from    the    other   conductor  by  a   mechanical 
separator  of  carbonizable  material,  and  both 
surrounded  in  damp    places   with  a  moisture- 
proof  and  a  non-inflammable  layer. 

2.  Must  be  protected  by  insulating  bushings 
where  the  cord  enters  the  socket. 

3.  Must  be  so  suspended   that   the   entire 
weight  of  the  socket  and  lamp  will  be  borne 
by  knots  above  the  point  where  the  cord  comes 
through  the  ceiling  block  or  rosette,  in  order 
that  the  strain  may  be  taken  from  the  joints 
and  binding  screws.     All  sockets  used  for  wire 
or   cord    pendants   should    have    openings    at 
least  equal  to  one-quarter  inch  gas  pipe  size. 

4.  Must    be    allowed     to    sustain    nothing 
heavier  than  a  four-light  cluster,  and  in  such 
a  case  special  provision  should  be  made  by  an 


extra  heavy  cord  or  wire,  as  a  mechanical  re- 
inforcement. 

5.  Must  be  equipped  with  keyless  sockets, 
as  far  as  practicable,  controlled  by  wall 
switches.  In  no  case  may  a  lamp  giving  more 
than  fifty  candle-power  be  placed  in  a  key 
socket  on  a  flexible  pendant. 

Electric  Heating  and  Cooking. 

1.  In  general  the  same  precautions  should 
be   taken   in   the  installation  and  operation  of 
electric  heating  and  cooking  appliances  as  are 
applicable   to  circuits   for  electric    light   and 
power. 

2.  The  practice  of   attaching   heating   and 
cooking  appliances  to  lamp  sockets  must  not 
be    permitted   where   said   appliances   require 
pver  three  amperes.     Proper  circuits  must  be 
provided,  fully  protected  by  double  pole  safety 
fuses  and  switches,  and  the  appliances  them- 
selves should  be  kept  from  contact  with  in- 
flammable materials. 

3.  Flexible  cords  should  be  used  with  strands 
separately  covered  with  non-inflammable  insu- 
lation, and  both  wires  or  strands  covered  with 
a  water-proofing,  and  that  by  a  braiding,  and 
especial  care  should  be  taken  to  make  proper 
connections  on  all  appliances,  and  each  should 
be  plainly  marked  with  the    maximum   volts 
and  amperes  they  will  safely  carry. 


Class  D — Alternating  Systems. 

Converters  or  Transformers. 
Converters. 

1.  Must  not  be  placed  inside  of  any  building, 
except  the  Central  Station,  unless  as  herein- 
after provided. 

2.  Must  not  be   placed  in  any  but  metallic 
or  non-combustible  cases,  which  cases  should 
be  connected  to  earth  when  wires  are  under- 
ground. 

3.  Must  not  be  attached  to  the  outside  walls 
of   buildings   unless   separated   therefrom    by 
substantial  insulating  supports. 

4.  Must  not  be  placed   in  any  other  than  a 
dry   and    convenient    location   (which  can  be 
secured   from  opening  into  the  interior  of  the 
building,   such   as   a  vault),  when   an    under- 
ground service  is  used. 

5.  Must  not  be  placed  without  safety  fuses 
at  the  junction  between  main  and  service  con- 
ductors,   and   safety    fuses    in    the  secondary 
circuits  where  they  will  not  be  affected  by  the 
heat  of  the  converter. 

Primary  Conductors. 

In  those  cases  where  it  may  not  be  possible 
to  exclude  the  transformers  and  primary  wires 


'59 


Painter's 

SPECIFICATION  of  the  labor  and  material  to  be  furnished   in  the  erec- 
tion of  a  frame  house  to  be  constructed  for  Mr. 
at 

in  accordance  with  the  accompanying  drawings  and  this  specification  and  under 
the  supervision   of 

Architect, 

\  address  \ 
\  date  \ 

General  The  Contractor  shall  furnish  all  materials,  labor,  transportation,  scaffolding, 

Conditions.  utensils,  and  so  forth,  of  every  description  required  for  the  full  performance 
of  the  work  herein  specified,  except  as  otherwise  particularly  mentioned.  He 
shall  keep  a  competent  foreman  on  the  premises  ;  shall  not  sublet  any  part  of 
his  work  without  the  written  consent  of  the  Owner  ;  shall  be  responsible  for  all 
damage  to  property  or  the  work  of  other  contractors  caused  by  him  or  his 
employees,  and  must  take  all  necessary  precaution  to  properly  protect  his  work 
during  progress. 

All  the  materials  are  to  be  of  the  best  of  their  several  kinds  in  quality  as 
herein  specified;  all  labor  is  to  be  performed  in  the  best  manner  by  skilled 
workmen,  and  both  are  to  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  Architect. 

When  special  makes  or  grades  of  prepared  paints,  varnish  or  wood  finish 
are  called  for,  such  material  must  be  delivered  at  the  -building  in  the  original 

1 60 


(Electrical  rules,  continued  from  p.  159.) 


entirely  from  the  building,  the  following  pre- 
cautions must  be  strictly  observed: 

1.  The   transformer   must  be  located  at  a 
point  as  near  as  possible  to  that  at  which  the 
primary  wires  enter  the  building. 

2.  The  primary  lead  of  a  transformer  should 
be    heavily    insulated    with   ihe    highest-class 
insulation,  such  as  vulcanized  pure  india-rubber 
of  the  best  quality,  preferably  covered  with  a 
high    class    outer   covering,    and    such   leads 
should  have   a    minimum   length   of  eighteen 
inches. 

3.  Between    these    points    the    conductors 
must   be   heavily  insulated  with  a  coating  of 
moisture-proof  material,  and  in  addition  must 
be  so  covered  and   protected  that  mechanical 
injury  to  them  or  contact  with  them   shall  be 
practically  impossible. 

4.  The    primary    conductors,    if    within    a 
building,  must  be  furnished  with  a  double  pole 
switch,  and  also  with  a  double  pole  cut-out 
where  the  wires  enter  the  building,  or  where 
they  leave  the  main  line  on  the  pole  or  in  the 
conduit.     These  switches,  should,  if  possible, 
be  enclosed  in  secure  and  fire-proof  boxes  out- 
side the  building. 

5.  The  primary   conductors,  when   inside  a 
building,  must  be  kept  apart  at  least  ten  inches, 
and  at  the  same   distance  from  all  other  con- 
ducting bodies. 

Secondary  Conductors. 

1.  The  conductors  from  the   secondary  coil 
of  the  transformer  to  the  lamps,  or  other  trans- 
lating devices,  must  be  installed  according  to 
the  rules    for    "inside    wiring"    for    "Low 
Potential  Systems." 

2.  Section  i    under  primary  conductors  and 
referring  to  primary  leads,  applies  with  equal 
force  to  the  secondary  leads. 


Class  E.— Electric  Railways.    (Omitted.) 


Class  F — Batteries. 

Primary  or  Secondary  Batteries. 

1.  Secondary     batteries     or     accumulators 
should  be  placed  in  a  light  and  well  ventilated 
place,  preferably  upon  racks,  and  thoroughly 
well  insulated. 

2.  Frequent  examinations  should  be  made  of 
the  connections  and  the  specific  gravity  of  the 
solution. 

3.  When  current  for  light  and  power  is  taken 
from  primary  or  secondary  batteries,  the  same 
general  regulations  must  be  observed  as  apply 
to  such  wires  fed  from  dynamo  generators  de- 
veloping the  same  difference  of  potential. 


Class  G.— Miscellaneous. 

i.  The  wiring  in  any  building  must  test  free 


from  "grounds"  before  the  current  is  turned 
on.  This  test  may  be  made  with  a  magneto- 
bell  that  will  ring  through  a  resistance  of  20,000 
ohms  where  currents  of  less  than  250  volts  are 
used. 

2.  No  ground  wires  for  any  purpose  may  be 
attached  to  gas  pipes  within  the  building. 

3.  All  conductors  connecting  with  telephone, 
district  messenger,  burglar  alarm,  watch  clock, 
electric   time  and    other  similar  instruments, 
must,  if  in  any  portion  of  their  length  they  are 
liable  to  become  crossed  with  circuits  carrying 
currents  for  light  or  power,  be  provided  near 
the   point    of   entrance   to    the  building  with 
some    protective    device   which    will    operate 
to  shunt  the  instruments  in  case  of  a  danger- 
ous rise  of  potential,  and  will  open  the  circuit 
and    arrest    an    abnormal    current   flow.      Any 
conductor  normally  forming  an  innocuous  cir- 
cuit may  become  a  source  of   fire  hazard  if 

•crossed  with  another  conductor  through  which 
it  may  become  charged  with  a  relatively  high 
pressure. 

Glossary  of  Electrical  Terms. 

A  Volt  is  the  unit  of  electro-motive  force,  or 
pressure.  It  is  the  electro-motive  force  which 
maintains  a  current  of  one  ampere  in  a  conduc- 
tor whose  resistance  is  one  ohm.  It  represents 
J-Qoo  of  the  electro-motive  force  of  a  Clark 
standard  cell. 

Electro-motive  Force  or  E.  M.  F.  is  equiva- 
lent to  the  difference  of  potential  between  two 
points,  analogous  to  the  head  of  water  in  hy- 
draulics. It  may  be  termed  a  tendency  to  flow. 

An  Ampere  is  the  unit  of  electric  current. 
It  is  the  amount  of  electricity  which  would 
pass  through  a  circuit  having  a  resistance  of 
one  ohm  under  an  electro-motive  force  of  one 
volt.  One  ampere  will  deposit  0.00118  of  a 
gramme  of  silver  per  second. 

A  Coulomb  is  the  unit  of  electrical  quantity. 
It  is  the  amount  of  electricity  which  would  pass 
in  one  second  in  a  circuit  having  a  resistance 
of  one  ohm  under  an  electro-motive  force  of 
one  volt. 

An  Ohm  is  the  unit  of  electrical  resistance. 
The  legal  or  Paris  ohm  is  the  resistance  of  a 
column  of  pure  mercury  one  square  millimeter 
in  section,  106.3  centimeters  long,  at  the  tem- 
perature of  melting  ice  (o°  C.  or  32°  F.).  A 
wire  with  one  ohm  resistance  will  limit  the 
current  passing  at  an  electro-motive  force  of 
one  volt  to  one  ampere. 

Megohm:  A  million  ohms. 

Ohm's  Law:  The  electrical  current  in  any 
circuit  is  equal  to  the  voltage  of  that  circuit 

E 

divided  by  its  resistance  in  ohms.     (C= — ) 

R 

A  Henry  is  a  unit  of  induction.  It  is  the 
induction  in  a  circuit  when  the  electro-motive 


161 


cans  with  the  seals  unbroken  and  labels  attached,  and  such  cans  are  not  to  be 
opened  until  inspected  by  the  Architect. 

Anything  not  shown  on  the  drawings  but  which  is  mentioned  in  the 
specification  or  vice  versa,  or  anything  not  expressly  set  forth  in  either,  but 
which  is  reasonably  implied,  shall  be  furnished  and  performed  the  same  as  though 
specially  shown  and  mentioned  in  both,  and  should  anything  be  omitted  from 
the  drawings  or  specifications  which  is  necessary  to  a  clear  understanding  of  the 
work,  or  should  any  error  appear,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Contractor  to  notify 
the  Architect  before  proceeding  with  his  work.  In  the  event  of  the  Contractor 
failing  to  give  such  notice,  he  shall  make  good  any  damage  to  or  defect  in  his 
work  caused  thereby. 

The  drawings  and  specifications  furnished  for  this  work  are  to  be  considered 
instruments  of  service,  are  to  be  used  for  this  building  only,  are  the  property  of 
the  Architect  and  must  be  returned  to  him  immediately  on  completion  of  the  work 
set  forth  therein. 

At  any  time  directed,  the  Contractor  shall  clear  out  any  of  his  rubbish  or 
material  which  may  be  in  the  way  of  other  mechanics,  and  at  completion  shall 
clear  out  all  rubbish  and  surplus  material  left  by  him,  shall  clean  off  all  paint 
and  varnish  spots  from  floors,  glass,  walls,  and  so  forth ;  shall  repair  any  damage 
to  his  work,  no  matter  by  whom  caused,  [loss  or  damage  by  fire  excepted,]  and 
leave  the  premises  broom  clean  and  in  perfect  repair  and  order  so  far  as  his  work 
is  concerned. 

The  Painter  is  referred  to  the  Carpenter's  specification  for  the  amount  of 
woodwork  to  be  finished. 

The  Owner  reserves  the  right  to  accept  any  or  reject  any  or  all  proposals 
presented. 


Painted  Work. 


Cover  all  sap,  knots  and  defects  in  wood  work  which  is  to  be  painted,  with  a 
good  coat  of  strong  shellac  before  priming.  Putty  up  all  nail  holes,  cracks  or 
defects  after  priming. 


Exterior.  Paint  a11  exteri<>r  wood  work,  unless  otherwise  particularly  specified,  including 

fences,  clothes  posts,  yard  house,  and  the  floors,  steps  and  ceilings  of  the  piazza  with 

163 


(Electrical  rules,  continued  from  p.  161.) 


force  induced  in  that  circuit  is  cue  volt,  while 
the  inducing  current  varies  at  the  rale  of  one 
ampere  per  second. 

A  Watt  is  the  unit  of  power. 

One  watt  =  one  volt  X  by  one  ampere. 

746  watts  =  i  electrical  horse-power. 

A  Wattmeter:  An  instrument  for  measuring 
the  electrical  energy  in  a  circuit. 

Horse-power  =  33,000  foot  pounds  per  min- 
ute, or  550  per  second. 

EC       C2R       E2      , 

One  horse-power  =  -  —  or  -   >  or  -   -  where 
746       746       746 

E  =  volts,  C  =  amperes  and  R  =  ohms. 

Mechanical  power  and  electrical  power  may 
both  be  expressed  in  horse  power,  watts  or 
kilowatts;  an  electrical  horse-power  is  about 


90  per  cent,  of  the  mechanical  horse-power 
applied  to  the  shaft  of  the  dynamo. 

Candle-power;  A  standard  candle  burns  120 
grains  of  spermacetti  wax  per  hour. 

A  sixteen  candle  power  incandescent  lamp 
gives  a  light  equal  to  sixteen  standard  candles. 

A  Farad  is  the  unit  of  electrical  capacity ;  a 
conductor  or  condenser  holding  one  coulomb 
under  potential  of  one  volt  has  a  capacity  of 
one  farad. 

Insulators:  Substances  possessing  high  re- 
sistance or  poor  conductivity  where  electric 
currents  are  concerned,  such  as  dry  air,  ebon- 
ite, paraffine,  glass,  etc. 

Conductors:  Substances  which  readily  con- 
vey electric  currents,  such  as  silver,  copper,  etc. 


(Copyright.     Printed  by  permission  N.  E.  L.  A.) 


163 


three  coats  of  f  John  Lucas  &•  CoSs  pure  oil  Tinted  Gloss  liquid  paint!  or  \Johrt 
Lucas  &  Co?s  Capitol  White  tinted  with  Lucas  C.  P.  Colors}  in  three  colors  as  directed. 
Paint  all  tin  work  of  roofs,  gutters,  valleys,  etc.,  and  all  iron  work  with  two 
coats  of  {John  Lucas  &  Co^s  Iron  Oxide]  or  \_John  Lucas  &  Co.'s  Plumbago-Graphite'} 
paint. 

Interior  Painting.  Paint  all  wood  work  in  {specify  where}  three  coats  of  {.John  Lucas  &  Co?s  Inside 
while}  or  [Imperial  Enamel  paint,  white}  tinted  with  Lucas  C.  P.  colors  in  four 
colors  as  directed. 


Shingles.  All   shingles  of  sides,  gables,  etc.   [and  all  roof  shingles]  are  to  be  "dipped 

three-fourths  of  their  length  in  [a  pure  linseed  oil  stain  made  by  mixing  equal 
parts  si  John  Lucas  &  CoSs  Pure  Oil  Tinted  Gloss  paint  and  pure  boiled  linseed  oil. 
or  \_ff.  W.  Johns  shingle  stain]  before  being  put  on.  The  colors  are  to  be  as  directed. 


Natural  Wood 
Finish. 


Hard  Wood. 


In  natural  wood  finish,  care  must  be  taken  to  have  the  putty  match  the  finish 
in  color.  All  such  work  must  be  properly  cleaned  from  dirt,  finger  marks,  etc., 
and  all  rough  spots  must  be  sandpapered.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Painter  to 
inspect  all  wood  work  and  floors  which  are  to  have  a  natural  finish,  and  if  such 
work  is  not  in  a  proper  condition  for  finishing,  he  shall  notify  the  Architect. 

All  hard  wood  of  \trim,  stairs,  doors  and  wainscoting,  where  hard  wood  is 
called  for  in  the  Carpenter's  specification,]  is  to  be  finished  as  follows: 

(First).  One  coatof/<?A«  Lucas  &  Co.' s paste  wood  filler  (light),  properly  and  evenly  filling 
the  grain  of  the  wood  by  rubbing  in  and  wiping  off  before  it  has  set.  When  dry  give 

(Second).  [One  coat  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.'s  liquid  wood  filler,  light,]  or  [One  thin  coat 
of  pure  spirit  (white)  or  (orange)  shellac]  rubbed  down  smooth  with  [No.  oo  sand  paper]  or  [No. 
i  steel  wool.] 

(Third  and  Fourth).  Two  coats  of  Laute  and  Dax  *  Interior  Star  Finish.  Rub  between 
these  two  last  coats  with  hair  cloth  and  'rub  the  last  coat  with  purnice  stone  and  water  to  a  dead, 
even  surface.  Then  finish  with  rotten  stone  and  oil. 


164 


'Often  yellow  ochre  (French  yellow  ochre  for  the  best  work)  ground  in  pure  linseed  oil  is  used 
for  the  priming  coat,  and  this  followed  by  one  or  two  coats  of  paint.  In  two-coat  work  for  a 
white  finish  the  yellow  ochre  should  not  be  used  for  priming,  as  one  coat  of  white  will  not  cover. 
Often  a  mixture  of  white  lead  and  zinc  white  is  used — French  zinc  white  for  the  best  work. 

Paint  is  composed  of  a  pigment — white  lead,  zinc  white,  ochre,  and  so  forth— and  a  fatty 
matter  or  oil,  usually  linseed  oil.  The  important  part  of  the  mixture  is  the  oil.  Pure  linseed  oil 
has  the  inherent  quality,  when  oxidized,  of  resisting  the  elements.  Hence  the  important  factor  in 
preserving  the  surface  of  a  building  exists  in  the  large  proportion  of  pure  linseed  oil  that  is  dried 
with  the  pigment.  The  pigment,  however,  should  always  be  neutral. 

The  analysis  of  a  100  ft.  keg  of  pure  white  lead  shows  it  to  contain  about  94  fts.  of  carbonate 
of  lead  and  about  6  fts.  of  oil  ;  and  of  a  100  ft.  keg  of  ochre,  70  to  75  fts.  of  ochre,  and  25  to  30  fts. 
of  oil.  Hence  the  larger  proportion  of  the  preserving  quality  is  in  the  ochre. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  in  this  specification  the  term  ' '  pure  linseed  oil  paint ' '  is  used  rather 
than  white  lead  and  linseed  oil.  It  has  been  more  common  to  specify  some  brand  of  white  lead 
and  linseed  oil  and  that  the  colors  shall  be  as  selected  by  the  owner.  White  lead  and  oil  will 
make  white  paint  only,  and  when  a  color  is  selected  requiring  some  other  pigment,  perhaps  one- 
half  of  the  mixture  will  be  ochre,  while  no  mention  of  ochre  is  made  in  the  specification.  In 
event  of  the  paint  wearing  well  the  credit  is,  perhaps,  given  to  the  lead,  when  probably  it  had 
little  to  do  with  the  lasting  quality. 

Ready  mixed  paints,  both  white  and  colored,  have  the  advantage  of  being  uniform  in  their 
several  qualities.  The  method  of  compounding  them  by  powerful  machinery  allows  of  the  maxi- 
mum quantity  of  pure  linseed  oil  being  used,  and  such  paints,  when  made  by  a  reputable  manu- 
facturer, are  more  scientifically  mixed,  contain  more  oil,  and  therefore  perform  their  duty  as  a 
preservative  better  than  a  paint  made  by  the  ordinary  methods  of  compounding  lead  and  oil  cold. 
The  cost  per  gallon  of  a  first-class  ready  mixed  paint  is  higher  than  that  of  the  ordinary  mixtures, 
but,  as  its  spreading  quality  is  greater,  the  real  cost  is  no  more  and  under  many  conditions  less. 

2Side  shingles  are  often  painted  or  stained  after  being  put  on.  Roof  shingles,  if  treated  a* 
all,  should  be  dipped  before  being  put  on.  Roof  shingles  are  dipped  in  hot  paint,  stain,  linseed 
oil  or  crude  petroleum,  the  first  being  the  highest  priced  and  the  last  the  cheapest. 

3"  Exterior ' '  varnish  is  used  for  outside  work. 

'This  provides  for  a  dead  finish.  When  a  gloss  finish  is  desired,  the  rubbing  of  the  last  coat 
is  omitted. 


'65 


Floors  and  Stair  Finish  the  floors  of  {specify  where!  and  treads  of  stairs  as  follows: 

'I  reads. 

(First).  One  coat  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.' s  paste  wood  filler  (light),  properly  and  evenly  filling 
the  grain  of  the  wood  by  rubbing  in  and  wiping  of!  before  the  filler  has  set.  When  dry  give 

(Second  and  Third).  Two  coats  of  Laute  &  Dax  Floor  Varnish  rubbed  with  pumice  stone 
and  water,  then  oiled  and  thoroughly  wiped  off. 

Pine-  Finish  the  ^pine  work  in   {specify  where j  as  follows: 

Or  any  soft  wood. 

(First).  One  coat  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.'s  liquid  wood  filler  (light),  rubbed  down  lightly 
with  (No.  oo  sand  paper)  or  (No.  i  steel  wool). 

(Second  and  Third).  Two  coats  of  Laute  &  Dax  Interior  Star  Finish,  rubbed  between  the 
two  finishing  coats  with  hair  cloth  and  after  the  last  coat  with  pumice  stone  and  oil. 


bnamel    Finish.  Finish  the  woodwork  in  {specify  where}  with  a  white  enamel  finish  as  follows: 

(First  and  Second).  Paint  with  two  coats  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.'s  pure  white  lead,  thinned 
with  two  thirds  oil  and  one  third  turpentine  carefully  applied  so  that  the  brush  marks  will  show  as 
little  as  possible;  sandpaper  lightly  between  each  coat  and  after  the  last  coat. 

(Third  and  Fourth).  Apply  two  coats  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.'s  enamel  paint  [or  ' 'Lucas  Bath 
Enamef] .  Moss  down  lightly  with  steel  wool  after  the  third  coat. 

Or 

(First  and  Second).  Paint  with  (wo  coats  of  pure  white  lead  and  linseed  oil,  carefully  applied 
so  that  the  brush  marks  will  show  as  little  as  possible,  and  sandpaper  lightly  between  each  coat 
and  after  the  last  coat. 

'(Third).  Apply  one  coat  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.'s  French  white  zinc  in  varnish,  thinned 
with  turpentine. 

(Fourth).  Apply  one  [or  two]  coats  of  French  white  zinc  mixed  with  Laute  &  Dax' s  finest 
white  enamel  varnish.  Rub  this  coat  well  with  hair  cloth. 

(Fifth).  Apply  one  coat  of  the  same  varnish,  rubbed  with  pumice  stone  and  water  to  a  dead, 
even  finish,  and  polish  with  rotten  stone  and  oil. 

Or 

(First).     One  thin  coat  of  pure  spirit  white  shellac,  sandpapered  smooth. 

(Second,  Third  and  Fourth).  Three  coats  of  John  Lucas  &  Co  's  pure  white  lead  and 
linseed  oil,  carefully  applied  so  that  the  brush  marks  will  show  as  little  as  possible,  sandpapared 
lightly  between  each  coat  and  after  the'last  coat. 

'(Fifth  and  Sixth).  Two  [or  three]  coats  composed  of  one  part  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.'s 
French  white  zinc  with  a  little  flake  white  mixed  in  and  one  part  of  pure  white  lead  mixed 
with  Laute  &  Dax' s  finest  white  enamel  varnish.  Rub  the  last  coat  with  pumice  stone  and 
water  and  polish  with  rotten  stone  and  oil  to  a  dead  even  finish. 

Put  on  John  Lucas  &•  CoSs  gold  size  and  when  in  proper  condition  apply  pure 
leaf  gold  to  the  mouldings  where  directed. 


1 66 


'The  ordinary  ways  of  finishing  soft  woods  are: 

One  coat  of  pure  spirit  shellac  and  two  coats  varnish. 

Three  coats  of  varnish- 

One  coat  of  filler  and  two  coats  of  varnish. 

Three  coats  of  shellac. 

Three  coats  of  shellac,  rubbing  each  coat,  is  a  very  durable  finish  and  looks  well.  It  can  be 
done  very  quickly,  but  is  more  expensive  than  a  varnish  finish. 

"Bath  Enamel  is  used  wherever  the  enamel  is  to  be  subjected  to  the  continuous  action  of  hot 
water,  as  in  bath  tubs,  bath  room  work,  etc. 

*If  a  colored  finish  is  desired,  mix  the  color  in  these  coats. 


167 


Staining.  The    wood    work    in    {specify  where}    is    to   be    stained    to  imitate   ckerrv  as 

follows  : 

(First),  {for  hard  woods}  Apply  a  first  coat,  consisting  of  John  Lucas  Cr  co.'s 
liquid  wood  filler  and  stain  combined,  or  {for  soft  woods}  Apply  one  coat  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.'s 
perfect  wood  stain. 

(Second  and  Third).  Two  coats  of  Laute  &  Dax  Interior  Star  Finish.  Rub  between 
the  two  coats  with  hair  cloth  and  after  the  last  coat  with  pumice  stone  and  oil  to  a  dead,  even 
finish. 


Graining.  Grain  the    {specify  where}    as   follows: 

(First  and  Second).     Two  coats  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.'s  Capitol    White,  tinted  with  Lucas 
C.  P.  Colors  and  thinned  with  one-third  oil  and  two-thirds  turps. 

(Third).     One  coat  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.'s  graining  color  grained  and  shaded  in  a  first-class 
manner  to  imitate  quaitered  oak. 

(Fourth  and  Fifth).      Two  coats  of  Laute  &  Dax  Star  Finish,  Interior  [or  Exterior] . 

Or 

(First  and  Second).     Two  coats  of  John  Lucas  &  Co.'s  pure  linseed  oil  paint. 

(Third).     One  coat  of  graining  color,  grained  and  shaded  in  a  first-class  manner  to  imitate 
quartered  oak. 

(Fourth  and  Fifth).      Two  coats  of  Laute  &  Dax  Star  Finish,  Interior  [or  Exterior]  . 


Kalsomining. 


Kalsoinine  in  the  best  manner  the  plaster  work  of  side  walls  and  ceilings  in 
{specify  rooms}  two  colors  to  each  room.  The  kalsoinine  is  to  be  composed  of  pure 
Paris  white,  glue  and  alum,  and  tinted  with  JoJin  Lucas  &  Co?s  water  colors  to 
such  tints  as  directed.  All  walls  which  are  to  be  kalsomined  are  to  be  first  given 
a  coat  of  good  varnish. 


Painted 
Piaster  Work. 


Paint  the  plaster  work  of  walls  and   ceilings  in  {specify  rooms}  four  coats  of 
John  Lucas  &  Co.^s  pure  Oil  Tinted  Gloss  Liquid  paint  in  two  colors  to  each  room. 
The  two  last  coats  are  to  be  stippled. 


flantles,  etc. 


The  finishing  of  mantles,  bookcases,  sideboard,  hat  rack,  church  pews,  school 
desks  and  scats,  Venetian  blinds  and  inside  shutters  [is  not  included  in  this  specifica- 
tion] or  [is  included  and  they  are  to  be  finished  in  the  same  manner  as  before 
specified  for  the  other  woodwork  in  the  same  rooms]. 


168 


'The  ordinary  ways  of  staining  are  as  follows: 

One  coat  composed  of  three  parts  of  stain  to  one  part  of  filler  and  two  coats  of  varnish. 

One  coat  of  stain,  one  coat  of  pure  spirit  shellac  and  one  or  two  coats  of  varnish. 

One  coat  of  stain,  one  coat  of  filler  and  one  or  two  coats  of  varnish. 

One  coat  of  stain  and  one  or  two  coats  of  varnish. 


169 


General 
Conditions. 


Plumber's 

SPECIFICATION    of    the   labor    and    material    to    be    furnished    in    the 
erection  of  a  frame  house  to  be  constructed  for  Mr. 
at 

in  accordance  with  the  accompanying  drawings  and  this  specification  and  under 
the  supervision  of 

Architect, 

\  address } 

I  date  \ 
\  For  General  Conditions  see  page  2.  j- 


Excavation.  Do  all  necessary  excavating  and  filling  to  properly  perform  the  work  herein 

specified.     All  filling  is  to  be  well  rammed  or  puddled  every  foot  in  height. 

Cutting.  The  Plumber  is  not  to  do  any  cutting  of  timbers.     The  Carpenter  will  do 

all  cutting  Tor  pipes,  etc.,  and  no  floor  beams  are  to  be  cut  at  a  greater  distance 
than  2'  from  bearings. 

170 


Pipes.  The  diameters   of  all  pipes,  as   herein  specified,  are  inside  diameters      The 

arrangement  of  the  waste  system  is  to  be  as  direct  as  possible,  avoiding  all  un- 
necessary offsets.  The  house  drain  and  all  horizontal  waste  pipes  must  have  a 
fall  of  at  least  '(£")  to  the  foot.  All  vent  pipes  are  to  be  graded  to  discharge  the 
water  of  condensation. 


Earthenware. 


Cast  Iron. 


Hangers. 


Coating. 


Joints. 


Wrought  Iron. 
Wastes,  etc. 


Supplies. 


All  earthenware  pipes  are  to  be  smooth,  salt-glazed  and  cylindrical,  not  less 
than  2(| ")  in  thickness,  free  from  defects,  and  each  length  perfectly  straight.  The 
ends  of  the  pipes  are  to  be  wet  before  applying  the  cement,  and  the  space  between 
each  hub  and  the  small  end  of  the  next  section  is  to  be  completely  filled  with 
Portland  cement  with  the  joints  clean  inside. 

All  cast  iron  pipes  and  fittings  must  be  sound,  smooth  and  cylindrical,  free 
from  cracks  and  defects,  of  a  uniform  thickness  and  of  the  grades  as  hereinafter 
called  for.  All  cast  iron  pipes  must  be  of  at  least  the  following  average  3weights 
per  lineal  foot : 

Diameter,  2"          3"          4"          5"         6" 

Standard,  3^         4!         6  8J         10  pounds  per  foot. 

* 

Extra  Heavy,      5^         gi       13          17  20 

All  vertical  runs  of  cast  iron  pipes  are  to  be  firmly  secured  in  position  with 
strong  iron  pipe  hooks  placed  under  each  hub  and  all  horizontal  runs  by  strong 
iron  hangers  not  more  than  5'  apart. 

No  tar  coated  pipes  are  to  be  used,  but  after  the  pipes  have  been  tested  and 
accepted  by  the  [Architect]  or  [Inspector]  they  will  be  coated  outside  with  coal-tar 
pitch,  applied  hot. 

All  joints  of  cast  iron  pipes  are  to  be  made  with  picked  oakum  and  pure  soft 
moulten  pig  lead  bedded  with  hammer  and  caulking  iron,  using  for  each  joint  (12) 
ounces  of  lead  to  each  inch  of  diameter  of  the  pipe  on  which  the  joint  is  made. 
No  putty  or  cement  joints  are  to  be  used. 

• 

All  waste,  soil  and  vent  pipes,  where  wrought  iron  is  hereinafter  called  for, 
are  to  have  wrought  iron  screw  couplings,  smooth  inside  with  a  shoulder,  and  put 
together  in  red  lead. 

All  supply  pipes,  where  galvanized  iron  is  hereinafter  called  for,  are  to  be 
extra  galvanized  wrought  iron,  with  fittings  and  screw  couplings  of  the  same 

172 


'It  is  claimed  that  a  fall  in  drain  pipes  of  from  £"  to  $"  is  better  than  a  greater  one,  the  con- 
tention being  that  if  the  fall  is  too  great  it  allows  the  liquid  to  run  away  faster  than  the  solid 
matter,  leaving  the  latter  to  clog  up  the  pipes. 

Thickness  of  Earthenware  Pipes. 

Inside  Diameter,  3"  4"  5"  6"  10"  12"  15"  18" 

Average  thickness,  f"  £"  f"         ||"  £"  £"  i"  i£"  if 

'Weights  of  Cast  Iron  Pipes. 

IN    POUNDS    PER    LINEAL    FOOT. 

Diameter,  2"  3"  4"  5"  6"  7"  8"  10"  12" 

Standard,  3|  4|  6  8£  10  13  16 

Extra  Heavy,  5^  9!  13  17  20  27  33^  45  54 

Iron  Pipes  are  made  porcelain  lined  in  both  weights. 


Heating. 


Gas  Pipes. 


Weights. 


Lead  Pipes. 
Wastes. 


Supplies. 


Weights. 


Supports. 


Joints. 


Brass. 


material,  put  together  in  red  lead  and  firmly  secured  in  position  with  galvanized 
iron  hooks,  bands  and  hangers,  put  up  on  suitable  blocks  where  required. 

All  steam  or  hot  water  heating  pipes  are  to  be  of  wrought  iron,  with  fittings 
and  screw  couplings  of  the  same  material,  put  together  in  [steam  pipe  cement]  or 
[red  lead]  and  firmly  secured  in  position  with  strong  iron  hooks  and  hangers. 

All  gas  pipes  are  to  be  of  wrought  iron,  with  fittings  and  screw  couplings  of 
galvanized  malleable  iron,  put  together  in  red  lead,  avoiding  the  use  of  cement, 
firmly  secured  in  position  with  iron  hooks  and  bands  to  the  timber,  cutting  in 
blocks  where  necessary. 

All  wrought  iron  pipes  are  to  be  of  the  following  'weights : 
Inside  diameter,  f"         f"         f"         i"         ij"        if"       2"         4"  5" 

Pounds  per  lineal  foot,    0.56     0.84     1.12      1.67     2.24     2.68     3.61      10.66     14.5 

All  branch  lead  soil,  waste  and  vent  pipes  including  bends,  which  are  herein- 
after specified,  are  to  be  of  the  grade  known  as  (D)  lead. 

All  lead  supplies  as  hereinafter  specified  are  to  be  in  grade  as  called  for. 
[The  main  and  the  cold  supplies  to  j  mention  fixtures  [  are  to  be  tin  lined.] 

All  lead  pipes  are  to  be  of  the  following  "weights  per  lineal  foot : 
Diameter,          f"  |"  f"  i"  ii"  2"         3"        4" 

D  pipe,  3lbs.  8oz.    4lbs.   6  Ibs.   8  Ibs. 

A  A  pipe,       2  Ibs.    2  Ibs.  12  oz.    3  Ibs.  8oz.    4  Ibs.  12  oz. 

All  vertical  lead  pipes  are  to  be  firmly  secured  in  position  with  hard  metal 
tacks  and  screws.  All  horizontal  risers  are  to  be  secured  with  brass  bands  and 
screws  to  boards  put  up  by  the  Carpenter.  These  supports  are  to  be  3  apart. 

All  joints  between  lead  pipes  are  to  be  wiped.  All  connections  of  lead  with 
iron  pipes  are  to  be  made  with  heavy  [brass  ferrules  set  in  the  hub  of  the  iron 
pipe  and  caulked  in]  or  [copper  ferrules  the  inside  diameter  of  which  is  larger  than 
the  outside  diameter  of  the  lead  pipe.  The  lead  pipe  is  to  be  drawn  through  the 
ferrule  and  lapped  over  the  flange.  The  copper  ferrule  is  then  to  be  caulked  into 
the  hub  of  the  iron  pipe]  and  the  lead  pipe  attached  to  the  ferrule  by  a  soldered 
wiped  joint. 

All  water  pipes  where  brass  is  hereinafter  called  for  are  to  be  of  seamless 
drawn  3brass  tubing  with  brass  fittings  and  screw  unions  put  together  in  red  lead 
and  firmly  secured  in  position  with  brass  hooks,  bands  and  hangers,  put  up  on 


'Sizes  and  Weights  of  Wrought  Iron  Pipe 

IN    POUNDS    PER    LINEAL    FOOT. 


Inside 
Diameter 
in  Inches, 
Standard, 
X  Strong, 
XX  Strong, 


4        i        I  J         i        ii      i*       2 

0.24  0.42   0.56  0.84    1.12    1.67   2.24  2.68  361 
0.29  0.54  o  74   1.09    1.39   2.17   3.00  3.63  5.02 


5-'4 


3 
7-94 


3i 
9.80   10.66   14.50   18.76 


y.6i    10.25    I2-47    '4-97   20.54  28.58 
i  7°   2.44   3  65   5-20  6.40  9.02    13.68   18.56   22.75    27-48  38.12   53.11 

"Weights  of  Lead  Pipe. 

IN     POUNDS    AND    OUNCES    PER    LINEAL    FOOT. 


Calibre  in  Inches, 

AAA 

AA 

A 

B 

C 

D 

D  light 

E 

E  light 

f-  

.  .  r-8 

1-5 

1-2 

I-O 

0-13 

O-IO 

.... 

0-8 

i  

•  -3-0 

2-0 

I-I2 

I  4 

I-O 

0-13 

.... 

O-II 

0-9 

£  

--3-8 

2-1  2 

2-8 

2-0 

I-I2 

1-8 

1-4 

I-O 

0-12 

1  

..4-8 

3-8 

3-o 

2-4 

2-0 

I-I2 

1-8 

i-4 

I-O 

i  

..6-0 

4-12 

4-0 

3-4 

2-8 

2-O 

I-I2 

1-8 

.... 

i^  

..6-12 

5-12 

4-12 

3-12 

3-0 

2-8 

2-4 

2-O 

.... 

i£  

..9-0 

8-0 

6-4 

5-° 

4-4 

38 

34 

2-0 

2     

.10-12 

q-o 

7-0 

6-0 

5-4 

A-O 

I-O 

2*  

,  6-0 

4-0 





3  

.  6-0 

q-o 

4-8 

3-8 

4  

8-0 

6-0 

5-° 

4-8 

4^      •  • 

.  .  8-0 

6-12 

6-0 

5  

12-0 

10   0 

8 

.... 

6  

.9    12 

.... 

'Weights   of   Seamless    Drawn    Brass    Pipe. 

IN    POUNDS     PER    LINEAL    FOOT. 

Inside  diameter 

in  inches,       i        i  i        '       'i      'A      2       2^       3       3^        4          4i        5         6 

Weight,  0.25  0.43  0.62  o.go  1.25  1.70  2.50  3.00  4.00  5.75  8.30  10.90  12.70  13.90  15.75  20.60 

Brass  pipes  are  made  either  plain  or  cin  lined  inside,  and  plain,  polished  or  nickel  plated  out- 
side. If  plain  outside  they  should  have  a  coat  of  white  shellac,  which  may  be  specified  either  here 
or  in  the  Painter's  "specification. 


'75 


suitable  blocks  where  required.  [The  main  supply  and  all  pipes  for  cold  water 
supplies  to  | mention  fixtures!  are  to  be  tin  lined.]  All  brass  pipes  where  they  are 
exposed  to  view  are  to  be  polished.  Give  all  other  brass  pipes  a  coat  of  white 
shellac. 


Pipe  Casings. 


Encase  all  supply  pipes  and  traps  above  the  first  floor  with  tubes  made  of 
i  i  oz.  zinc.  The  horizontal  joints  are  to  be  well  soldered  and  the  upright  joints 
lapped.  These  casings  are  to  be  graded  to  certain  points  and  connected  to  f"  D 
lead  drip  pipes  run  to  the  laundry  tubs. 


Exposed   Pipes. 


All  pipes  in  kitchen  and  inferior  rooms  where  practicable  are  to  be  left  exposed. 
All  exposed  iron  pipes  are  to  be  bronzed  and  all  lead  pipes  cleaned  off  with  oakum 
and  gasolene  and  [bronzed]  or  [shellaced]. 


Testing. 
Wastes. 


Gas. 


Supplies. 


Cesspools. 


Before  the  plastering  is  done  the  house  trap  is  to  be  filled  with  'plaster-of- 
Paris  or  plugged,  all  openings  in  waste,  soil  and  drain  pipes  plugged,  and  the 
entire  system  of  waste,  soil,  vent  and  drain  pipes  filled  to  the  top  with  2water  in 
the  presence  of  the  Architect  and  Inspector. 

Before  the  plastering  is  done  all  gas  outlets  are  to  be  capped  and  the  gas 
pipes  tested  under  an  air  pressure  of  eight  pounds.  The  caps  are  to  be  left  on. 

At  completion  the  water  is  to  be  turned  on  in  the  presence  of  the  Architect 
and  left  for  his  inspection,  after  which  the  water  shall  be  turned  off  in  the  street 
and  all  traps  emptied. 

If  any  defects  are  found  in  the  work  in  testing  they  must  be  repaired  and  the 
tests  repeated  until  the  work  is  found  to  be  perfectly  tight. 

{See  page  40,} 


,76 


'Usually  a  mixture  of  plaster-of-Paris  and  Portland  cement  in  equal  proportions  is  used  for 
filling  up  the  house  drain  for  these  tests. 

'This  water  test  is  undoubtedly  the  best.  In  case  of  the  building  being  so  high  or  the  drain 
pipes  so  light,  however,  that  this  test  would  burst  them,  or  where  there  is  danger  of  freezing,  a 
peppermint  test  is  sometimes  specified,  as  follows  : 

"Fill  all  traps  with  water,  close  all  outlets  and  pour  five  ounces  of  oil  of  peppermint  into  the 
top  of  the  soil  pipe.  Follow  with  two  or  three  gallons  of  hot  water  and  immediately  close  the  top 
of  the  soil  pipe.  If  any  odor  of  peppermint  is  detected  in  any  part  of  the  building  the  Plumber 
shall,  at  his  own  expense,  find  and  repair  the  defects.  This  test  shall  be  repeated  until  the  system 
is  proven  tight." 

An  air  pressure  test  of  about  eight  pounds  is  sometimes  used  for  the  waste  system,  the  same 
as  is  here  given  for  gas. 


'77 


House  Sewer. 


[Lay  a  (5")  vitrified  'tile  house  sewer  from  a  point  (6')  outside  of  the  front 
wall  of  the  building]  or  [Lay  a  (5 ")  extra  heavy  cast  iron  house  sewer  from  the 
house  drain  in  the  building]  to  the  [cesspool  which  will  be  located  (50')  from  the 
building]  or  [sewer  in  the  street.  Tap,  and  pay  for  tapping  the  sewer  and  connect 
therewith.  The  building  is  to  be  located  (50')  from  the  street  line.] 


House  Drain. 


House  Trap. 


Cleaning  Screws. 


Run  a  (5")  extra  heavy  cast  iron  house  drain  [where  shown  on  the  plans,  from 
the  foot  of  the  soil  pipe  to  a  point  (6')  outside  of  the  front  wall  of  the  building], 
and  connect  to  the  house  sewer  with  a  tightly  cemented  joint.  Make  all  necessary 
changes  in  direction  with  curved  pipes.  The  house  drain  is  to  be  run  [below 
the  cellar  bottom  in  a  "trench  prepared  by  the  Mason^\ 

Trap  the  house  drain  with  a  (5")  extra  Jieavy  cast  iron  running  or  half  S  trap 
placed  just  inside  the  cellar  wall,  with  a  hand  hole  for  cleaning  covered  with  a 
brass  screw  cap. 

Place  two  cleaning  screws  between  the  house  trap  and  the  foot  of  the  soil 
pipe,  with  Y  branch  connections  to  the  drain  and  with  brass  screw  covers. 


Fresh  Air  Inlet. 


Provide  and  put  in  a  (5")  extra  heavy  cast  iron  pipe  connected  to  the  house 
drain  inside  of  the  house  trap,  and  run  [to  a  point  (25')  outside  of  the  building 
where  shown,  and  (i')  above  the  finished  grade,  with  a  perforated  iron  cover]  or 
[flush  with  the  sidewalk  near  the  street  curb,  and  covered  properly  with  a 
galvanized  iron  grating  leaded  into  the  flagstone.] 


Yard  Drains. 


Leader  Drains. 


[The  3Mason  will  construct  the  area,  light  court  and  yard  catch  basins  shown 
on  the  drawings.  Provide  and  set  a  (10")  galvanized  iron  strainer  for  each]  or 

[Furnish  and  set  in  each  area,  light  court  and  yard  where  shown  on  the  plans, 
a  heavy  4cast  iron  round  cesspool  or  catch  basin  (13 ")  in  diameter  with  a  galvanized 
iron  grating.] 

Run  from  each  a  4"  extra  heavy  cast  iron  drain  and  connect  to  the  house  drain. 
Trap  each  with  a  (4")  extra  heavy  cast  iron  running  trap  placed  [inside  the  cellar 
wall]  or  [deep  enough  in  the  ground  to  prevent  freezing.] 

|  For  cast  iron  connections  for  leaders,  see  page  182,  and  tile  drain  leader  connections  and  irri- 
gation drains,  see  page  42.;- 

178 


'A  vitrified  tile  house  sewer  is  also  specified  in  the  Mason's  Specification,  page  42. 

'For  trench  for  drain  pipe,  see  in  Mason's  specification,  page  30. 

'Brick  catch  basins  are  specified  in  Mason's  specification,  page  42. 

'Cast  iron  cesspools  or  catch  basins  are  made  round  or  square,  with  grating  or  plate  and  with 
or  without  a  bell  trap.  If  one  with  a  bell  trap  is  used,  omit  the  trap  on  the  waste.  If  set  out 
of  doors  the  bell  trap  is  likely  to  freeze. 

The  ordinary  sizes  of  iron  cesspools  are  6,  8,  9,  12,  13,  14,  16,  18,  20  and  24  inches,  either 
square  or  round.  The  usual  sizes  of  outlets  are  for  6"  cesspools,  2"  outlets;  for  8"  and  9",  3"  out- 
lets, and  for  all  the  others  4"  outlets. 


Standing  Soils 
and  Wastes. 


Provide  and  set  one  line  of  (4")  extra  heavy  cast  iron  soil  pipe  and  two  lines  of 
(2")  extra  heavy  cast  iron  standing  waste  pipe,  as  shown  on  the  drawings.  Connect 
each  line  at  the  foot  of  the  house  drain  and  continue  each  Line  independently  (3') 
above  [the  highest  part  of]  the  roof,  leaving  the  end.y  open. 

All  waste  connections  into  soils  and  standing  wastes  and  the  soil  and  waste 
connections  into  the  house  drain  are  to  be  made  with  Y  branches  and  one-eighth 
or  one-sixteenth  bends.  All  vent  connections  are  to  be  made  with  T  branches. 


Vent  Pipes. 


Provide  and  run  for  each  line  of  water  closets  a  (2")  extra  heavy  cast  iron  vent 
pipe  connected  to  each  water  closet  'trap  with  a  short  length  of  (2"  D)  lead  pipe 
and  [connect  into  the  soil  pipe  above  the  highest  fixture]  or  [run  above  the  roof 
independently.] 

Ventilate  all  other  traps  in  the  building  by  running  (2")  extra  heavy  cast  iron 
pipes  connected  to  the  traps  by  short  lengths  of  (D)  lead  pipes  of  the  full  size  of 
the  wastes  on  which  such  traps  are  located.  Run  these  vent  pipes  either  into  the 
soil  or  waste  lines  above  the  highest  fixtures  on  such  lines,  or  extend  them  inde- 
pendently (3')  above  [the  highest  part  of]  the  roof. 


Pipes  Enlarged. 


Every   standing  waste   and  vent  pipe  extending  through  the  roof  is  to    be 
enlarged  at  the  roof  line' to  a  (4")  extra  heavy  cast  iron  pipe. 


Roof  Joints.  All  joints  between  the  roof  and  such  pipes  as  extend  through  the  roof,  are  to 

be  made  water  tight  by  heavy  [sheet  lead]  or  [tin]  or  [copper]  flashings  18"  square, 
with  a  funnel  around  the  pipe.  The  flashing  is  to  be  securely  fastened  to  the  roof 
and  the  funnel  is  to  be  turned  over  and  caulked  into  the  hub  of  the  iron  pipe. 


Baskets.  Protect  the  open  ends  of  all  soil,  waste  and  vent  pipes  above  the  roof  with 

strong  wire  baskets  properly  secured. 


1 80 


'Syphon  closets  do  not  require  trap  ventilation. 


181 


Leaders. 

Inside. 


Outside. 


Traps. 


Provide  and  run  two  (4")  extra  heavy  cast  iron  leaders  inside  the  building. 
The  joint  between  the  leader  and  the  roof  is  to  be  made  by  means  of  a  brass 
ferrule  and  copper  tube  properly  connected.  Connect  the  leaders  to  the  house 
drain. 

Run  from  each  outside  leader  a  (4")  extra  heavy  'cast  iron  pipe.  Connect  to 
the  house  drain  and  run  up  (4')  above  the  finished  grade.  j  For  leaders,  see  under 
Metal  Work.  | 

Trap  all  leader  connections  into  the  house  drain  with  a  (4")  extra  heavy  cast 
iron  running  trap  placed  [inside  the  cellar  wall]  or  [deep  enough  in  the  ground  to 
prevent  freezing.] 


Traps. 


Bell  Traps. 


Trap  all  fixtures  in  the  building  unless  otherwise  specified  with  half  S  or  running 
traps  of  the  same  size  and  material  as  the  wastes  from  such  fixtures.  All  traps 
are  to  be  ventilated  as  specified,  and  are  to  have  brass  trap  screws. 

| For  Grease  Trap,  see  note  No.  2,  oppos      ,\ 

Furnish  and  set  four  (6' )  bell  traps  with  (2")  outlets  for  heater,  refrigerator 
ivaste,  gas  machine,  conservatory  waste,  as  shown  on  the  plans.  Run  an  extra  heavy 
cast  iron  pipe  from  each  bell  trap,  in  size  to  correspond  with  the  outlet,  and 
connect  to  the  drain. 


Safes. 

Marble. 


Lead. 


Wastes. 


Furnish  and  set  (ii")  countersunk  Italian  marble  safe  slabs  under  |  mention 
fixtures  [  each  in  one  piece  the  full  size  of  the  fixture  under  which  it  is  placed,  and 
with  a  waste  hole  drilled  through. 

Underline  all  other  fixtures  above  the  basement  with  3(4  Ib.)  sheet  lead  turned 
up  2"  all  around. 

All  safes  are  to  have  (ii  )  convex  brass  strainers  and  (f"  D)  lead  wastes  to 
the  4cellar  floor. 


182 


'For  tile  leader  connections,  see  Mason's  specification,  page  42. 

"Where  a  grease  trap  is  desired,  the  usual  way  is  to  place  brass  grease  traps  under  the  sinks 
or  other  fixtures  desired,  in  which  case  the  ordinary  traps  under  such  fixtures  are  omitted — see 
Grease  Traps  under  heading  "Sinks."  Sometimes,  however,  a  brick  grease  trap  is  constructed 
on  the  house  drain  in  the  cellar  or  outside  of  the  building — see  Mason's  specification,  page  40 — 
in  which  case  it  should  be  ventilated  with  a  special  iron  pipe  about  2"  in  size,  carried  to  the  soil 
or  above  the  roof. 

"Sheet  lead  is  usually  made  in  rolls  8'  wide  and  2^,  3,  3^,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8  and  10  pounds  to  the 
square  foot. 

*Or  these  safe  wastes  might  be  run  to  some  fixture  in  the  basement  or  kitchen. 


Tank. 


% 

A  tank  (Y  x  4')  in  size  and  (3')  deep  will  be  constructed  in  the  attic  by  the 
'Carpqnter.  Line  this  tank  with  2(8  lb.  sheet  lead),  with  wiped  seams.  Dot  the 
sides  with  2!"-  dots,  placed  2'  on  centres,  and  leave  the  lead  smooth  all  around. 
Use  tinned  copper  nails. 


Overflow.  Connect  a  (2")  D  lead  overflow  pipe  3"  from  the  top  of  the  tank,  and  run  to 

[a  3roof  gutter  or  leader,  with  a  brass  flap  valve  on  the  end  to  keep  out  the  cold.] 


Emptying  Pipe. 


Run  a  (iF)  D  lead  pipe  from  the  bottom  of  the  tank  to  the  overflow  pipe  with 
a  (ii')  open  way  valve  placed  close  to  the  tank. 


City  Supply.  Supply  the  tank  with  city  water  through  a  separate  (£")  galvanized  iron  rising 

main.      No  cold  water  branches  to  fixtures  are  to  be  taken  from  this   riser.     Place 
a  ball  cock  on  this  supply  to  prevent  overflow. 


Roof  Supply. 


Cistern  or  Well 
Supply. 

Cistern  and  Well 
Supply. 


Tell-tale  Pipe. 


Run  {specify  number}  (4")  galvanized  iron  leader  pipes  .from  the  gutters  in  the  roof  to  the 
tank  and  run  down  to  within  6"  of  the  bottom  of  the  tank. 

Supply  the  tank  from  the  cistern  through  a  (2")  AA  lead  pipe,  run  to  within  one  foot  of  the 
bottom  of  the  cistern,  and  provide  and  set,  on  the  kitchen  sink,  a  (4")  Douglass  double  acting  lift 
and  force  pump  with  all  proper  connections. 

Supply  the  tank  from  the  cistern  and  well  through  (2")  A  A  lead  pipes,  run  to  within  one  foot 
of  the  bottom  of  each  and  place  a  shut-off  on  each  line  so  that  the  water  can  be  pumped  from 
either  by  closing  the  shut-off  on  the  line  not  required.  Provide  and  set  on  the  kitchen  sink  a  (4") 
Douglass  double  acting  lift  and  force  pump  with  all  proper  connections.  Run  a  (f")  A  A  lead  pipe 
from  a  point  just  below  the  retaining  valve  of  the  pump,  to  the  cold  water  cock  over  kitchen 
sink. 

Run  a  (£")  D  feza"teil-tale  pipe  from  a  point  4"  below  the  top  of  the  tank  to  the  kitchen  sink 
and  leave  the  end  open. 


Supplies  from  Tank. 


Provide  and  place  at  the  bottom  of  the  tank  a  tank-valve  with  an  air  tube 
.carried  above  the  water  level  in  the  tank,  and  from  it  run  a  (f)  galvanized  iron 
pipe  to  supply  the  boiler  and  fixtures.  [The  \  mention  fixtures  |  will  be  supplied 
with  cold  water  5direct  through  separate  branches  taken  from  the  house  main,  and 
not  from  the  riser  to  the  tank.]  All  other  fixtures  are  to  be  supplied  with  cold 
water  through  branches  taken  from  the  down  pipe  from  the  tank. 


184 


'For  a  wood  tank,  see  Carpenter's  specification,  page  134. 

'Weights  of  sheet  lead  are  2%,  3,  3%,  4,  4%,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9  and  10  pounds  per  square  foot. 
Often  tinned  copper,  about  16  oz.  ,  is  used  for  tank  lining  Copper  is  made  in  weights  of  10, 
12,  14,  16,  18  and  20  oz.  per  square  foot. 

Tanks  are  sometimes  made  in  cast  or  wrought  iron   either  rectangular  or  cylindrical;  the 
cast  iron  in  plates  18"  x  18*  and  18*  x  9'  in  size,  bolted  together  and  cemented.     The  wrought 
iron  tanks  are  riveted  together. 
Capacity  of  Tanks: 

Rectangular  : 

Cubical  Con  tents  =  Length  x  breadth  x  height. 

Cylindrical  : 

Cubical  Contents=3.  14159  x  the  square  of  the  radius  x  height. 

Cubical  contents  in  inches 
Capacity  in  gallons  = 


Or 

Capacity  in  gallons=  Cubical  Contents  in  feet  x  7.48. 

Weight  of  Contents. 

To  find  the  weight  of  water  in  a  tank  : 

Weight  of  contents  in  pounds  =  Capacity  in  gallons  x  8. 
Or 

Weight  of  contents  in  pounds=Cubical  Contents  in  feet  x  59.84. 

The  two  formulas  following,  which  are  approximately  correct,  may  be  found  useful  in  this 
connection  : 

Area  of  a  Circle  =(  Diameter  x  148-=-167)' 

Cubical  Contents  of  a  Cylinder  =(  Diameter  x  148-=-167)s  x  length. 

* 

'If  no  roof  gutter  or  leader  is  accessible,  this  overflow  might  be  run  to  the  kitchen  sink  or 
laundry  tubs  and  discharged  over  them. 

4This  tell-tale  pipe  is  used  only  where  the  tank  is  supplied  with  a  pump. 
•5This  direct  supply  is  for  drinking  water. 


185 


Water  Supplies. 


Tap  and  pay  for  tapping  the  water  main  in  the  street.  Connect  and  run  to 
the  building  a  (74")  galvanized  iron  supply  pipe.  Continue  in  the  building  with  a 
(34")  galvanized  iron  house  main  and  run  the  necessary  branches  as  required  and 
specified.  [The  building  is  to  be  set  (50')  from  the  street  line.]  Place  a  lever 
handled  shut-off  on  the  main  supply  just  inside  the  cellar  wall.  Before  any  mason 
work  is  begun,  place  a  temporary  cock  in  the  cellar  on  the  supply,  to  give  water 
during  the  progress  of  the  work.  All  supplies  are  to  be  graded  so  that  they  will 
drain  dry.  All  hot  and  cold  water  lines  are  to  be  placed  at  least  J^"  apart. 

No  cock  is  to  be  placed  at  the  end  of  a  line  pipe,  but  the  pipe  must  extend 
beyond  vertically,  a  sufficient  length  to  form  a  proper  air  chamber. 

'Arrange  all  lines  so  that  the  hot  and  cold  water  can  be  shut  off  from  each 
group  of  fixtures  independently,  by  means  of  Peck's  lever  handled  ground  key  2stop 
and  waste  cocks  placed  on  the  kitchen  ceiling,  and  all  such  lines  are  to  have  the 
name  lettered  on  the  pipe.  The  drips  are  to  be  connected  by  small  lead  wastes  to 
some  convenient  fixture. 


Hose  Connection,  etc. 


Run  a  (2")  galvanized  iron,  pipe  to  the  point  marked  on  the  drawings.  Furnish 
and  put  up  complete  a  Guibert  Perfect  hose  reel  (perpendicular)  or  (forty-five 
degree)  pattern  with  (2")  brass  nickel  plated  valve  and  capacity  for  ( 1 50')  of  (2")  hose. 

Furnish    (150')    of   (2")    Underwriters   unlined   linen   hose   with   a    (plain)    or 
(shut-off)  pipe  nozzle. 
Or 

Run  a  (3^")  galvanized  iron  pipe  to  the  point  marked  on  the  drawings,  with  a 
hose  bibb  placed  at  the  end  and  lever  handled  stop  and  a  waste  shut-off  inside 
the  cellar  wall. 

Run  04")  galvanized  iron  supplies  for  heater  and  'gas  machine  with  ends 
plugged  up  ready  for  future  connections. 


Hydrant.  Provide  and  set  where  shown   on  the  drawings,   a  3(3'-G")  Douglass   hydrant  with   hose 

connections  complete.  Run  for  this  a  (%")  galvanized  iron  pipe  and  place  a  lever  handled  stop 
and  waste  shut-off  on  the  supply  inside  the  cellar  wall.  Furnish  and  set  a  (12"  x  12")  cast  iron 
hydrant  cesspool  with  galvanized  iron  strainer  on  top  and  (3")  outlet.  Run  a  (3")  extra  heavy 
cast  iron  waste  to  the  house  drain  with  a  (3")  extra  heavy  cast  iron  trap  placed  below  frost. 


186 


'The  "  Arrangement  of  Lines  "  might  be  specified  more  definitely  to  suit  the  building  by 
specifying  the  number  of  lines  required  and  grouping  the  fixtures.  For  instance,  in  a  simple 
ordinary  arrangement  with  a  bath  room  and  adjoining  lavatory  in  the  second  story,  with  two 
sinks  and  laundry  trays  below  second  story,  with  boiler  located  in  the  first  story  kitchen  and 
with  cold  water  supply  coming  in  at  the  basement,  the  arrangement  might  be  specified  as  follows 

(Lines  i  and  2).  Run  a  line  of  hot  and  cold,  each  (}")  galvanized  iron  pipes,  to  supply  the 
fixtures  in  the  second  story  bath  room  and  the  lavatory  adjoining. 

(Lines  3  and  4).  Run  a  line  of  hot  and  cold,  each  (J")  galvanized  iron  pipes,  to  supply  kitchen 
sink,  butler's  pantry  sink,  and  laundry  tubs. 

Run  the  two  hot  water  lines  across  the  ceiling  of  the  kitchen,  and  the  two  cold  water  lines 
across  the  ceiling  of  the  laundry  in  the  basement. 

(Stops.)  Place  four  combined  stop  and  waste  cocks  on  these  lines,  two  on  the  kitchen  ceil- 
ing and  two  on  the  laundry  ceiling. 

(Drips.)  Connect  the  drip  cock  on  each  end  with  a  small  lead  waste,  the  waste  from  hot 
water  lines  to  run  to  kitchen  sink  and  the  waste  from  cold  water  lines  to  run  over  laundry  tubs. 

All  lines  are  to  have  the  names  lettered  on  the  pipes. 

Or  the  cold  water  lines  might  be  run  across  the  kitchen  ceiling  by  the  side  of  the  hot  water 
lines.  This  would  make  the  cold  runs  somewhat  longer,  but  would  have  the  advantage  of  bring- 
ing all  the  shut-offs  together  in  one  place  on  the  kitchen  ceiling,  but  the  hot  water  pipes  should 
not  be  run  down  and  across  the  basement  ceiling  to  accomplish  the  same  purpose,  as  it  would 
trap  the  pipes  running  from  the  boiler,  down  below  the  boiler  and  up  again  to  the  second  story 
fixtures.  Hot  water  pipes  should  be  kept  rising  from  the  boiler  to  the  fixtures  above. 

In  the  arrangement  here  given  as  an  example,  the  hot  and  cold  water  "grouping  "  of  fixtures 
has  been  made  the  same,  which  might  not  be  the  most  desirable  way  in  many  cases. 

Additional  fixtures  might  be  disposed  of  in  like  manner,  either  by  extending  these  lines  and 
placing  shut-offs  on  them  after  passing  the  first  two  or  three  fixtures,  or  by  carrying  branches  from 
these  lines  to  such  additional  fixtures  with  shut  offs  on  such  branches,  or  by  making  more 
"groups"  and  corresponding  lines  as  the  arrangement  might  require  or  the  limit  of  cost  allow: 

It  is  not  advisable  to  specify  an  arrangement  requiring  long  runs  back  of  the  plastering  above 
the  first  story,  as  the  water  of  condensation  may  damage  the  ceiling,  especially  if  galvanized  iron 
pipes  are  used  and  without  pipe  casings. 

If  a  tank  is  used,  as  specified  on  page  184,  it  should  be  supplied  from  a  separate  riser  run 
independently,  and  it  would  be  necessary  under  the  heading  "  Arrangement  of  Lines,"  to  specify 
only  the  hot  water  lines  and  the  cold  supply  to  such  fixtures  as  are  to  be  supplied  direct  for 
drinking  water,  as  everything  else  necessary  is  called  for  under  its  appropriate  heading;  for 
instance,  supply  to  tank  and  fixtures  from  tank  under  heading  "Tank,"  tin  lined  pipes  under 
heading  "Pipes,"  etc. 

"Sometimes  combined  stop"and  waste  cocks  are  used  and  sometimes  ordinary  stop  cocks  are 
used  and  separate  waste  or  drip  cocks  placed  on  the  lines. 

'Hydrants  are  3^,  4,  4^  and  5  feet  high. 


187 


Boiler. 


Circulation  Pipe. 


Steam  Escape. 


Furnish  and  set  where  shown  on  the  drawings  a  Hepe,  Kaven  &  Company's 
'(40)  gallon  extra  heavy  galvanized  iron  range  boiler,  double  row  riveted  [set  on 
a  Lock-wood  galvanized  iron  standard]  or  ["horizontal  pattern,  to  be  hung  from  the 
ceiling  by  means  of  ($•"  x  i-j-")  iron  hangers  run  through  the  beams  and  with  nuts 
and  washers  on  top  let  in  flush  with  the  top  of  the  beams,  all  furnished  and  put  up 
complete  by  the  Plumber.] 

Supply  the  boiler  through  a  (£")  galvanised  iron  pipe  with  a  lever-handled 
shut-off  placed  near  the  boiler.  Connect  the  boiler  to  the  water-back  of  the  range 
with  3(|")  brass  pipes  and  brass  couplings.  The  boiler  is  to  have  a  (f")  sediment 
pipe  and  cock.  [4The  sediment  pipe  is  to  be  connected  to  the  kitchen  sink  waste 
on  the  house  side  of  the  trap.] 

Run  a  (i")  galvanized  iron  pipe  from  the  highest  point  on  the  hot  water  pipes, 
down  to  below  the  boiler  and  there  connect  to  the  sediment  pipe  inside  of  the 
sediment  cock. 

All  the  hot  water  pipes  must  be  kept  rising  from  the  head  of  the  boiler  to 
fixtures  above,  and  to  fixtures  on  the  same  floor  they  must  be  run  up  from  the 
boiler  and  down  to  the  fixtures  rather  than  down  on  the  ceiling  below  and  up  to 
such  fixtures. 

Run  a  (i")  [AA  lead]  or  [£"  galvanized  iron]  pipe  from  the  top  of  the  hot 
water  supply  at  its  highest  point,  up  to  and  over  the  top  of  the  tank,  leaving  the 
end  open  for  a  5steam  escape. 


Range.  Furnish  and  set  in  the  kitchen  where  shown  on  the  plan,  a  [6Bay  State 

Hamilton  No.  i  Portable  double  oven  range  with  water  back,  warming  closet, 
shelf  and  hood  complete.] 

Register.  Furnish  a  (12"  x  14")  japanned  iron  vent  register  to  be  set  by  the  Mason. 

Brickset.  The  Mason  is  to  furnish  the  brick  and  mortar  to  brick  set  the  range. 

Connect  the  range  to  the  flue  in  the  chimney  with  a  7(7")  No.  24  imported 
Russia  iron  stove  pipe,  with  a  slide  damper  and  a  proper  tin  collar  over  the  joint 
where  the  pipe  enters  the  chimney  flue. 


188 


'The  size  of  boiler  should  be  suited  to  the  size  of  range  used.  Boilers  are  made  in  copper, 
steel  or  iron.  Copper  boilers  are  20  to  40  per  cent,  higher  priced  than  galvanized  iron.  Galvan- 
ized iron  boilers  are  much  the  strongest  and  are  usually  used  where  no  tank  is  called  for.  They 
will  wear  twice  as  long  as  steel  boilers. 

Copper  Boilers. 

Sizes  in  gallons:     30,  35,  40,  45,  50,  60,  70,  80,  90,  100. 
Grades:     Ordinary,  50  Ibs. ;  heavy,  70  Ibs. ;  double  heavy,  125  Ibs.  pressure. 

Iron  Boilers. 

Capacity,  in  Gallons:     18  21  24  24  27  28  30  32  35 

Size,  in  Inches:  36x12     42x12     48x12     36x14     54x12     42x14     60x12     48x14     60x13 

Capacity,  in  Gallons:     36  36  40  42  47  48  52  53  63 

Size,  in  Inches:  72x12     54x14     60x14     48x16     54x16     72x14     60x16     48x18     72x16 

Capacity,  in  Gallons:     66  79  82  98         100          120        120         144         168       192 

Size,  in  Inches:  60x18    72x18    60x20    72x20   -60x22     72x22    60x24    72x24   84x24    96x24 

Iron  boilers  are  made  galvanized  or  plain  and  in  three  grades:  standard  or  regular,  200  Ibs. ; 
extra  heavy,  250  Ibs.,  and  double  extra  heavy  or  special,  300  Ibs.  pressure. 

"Many  ranges  are  made  with  brackets  for  a  horizontal  boiler.  If  a  boiler  is  hung  from  the 
beams,  extra  timbers  should  be  put  in  to  support  it. 

'Sometimes  galvanized  iron  pipe  and  couplings,  sometimes  AA  or.  AAA  lead  pipe  with  brass 
couplings,  and  sometimes  even  lead  pipe  with  wiped  joints,  are  used  to  connect  the  waterback  of 
the  range  with  the  boiler. 

*The  sediment  pipe  often  terminates  at  the  sediment  cock,  the  boiler  being  emptied  from  the 
sediment  cock  through  a  rubber  hose  attached  when  needed. 

'One  of  the  greatest  advantages  of  using  a  tank  instead  of  a  direct  supply  is  the  opportunity 
thus  afforded  of  allowing  this  steam  escape  to  be  put  in;  often  in  cases  of  a  direct  supply  a 
"  vacuum  valve  "  is  placed  on  top  of  the  boiler  for  the  same  purpose. 

"Tables  of  the  ranges  usually  used,  giving  the  sizes  for  brick  setting,  etc.,  will  be  found  of 
great  convenience  in  writing  specifications.  As  the  size  of  the  boiler  should  be  suited  to  the 
size  of  the  range  used,  these  tables  should  include  such  information  which  is  not  usually  given 
in  the  catalogues.  For  an  example  of  the  arrangement  of  such  tables,  see  opposite  Heating 
Specification. 

'A  7"  pipe  is  usual  for  a  double  oven  range  and  a  6"  pipe  for  a  single  oven. 


189 


Kitchen  Sink. 

Iron. 
City  Supply. 

Cistern  Supply. 


Well  and  Cistern 
Supply. 


-     Waste. 


Porcelain 
with  flarble  Fittings. 


Pantry  Sink. 

Copper. 


Furnish  and  set  in  the  kitchen  where  shown,  a  (20"  x  36") galvanized  'cast  iron 
sink  with  a  strainer  and  with  galvanized  iron  legs  and  a  galvanized  iron  back. 

Supply  the  sink  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (£")  galvanized  iron  pipes 
and  Peck's  brass  compression  cocks.  The  cold  water  cock  is  to  have  a  hose  end. 

Supply  from  the  cistern  in  the  cellar  through  a  (i^")  galvanized  iron  pipe  run  to  within  a  foot 
of  the  bottom  of  the  cistern.  Furnish  and  set  a  No.  2  Douglass  revolving  stand  pump  with  all  the 
necessary  connections. 

Supply  from  the  well  and  the  cistern  through  (i^")  galvanized  iron  pipes  run  to  within  one 
foot  of  the  bottom  of  each  and  place  a  shut-off  on  each  line,  so  that  the  water  can  be  pumped  from 
either  by  closing  the  shut-off  on  the  line  not  required.  Furnish  and  set  a  No.  2  Douglass  revolving 
stand  pump  with  all  the  necessary  connections. 

Waste  through  a  (2"  D)  lead  branch  waste  connected  to  the  soil. 

| Grease  Trap.} 

Furnish  and  set  a  first  quality  Peck's  white  ^crockery  kitchen  sink  (22"  x  37")  in  size  with  brass 
coupling  and  nickel-plated  strainer  ;  set  on  nickel-plated  legs  and  standards,  as  shown  in  Fig.  418 
Peck's  catalogue. 

Supply  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (f ")  nickel-plated  brass  pipes  above  the  floor  and  (f ") 
galvanized  iron  pipes  below  and  Peck's  polished  brass  improved  faucets.  The  cold  water  faucet  is  to 
have  a  hose  end. 

Waste  through  a  (2")  branch  (D)  lead  waste  connected  to  the  standing  waste.  Provide  a 
Peck's  No.  5,  2"  sink  trap  with  vent.  The  trap,  waste  to  floor,  and  vent  are-  to  be  nickel-plated  brass 
where  exposed  to  view. 

Provide  with  Italian  marble  backj  end,  drip  slab,  frame  and  apron.  The  back  and  end  are  to 
be  £"  thick  and  (18")  high.  The  drip  slab  and  frame  are  to  be  cut  from  a  (i£"  x  27"  x  75")  slab 
with  grooves  in  the  drip  to  drain  the  water  back  to  the  sink  and  with  a  hole  cut  through  the  size 
of  the  sink.  The  aprons  are  to  be  (£"  x  5".)  All  free  edges  of  the  marble  are  to  be  ogee 
moulded. 

JFor  marble  floor  slab,  see  under  "Safes."' 


Furnish  and  set  in  the  pantry  where  shown  an  [oval]  or  [flat  bottom]  tinned 
planished  3copper  overflow  pantry  sink,  (16"  x  24")  in  size,  with  a  nickel-plated  plug 
strainer,  chain  and  rubber  stopper.  [Set  the  sink  in  a  wood  box  and  bed  it  in 
plaster-of-Paris.] 

Supply  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (i")  galvanized  iron  pipes  and  Peck's 
nickel-plated  brass  compression  pantry  cocks. 

Waste  through  a  (i£"  D)  lead  branch  waste  trapped  and  run  to  the  standing 
waste.  The  overflow  is  to  be  connected  to  the  waste.  The  sink  is  to  be  set  in  a 
wood  frame  put  up  by  the  Carpenter. 

190 


5inks : 

'Cast  iron  sinks  are  made  either  plain,  galvanized  or  white  enameled.  The  relative  list 
prices  are,  for  instance,  20"  x  36",  $3.70  plain;  $7.75  galvanized  and  $10  50  enameled.  They 
are  furnished  without  legs  to  be  set  in  a  wood  frame  made  by  the  Carpenter,  or  with  galvanized 
iron  or  bronze  legs  to  be  set  open.  The  usual  sizes  of  iron  sinks  arc  as  follows: 

12  x  18  inches;  14  x  20;  15  x  27;  16  X  24,  28,  30;  18  x  24,  30,  32,  36;  20  x  24,  30,  36,  38,  40, 
42,  48;  21^  x  32^,  36;  22  x  42,  48,  50,  62  and  76  inches. 

Wrought  steel  sinks  are  made  plain,  galvanized  and  grey  or  white  enameled.  The  prices 
are  about  the  same  as  for  the  cast  iron  sinks.  The  usual  sizes  are  16  x  24;  18  x  30,  36;  20  x  30, 
36  and  40  inches. 

Kitchen  sinks  sometimes,  but  not  usually,  have  an  overflow  connected  to  the  waste. 

"White  porcelain  or  crockery  sinks  are  usually  of  the  following  sizes:  22"  x  30";  22"  x  37"; 
22"  x  42".  They  are  set  up  with  marble  fittings  or  with  wood  rims  and  drip  same  as  for  iron 
sinks. 

3Copper  pantry  sinks  are  made  in  three  shapes:  oval,  flat  bottomed  and  recessed,  and  with  or 
without  overflows.  The  recessed  sinks  are  flat  bottomed  and  are  used  for  a  standing  overflow. 
The  usual  sizes  for  all  shapes  are  as  follows:  12x18;  i2X2o;i4Xi6;i4X2o;i4X24;  16x24; 
16  x  30,  and  18  x  30  inches.  The  oval  shapes  cost  more  than  the  flat  bottomed.  Cocks  are  made 
polished  brass,  nickel  plated  and  silver  plated.  The  trap,  waste  and  vent,  where  exposed  to  view, 
are  often  of  polished  or  nickel  plated  brass,  with  the  waste  run  to  the  floor  or  back  through  the 
wall.  Pantry  sinks  usually  have  an  overflow  and  plug  and  chain. 


191 


Porcelain.  Furnish  and  set  in  the  pantry  a  first  quality  Peck's  white  ^crockery  butler's   pantry   sink  (18"  x 

with  Harble  Fittings.       24"  x  8")  in  size  as  shown  in  figure  427  Peck's  catalogue,  with  a  nickel  plated  plug,  strainer,  chain 

and  rubber  stopper.     Set  the  sink  and  slab  on  nickel  plated  brackets  and  legs. 


Supply  with  hot  and  cold  water  through 
plated  pan  try  cocks. 


galvanized  iron  pipes  and  Peck's  improved  nickel- 


Waste  through  a  (i£")  branch  (D)  lead  waste  connected  to  the  main  waste.  [Provide  with  a 
nickel-plated  brass  waste  run  to  the  floor  with  a  neckel-plated  brass  trap,  vent  and  overflow  connec- 
tion.] The  overflow  is  to  be  connected  to  the  waste. 

Provide  with  Italian  marble  back,  end,  drip  slab,  frame  and  apron.  The  back  and  end  are  to 
be  $•"  thick  and  (18")  high.  The  drip  slab  and  frame  are  to  be  cut  from  a  (ij"  x  23"  x  49")  slab 
with  grooves  in  the  drip  and  with  a  hole  cut  through  the  size  of  the  sink.  The  aprons  are  to  be 
(&"  x  5").  All  free  edges  of  the  marble  are  to  be  moulded. 

{For  floor  slab    see  under  "Safes."} 


Grease  Traps. 


Furnish  and  set  under  the  kitchen  and  pantry  sinks  on  the  line  of  each  sink 
waste  an  (8")  nickel  plated  brass  "grease  trap  with  a  brass  screw  cover.  Vent  this 
trap  through  a  (2")  branch  (D)  lead  vent  pipe.  .  The  waste  and  vent  pipes  where 
exposed  to  view,  are  to  be  nickel-plated  brass. 


Bath  Tubs. 

Copper. 


Furnish  and  set  in  the  third  story  bath  room  where  shown,  a  (14  oz.)  3copper, 
tinned  planished  bath  tub  (6')  long  with  nickel-plated  plug  and  chain  and  rubber 
stopper. 

Supply  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (-£")  galvanized  iron  pipes  and  Peck's 
nickel-plated  No.  4%  combination  bath  cocks. 

Waste  through  a  (ii"  D)  lead  branch  waste  trapped  and  connected  to  the 
soil.  Connect  the  overflow  to  the  waste.  Provide  a  nickel-plated  sprinkler  and 
six  feet  of  rubber  hose. 

{Specify  rim  here  or  in  Carpenter's.} 


Porcelain 
or  porcelain  lined. 


Furnish  and  set  in  the  second  story  bath  room  where  shown,  a  first  quality  (5^')  'porcelain  lined, 
roll  rim,  French  shape,  bath  tub  as  shown  in  plate  (245  A)  Peck's  catalogue,  with  full  nickel-plated 
brass  fittings,  including  supply  pipes  to  the  floor  [and  with  a  white  Colophite  enamel  finish  and  gold 
bands  outside.] 

Supply   with    hot    and    cold  water  through   (f")  galvanized  iron  pipes  and   waste,  through  a 
(i£"  D)  lead  branch  waste,  trapped  and  connected  to  the  soil. 

JFor  marble  floor  slab,  see  under  "Safes."} 

192 


'White  porcelain  or  crockery  pantry  sinks  are  usually  about  18"  x  24"  x  8"  or  18"  x  30"  x  n"  in 
size.  They  are  set  up  with  marble  fittings  or  with  wood  rim  and  drip. 

"When  this  grease  trap  is  used,  the  ordinary  trap  under  such  fixtures  is  omitted.  These  traps 
are  made  in  polished  or  nickel-plated  brass.  A  kind  of  grease  trap  is  also  made  which  screws  on 
the  underside  of  iron  sinks.  For  a  brick  grease  trap,  see  page  40. 

'Copper  tubs  are  made  in  two  shapes,  ordinary  and  French,  the  French  shape  costing  the 
more  and  both  shapes  4'-6",  5',  s'-6"  and  6'  long,  all  in  12,  14,  16,  18  and  20  oz.  tinned  planished 
copper.  Copper  tubs  are  also  made  for  standing  or  recessed  waste. 

Zinc  tubs  are  about  one-half  the  cost  of  the  ordinary  copper  and  are  made  5',  5'— 6"  and 
6'  long,  all  one  weight. 

Steel  Clad  bath  tubs  are  made  by  the  Steel  Clad  Bath  Company,  447  West  26th  St.,  N.  Y. 
These  tubs  are  enameled  outside,  lined  with  tinned  planished  copper  inside,  set  out  open  on  four 
ornamental  bronzed  legs,  weigh  about  100  pounds,  and  have  nickel-plated  overflow.  These  tubs 
present  a  very  neat  appearance  and  cost  about  half  way  between  copper  and  porcelain  lined. 
They  are  26"  wide  outside  of  rim  and  26"  high  from  floor  to  top.  They  are  furnished  with  either 
polished  cherry  or  oak  rim,  decorated  in  any  color,  and  are  made  in  three  shapes,  Roman,  French 
and  American,  and  numbered  as  follows  : 

ROMAN.  FRENCH.  AMERICAN. 

12—14—16  ounces.     12—14—16  ounces.          12  ounces. 

4'-6"         Nos.      21.   23.  25.  14.    16.   18.  38. 

5'  Nos.      27.   29.   31.  40. 

5'— 3"  NOS.  20.      22.     24. 

5-6"         No.  42. 

5 '-9"         Nos.  26.   28.  30. 

6  Nos.  32.   34.   36. 

It  is  necessary  to  specify  only  the  number  in  order  to  indicate  the  size,  shape  and  weight  of 
lining.  The  rim,  fittings  and  stopper  and  chain  should  be  specified.  The  American  shape  is  the 
lowest  priced,  the  Roman  highest. 

4Bath  tubs  are  made  both  solid  porcelain,  and  iron  porcelain  lined.  Both  are  made  in  two 
shapes,  French  and  Roman,  and  the  solid  porcelain  in  two  grades,  firsts  and  seconds.  Both  are 
made  with  or  without  a  roll  rim.  If  a  roll  rim  tub  is  used,  no  wood  rim  is  required.  If  not,  a 
wood  rim  should  be  provided  for  either  here  or  in  the  Carpenter's  specification.  The  usual  lengths 
are  4^,  5,  5^  and  6  feet  in  iron  porcelain  lined,  and  5  and  5^  feet  in  solid  porcelain.  Usually  one 
with  a  combination  waste  and  overflow  is  used.  If  not,  the  overflow  should  connect  to  the  waste. 
Decoration  costs  extra;  about  $16  for  white  or  ivory  enamel,  and  from  $20  to  $35  with  ornamental 
borders. 


'93 


Shower  Bath. 


Furnish  and  set  where  shown,  a  No.  14  A  Peck's  catalogue  shower  bath,  with 
nickel-plated  brass  supply  pipes  from  floor,  improved  temperature  cock  and  fittings 
as  there  shown.  The  shower  is  to  be  8f"  and  the  curtain  ring  25"  in  diameter. 
Furnish  and  put  up  a  white  rubber  curtain  and  nickel-plated  shampoo  complete. 

Supply  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (i")  galvanized  iron  pipes  where  not 
exposed  to  view.  If  not  set  over  a  bath  tub,  provide  a  (2 ")  Italian  marble  floor 
slab  (30")  square,  countersunk  i"  deep,  with  a  (3i")  nickel-plated  strainer  and  (ii") 
branch  (D)  lead  waste  trapped  and  connected  to  the  main  waste. 


Seat  Bath. 

Copper. 


Furnish  and  set  where  shown  on  the  plans,  a  (14  oz.)  copper  tinned  planished 
'seat  bath  (24"  x  22")  in  size. 

Supply  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (i")  galvanized  iron  pipes  and  Peck's 
nickel-plated  bell  supply  and  independent  hot  and  cold  cocks  with  handles  above 
the  rim  of  the  tub. 

Waste  through  a  (ii  )  branch  (D)  lead  waste  trapped  and  connected  to  the 
main  waste.  Provide  a  [nickel-plated  plug  and  chain  with  a  rubber  stopper  and 
overflow  connected  to  the  waste]  or  [a  nickel-plated  standing  combination  waste 
and  overflow.] 


Porcelain.  Furnish  and  set  where  shown  on  the  plans,  a  first  quality  porcelain  lined  seat  bath  (28"  x  27-!-" 

x  15"  and  20")  in  size,  [roll  rim  No.  440]  or  [wood  rim  No.  400]  Peck's  catalogue  with  a  white 
Colophite  enamel  finish  and  gold  lines  outside,  white  legs,  nickel-plated  Bi-  Transit  waste  and  over- 
flow, combination  compression  cocks  and  bell  supply  and  all  fittings  as  shown. 

Supply  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (f ")  galvanized  iron  pipes  below  the  floor  and  nickel- 
plated  brass  pipes  above  the  floor. 

Waste  through  a  (i-J-")  branch  (D)  lead  waste  trapped  and  connected  to  the  main  waste. 
{For  marble  floor  slab,  see  under  "Safes."} 


194 


'Copper  seat  baths  are  made  in  10,  12,  14,  16,  18  and  20  oz.  copper,  and  are  usually  about 
24  x  22"  in  size.  Foot  baths  are  made  in  the  same  weights,  and  about  16"  x  20'  x  10"  in  size. 
A  foot  bath  should  be  connected  in  the  same  manner  as  a  seat  bath.  A  seat. bath  may  be  used 
for  a  foot  bath  also. 


J95 


Wash  Bowls. 

Ordinary. 


Lavatory  Apparatus. 


Water  Closet. 


Furnish  and  set  in  {mention  rooms}  where  shown,  three  best  (15")  white 
earthenware  overflow  round  wash  basins. 

Supply  each  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (i")  galvanized  iron  pipes  and 
Peck's  improved  nickel-plated  brass  No.  i  basin  cocks. 

Waste  through  a  (i£"  D)  lead  branch  waste,  trapped  and  connected  to  the 
soil.  Provide  a  nickel-plated  plug  with  a  rubber  stopper  fastened  to  the  marble 
with  a  nickel-plated  chain. 

Set  for  each  basin  a  (ii"  x  18"  x  20")  Italian  marble  countersunk  top  and  $" 
wall  plates  (12")  high.  All  free  edges  of  the  marble  are  to  be  ogee  moulded. 
Secure  each  basin  to  the  marble  with  three  brass  basin  clamps  with  bolts  and 
make  the  joints  tight  with  plaster-of-Paris. 

The  slabs  are  to  be  set  on  nickel-plated  [brackets  No.  p]  or  [legs  No.  /]  Peck's 
catalogue. 

Furnish  and  set  {mention  where!  a  lavatory  apparatus  with  a  (15"  x  19")  oval  Erie  basin 
decorated  with  gold  bands,  with  a  Niagara  waste. 

Supply  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (£")  galvanized  iron  pipes  and  a  A'zW-Erie  base 
outlet  fixture.  The  pipes  are  to  be  No.  2  Peck's,  nickel  plated  where  exposed  to  view. 

Waste  through  a  (i-J-")  nickel-plated  brass  pipe  to  floor  with  a  (No.  13)  nickel-plated  trap  and 
vent  connection.  Continue  through  a  (i£"  D)  lead  pipe  connected  to  the  soil. 

Set  a  (i^"  x  23"  x  36")  countersunk  top,  (£"  x  16")  back  and  ends,  and  (|"  x  5")  front  and 
side  aprons,  all  of  Sienna  marble  with  all  free  edges  moulded.  Support  the  marble  on  a  pair  of 
Peck's  No.  16  B  legs  and  5"  apron  wall  sockets. 

{ For  floor  slab,  see  under  "  Safes." } 

Furnish  and  set  \  mention  where  \  a  Peck's  Triple  jet  No.  (45)  embossed  lsyphon 
water  closet  [with  gold  and  color  decoration],  with  a  (ii")  nickel-plated  brass  flush 
pipe  and  chain,  celluloid  pull  and  brass  floor  flange. 

Provide  with  a  round  'shaped  Unique  polished  light  oak  seat  and  lid  with 
nickel-plated  hinges. 

Provide  a  (18"  x  n"  x  ioi")  copper-lined  polished  light  oak  tank  with  a  ball 
cock  and  a  copper  ball  on  the  supply,  and  with  nickel-plated  brass  brackets 
complete. 

Supply  the  cistern  through  a  (£")  galvanized  iron  pipe  and  (•£")  nickel-plated 
brass  pipe  from  floor  to  tank.  Place  a  suitable  shut-off  valve  on  the  supply. 

Connect  the  closet  to  the  soil  with  a  4"  branch  lead  waste. 
{For  floor  slab,  see  under  "  Safes."  } 

196 


'Syphon  closets  are  used  where  the  highest  sanitary  fixture  is  desired.  Washdown  or  washout 
closets  are  used  more  often  in  public  or  office  buildings,  etc.,  and  in  dwellings  where  a  cheaper 
closet  is  desired.  Syphon  closets  are  not  "  back  vented,"  that  is,  vented  from  the  trap,  but  both 
syphon  and  other  closets  have  often  a  local  vent.  A  local  vent  should  never  be  used  unless  it 
can  be  connected  with  a  hot  flue.  A  closet  made  in  one  piece  of  porcelain  is  preferable  to  one 
with  a  joint.  If  a  closet  is  used  which  does  not  contain  a  trap  in  the  earthenware,  a  lead  trap 
must  be  provided  under  the  floor  on  the  waste  line  and  directly  connected  with  the  closet. 


197 


Urinal. 


Furnish  and  set  where  shown  on  the  plan  one  first   quality  white  earthenware 
lipped  [corner]  or  [flat  backed]  urinal  with  a  nickel-plated  strainer  and  an  overflow. 


Supply. 
Direct. 


Supply  through  a  (i")  galvanised  iron  pipe  below  floor  and  nickel-plated  brass 
pipe  and  coupling  where  exposed  to  view.  Provide  a  nickel-plated  self-closing 
urinal  cock  on  the  supply  near  the  urinal. 


Tank  with  Pull. 


Tank,  Automatic. 


Tank  Connections. 


Furnish  and  set  a  (14"  x  7"  x  6£")  copper-lined  polished  light  oak  tank,  set  on  nickel-plated 
brackets,  with  a  ball  cock  and  a  copper  ball  on  the  supply,  and  with  nickel-plated  chain  and  cellu- 
loid pull. 

Furnish  and  set  one  Peck's  copper-lined  automatic  syphon  flushing  polished  light  oak  urinal 
tank,  set  on-  nickel-plated  brackets  and  with  a  ball  cock  and  a  copper  ball  on  the  supply. 

Supply  the  cistern  through  a  ($")  galvanized  iron  pipe  and  a  (£")  nickel-plated  brass  pipe  and 
coupling  where  exposed  to  view.  Place  a  suitable  shut-off  on  this  supply. 

Connect  the  cistern  to  the  urinal  with  a  (i")  nickel-plated  brass  flush  pipe. 


Waste. 


Waste  from  the  urinal  through  a  (ii"  D)  lead  branch  waste  with  a  (ii")  trap 
connected  to  the  main  waste.  The  trap  and  the  waste  and  vent  pipes  where 
exposed  to  view,  are  to  be  nickel-plated  brass. 


Form  the  back,  ends  and  partitions  (s'-6")  high  of  f"  Italian  marble  put  together  with  nickel- 
plated  corner  clamps.  The  stalls  are  to  be  (24")  wide  on  centres  and  (19")  deep.  Provide  a  2" 
countersunk  floor  slab  of  the  full  size  of  the  stalls  with  i^"  nickel-plated  strainers  and  (i£"  D) 
lead  waste,  trapped  and  connected  to  the  drain. 


Slop  Hopper.  Furnish  and  set  where  shown  on  the  plan  a  Peck's  cast-iron  porcelain  lined  'slop 

Iron.  hopper,  Fig.  351  (20   x  22")  in  size  set  on  a  cast  iron  trap,  with  a  brass  flushing 

rim. 


Direct  Supply.  Supply  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  ( f ")  galvanised  iron  pipes  and  Peck's 

No.  j  nickel-plated  compression  double  slop  sink  cock  with  .air  chambers  and  flush- 
ing rim  connection  and  nickel-plated  pipes  to  the  floor. 


Porcelain.  Furnish  and  set  where  shown  on  the  plan,  a  first  quality  earthenware  flushing  rim  slop  hopper 

(20"  x  20")  in  size  with  a  porcelain  trap;   Peck's  combination  No.  i. 

Supply.  Supply  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (J")  galvanized  iron  pipes  and  a  nickel-plated  brass. 

198 


"Slop  hoppers  are  made  in  galvanized  iron,  cast  iron  porcelain  lined  and  solid  earthenware  or 
porcelain.  They  are  supplied  sometimes  with  ordinary  cocks  set  about  12"  above  the  sink  and 
sometimes  with  hot  and  cold  combination  cocks.  They  are  usually  flushed  through  a  flushing  rim 
provided  either  with  a  direct  supply  or  connected  to  a  tank  similar  to  a  water  closet.  A  trap 
should  be  placed  on  the  waste  below  the  floor,  connected  directly  with  the  fixture,  unless  one  is 
provided  for  in  the  hopper. 


199 


Cistern. 


Peck's  No.  2  compression  double  slop  sink  cock  with  nickel-plated  air  chambers  and  nickel-plated 
pipes  to  the  floor. 

Furnish  a  copper  lined  polished  light  oak  cistern,  with  a  nickel-plated  chain  and  celluloid  pull 
and  set  on  (No.  3)  nickel-plated  brackets.  Furnish  with  a  syphon  valve  and  a  ball  cock  and  a 
copper  ball  on  the  supply.  Supply  the  cistern  through  a  (£")  galvanized  iron  pipe  and  a  f"  nickel- 
plated  brass  pipe  from  the  floor  to  the  cistern,  with  a  nickel- plated  shut-off  on  the  supply.  Connects 
the  cistern  to  the  flushing  rim  with  a  (i£")  nickel-plated  brass  flush  pipe. 


Waste. 


Waste  through  a  (3"  D)  lead  branch  waste  connected  to  the  soil. 
Furnish  and  set  a  (£"  x  27"  x  54")  Italian  marble   back   with   all  free   edges 
ogee  moulded. 


(For  marble  floor  slab,  see  "safes.' 


Wash  Trays. 

Cement. 


Furnish  and  set  where  shown  a  three  part  Peck's  improved  Weehauken  cement 
wash  'tray,  (80"  x  24")  in  size.  Set  the  trays  on  a  galvanized  iron  standard  and 
provide  with  polished  brass  chains  and  plugs  and  rubber  stopper.  Provide  an  ash 
frame  and  ash  covers  put  on  with  brass  screws. 

Supply  each  part  with  hot  and  cold  water  through  (f")  g-alvanized  iron  pipes 
and  Pecks  brass  compression  cocks.  One  cold  water  faucet  is  to  have  a  hose  end. 

Waste  through  a  (ii")  branch  and  (2")  main  (D)  lead  wastes,  trapped  and 
connected  to  the  soil. 


Porcelain.  Furnish  and  set  where  shown  three  roll  rim  solid  porcelain  wash  trays,  each  (30"  x  24"  x  15")  in 

size  with  nickel-plated  plugs  and  chains  and  rubber  stoppers.     Provide  a  bronzed  iron  standard  for 
each  tub. 

Furnish  and  set  a  (i£"  x  5")  Italian  marble  slab  and  (|"  x  15")  back  with  all  free  edges  ogee 
moulded. 

{For  floor  slab,  see  "Safes."} 

Supply  each  -tray  with   hot  and    cold   water    through   f "  galvanized  iron   pipes,    and    Peck's 
nickel-plated  f"  compression  cocks.     One  cold  water  faucet  is  to  have  a  hose  end. 

Waste  through  a  (i£")  branch  waste,  (2")  trap  and  (2")  main  waste,  all  of  nickel-plated  brass 
where  exposed  to  view.     Continue  with  a  (2"  D)  lead  waste  to  the  soil. 


200 


"Wash  trays  are  made  of  cement,  slate,  soapstone,  white  or  brown  crockery  ware,  iron  porce- 
lain lined,  and  solid  porcelain.  The  crockery  ware,  porcelain  and  porcelain  lined  are  made  either 
with  or  without  roll  rims.  Roll  rim  wash  trays  are  set  without  frames  and  covers  and  often  with 
polished  or  nickel-plated  brass  wastes  and  trap. 


201 


GAS  FITTING. 

{if  the  gas  fitting  be  made  a  separate  contract,  this  specification  should  be  preceded  by  a 
Heading  and  General  Conditions  and  should  also  include  the  following:  Cutting,  page  170;  Pipes  and 
Hangers,  under  Wrought  Iron  Pipes,  page  174;  Testing  of  Pipes,  page  176.} 

Furnish  and  put  in  the  gas  pipes  in  accordance  with  the  rules  of  the  Gas 
Light  Company,  with  outlets  where  marked  on  the  drawings,  (70)  outlets  in  all. 
All  branch  outlets  are  to  be  taken  from  the  top  or  side  of  running  lines.  The 
whole  system  is  to  be  free  from  traps  or  low  places  and  is  to  decline  with  a  fall 
towards  the  meter,  which  will  be  located  \ specify  where}. 

All  side  lights  in  the  first  story  rooms  and  in  all  halls  are  to  be  (s'-6")  above  the  finished  floor. 
All  mirror  lights  are  to  be  (8')  and  all  other  side  lights  (4-9")  above  the  finished  floor. 

All  nipples  are  to  project  (ii")  from  the  face  of  the  timber.  All  drops  are  to 
be  made  perfectly  plumb  by  screwing  a  1 2"  piece  of  pipe  on  the  nipple  and  trying 
with  a  square  or  level.  All  side  lights  are  to  be  perpendicular  to  the  walls. 

[The  'sizes  of  pipes  are  to  be  as  follows : .] 


Gas  Log  Connections. 


Run  the  pipes  for  gas  log  connections  in  \  mention  \  fireplaces.  The  pipes  are 
to  be  run  below  the  tile  of  the  hearths  and  are  to  extend  (ii")  above  the  level  of 
the  finished  floor.  The  outlets  are  to  be  in  the  centre  of  the  fireplace  and  (8")  in 
front  of  the  brick  back.  Place  a  valve  shut-off  with  a  wooden  wheel  on  each  "in 
the  floor  at  the  side  of  the  chimney  breast. 


Street  Connections. 


[The  Owner  will  tap  the  main  in  the  street  and  bring  the  service  pipe  to  the 
building.]  Or  [Tap  the  gas  main  in  the  street,  obtaining  the  necessary  permit, 
excavating  for  the  same,  and  paying  the  required  charges.  Carry  the  main  pipe 
to  the  meter  and  leave  ready  for  the  meter  connection.] 


402 


'Sizes  of   Gas  Pipe. 

FOR   ORDINARY  PIPING. 
Sizes  in  use  Washington,  D-  C.,  Feb..  1893. 

Diameter  of  pipe,  #"         i"     i#"       i*/?'  3"         4" 

Longest  run  in  feet,  6         20         40         60         80         150         200         300         450         600 

Greatest  number  of  burners,   i  6         20         35         60         100         200         300         450         750 

FOR  GAS  MACHINE. 

Diameter  of  pipe,  i"  i#"  2" 

Longest  run  in  feet,  20  30  50  70  100  150 

Greatest  number  of  burners,  2  4  15  25  40  70 

"If  the  floor  is  not  to  be  carpeted,  the  valve  controlling  the  gas  log  is  usually  placed  in  the 
floor  in  some  out  of  the  way  position.  Sometimes  the  valve  is  left  flush  with  the  floor  and  a 
moveable  key  provided  in  place  of  a  fixed  wheel  on  the  valve.  If  the  floors  are  to  be  carpeted, 
these  valves  are  usually  placed  on  the  base. 


203 


Tin. 

Make. 


Painting. 


Solder. 


Roofs. 

Tin. 


Copper. 


Corrugated  Fron. 


METAL  WORK. 

{if  the  Metal  Work  be  made  a  separate  contract  this  specification  should  be  preceded  by  a 
Heading  and  General  Conditions,  j 

All  tin  throughout  is  to  be  of  the  N.  &  G,  Taylor  Co?s  Old  Style  brand  of 
roofing  tin,  each  sheet  stamped  with  the  brand  and  thickness. 

Paint  all  tin  work  of  roofs  on  the  underside,  all  tin  of  gutters  on  the  underside 
and  on  the  top  where  it  will  be  covered  with  slate  or  shingle,  and  all  tin  flashing 
and  valleys  both  sides,  with  a  coat  composed  of  seven  pounds  of  Prince's  metallic 
paint,  dry,  to  one  gallon  half-boiled,  half  raw,  pure  linseed  oil. 

All  tin  work  of  roofs,  gutters,  etc.,  is  to  be  well  locked  and  soldered  in  half-tin 
half-lead  solder,  using  resin  as  a  flux,  to  be  wiped  off  at  completion. 

Cov(  r  the  roofs  where  shown  tin  on  the  drawings  with  1C  thickness  N.  &  G. 
Taylor  Co.'s  Old  Style  brand  of  roofing  tin  in  sheets  '(zo"  x  14")  in  size  with  three 
wire  nails  to  each  sheet.  No  nail  heads  are  to  be  left  exposed.  Where  the  tin 
work  of  roofs  comes  against  the  frame  building,  the  tin  is  to  be  run  up  (6")  behind 
the  clapboards.  Where  the  tin  work  of  roofs  comes  against  brick  or  stone  work  of 
walls  or  chimneys,  the  tin  is  to  be  turned  up  against  the  brick  work  (6")  and  counter 
flashed  with  [the  same  tin]  or  [4  lb.  lead]  or  [14  oz.  copper.] .  The  counter  flashing  is 
to  be 

[stepped  up  and  turned  into  the  horizontal  joints  of  the  brick  work]  or 

[turned  into  the  reglet  cut  by  the  Mason] 

and  cemented  in  with  rubber  roofing  cement,  soldering  the  vertical  joints,  and  ex- 
tending down  to  within  (2")  of  the  roof. 

Cover  the  roof  of  {specify}  with  soft  (14)  oz.  sheet  copper  in  sheets  (12"  x  14") 
in  size.  Tin  the  edges  and  seams  with  not  less  than  i"  edge-  Solder  with  half- 
tin,  half-lead  solder  and  resin,  using  not  less  than  6  Ibs.  of  solder  to  the  square. 
Bach  sheet  is  to  be  nailed  with  three  tinned  wire  nails,  and  no  nail  heads  are  to 
be  left  exposed. 

{For   Plashing,  etc.,  see  under  Tin  Roof.  J 
{For  Corrugated  Iron  Roof,  see  page  74.} 


204 


*The  usual  sizes  of  tin  sheets  for  roofing  are  10"  x  14",  14"  x  20"  and  20"  x  28". 

The  best  quality  of  roofing  tin  is  made  by  soaking  or  literally  boiling  each  sheet  of  iron  in 
pure  palm  oil,  then  dipping  the  sheets  by  hand  in  open  pots  of  metal  by  successive  immersions, 
the  metal  in  these  pots  being  different  in  temperature.  Made  by  this  method  the  plates,  when 
taken  from  the  last  pot,  hold  every  ounce  of  metal  coating  it  is  possible  for  them  to  absorb.  Tin 
made  in  this  way,  if  properly  put  on  and  given  reasonable  care,  will  practically  outlast  the  life  of 
the  building  itself.  This  is  the  way  tin  was  originally  made  (Philadelphia,  1830),  and  is  the  pro- 
cess still  used  in  the  manufacture  of  the  Taylor  "  Old  Style"  brand  of  tin. 

The  quick,  cheap  way  of  making  roofing  tin  is  by  the  use  of  rolls  and  machinery.  After  the 
steel  or  iron  plate  is  placed  in  the  metal  bath,  it  is  passed  between  submerged  rollers  and  the 
coating  squeezed  off.  Such  roofing  plates  as  these  are  attractive  to  the  eye  but  have  not  the 
wearing  qualities. 


205 


Gutters. 

Lined. 


Hung. 


Valleys. 

Strip. 
Pieced. 


Line  the  gutters  with  l\_fX  Old  Style  tin]  or  [(14)  oz.  copper]  and  extend  the 
metal  up  under  the  slate  at  least  (10"),  bringing  the  metal  over  the  face  of  the  cor- 
nice and  tacking  it  smoothly. 

Form  the  hung  gutters  of//  oz.  copper,  \\ith  Y?"  roll  edge,  and  braces  of  the 
same  material,  every  30"  well  soldered. 

Line  the  valley  (20'')  wide  \\ith  /./  oz.  copper. 

Furnish  for  lining  the  valleys,  pieces  of  //  oz.  copper  '(7")  long,  10"  wide  at 
the  bottom  and  15"  wide  at  the  top.  These  pieces  are  to  be  woven  in  with  the 
slate  by  the  roofer. 

Cover  the  ridge  rolls  on  the  hips  with  a  strip  of  No.  2j  galvanized  iron.  Run 
the  metal  (4")  each  side  over  the  slate. 

Furnish  pieces  of  /^  oz.  copper  of  the  proper  size  to  cover  the  hips.  These 
pieces  are  to  be  woven  in  with  the  slate  by  the  roofer. 

{See  in  Carpenter's  Specification,  page  88.  j 
{See  in  Carpenter's  Specification,  page  90. } 
{See  in  Carpenter's  Specification,  page  90. } 

Furnish  and  put  up  seven  corrugated  galvanized  iron  leaders  where  shown.  The 
leaders  are  to  be  "(3/4"  x  4^")  in  size  on  the  main  roofs  and  (2%''  x  2^")  on  the 
piazzas.  Furnish  and  put  up  three  ornamental  leader  heads  made  according  to  the 
drawings.  Cover  the  leader  openings  in  the  gutters  with  galvanized  wire  baskets. 
Secure  the  leaders  to  the  building  with  galvanized  iron  hooks,  allowing  the  leaders 
to  stand  clear  of  all  mouldings: 

{For  leader  connections  see  in  Mason's  Specification,  page  42,  and  in  Plumber's  Specification 
page  1 8a.  j 


Speaking  Tubes.  Furnish  and  put  up  with  porcelain  mouth  pieces  and  whistles  complete,  i"  tin 

speaking  tubes  from to . 


Hips. 

Strip. 


Pieced. 


Flashing. 

Skylights. 

Scuttles. 

Leaders  o 


Furnace  Work. 


{For  furnace  metal  work,  see  Heating  Specif ication.} 


206 


'The  materials  usually  used  for  gutters,  valleys,  hips,  etc.,  are  IX  and  1C  tin,  14  oz.  copper, 
1 6  oz.  zinc,  4  Ib.  sheet  lead  and  No.  24  galvanized  iron. 

"These  metal  strips  for  valleys  should  be  2"  longer  than  the  slate  is  laid  to  the  weather. 
'The  usual  sizes  for  rectangular  leaders  are  : 

ij"  x  2^"  equal  to  2"  round. 

2*"  X   2|"  3" 

*F  x  3t"  4" 

3i"  ^  4i"  5" 

"  x      "  6" 


207 


Heating 

SPECIFICATION   of  the  labor  and  material  to  be  furnished  in  the  instal- 
lation of  the  1Hot  Air  Heating  plant  for  the  frame  house  to  be  constructed   for 
Mr. 
at 

in  accordance  with  the  accompanying  drawings  and  this  specification  and  under 
the  supervision   of 

Architect, 

|  address } 
|  date  \ 

General  The  Contractor  shall  furnish  all  material,  labor,  transportation,  utensils  and 

Conditions.          so  forth  of  every  description  required  for  the  full  performance  of  the  work  herein 

specified,  except  as  otherwise  particularly  mentioned.      He  shall  lay  out  his  work 

and  be  responsible  for  its  correctness  ;  shall  keep  a  competent  foreman  on  the 

premises,  and  shall  properly  protect  his  work  during  progress. 

All  the  materials  are  to  be  of  the  best  of  their  several  kinds  in  quality  as 
herein  specified,  all  labor  is  to  be  performed  in  the  best  manner  by  skilled  work- 
men and  both  are  to  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  Architect.  [All  work  and 
material  must  conform  to  the  laws,  rules  and  regulations  in  force  in  the  locality  in 
which  the  building  is  to  stand,  anything  hereinafter  specified  to  the  contrary  not- 
withstanding.] 

Anything  not  expressly  set  forth  in  this  specification,  but  which  is  reasonably 
implied,  is  to  be  furnished  and  performed  without  extra  charge.  Should  any  error 
appear,  either  in  this  specification  or  in  the  work  done  by  other  contractors 
effecting  the  work  included  herein,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Contractor  to  notify 

208 


RICHARDSON  &  BOYNTON  Co.,  234  Water  Street,  New  York. 

(Established  1837.) 

Heating  Furnaces. 


•< 

DIA- 

T^T * 

HEATING 

NAME. 

SIZE. 

MATERIAL. 

METER 
OF  FIRE 
CHAM- 
BER IN 

INCHES. 

DIA- 
METER 

OF  CAS- 
ING IN 
INCHES. 

CAPACITY  IN 
ORDINARY 
ROOMS 

(  14  FT.  x  14 

FT). 

AIR  SUPPLY 
SHOULD  BE 

SIZE  OP 
SMOKE 
PIPE. 

Perfect. 

131 

With  High  Gas 

17 

31 

4  rooms                10x18 

7 

(Portable.) 

i34 

Combustion 

19 

34 

5                           10x24 

7 

Chamber.  Cast  Pot. 

(  Either  brickset  or 
portable.  ) 

139 

M3 
147 
155 

161 

With  High  Gas 
Combustion 
Chamber. 
Cast  Pot 

22 
25 
27 
29^ 

35 

39 
43 
47 
55 
61 

6-  7  rooms 
8 
9-10 
12-13 
14-16 

12x28 
12x32 
12x36 
14x40 
MM7 

8 
8 
8 
9 

i 

Revere. 

33 

Steel  Plate  Body 

17 

28 

2  rooms 

10x14 

7 

(Portable  only.) 

42 

and  Cast  Pot 

19 

32 

3 

10x18 

7 

46 

22 

36 

4 

12x24 

7 

50 

25 

40 

6 

12x28 

8 

54 

27 

44 

8 

12x32 

9 

60 

29^ 

50 

10 

14x34 

8 

Perfect. 

82 

All  Cast  Iron  with 

25 

43 

7  rooms 

12x28 

8 

(  Portable  or  brickset.  ) 

83 

Revertible  Flue 

27 

47 

9 

12^35 

8 

84 

Radiator. 

29  'A             55 

12 

14x40 

9 

86 

35 

60 

14 

14x47 

9 

Ranges. 


•      Qf7f  r»i.- 

SIZE  OF 

SIZE 

a 

^  t- 

NAME 

•-: 

N 

tn 

STYLE. 

BRICK 
OPENING. 

RANGE 
FLOOR 

SIZE  OF  OVENS. 

STYLE  OF 
OVENS. 

BOILER 
HOLES. 

OF 
BOIL- 

-.- 
a  a 
S* 

SPACE. 

ER. 

u* 

at 

Provident 
(Single  oven) 

So 

Brickset  or 
portable 

33"*  i  2" 

39"x26" 

iS"xi8^" 

Wrought  iron 

6—  S" 

40  gal 

5" 

'37 

Brickset  or 
portable 

30"XI2" 

33K"«3K" 

i6"xi7" 

Cast  Iron 

6-7" 

30  gal. 

6" 

Perfect 
(single  oven  i 

195 

Brickset  or 
portable 

30"X12" 

33#"«3^" 

i6"xi7#" 

Cast  Iron 

6-7" 

50  gal. 

6" 

98 

Brickset  or 
portable 

30"XI2" 

33^"«3^" 

i6"xi7>£" 

Cast  Iron 

6—8" 

30  gal. 

6" 

68 

Brickset  or 
portable 

33"x  12" 

42"X26" 

20"XI8// 

Wrought  Iron 

6—  S" 

45  g»!- 

7" 

69 

Portable 

42"X26" 

20"XI8// 

Wrought  Iron 

6-9" 

45  gal. 

7" 

Perfect 
(double 

ii 

Brickset  or 
portable 

42#"X20" 

49X"x26" 

2o"xi2"xi4"  each 

Wrought  Iron 

S—  8" 

60  gal 

7" 

oven) 

12 

Brickset  or 
portable 

46>£"x2o" 

53"x26" 

2o"xi3//xi4//  each 

Wrought  Iron 

8—  S" 

65  gal. 

~// 
/ 

13 

Brickset  or 
portable 

46#"X20" 

53"x26" 

2o"xi3"xi4"  each 

Wrought  Iron 

6-9"  + 

2—  S" 

65  gal. 

7" 

14 

Brickset  or 
portable 

54#"x2o" 

6o"x26" 

2o"xi6"xi4"  each 

Wrought  Iron 

8—9" 

So  gal 

7" 

15 

Portable 

1 

63"x26" 

2o"xl6"xl4"  each 

Wrought  Iron 

8-9" 

So  gal. 

7" 

AH  Wrought  Iron  ovens  are  removable. 


209 


the  Architect,  and  in  the  event  of  the  Contractor  failing  to  give  such  notice,  he 
shall  make  good  any  damage  to  or  defect  in  his  work  caused  thereby. 

At  any  time  directed  by  the  Architect,  the  Contractor  shall  clear  out  any  of 
his  rubbish  or  material  which  may  constitute  an  obstruction  to  the  progress  of  the 
works,  and  at  completion  shall  clear  out  all  rubbish  and  surplus  material  left  by 
him  ;  shall  repair  any  damage  to  his  work,  no  matter  by  whom  caused,  loss  or 
damage  by  fire  excepted,  and  leave  his  work  in  perfect  repair  and  working  order. 

The  Contractor  is  not  to  do  any  cutting  of  timber.  All  such  work  will  be 
done  by  the  Carpenter,  and  he  shall  not  cut  any  timber  so  as  to  weaken  them, 
without  the  consent  of  the  Architect. 

The  Owner  reserves  the  right  to  accept  any  or  reject  any  or  all  proposals 
presented. 

The  necessary  fuel  to  test  the  plant  will  be  furnished  by  the  owner. 


Furnace. 


Casing. 

Brick  Setting. 
Foundation. 


HOT    AIR. 

Furnish  and  set  in  the  cellar  where  shown  on  the  plan,  a  'No.  /.//  New  Perfect 
Portable  "furnace  made  by  the  Richardson  and  Boynton  Company,  with  hoe,  poker, 
shovel  and  evaporating  pan  complete. 

The  furnace  is  to  be  enclosed  in  a  No.  24  galvanized  iron  casing  Alined  inside 
with  asbestos  and  corrugated  tin. 

.  |  For  brick  setting  and  furnace  pit  see  in  Mason's  Specification,  page  30. ' 

A  4foundation  on  which  to  set  the  heater  will  be  provided  by  the  Owner. 


'In  specifying  furnaces  and  ranges  the  requisite  information  may  be  more  conveniently 
obtained  from  properly  prepared  tables  than  by  repeated  references  to  catalogues.  These 
tables  might  be  elaborated  to  advantage  by  the  addition  of  prices  and  so  forth,  omitted  in  the 
examples  here  given. 

"The  New  York  Building  Law  requires  that  portable  furnaces  be  kept  2'  from  wood  work, 
unless  the  wood  work  is  protected  by  a  metal  shield,  when  the  least  distance  allowed  is  1'.  A 
portable  furnace  when  set  over  a  wood  floor,  must  rest  on  a  stone  or  brick  hearth,  extending  at 
least  2'  in  front  of  the  ash  pan.  It  also  requires  that  brickset  furnaces  be  built  at  least  4"  from 
woodwork;  that  the  sides  be  made  hollow  with  3"  air  space,  and  that  the  tops  be  made  double: 
the  inner  top  of  brick  and  the  outside  top  of  brick  or  metal,  both  on  iron  bars. 

3The  furnace  casing  is  often  lined  in  this  way  in  order  to  better  retain  the  heat. 

4The  concrete  cellar  bottom  is  a  sufficient  foundation. 

210 


THATCHER  FURNACE  COMPANY. 
Furnaces. 


j                 .    j 

SIZE  OF  PIT 

iu^Se 

IN  INCHES. 

DIAMETER     DIAMETER 

HOT  AIR 

<  ~  -^  r 

NAME. 

No. 

MATERIAL. 

OF 

FIRE  POT 
IS  INCHES. 

OF  CASING 
IN  INCHES. 

CAPACITY 
IS  CUBIC  FEET. 

gjsl 

• 

=>2 
-  £ 
'*  a 

| 

c  ~ 

I 

Thatcher  Tubular  Furnace          32       Cast  Iron                               32 

8  to  12000 

31         12 

(Either  portable  or  brickset.  )        36 

36 

10  to  16000 

36         14 

40 

40 

16  to  22000 

40         15 

44 

. 

44 

20  to  30000 

44         16 

48 

48               30  to  40000 

47         16 

52 

52 

40  to  50000 

52         18 

56 

56 

60  to  80000 

56         18 

60 

60 

65  to  85000 

60         18 

Thatcher  Tubular  Combination    240       Cast  Iron 

40               13  to  19000           100 

40 

15 

Heater.                          244 

44               14  to  24000 

200 

44 

16 

(Either  portable  or  brickset.  )      248 

48               21  to  31000 

300       I    47 

16 

959 

52               30  to  40000 

400 

52 

18 

256 

56               45  to  60000 

500 

56 

18 

260 

60 

55  to  75000 

550 

60 

18 

Scorcher  Furnace                 132     !   Cast  Iron            19 

32 

31 

12 

(Either  portable  or  brickset.)      136     |vv''tthur<n°fluee         21                  36 

36 

14 

140              steel                   25                     40 

40 

15 

144 

radiator.               27 

44 

44 

16 

Meteor  Furnace 

208     !  Cast  Iron 

16 

28 

27 

10 

(Either  portable  or  brickset.  ) 

302     ''•  with  steel 

18 

32 

31 

12 

306 

plate 

20 

36 

36 

14 

400 

radiator. 

22 

40 

40 

15 

404 

25 

44 

44 

16 

408 

27 

48 

48 

18 

Active  Furnaces 

332 

Cast  Iron 

18 

32 

29 

10 

336 
340 

pot  with 
steel  plate 
body. 

20 
22 

36 
40 

35 
41 

12 
14 

Ranges. 


SIZE  OF 
BRICK  SETTING 

j 
SIZE  OF  RANGES. 

SIZE  OF  OVENS. 

NAME.         No.     STYLE. 

:                 * 
=           1    "5 

j          Z          \    * 

±|     OVENS 
:                t* 

0              "5 
E              X 

£              j;        HOLES.    ' 

"c               '** 

«                 *                            j 

BOILERS. 

Thatcher 


Brickset 


Double  Oven 

•  8  j         or 
Portable 

42"  x  20' 

5        48'x30"       31      Two      20"xl2' 

14 

Eight  8" 

t     40  gal.  ordmarv 
or 
1  60  gal.  ex.  «-.  back 

Thatcher 
Single  Oven 

Brickset 
88          or 
Portable 

33  Jsf  x  12' 

J38-X26*" 

29%   One 

18^x19- 

12J4 

Six8" 

<  40  gal.  vertical 
)  28  gal.  horiz'tal 

Brickset 

180          or 
L  Portable 

33i4'xl2'             41»£'x29-    31%    One 

18^x20' 

14 

Six  8" 

{48  gal.  vertical 
32  gal.  horiz'tal 

Brickset 
or 
Portable 

39"  x  29" 

39'x29' 

31  %   One 

22"x20- 

14 

Six  8" 

(  52  gal.  vertical 
<  42  gal.  horiz'tal 

Brickset 
290          or 
Portable 

39"  x  29" 

39"  x  29'    |  31J£    One 

22'x20' 

14 

Six8" 

(  52  gal.   vertical 
)  42  gal.  horiz'tal 

1   -   I 

Thatcher 
Single  Oven 

Brickset 
77            or 

Portable 
Rrirlc«M»t 

«..» 

8Sif**84%"  as&j  One    17%'xl7y 

^ 

Six  7" 

(  30  gal.  vertical 
"/  18  gal.  horiz'tal 

i78. 

or         33M"xl2"            33a4"x24^" 
Portable 

28% 

One     18"  x  17  14  " 

11^     Six8' 

\  32  gal.  vertical 
(  18  gal.  horiz'tal 

Thatcher 
Single  Oven 

80 

Brickset 
or          33V  x  12'              38'x25i-i' 
Portable 

1           !     ! 

30 

One 

11  J£     Six  8* 

(  35  gal.  vertical 
"(  24  gal.  horiz'tal 

No.  88  Serie=  have  removable  steel  plate  ovens  and  can  be  furnished  with  high  or  low  warming  closets. 

211 


Smoke  Pipe.  Connect  the  heater  to  the  smoke  flue  built  in  the  chimney,  with  a  No.  20  (9") 

galvanized  iron  smoke  'pipe  with  a  close  fitting  lever  damper,  and  with  a  T  joint  and 
a  cold  air  check  damper. 

I  ipes  and  Run  tne  required   number  of  cellar  '•'pipes  and  vertical  stacks  to  the  various 

Kg      e  s.  registers,  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  of  the  sizes  as  hereinafter  specified,  made  of 

IX  bright  tin,  with  a  damper  in  each  pipe  close  to  the  furnace.  The  horizontal 
pipes  in  the  cellar  are  to  be  round  and  are  to  connect  with  the  stacks  by  means  of 
shoes  and  elbows  rather  than  by  collars  in  the  side  of  the  stack.  All  pipes  are  to 
be  lettered  in  the  cellar  with  the  name  of  the  room  which  they  supply.  Where 
pipes  pass  through  partitions,  they  are  to  be  provided  with  tin  collars  %"  larger 
than  the  pipe.  Where  stacks  or  pipes  pass  within  3"  of  any  wood  work,  such  wood 
work  is  to  be  flashed  with  1C  bright  tin.  Lath  over  all  stacks  in  partitions  with 
York  metal  lath. 

[Cover  all  stacks  and  all  pipes  where  they  pass  between  floors,  with  two 
thicknesses  of  3asbestos  weighing  not  less  than  10  Ibs.  to  100  square  feet.] 

All  registers  are  to  be  Tnttle  and  Bailey  Mamifacturing  Co.'s  make,  Indian 
lattice  design. 

All  floor  registers  are  to  be  black  japanned,  and  all  side  wall  registers  "white 
[porcelain  enameled]  or  [japanned].  All  registers  are  to  have  IX  tin  register 
boxes  and  suitable  valves  and  5frames  complete. 


'New  York  Building  Law:  Where  laundry  stoves,  hot  water,  steam,  hot  air  or  other 
furnaces  are  used  in  any  building,  the  smoke  pipe  leading  therefrom  must  be  kept  at  least  IS" 
from  the  floor  beams  or  ceiling,  unless  the  same  is  properly  protected  by  a  metal  shield,  when 
the  distance  shall  not  be  less  than  9".  In  all  cases  where  such  pipe  passes  through  a  wood  or 
stud  partition,  it  shall  be  protected  by  a  thimble  with  8"  of  brickwork  around  it,  or  a  double 
collar  of  metal  with  at  least  0"  air  space  and  holes  for  ventilation. 

2The  New  York  Building  Law  requires  horizontal  and  hot  air  pipes  in  stud  partitions  to  be 
constructed  double  with  %"  air  space  between;  also  that  pipes  in  partitions  shall  not  come  within 
3"  of  studs,  that  horizontal  pipes  shall  not  come  within  0"  of  an  unprotected  ceiling  or  :»"  of  a 
protected  ceiling,  and  that  where  hot  air  pipes  pass  through  a  wood  or  stud  partition,  they  shall 
be  protected  by  either  a  double  collar  of  metal  with  2"  air  space  and  holes  for  ventilation,  or  by 
brickwork  4"  in  thickness. 

3This  asbestos  covering  on  furnace  pipes  assists  greatly  in  retaining  the  heat.  It  is  often 
applied  by  being  wired  on,  but  a  better  and  cheaper  method  of  affixing  it  is  by  means  of  Jaqui's 
patent  application  (The  Union  Asbestos  Wrapping  Co.,  Newark,  N.  J.)  by  which  the  asbestos 
is  closely  applied  to  the  pipes  without  wire  or  paste.  This  method  is  also  used  for  low  pressure 
steam  or  hot  water  pipes. 

4White  japanned  registers  cost  about  one-half  as  much  as  white  porcelain  enameled. 

sThe  New  York  Building  Law  requires  that  registers  in  wood  floors  have  stone  boarders  set 
in  plaster-of- Paris,  and  that  registers  set  directly  over  a  brickset  furnace  be  supported  on  a 
brick  shaft,  built  up  from  the  cover  of  the  hot  air  chamber,  and  lined  with  a  metal  pipe. 

212 


THATCHER  FURNACE  COMPANY. 
Hot  Water  Boilers. 


i.  -t.  •' 
OK 


:   zx     r.—x. 

i|l 

xO               ?; 

ffi             ?  3- 

?     5'J 

!?• 

I 

Z 

x 
7.'r. 

i§ 

ii   i 

^£ 

f.'^r- 

Thatcher  safety 
sectional    cast 
iron   boiier. 

25        940 
26      1250 
27       1540 
28      1850 
29      2150 

24x24 
24x30 
24x36 
24x42 
24x48 

5 

6 

1 

8 
9 

67 
67 
67 
67 
67 

40 
46 
52 
58 
64 

46 
46 
46 
46 
46 

10 
10 
10 
10 
10 

1-4,  2-3 
1-4,  2-3 
1-4,  2-3 
1-i,  3-3 
1-i,  3-3 

4-2,2-3 
4-2,  2-3 
6-2,  2-3 
6-2,  2-3 
6-2,  2-3 

Thatcher  boiler. 

206      2250 
207      2925 
208      3600 
209      4275 
210      4ir.O 
211       5625 

36x3*1 
36x36 
36x43 
36x48 
36x54 
36x60 

« 

1 

8 
9 
10 
11 

72 

'  2 
2 
-o 
•  o 

50 
56 
02 
68 
74 
80 

58 
58 
58 
58 
5S 
58 

12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 

2-4,  1-3 
2-4,  1-3 
2-4,  1-3 
2-5,  1-3 
2-5,  1-3 
2-5,  1-i 

4-2,  2-3 
6-2.  2-3 
6-2,  2-3 
6-2,  2-4 
4-3,  2-4 
4-^J,  2-4 

212      0300 

36x66 

12 

"2 

86 

58 

12 

2-5,  1-i 

4-3,  3-4 

Champion   return 

22        600 

20x18 

4        36 

20 

54 

60 

45 

8 

3_2t/ 

2—2  2—21 

15 

draught  wrought 
iron  tubular 

33        800 

20x24 

5        42 

20 

54 

72 

45 

8 

1-3,  ll2X 
1-2 

4-2.  1-3 

18 

boiler. 

44      1000 

20x30 

6        -is 

20 

54 

84 

45 

9 

2-3,  1-2 

4-2,  1-3 

20 

65      1300 

30x18 

5         36 

30 

64 

60 

55 

10 

3-3 

2-2,  2-3 

24 

66      1550 

30x24 

5        48 

30 

64 

78 

55 

10 

2-3.  l-2i., 

4-2,  2-3 

26 

77      2000 

30x30 

6        60 

30 

64 

96 

55 

10 

2-314.  1-3 

6-2,  2-3 

28 

88      2400 

30x36 

7        72 

30 

64 

114 

55 

12 

•14 

6-2,  2-3 

32 

99      2850 

30x42 

8         84 

30 

64 

133 

55 

12 

3-4 

6-2,  2-4 

42 

101      3400 

36x36 

7        60 

36 

70 

102 

65 

12 

2-5 

2—2  2-4 

48 

SIZE 

202      3850 

36x42 

8        72 

36 

70 

120 

65 

12 

2-5 

2-2,  2-4 

52 

FIRE 

303      4500 

36x48 

9        H4 

36 

70 

138 

65 

16 

1-6 

2-2i2,  2-5 

60 

Inches 

Empire     vertical 
safety  cast  iron 
boiler. 

2        225 
3        350 
4        525 

Mains  in 
ered  or 

cellar  to  be  cpv- 
figured  as  radi- 

47 
51 
53 

26 
29 
32 

l-8jf 
1-i 

il1 

10 
10 
15 

13 
16 
19 

5        650 

56 

35 

1-4 

1-4 

20 

22 

Steam  Boilers. 


'.—  —  • 

-s.-s.C 


•S.X.S. 


Thatcher     safety 

15 

525 

24x24        5 

67 

46 

40 

10 

2-3 

2-2,  2-3 

47 

sectional      cast  ' 

16 

690 

24x30        6 

67 

46 

46 

10 

2-3 

2-2,  2-3 

47 

iron  boiler. 

17 

870 

24x36        7 

67 

46 

52 

10 

2-3 

4-2,  2-3 

47 

18 

1045 

24x42        8 

67 

46 

58 

10 

2-3 

4-2,  2-3 

47 

19 

1220 

24x48        9 

67 

46 

64 

10 

2-3 

4-2,  2-3 

47 

Thatcher  boiler. 

106 

1185 

36x30        6 

•72 

50 

58 

12 

3-3 

4-2,2-3 

••' 

107 

1550 

36x36        7 

o 

56 

58 

12 

3-3 

6-2,  2-3 

54 

108 

1915 

36x42        8 

2 

62 

58 

12 

3-3 

6-2,  2-3 

54 

109 

2280 

36x48        9 

2 

68 

58 

12 

2-4,  1-3 

6-2,  2-3 

54 

110 

2645 

36x54       10 

2 

74 

58 

12 

2-4.  1-3 

6-2,  2-4 

54 

111 

3010 

36x60      1  1 

2 

80 

58 

12 

2-5,  1-3 

6-2,  2-4 

54 

112 

3375 

36x66      12 

'  'O 

86 

58 

12 

2-5,  1-3 

6-2,  2-4 

54 

Champion   return 

22 

325 

20x18        4 

36 

20 

54 

60 

45 

8 

1-2  14 

2-1  *4 

39 

draught  wrought 

33 

425 

20x24        5 

42 

20 

54 

72 

45 

8 

'  & 

1      o  I 

2-1  '14 

39 

iron  tubular 

44 

525 

20x28        6 

48    ' 

20 

54 

84 

45 

9 

i-3  2 

2-2 

39 

boiler. 

65 

750 

30x20        5 

36 

30 

64 

60 

55 

10 

1-3 

2-2 

47 

66 

900 

30x24        5 

48 

30 

64 

78 

55 

10 

1-314; 

2-2 

47 

77 

1100 

30x30        0 

60 

30 

64 

96 

55 

10 

2-3 

2—  2i  ( 

47 

88 

1400 

30x36        7 

72 

30 

64 

114 

55 

12 

2-3 

3-31-2 

47 

99 

1700 

30x42        8 

84 

30 

64 

132 

55 

12 

l-3i.i 

o_  2  L/ 

47 

101 

2000 

36x36        7 

60 

36 

77 

102 

65 

12 

1-5" 

2—2  1 

53 

202 

2300 

36x42        8 

72 

36 

77 

120 

65 

12 

1-6 

2-2  >! 

53 

303 

2700 

36x48        9 

84 

36 

77 

138 

65 

16 

1-6 

2-3 

53 

Empire    vertical 

2 

125 

These  ratiny> 

are  in 

ad- 

47 

26 

- 

2—2 

33 

13 

safety  cast  iron 

3 

200 

dition  to  mains  and 

are 

51 

29 

1-3& 

2—2 

36 

16 

boiler. 

4 

300 

guaranteed 

to  be'cor- 

53 

32 

2—2i 

39 

19 

5 

400 

rect 

56 

.  35 

1-3 

2-2J'a 

43 

33 

213 


The  'sizes  of  pipes,  stacks  and  registers  are  to  be]as  follows  : 

ROOM.  PIPE.  STACK. 


FLOOR. 

First 
Second 


Parlor . 

Parlor  Bed  Room 


PIPE. 

10" 

0" 


4"  x  16" 


REGISTER. 
10"  X  U" 

10"xl2" 


LOCATION. 

In  floor 
Side  wall 


Cold  Air  Box. 


Guarantee. 


Construct  and  put  up  a  cold  air  box  '(22"  x  30")  in  size,  extending  from  the 
opening  in  the  wall  to  the  heater.  Form  this  box  of  No.  24  galvanized  iron, 
riveted  together  and  secured  to  the  cellar  ceiling.  Place  a  galvanized  iron  sliding 
damper  in  each  end,  and  make  a  (22"  x  30")  door  in  the  side  with  a  button 
fastening. 

The  Contractor  hereby  guarantees  that  this  apparatus  will  heat  the  rooms 
mentioned  in  the  schedule  to  70°  Fahr.  in  the  coldest  winter  weather,  provided 
that  the  apparatus  is  given  proper  care  and  attention  and  coal  suited  to  the 
requirements  of  the  heater  is  used.  Should  any  part  of  this  system  fail  to  fulfill 
the  guarantee  herein  contained,  or  should  any  defect  appear  in  the  same,  the 
Contractor  hereby  agrees  to  remedy  such  defect  at  his  own  cost,  within  a 
reasonable  time  after  receiving  a  written  notice  of  the  same. 


'It  would  be  difficult  to  give  exact  rules  for  ascertaining  the  sizes  of  pipes,  stacks  and 
registers  required  for  furnace  heating.  In  general,  the  pipes  leading  to  registers  in  upper 
stories  are  smaller  in  proportion  than  those  leading  to  registers  in  the  first  story.  The  follow- 
ing rules,  varied  according  to  the  climate  and  the  exposure  of  the  building,  may  be  found 
useful.  They  are  on  a  basis  of  raising  the  temperature  from  zero  to  70°. 
Pipes. 

For  ascertaining  the  number  of  square  inches  in  sectional  area  of  the  cellar  pipes  in  propor- 
tion to  the  cubic  feet  of  air  in  the  rooms  to  be  heated  : 

Cubic  feet  of  air  (about)  to  one  square  inch  of  pipe. 

Exposed.  Ordinary.  Warm. 

First  Story  Rooms,  10  25  30 

Second  Story  Rooms,  21  .33  40 

Third  Story  Rooms,  2G  40  48 

Stacks. 

The  stacks  are  usually  made  equal  in  area  to  the  pipes  or  a  little  larger. 
Registers. 

The  net  capacity  in  square  inches  of  the  registers  should  be  about  one-fifth  greater  than  that 
of  the  cellar  pipes. 

The  following  tables  give  the  capacity  in  square  inches  of  the  usual  sizes  of  pipes  and  registers: 

ROUND  PIPES. 


Diameter.     Area. 

Diameter.     Area. 

Diameter.       Area. 

4  in.              13 

10  in.             78 

20  in.              314 

"> 

20 

11 

95 

22 

380 

fi 

28 

12 

113 

24 

452 

7 

38 

14 

154 

2fi 

531 

8 

50 

10 

201 

28 

616 

9 

03 

18 

254 

30 

707 

214 


REGISTERS. 

Rectangular. 

Openings  in  inches  and  capacities  in  square  inches. 


Net 

Net 

Net 

Net 

Opening. 

Capacity.      Opening. 

Capacity.      Opening. 

Capacity.      Opening. 

Capacity. 

4x8 

21 

8x8 

43              12x12 

96 

15  X  25 

250 

4  x  10 

27 

^8  x  10 

53              12  *  14 

112 

16  x  16 

171 

4  x  13 

35 

8x12 

64              12  x  15 

I  2O 

16  x  20 

213 

4X  15 

40 

8x15 

80              12  x  16 

128 

16  x  24 

256 

4  x  18 

48 

8  x  18 

96              12x17 

136 

18  x  24 

288 

6x6 

24 

9  x     2 

54              12  x  18 

144 

20  x  20 

267 

6x8 

3* 

9  x  19 

72 

12  X   19 

»52 

20   X    24 

320 

6  x    9 

36 

9  x  13 

?8 

12    X    2O 

1  60 

20  x  26 

347 

6  x  10 

40 

9  x  14 

84 

12  X  24 

192 

21   X   29 

406 

6  x  14 

56 

10  X    IO 

67 

14  x  14 

131 

24  x  24 

384 

6  x  16 

64 

IO  X    12 

80 

14  x  16 

'49 

24  x  32 

5" 

6  x  18 

72 

10  X    14 

93 

14  x  18 

168 

27  x  27 

486 

6  x  24 

96 

10  x  16 

107 

14  x  20 

187 

27  x  38 

684 

7x7 

32 

10  x  18 

1  20 

14  X  22 

205 

30  x  30 

600 

7  x  10 

47             10  x  20 

'33 

Net 
Opening.    Capacity. 

7  26 

8  33 


ROUND. 


Net 

Opening.   Capacity. 
10  52 

"  75 


Net 

Opening.   Capacity. 
16  134 

18  169 

20  209 


Net 

Opening.  Capacity. 
24  3°i 

3°  47i 

36  679 


9  42 

EXAMPLE. 

Find  the  size  of  the  pipe,  stack  and  register  required  to  heat  a  15'  x  20'  second  story  room  10'  in  height  with  one 
side  exposed  and  with  three  windows. 
SOLUTION. 

Pipe :  The  capacity  of  the  room  is  3,000  cubic  feet.  Allowing  i  square  inch  of  pipe  area  to  33  cubic  feet  (as  given 
above  for  "  ordinary  "  exposure),  a  pipe  capacity  of  91  square  inches  is  required.  A  reference  to  the  table  shows  that  an 
n"  pipe  containing  95  square  inches  is  the  nearest  larger  size. 

Stack  :   The  stack  should  contain  95  square  inches  to  equal  the  capacity  of  the  cellar  pipe. 

_  Register:  Allowing  an  area  one-fifth  greater  than  that  of  the  pipe  (95),  a  register  with  a  net^rea  or  capacity  of  114 
square  inches  would  be  required.  A  reference  to  the  table  shows  that  a  13"  x  15''  sqnare  register  with  a  net  capacity  of  120 
square  inches  is  the  nearest  larger  size. 

The  note,  No.    i  on  page  219,  referring  to  the  amount  of  radiation  required,  is  also  appli- 
cable to  the  amount  of  hot  air  to  be  supplied  for  furnace  heating.     The  formula,  as  there  given, 
might  be  used  for  finding  the  size  of  the  furnace  pipes  required,  as  follows  : 
Formula  A'. 

The  sectional  area  of  the  cellar  pipe=Formula  A  X  C. 

In  which  the  value  of  C  is  for  first  story  rooms,  2.2;  for  second  story  rooms,  1.8;  and  for 
third  story  rooms,  1.5. 

EXAMPLE. 

Find  the  pine  capacity  required  to  raise  the  temperature  from  zero  to  70"  in  the  room  taken  above  as  an  example 
containing  3,000  cubic  feet,  with  60  square  feet  of  glass  and  with  (200-60=140)  140  square  feet  of  exposed  brick  wall,  furred 
and  plastered. 

SOLUTION  (by  the  formula  A'): 
I  —  +  60 

10    3000      r  67  3000! 

1 |  70x1.8—1 1 7011.8— (.134  +  .6)70x1. 8=92. 

1.  500   5000  J     (.500  5000  J 

A  stack  should  not  be  connected  to  two  separate  registers  on  different  floors  where  it  can  be 
avoided.  When  it  is  necessary  to  so  arrange  them,  the  pipe  above  the  lower  register  should  be 
reduced  in  size  to  about  one-half  and  a  tight  damper  should  be  placed  just  above  the  lower 
register.  Two  registers  on  the  same  floor  are  often  supplied  from  one  stack,  in  which  case  the 
stack  should  be  about  one-half  larger  and  a  division  strip  should  be  placed  in  the  stack  extending 
from  the  top  down  about  2'. 

"The  cold  air  box  should  be  equal  in  section  to  at  least  six-sevenths  of  the  aggregate  sectional 
area  of  the  heating  pipes  taken  from  the  furnace.  It  is  usual  to  make  the  cold  air  box  equal  in 
area  to  the  total  area  of  the  pipes.  The  law  in  most  cities  requires  the  cold  air  box  to  be  of 
metal  or  masonry.  For  a  masonry  cold  air  box,  see  page  30,  and  for  one  of  wood,  see  page  138. 
To  insure  a  better  supply  of  cold  air,  often  the  cold  air  box  is  constructed  across  the  cellar,  con- 
necting two  openings  in  the  foundation  and  a  branch  duct  is  carried  from  the  main  duct  to  the 
furnace.  Sometimes  also  a  register  is  placed  in  the  hall  or  some  room,  connected  by  a  duct  to 
the  cold  air  box,  thereby  increasing  the  capacity  of  the  furnace  at  the  expense  of  the  ventilation. 


215 


Principle  of 
Construction. 


STEAM. 

{For  Heading  and  General  Conditions,  see  page  208.  j 

This  apparatus  is  to  be  constructed  on  the  'low  pressure  system  and  on  the 
[two  pipe  system  with  separate  feed  and  return  pipes  and  mains]  or  [one  pipe 
system  with  single  pipes  to  the  radiators  serving  both  for  feed  and  returns,  and 
with  proper  relief  pipes  from  the  ends  of  the  return  mains,  returned  to  the  boiler 
and  connected  below  the  water  line.] 


Heater.  The  Contractor  is  to  furnish  and  set  in  complete  working  order  a  No.  27-12 

Boynton  Furnace  Company  s  Portable  Sectional  Return  Flue  steam  Boiler  with  a  gross 
capacity  of  (1850)  square  feet  of  radiation.  The  boiler  is  to  be  tested  under  a 
hydrostatic  pressure  of  100  Ibs.  to  the  square  inch,  before  leaving  the  factory. 


Fittings.  Furnish  and  place  on  the  heater  complete  a  Crosby  steam  gauge  with  syphon 

and  cock,  a  water  gauge  with  column  and  gauge  cocks,  glass  and  rods  complete  ; 
a  safety  valve  with  [lever  and  weights]  or  [ball]  ;  an  automatic  draft  regulating 
apparatus  with  lever  weights  and  cock  complete  ;  one  blow-off  cock  not  less  than 
f"  in  size  ;  one  [lever  handled]  or  [square  head  with  detachable  wrench]  feed  cock 
not  less  than  f"  in  size  ;  one  Jenkins  Brothers'  [globe]  or  [angle]  valve  for  main 
steam  ;  Q^.^  Jenkins  Brothers  [globe]  or  [angle]  valve  and  one  swinging  disk  check 
valve  for  main  return. 


Fire  Tools.  Furnish  a  full  set  of  fire  tools  with  slicing  bar,  poker,  shaker  bar,  shovel  and 

cleaning  brush  complete. 

Smoke  Pipe.  Connect  the  heater  to  the  smoke  flue  built  in  the  chimney  by  the  Mason,  with 

a  No.  20  (14")  galvanized  iron  smoke  "pipe  with  a  close  fittin-g  lever  damper  and 
with  a  T  joint  and  a  cold  air  check  damper. 


Foundation. 


A  foundation  on  which  to  set  the  heater  will  be  provided  by  the  Owner. 


Bricking. 


|  For  brick-setting  the  Boiler,  see  in  Mason's  Specification,  page  30. } 

216 


Steam  Heating. 

'Steam  heating  plants  are  either  high  or  low  pressure.  Low  pressure  plants  are  those  carrying 
up  to  10  Ibs.  of  steam,  2  to  5  Ibs.  being  the  usual  pressure.  High  pressure  plants  are  sometimes 
used  for  large  buildings.  A  low  pressure  gravity  circulation  apparatus  is  the  one  usually  employed 
for  dwellings  and  may  be  used  for  the  largest  buildings.  It  consists  of  the  boiler,  the  main  steam 
pipes  and  risers  and  corresponding  return  risers  and  mains  for  the  return  of  condensation  to  the 
boiler,  relief  pipes  for  relieving  the  mains,  and  radiators,  coils  or  other  heating  surfaces  for  the 
various  rooms  to  be  warmerf. 

2For  the  New  York  Building  Law  in  regard  to  smoke  pipe  see  note  4,  page  210. 

New  York  Building  Law:  No  steam  pipe  shall  be  placed  within  2"  of  any  timber  or  wood 
work  unless  the  timber  or  wood  work  is  protected  by  a  metal  shield,  then  the  distance  shall  not 
be  less  than  i".  All  steam  pipes  passing  through  floors  and  ceilings  shall  be  protected  by  a  metal 
tube  i "  larger  in  diameter  than  the  pipe  and  the  space  shall  be  filled  with  mineral  wool,  asbestos 
or  other  incombustible  material.  All  wooden  boxes  or  casings  enclosing  steam  pipes,  and  all 
covers  to  recesses  shall  be  lined  with  iron  or  tin  plate. 

(Continued  on  p.  219.) 


THE  BOYNTON  STEAM  HEATERS. 


a. 
o 

X    . 

NAME. 

SIZE  OF 
HEATER. 

HEIGHT  IN 

INCHES  TO  Ti 

OF  DRUM. 

WIDTH 
OUTSIDE  OF 
DRUMS 

LENGTH 

IN  INCHES. 

HEIGHT  OF 
WATER  LINE. 

SIZE  OF  STEA 
CONNECTIONS 

SIZE  OF 
RETURNS. 

NUMBER  OF 
SECTIONS. 

SIZE  OF 
GRATE  IN 

INCHES. 

SIZE  OF 
SMOKE-PIPE 
REQUIRED. 

CAPACITY  IN 

SQ.  FT.  OF 

DIRECT 
RADIATION. 

DIAMETER 
OF  FIREPOT. 

Boynton  Niagara  Low- 

118 

14  inch 

6 

125 

14" 

pressure  Steam  Boiler 

1  20 

17     " 

7 

175 

17" 

124 

20      " 

I 

250 

20" 

Boynton    Sectional    Return 

.05 

59 

4i 

40 

40 

3 

2-2 

5 

17X20 

8 

300 

Flue  Steam  Boiler 

.oc 

59 

4i 

45 

40 

3 

2-2 

6 

17X25 

8 

350 

.07 

59 

41 

50 

40 

3 

2-2 

7 

17x30 

8 

400 

.08 

59 

4i 

55 

40 

3 

2-2 

8 

17X35 

9 

450 

i--  .. 

66 

44 

46 

48 

3 

2-2 

6 

18x30 

9 

550 

1  8-7 

66 

44 

52 

48 

3 

2-2 

7 

18x36 

9 

650 

1  8-8 

66 

44 

58 

48 

3 

2-2 

8 

18x42 

9 

800 

18-9 

66 

44 

64 

48 

3 

2-2 

9 

18x48 

9 

950 

27-7 

77 

55 

54 

54 

4 

2-3 

7 

27x36 

10 

1  100 

27-8 

77 

55 

60 

54 

4 

2-3 

8 

27X42 

10 

1250 

27-9 

77 

55 

66 

54 

4 

2-3 

9 

27x48 

12 

1400 

27-10 

77 

55 

72 

54 

4 

2-3 

10 

27x54 

12 

1550 

27-11 

77 

55 

78 

54 

4 

2-3 

ii 

27x60 

12 

1700 

27-12 

77 

55 

84 

54 

4 

2-3 

12 

27x60 

'4 

1850 

27-13 

77 

55 

90 

54 

4 

2-3 

13 

27x66 

14 

2OOO 

27-14 

77 

55 

96 

54 

4 

2-3 

14 

27x66 

14 

2150 

The  above  sizes  are  fitted  with  revolving  triangular  grates  acting  independently  of  each  other.  The  above  ratings  are 
based  on  all  mains  and  returns  as  radiation  and  are  absolutely  guaranteed  in  any  section  of  the  country.  Manville  sheep's 
wool  cement  is  included  for  covering  the  sides  and  top  of  Heater  ^  inch  thick.  For  anthracite  coal  use  stove  size.  These 
Boilers  are  guaranteed  to  operate  successfully  » ith  soft  coal  for  fuel. 


217 


Radiation. 


Indirect  Radiators. 


Coils. 


Direct-Indirect. 


Valves. 


The  rooms  are  to  have  the  full  number  of  feet  of  direct,  indirect,  and  direct- 
-indirect  'radiation,  as  called  for  in  the  following  schedule  : 


DIRECT. 

INDIRECT. 

DIRECT-INDIRECT. 

Radiators 

Radiators 

Registers 

Cold  Air 
Inlets 

Radiators. 

£ 

JH 

TO 

FLOOR 

ROOM 

HEAT 

W 

c 

0 

„ 

c 

.t 

TO 

u- 

'S» 

<u 

U< 

u 

£ 

fc 

^ 

o 

X 

V 

a 

i 

£ 

o 
fc 

5" 
O 

£ 

o 

N 

cn 

o 

N 

K 

o 

cr 
en 

V 

a 

a 

o 
O 

First 

Parlor 

i 

50 

45" 

Ideal 

. 

70' 

Totals. 


The  indirect  radiators  are  to  be  in  not  less  than  (15)  square  foot  sections 
wherever  practicable.  They  are  to  be  placed  in  the  cellar  and  enclosed  in  No.  24 
galvanized  iron  casings.  Connect  proper  No.  24  galvanized  iron  inlets,  with 
dampers,  to  supply  fresh  air  from  the  opening  left  for  that  purpose  to  the  stacks, 
and  run  the  corresponding  outlets  for  warm  air,  connected  by  1C  charcoal  tin  pipes 
to  the  registers  in  each  room  heated  by  indirect  radiation.  The  registers  are  to 
be  [bronze]  or  [black  japanned]  and  of  the  sizes  given  in  the  schedule  and  set  in 
strong  tin  boxes.  All  pipes  to  and  from  the  indirect  stacks  are  to  be  so  arranged 
that  the  air  coming  in  shall  be  properly  circulated  over  the  stacks,  thoroughly 
warmed  and  conveyed  without  loss  to  the  rooms  in  which  the  registers  are  placed. 

All  coils  are  to  be  hung  on  ring  and  hook  plates  and  fastened  to  ij"  x  3^" 
wood  strips. 

Connect  the  direct-indirect  radiators  to  the  openings  in  the  walls  left  for  that 
purpose,  with  No.  24  galvanized  iron  ducts,  4"  high  and  as  wide  as  the  length  of 
the  radiator.  These  ducts  are  to  be  turned  downward  to  the  openings  at  an  angle 
of  45°.  Place  a  [black  japanned]  or  [bronze]  register  face  in  each  outside  opening, 
and  a  proper  damper  in  each  duct  to  regulate  the  flow  of  air. 

All  radiators  are  to  have  nickel  plated,  wood  wheel  Standard  radiator  valves 
of  full  opening  with  Jenkins  disks  and  also  automatic  nickel  plated  air  valves. 

218 


(Steam  Heating,  Continued.) 

Radiation. 

The  three  usual  systems  of  steam  or  hot  water  for  communicating  the  heat  to  the  various 
rooms,  are:  First,  Direct  radiation,  consisting  of  radiators  or  coils  placed  directly  in  the  rooms  to 
be  warmed,  warming  and  maintaining  the  temperature  of  the  air  in  the  rooms;  Second,  Direct-Indi- 
rect radiation  consisting  of  radiating  surfaces  placed  in  the  rooms  as  in  the  direct  system,  but  with  a 
compartment  in  the  radiator  into  which  outside  air  is  admitted,  thus  warming  directly  the  air  in  the 
room  and  also  that  which  is  admitted  for  ventilation;  Third,  Indirect  radiation  consisting  of 
radiating  surfaces  placed  outside  of  the  room  to  be  warmed,  commonly  divided  into  several  parts 
and  placed  at  the  lower  end  of  vertical  flues  leading  to  the  different  rooms.  These  radiators  are 
supplied  with  outside  air  through  special  ducts  and  warm  only  the  air  passing  into  the  room. 
Where  the  Indirect  or  Direct-Indirect  systems  are  used  the  building  should  be  provided  with  some 
definite  system  of  ventilation  for  the  removal  of  foul  air. 

'Aside  from  the  size  of  a  room  the  amount  of  steam  or  hot  water  radiation  required  to  heat 
it  depends  on  a  number  of  conditions,  among  which  might  be  mentioned:  the  material,  construc- 
tion and  location  of  the  building;  the  amount  of  glass  and  outside  wall  surface  in  the  room;  the 
direction  of  the  room  exposure;  the  amount  of  steam  carried  by  the  boiler;  the  number  of 
degrees  of  heat  it  is  required  to  raise  the  temperature  and  the  amount  of  ventilation  furnished 
to  the  room.  It  is  apparent  that  any  rule  of  universal  application  must  take  all  these  conditions 
into  consideration. 

The  following  is  an  original  formula  and  while  not  verified  to  any  great  extent  by  experience 
it  seems  to  nearly  meet  the  requirements: 

Formula  A. 

For  direct  low  pressure  steam. 

f  Area  of  exposed  wall  surface  in  sq.  ft.  ,  Decrees  of  de 

*£££*££"-  ~a~  '  *"'  ft"     +     Cubical  contents  of  room  in  ft.   |  X     sirii  raise  in" 

(Nor« :  To  divide  by  500  or  5,000  doable  the  dividend  and  point  off  three  figures  from  the  right  for  500  and  four  for  5000.) 

In  which  the  value  of  a  is  as  follows: 
20  for  brick  or  stone  walls,  furred,  lathed  and  plastered. 
15  for  brick  or  stone  walls,  lathed  and  plastered. 
10  for  frame  walls,  sheathed,  lathed  and  plastered. 
5  for  frame  walls  sheathed  both  sides. 
5  for  brick  or  stone  walls  bare. 

For  direct  hot  water  heating  take  about  double  the  amount  of  radiation  as  given  by  the 
formula. 

For  furnace  heating,  see  Formula  A'  page  215. 

The  usual  method  of  computing  the  amount  of  radiation  required  is  that  of  allowing  one 
square  foot  of  heating  surface  to  a  certain  number  (depending  on  the  above  conditions)  of  cubic 
feet  of  air  in  the  room.  If  this  method  is  used  the  following  figures  for  a  low  pressure  steam  sys- 
tem may  be  useful: 

Direct.  Indirect.  Direct-Indirect. 

For  living  rooms  in  dwellings,  Zero  to  70°. 

Exposed,  i  sq.  ft.  of  radiation  to 50  33  42          cu.  ft.  air. 

Ordinary 60  40  50 

Warm 75  5°  63 

For  Bed  Rooms,  etc.,  Zero  to  65°. 

Exposed 55  37  45 

Ordinary 66  45  55 

Warm 82  55  68 

Stores,  Churches,  Public  Halls,  etc 75  to  125  50  to    80  60  to  100 

Factories 10010150  6510100  80  to  120 

Warehouses 150  to  200         100  to  130         120  to  160 

Conservatories,  etc.,  principally  of  glass. ...  20  13  16 

"  "      entirely  of  glass,  i  square  foot  of  radiation  to  5  or  6  of  glass. 

For  hot  water  heating  allow  2  square  feet  of  radiation  instead  of  i  square  foot  to  the  amount 
of  air  given  in  the  table. 

(Continued  on  p.  231.) 


219 


Piping.  Furnish  and  put  up  all  the  necessary  flow  and  return  mains  and  connections, 

properly  proportioned,  of  the  best  quality  wrought  iron  with  tight  joints.  All 
horizontalyftw  and  return  mains  are  to  have  a  rise  from  the  heater  of  not  less  than 
i"  in  10'.  All  rising  pipes  are  to  be  plumb  and  all  pipes  are  to  run  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  insure  a  perfectly  noiseless  free  circulation.  The  ends  of  all  pipes 
are  to  be  reamed  out  and  all  burrs  and  obstructions  removed  before  being  placed 
in  position. 

[All  pipes,  except  in  the  cellar,  are  to  be  concealed]  or  [All  pipes  are  to  be  left 
exposed  and  run  parallel  and  free  from  unsightly  bends  or  exposed  couplings 
above  the  cellar.] 

The  sizes  of  all  pipes  are  to  be  as  follows : 


For  Double  Pipe. 
(Steam.) 


Radiators  30  square  feet  and  under  are  to  have  f "  supply  and  f "  return  valve  and  connections. 

Radiators  above  30  square  feet  and  not  exceeding  60  are  to  have  i"  supply  and  f"  return 
valve  and  connections. 

Radiators  above  60  square  feet  and  not  exceeding  xooare  to  have  i£"  supply  and  i"  return 
valve  and  connections. 

Radiators  above  100  square  feet  and  not  exceeding  150  are  to  have  i|"  supply  and  *£"  return 
valve  and  connections. 


For  One  Pipe.  Radiators  25  square  feet  and  under  are  to  have  i"  single  valve  and  connections. 

(Steam.)  Radiators  above   25   square  feet  and  not  exceeding  60  are  to  have  i^"  single  valve  and 

connections. 

Radiators  above  60  square  feet  and  not  exceeding  IDO  are  to  have  i^-"  single   valve  and 
connections. 

Radiators  above   100  square  feet  and  not  exceeding   200  are  to  have  2"  single  valve  and 
connections. 


(Hot  Water.) 


Radiators  40  square  feet  and  under  are  to  have  i'  flow  and  return. 
Radiators  above  40  square  feet  and  not  exceeding  72  are  to  have  i£"  flow  and  return. 
Radiators  above  72  square  feet  and  not  exceeding  125  are  to  have  i-J"  flow  and  return. 
Radiators  above  125  square  feet  and  not  exceeding  200  are  to  have  2"  flow  and  return. 


220 


(Steam  Heating,  Continued.) 

The  following  table  gives  the  capacity  and  dimensions  of  a  number  of  Direct  and  Direct-Indi- 
rect radiators: 


Direct  :  National,  Ideal  and  Peerless  Steam  .... 
Direct-Indirect:  National  ^  SttSm  and 

2 

3 

3 

•S^c 

5 

8 

754 

754 

-    •; 

1  Width  over  legs 
in  inchu. 

HIATING  SURFACE  OF  ONE  Loop  IN  SQUARE  FKET. 

HEIGHT  OF  SECTION  IN  INCHES. 

45 

38 

3» 

3' 

16 

*5 

*3 

23 

2O 

.9 

iS 

16 

'5 

'4 



854 
1 

954 

5 

s 

4 
4 
8 
3 

» 

i 

4 

Direct  :  Ideal  and  Peerless  Water  .... 

^. 

,, 

Direct  :  ^National  four  column  Water  
Direct  :  National  single  column  Steam  .... 

-;. 

>» 

j*,j 

Direct  :  National  single  column  Water  

r>i«*>t  •  F.Tr*l«W          .....                                   !  Stram 

iH 

\  Detroit  ornamental  fluted  J 
Direcl:  •<  Detroit  plain  fluted  £           (Steam  and 
(  Detroit  special  wide  top  1   "|      Water 
Direct-Indirect:  Detroit  ; 

554 

H 

•*f 

•*f 

5 

M 

* 

.... 

4 

3% 

Direct  :  Detroit  Flue  '.  .  .                           .  .  J  Stf^  ™>d 

|     Water 
.'  Perfection                                    .  1 

5 

5 

4 
4 

954 

3H 
8 

I  Perfection  special  cast  iron  top   | 
Direct  i*t  Perfection  special  marble  top.     f-  .  .  .  .  Steam.  .  .  . 

{.Perfection  wide  top  curved  j 
Direct-Indirect  :  Perfection  Water  

Direct:  Perfection  Flue  <  Steam  and 

g 

M 

3* 

3* 

.... 

1      Water 

Allow  ^  "  at  each  end  of  radiators  for  the  bushings. 

The  Ideal  and  Perfection  are  made  circular,  corner,  window  and  stairway  shapes  for  both  steam  and  water  in  all  sizes  given  in  the  table. 

The  Detroit  ornamental  fluted  is  made  corner  and  circular  shapes  for  steam  and  water  in  all  sizes  given  in  the  table. 

The  Detroit  and  Perfection  are  made  in  dining  room  forms, 

.  » 

All  these  radiators  are  tapped  2"  and  bushed  to  the  following  sizes. 

STEAM.  HOT  WATER. 

One  Pipe  System  Two  Pipe  System. 


24  sq.  ft.  and  under  i' 
24  sq.  ft.  to  60  sq.  ft.  i54' 
60  sq.  ft.  to  loo  sq.  ft.  l5£' 
loo  sq  ft.  and  up  2" 


48  sq.  ft.  and  under  i"      x 


48  sq.  ft.  to  96  sq.  ft.  iJ4"  x  i" 


96  sq.  ft.  and  up 


40  sq.  ft.  and  under  i "      x  i" 


40  sq,  ft.  to  72  sq.  ft.  iVi'    x  i!4  ' 


73  sq.  ft.  and  up        ij£"  x  ij$" 


The   following   table   gives   the   capacities   and    dimensions   of   a   few   Indirect   Radiators. 

STEAM  OR  HOT  WATER. 

Excelsior.  Perfection  Pin. 


Length  of  section 36" 

Height  of  section 754" 

Height  of  section  at  connections 754" 

Width  occupied  in  stack 354" 

No.  of  sq.  ft.  of  radiation  to  each  section,  12 

(Continued  on  page  223.) 


Standard.  Extra  Large. 
36"  36" 

"54"  '5*4" 

10  15 


221 


For  Two  Pipe  System. 
(Steam.) 


For  One  Pipe  (Steam) 
or  For  Hot  Water. 


All  mains  and  returns  are  to  be  in  size  as  follows 
To  supply  100  square  feet  of  radiation  and  under, 


It 

100 

(  ( 

and  not 

exceed 

ing  150 

1  1 

150 

(  » 

1  1 

ti 

225 

n 

225    " 

« 

(  * 

*  t 

400 

u 

400   " 

t  t 

1  1 

a 

700 

" 

700   " 

« 

<  i 

1  1 

IOOO 

1< 

1000     '" 

(  ( 

1  1 

1  1 

1400 

It 

1400   " 

(  i 

i  t 

«  t 

22OO 

1  1 

220O     " 

I  i 

1  1 

a 

3500 

To  supply  100  square 

feet 

and  under, 

1  1 

100 

t  t 

and  not 

exceeding  225 

it 

225     " 

1  ( 

tt 

ii 

4OO 

1  1 

400         '* 

(  t 

i  t 

*  ( 

7OO 

1  1 

700 

(  ( 

1  1 

1  1 

IOOO 

1  1 

IOOO     " 

i  ( 

1  1 

t  < 

1500 

" 

1500   " 

41 

M 

44 

2500 

Steam.   Return, 
i"  i" 


if 

2-J-"  2" 

3"        •    *f 
3i"        3" 

it  i  // 

4  3i 

5"          4" 

'f 
2" 

3" 
3f 
4" 
5" 


Fittings. 


Hangers. 


Plates. 


Bronzing  and 
Japanning. 


All  fittings  are  to  be  of  heavy  cast  grey  iron,  no  malleable  iron  fittings  are  to 
be  used,  and  all  unions  are  to  be  ground  unions,  flange  unions  or  rights  and  lefts. 

All  pipe  lines  in  the  basement  are  to  be  supported  by  neat  and  strong  expan- 
sion hangers  securely  fastened. 

Where  pipes  pass  through  the  floors  and  ceilings,  the  openings  are  to  be  fitted 
with  [nickel  plated]  or  [bronze]  or  [iron]  floor  and  ceiling  plates. 

All  radiators  and  coils  and  all  exposed  pipes  above  the  cellar  are  to  be 
bronzed  in  the  best  manner,  and  the  heater  and  basement  pipes  are  to  receive  one 
coat  of  best  japan. 


Covering, 
flagnesia  Sectional. 


Cover  the  heater,  boiler  and'  tanks  completely  with  Magnesia  blocks,  i-J"  thick  when  com- 
pletely applied,  secured  by  No.  19,  2"  mesh  poultry  wire  and  brought  to  a  smooth  uniform  surface 
by  a  coat  of  hard  finishing  plaster. 

Cover  the  smoke  pipe  with  an  air  space  i"  deep  formed  by  using  wire  net  of  No.  18  wire  £" 
mesh,  offset  from  the  surface  of  the  smoke  pipe  by  iron  studs  at  least  five  to  the  square  foot  and 
r"  long  in  the  clear,  fastened  to  the  wire  net.  Cover  the  wire  netting  with  Magnesia  blocks  i£" 
thick  when  completely  applied,  secured  by  mesh  poultry  net  and  brought  to  a  smooth  surface  by  a 
hard  finishing  plaster. 

Cover  all  pipes,  mains,  returns  and  risers  and  all  connections  and  fittings  with  Magnesia 
sectional  coverings  with  moulded  fittings.  All  joints  are  to  be  set  up  tight,  laps  of  canvas  are  to 
be  pasted  down  and  bands  of  japanned  iron  i"  wide  are  to  be  applied  at  intervals  of  18"  and  on 
each  side  of  every  fitting.  All  covering  placed  out  of  doors  is  to  be  enclosed  in  an  extra  wrapping 

of  10  oz.  canvas,  sewed  on. 

222 


(Steam  Heating,  Concluded.) 

The  following  table  gives  the  proportion  of  the  cold  air  supplies,  hot  air  flues  and  registers 
required  for  indirect  heating.  As  most  indirect  sections  are  made  in  either  8,  10,  12,  15  or  20 
square  foot  capacities,  the  table  is  given  in  multitiples  of  those  numbers.  The  sizes  of  the  hot  air 
flues  and  registers  are  for  first  story.  For  second  story  about  three  quarters  and  for  third  story 
about  one  half  of  the  sizes  given  are  usually  used. 


Heating 

Cold  Air 

Diameter  of 

Hot  Air 

Size  of 

Net  Capacity 

Surface 

Supply 

Round  Duct 

Flue 

Register 

of  Register 

sq.  ft. 

sq.  in. 

inches. 

sq.  in. 

sq.  in. 

sq.  in. 

i 

!•} 

't 

2 

3 

2 

8 

12 

4 

16 

24 

16 

10 

IS 

4t 

20 

3° 

20 

12 

18 

4i 

24 

36 

24 

15 

23 

5* 

3° 

45 

3° 

16 

24 

Si 

32 

48 

32 

20 

3° 

6} 

40 

60 

40 

24 

36 

6$ 

48 

72 

48 

3° 

45 

7f 

60 

90 

60 

32 

48 

7* 

64 

96 

64 

36 

54 

8f 

72 

108 

7* 

40 

60 

8J 

80 

1  20 

80 

45 

68 

9f 

90 

'35 

90 

48 

72 

9f 

96 

144 

96 

50 

75 

9J 

100 

T5° 

IOO 

56 

84 

lOf 

112 

1  68 

112 

60 

90 

I  Of 

120 

1  80 

I2O 

64 

96 

-  "i 

128 

192 

128 

70 

i°5 

"I 

140 

210 

140 

72 

108 

144 

216 

144 

75 

"3 

12 

'5° 

225 

'5° 

80 

I2O 

I2f 

160 

240 

160 

84 

126 

I2f 

1  68 

252 

168 

88 

132 

13 

176 

264 

176 

90 

'35 

'3i 

1  80 

27O 

180 

96 

144 

13; 

192 

288 

192 

100 

'5° 

I3f 

200 

300 

200 

104 

156 

14* 

208 

312 

208 

I05 

'58 

Mi 

21O 

315 

2IO 

1  08 

162 

'4f 

216 

324 

216 

no 

'65 

'4i 

22O 

33° 

22O 

112 

168 

Ml 

224 

336 

224 

1  20 

180 

1  5^ 

240 

360 

240 

128 

192 

*5f 

256 

384 

256 

130 

'95 

jsf 

260 

39° 

260 

132 

198 

15$ 

264 

396 

264 

135 

203 

i6i 

270 

405 

270 

For  the  size  of  registers  corresponding  to  the  net  capacities,  see  in  table,  page  215. 
Piping. 

There  are  four  usual  systems  of  piping: 

First,  With  main  steam  pipes  and  risers  with  accompanying  returns; 

Second,  With  main  steam  pipes  and  risers  with  accompanying  return  mains  and  separate  re- 
turn risers  from  each  heater  connected  below  the  water  line.  (This  system  is  noiseless  and  is 
usually  used  for  very  low  pressures  as  in  dwellings.); 

Third,  With  main  steam  pipes  and  risers  with  corresponding  return  mains  but  without  separate 
return  risers; 

Fourth,  With  single  pipes,  either  one  or  several,  running  from  the  top  of  the  boiler  and 
branching  to  the  various  heaters,  returning  the  condensation  back  through  the  same  pipe  which 
supplies  the  steam.  (This  system  requires  large  pipes  and  considerable  pitch,  and  works  much 
better  where  a  separate  pipe  is  run  from  the  top  of  the  boiler  to  each  radiator.  The  third  and 
fourth  systems  are  cheaper  in  first  cost  and  require  but  one  valve  for  each  heater.) 

The  following  table  gives  the  sectional  area  of  a  few  sizes  of  steam  and  hot  water  pipes  : 


Inside  diameter  of  pipe  in  inches 
Area  of  pipe  in  square  inches  

K 

I 

•k 

iH 

2 

*X 

3 

3« 

4                5 

6 

.4418 

.7854 

I.  5W72 

1.7671 

i-M'6 

4.9087 

7.0686 

9.6211 

13.566  :  19.635 

*8.*74 

223 


Asbestos  Cover  the  heater  completely,  also  the  smoke  pipe,  with  H.  W.  John's  sheet  fire  felt  (i")  in 

Covering.  thickness,  finished  with  H.   W.  John's  Asbestos  cement  (£")  thick. 

Cover  all  steam  pipes — mains,  returns  and  risers  and  all  connections  and  fittings — with  H. 

W.  John's  asbestos  fire  felt  sectional  pipe  covering  with  canvas  cover  fastened  with  metal  bands 

or  straps  placed  18"  apart. 


Temporary 
Heat 


If  temporary  heat  be  required,  the  Contractor  shall,  at  any  time  directed 
by  the  Architect,  set  a  sufficient  number  of  radiators  to  furnish  the  same.  The 
Owner  shall  supply  coal  for  such  temporary  heat  and  care  for  the  apparatus  during 
such  time.  If  such  heating  requires  radiators  to  be  set  out  of  their  final  position, 
an  allowance  of  ($3.00)  for  each  radiator  so  connected  shall  be  made  by  the  Owner. 


Guarantee. 


The  Contractor  hereby  guarantees 

(First)  That  the  apparatus  will  heat  the  rooms  mentioned  in  the  schedule,  to 
the  temperatures  mentioned  in  the  same,  in  the  coldest  winter  weather,  and  with 
not  more  than  (5)  Ibs.  pressure  to  the  square  inch  ; 

(Second)  That  the  apparatus  will  maintain  heat  in  every  radiator  at  the  same 
time ; 

Provided  that  the  apparatus  is  given  proper  care  and  attention,  and  coat 
suitable  to  the  requirements  of  the  heater  is  used. 

Should  any  part  of  this  system  fail  to  fulfill  the  guarantee  herein  contained,  or 
should  any  defect  appear,  the  Contractor  hereby  agrees  to  remedy  such  defects  at 
his  own  cost,  within  a  reasonable  time  after  receiving  a  written  notice  of  the  same. 


224 


HOT  WATER. 

[  For  Heading  and  General  Conditions,  see  page  208. } 


Principle  of 
Construction. 


This  apparatus  is  to  be  constructed  on  the  gravity  or  law  pressure  system,  open 
to  the  atmosphere  through  an  expansion  tank  and  in  such  a  manner  as  to  insure  a  free 
and  continuous  circulation  throughout  the  entire  apparatus  and  so  that  radiators 
on  any  floor  may  be  shut  off  without  interfering  with  the  circulation  in  others. 


Heater.  The  Contractor  is  to  furnish  and  set  in  complete  working  order  a  No.  79 

Boynton  Furnace  Company's  Portable  Return  Flue  Sectional  hot  water  heater  with  a 
capacity  of  (1850)  square  feet  of  radiation.  The  boiler  is  to  be  tested  under  a 
hydrostatic  pressure  of  100  Ibs.  to  the  square  inch  before  leaving  the  factory. 


Special  Fittings. 


Furnish  and  put  on  the  heater  a  nickel-plated  Scully  hot  water  thermometer 
and  an  Ashcroft  altitude  gauge. 


Firestools. 


j  See  Steam  Heating,  j 


Supply  and  Draw 
Cocks. 

Smoke  Pipe. 

Foundation. 

Bricking. 


Furnish  a  £"  or  f"  square  head  brass  feed  cock  connected  to  the  boiler  with  a 
detachable  wrench,  also  a  f"  brass  blow-off  cock. 

{See  Steam  Heating.} 
{See  Steam  Heating.  1 
|  For  Bricksetting  the  Heater  see  in  Mason's  Specifications,  page  30. } 


Expansion 
Tank. 


Furnish  and  set  where  directed  above  the  highest  point  in  the  system,  a  heavy 
galvanized  steel  'expansion  tank  of  a  capacity  of  one  gallon  to  every  (18)  gallons  or 
water  in  the  entire  system,  with  proper  gauge  glass,  brass  fixtures  and  guard  rods. 
The  tank  is  to  have  an  overflow  pipe  taken  to  the  roof  or  sink  as  may  be  most 
convenient,  and  an  exhaust  pipe  to  be  taken  from  the. tank  to  the  open  air.  Con- 
nect the  tank  to  the  feed  and  return  riser.  Construct  a  neat  shelf  on  which  to 
rest  the  tank. 

226 


Hot  Water  Heating. 

There  are  two  forms  of  hot  water  heating  apparatuses,  depending  on  the  temperature  of  the 
water: 

First,  The  open  tank  system  in  which  the  water  is  rarely  above  200°  and  never  above  212°. 
(In  this  method  the  heating  surface  must  be  about  double  that  for  steam  and  the  cost  is  propor- 
tionately greater.); 

Second,  The  closed  system,  sometimes  called  the  high  pressure  system,  although  the  pressure 
need  not  exceed  10  Ibs.  (With  this  system  the  surface  need  not  be  much  greater  than  for  steam.) 

'If  it  is  necessary  to  use  water  from  a  house  tank  an  expansion  tank  with  a  float  valve  should 
be  used. 

Radiation. 

The  same  systems  of  radiation  are  used  for  hot  water  heating  as  for  steam.  See  pages  219, 
221,  223,  for  radiation,  etc.  The  radiators  require  but  one  valve  for  each,  which  may  be  placed 
either  on  the  flow  or  return  pipe.  These  valves  should  have  full  openings.  Air  cocks  are  placed 
at  the  highest  points  on  all  radiators  or  coils  to  permit  of  the  escape  of  air  in  filling  and  the 
admission  of  air  in  emptying. 

Pipes. 

A  hot  water  system  always  has  separate  flow  and  return  pipes.  The  flows  are  taken  out  of 
the  top  of  the  boiler  and  the  returns  are  connected  near  the  bottom.  Larger  pipes  are  required 
for  hot  water  than  for  the  two  pipe  system,  steam.  The  sizes  of  mains  are  about  the  same  as  for 
one  pipe  steam,  or  they  may  be  somewhat  smaller.  Horizontal  mains  less  than  i£"  in  size 
should  not  be  used  except  for  single  radiator  connections.  In  the  Mills  or  overhead  system 
of  hot  water  piping,  sometimes  erroneously  called  the  one  pipe  system,  the  feed  pipe  is  run  from 
the  top  of  the  boiler  as  directly  as  practicable,  to  the  top  of  the  building.  Branches  are  there 
taken  off  and  run  to  points  over  the  radiators  in  the  stories  below.  These  pipes  then  descend 
and  have  two  connections  to  the  radiators,  one  at  top  and  one  at  bottom.  After  passing  all  the 
radiators,  on  the  vertical  line,  these  down  pipes  return  to  the  bottom  of  the  boiler  either 
separately  or  connected  in  the  cellar.  With  this  method,  air  keys  are  not  required  on  the 
radiators. 


227 


Radiation. 


Indirect  Radiators. 


Coils. 


Direct-Indirect. 


Valves. 


|  See  Steam  Heating.} 
{See  Steam  Heating. ( 
{See  Steam  Heating.! 
{See  Steam  Heating.} 

Each  radiator  is  to  have  a  nickel-plated  wood  wheel  Detroit  quick  opening 
radiator  valve  of  full  opening  with  union  elbow,  also  a  Beltknap  nickel-plated  air 
valve  operated  with  a  key.  One  key  is  to  be  furnished  for  each  floor. 


Piping. 

Fittings. 

Hangers. 

Plates. 


Bronzing  and 
Japanning. 

Covering. 


{See  Steam  Heating.} 


{ See  Steam  Heating. } 


{See  Steam  Heating. 


{See  Steam  Heating. 


{See  Steam  Heating. 


{See  Steam  Heating.} 


Guarantee. 


The  Contractor  hereby  guarantees 

(First)  That  the  apparatus  will  heat  the  rooms  mentioned  in  the  schedule 
to  the  temperatures  mentioned  in  the  same,  in  the  coldest  winter  weather,  with  the 
water  at  not  over  (180°)  Fahr.  ;• 

(Second)  That  the  apparatus  will  maintain  heat  in  every  radiator  at  the  same 
time ; 

Provided  that  the  apparatus  is  given  proper  care  and  attention  and  coal  suit- 
able to  the  requirements  of  the  heater  is  used. 

Should  any  part  of  this  system  fail  to  fulfill  the  guarantee  herein  contained, 
or  should  any  defect  appear,  the  Contractor  hereby  agrees  to  remedy  such  defects 
at  his  own  cost  within  a  reasonable  time  after  receiving  a  written  notice  of  the 
same. 

228 


THE  BOYNTON  HOT  WATER  HEATERS. 


0. 

0 

o 

C9 

H 

2  O     . 

to 
O 

ta.   M 
0  o     ' 

SIZES  OF 

to 

H 
-  X 

2  x      5 

*°' 

NAME. 

sj| 

Z  *•  s 

III 

Id 

X  Q  « 

SsS 

en  r-  ± 

3*1 

^  H 

FLOWS  AND 
RETURNS. 

09 

«  Z 

S2 

S  f- 

z 

E  M 

x  si  * 
MOO* 

&o     2 

2  1?  S3 

*  *•      a 

s£ 

id  of 

<<* 

- 

Is 

te  u  ^ 

=  £0 

i?OQ 

3  <  o* 

o££ 

0  a 

Z* 

sis 

N   g    g 

<  x;  -  •< 
UiiQK 

C§ 

The   Boynton  Niagara   Hot   Water 

14 

.. 

75 

1-1%  inch. 

.. 

12  inch 

6 

150 

12 

Heater  for  Hard  Coal. 

iS 

100 

1-2            " 

14     " 

7 

2OO 

M 

118 

.   . 

.  . 

125 

2-2 

14    " 

6 

250 

14 

I2O 

.    t 

.  . 

150 

2-2 

.  . 

17     " 

7 

300 

17 

124 

••    . 

200 

2-2 

20      " 

7 

375 

20 

Boynton  Return  Flue  Sectional  Hot 

62 

59 

40 

.. 

-3  and  2-2 

5 

18x25 

8 

500 

.. 

Water  Heater. 

63 

59 

40 

-3  and  2-2 

6 

18x30 

8 

700 

,    . 

For  Hard  Coal,  Wood  or  Natural  Gas. 

64 

59 

40 

-3  and  2-2 

7 

18x35 

9 

900 

. 

76 

65 

43 

-4  and  2-3 

6 

2IX3O 

9 

1  100 

77 

65 

43 

-4  and  2-3. 

7 

21X35 

10 

1350 

78 

65 

43 

-4  and  2-3 

8 

2IX4O 

10 

1600 

.    . 

79 

65 

43 

—4  and  2—3 

9 

21X45 

10 

1850 

So 

65 

43 

'• 

-4  and  2—3 

10 

21X50 

12 

2IOO 

85 

75 

68 

.. 

2-4  and  1-3 

5 

42X30 

14 

25OO 

.. 

86 

75 

68 

.  . 

1-6  and  2-4 

6 

42x36 

14 

3000 

87 

75 

68 

1-6  and  2-4 

7 

42X42 

M 

3500 

88 

75 

68 

.  . 

1-6  and  2-4 

8 

42x48 

14 

4OOO 

.    . 

89 

77 

72 

1-8  and  2  -4 

9 

42X54 

16 

4500 

90 

77 

72 

1-8  and  2-4 

10 

42x60 

16 

5000 

77 

72 

•- 

1-8  and  2-4 

ii 

42X66 

16 

5500 

•' 

The  above  sizes  are  fitted  with  revolving  triangular  grates,  acting  independently  of  one  another.  The  above  ratings  are 
based  on  exposed  flows  and  returns  as  radiation  and  are  absolutely  guaranteed  in  any  section  of  the  country.  Manville 
sheep's- wool  cement  is  included  for  covering  sides  and  top  of  Heaters  %  inch  thick.  For  anthracite  coal  use  coal  stove  size 


E 

o 

H 

£  o  . 

to 
o 

SIZES  OF 

°  „• 

Id 

£  a 

z 

NAME. 

a.  os 

i.  *"  S 

M 

FLOWS  AND 

*S 

£ 

-  a: 

>  0        ° 

—     fr* 

off 

g  a  « 

X  O  « 
H  CD  2 

RETURNS. 

£2 

°  £  £ 

S  S  s 

0  H  U  < 

M  •< 

—  —  — 

a  C  S 

s  r^ 

&J  <  S 

a  o  o 

sS  ***  eg  a 

2  s 

=  2§ 

"•    £>   Oti 

SBw 

SO  5 

«  -5  •*• 
X  X  Ctf 

uSax 

The  Boynton  Soft  Coal  Return  Flue 

.05 

59 

41 

.. 

1-3  and  2-2 

5 

17x20 

8 

400 

Sectional  Hot  Water  Heater. 

.06 

59 

41 

.  .     . 

1-3  and  2-2 

6 

17x25 

8 

500 

.07 

59 

41 

1-3  and  2-2 

7 

17x30 

8 

000 

.08 

59 

41 

1-3  and  2-2 

8 

17x35 

9 

700 

-• 

1  8-5 

66 

44 

1-3  and  2-2 

5 

18x24 

9 

TOO 

18-6 

66 

44 

.  . 

1-3  and  2-2 

6 

18x30 

9 

800 

.  . 

18-7 

66 

44 

.  . 

2-3  and  1-2 

7. 

18x36 

9 

IOOO 

.  . 

1  8-8 

66 

44 

.  . 

2-3  and  1-2 

8 

18x42 

9 

1200 

.   , 

18-9 

66 

44 

2-3  and  1-2 

9 

18x48 

10 

I4OO 

27-7 

77 

55 

.  . 

1-4  and  2-3 

7 

27x36 

10 

1750 

.   . 

27-8 

77 

55 

1-4  and  2-3 

8 

27x42 

10 

20OO 

27-9 

77 

55 

1-4  and  2-3 

9 

27x48 

12 

225O 

27-10 

77 

55 

. 

1-4  and  2-3 

10 

27x54 

12 

2500 

27-11 

77 

55 

1-4  and  2-3 

ii 

27x60 

12 

2750 

27-12 

77 

55 

2-4  and  1-3 

12 

27x60 

H 

3000 

.  . 

27-13 

77 

55 

. 

2-4  and  1-3 

13 

27x66 

14 

3250 

27-14 

77 

55 

2-4  and  1-3 

14 

27x66 

14 

3500 

The  above  sizes  are  fitted  with  revolving  triangular  grates  acting  independently  of  each  other.  The  above  ratings  are 
based  on  all  mains  and  returns  as  radiation,  and  are  absolutely  guaranteed  in  any  section  of  the  country.  Manville  sheep's- 
wool  cement  is  included  for  covering  the  sides  and  top  of  Heater  %  inch  thick.  For  anthracite  coal  use  stove  size.  These 
Boilers  are  guaranteed  to  operate  successfully  with  soft  coal  for  fuel. 


229 


INDEX. 

Abbreviations:    Mason's,  M.;  Bluestone,  S.;  Cut  Stone,  S.;  Iron  Work,  I.;  Carpenter's,  C,;  Electrical,  E.;  Painting,  Pa.;  Plumbing,  PI.;  Heating,  H. 


Page. 

ADAMANT  piaster- 
ing 48 

Alterations 3 

Anchors M.  44,  C.  84 

Angle  Beads 1 1 8 

Arbitration 3 

Arch  Centres 6 

Arches,  Inverted 24 

Arches,  Stone 62 

Arches,  Wood  Centres 

for 86 

Area  Flagging 54 

Area  Grating 44 

Area  Railings,  Iron. . .  76 

Areas  .   26 

Ashlar  Work 58 

Ash  Pits 32 

Automatic  Gas  Light- 
ers   1 56 

Award  of  Contract. ...  4 

BACKING,  Brick.. 20, 21 

Balconies 96 

Base 114 

Bases S.  52,  I.  68 

Basins,  Wash 196 

Baskets  for  Pipes 1 80 

Bath  Room C.  130 

Bath  Tubs 192,193 

Beam  Anchors 84 

Beam  Filling 26 

Beams,  Iron 70,  71 

Bells,  Electric 158 

Bell  Traps 182 

Blasting 10,  n 

Blinds 108 

Bluestone 52 

Board  Fence 140 

Board  Walk 140 

Boilers,  Range  ...188,  189 
Boilers,  Heating.  .216,  226 
Bolting  of  Iron  Work.  66 

Book  Cases 124 

Box  Girders 70 

Boxing  for  Shutters.  .  116 
Bracing  of  Frame  .  ..80,  81 

Brass  Pipes 174,  175 

Brick  Footing 22 

Brick  Foundations ....     22 

Brick,  Moulded 36 

Brick  Paving. ...      ...     38 

Brick  Set  Heater 30 

Brickwork 20,  21 

Brickwork,  Face 36 

Bridge  and  Platform   .        8 

Bridging 86 

Bridle  Irons.see  Stirrup     84 

Burglar  Alarm 154 

Butler's  Pantry 126 

CAPACITY  of  Tanks  i%$ 
Capping  for  Piling     14 

Care  of  Building 4,  6 

Carpenter's    Specifica- 
tion      78 


Page. 

Carving S.  56,  C.  94 

Casings,  Inside 114 

Cast  1  ron 64 

Cast  Iron  Columns. ...  68 
Cast  Iron  Pipes. . .  172,  173 
Catch  Basins, 

M.  42,  PI.  178 

Cedar  Closet 128 

Cellar  Area 26 

Cellar  Bottom 28 

Cellar  Hatchway 96 

Cellar  Stairs 122 

Cellar  Work   136 

Cement 18,  19,  65 

Cement  Sidewalk 54 

Centres  for  Arches. ...      86 

Centres,   Plaster 50 

Cesspools 40 

Chair  Rail 116 

Chimney  Caps 60 

Chimney  Rods   44 

Chimneys 32 

China  Closet 126 

Cistern 38 

Cistern  Supply  to  Sink  190 
Cistern  Supply  to  Tank  184 

Clamps  for  Stone 56 

Clapboards 90,  91 

Cleaning  Screws 178 

Closets 126 

Closets,  Water, 

C.  130,  136,  PI    196,  197 

Clothes  Chute 134 

Clothes  Posts   138 

Coal  Bins 136 

Coal  Slide   26 

Coating  of  Pipes 172 

Cold  Air  Duct, 

M.  30,  C.  138,  H.  214,  215 
Columns  and  Pilasters, 

Stone 62 

Columns,      Iron      and 

Steel 68,  71 

Composition  Work ....     94 

Concrete 18 

Concrete  Footings     .  .     22 

Conservatory 134 

Conservatory       Floor, 

Cement 38 

Contractor 2 

Coping 62 

Copper  Baths  .  .  .   192,  193 
Copper     Range    Boil- 
ers   188,  189 

Corner  Boards 92 

Cornices,  Plaster 50 

Cornices,  Wood.  .  .  .92,  116 
Corrugated  Iron  Roof.  74 
Counter  Flashing. . .  ,  .  88 

Coves,  Plaster 50 

Cresting 88 

Curb 54 

Curb,  Backing  for. ...  20 
Cut  Outs,  Electric. ...  152 
Cut  Stone  Specification  56 
Cutting C.  78,  PI.  170 


Page. 

[)AMP  Course 24 

Deafening,  M.  44,  C.IO2 
Deflection  of  Wooden 

Beams,  Formulae  for  81 

Delay 3 

Demolition  of  Old 

Buildings.  .  .M.  8,  C.  78 

Door  Frames  98 

Door  Openers,  Electric  158 

Doors. 112 

Doors,  Iron  Sidewalk.  74 

Drain,  House 178 

Drains M.  42,  PI.  178 

Drawers 130 

Drawings 4 

Dresser,  Kitchen.  ...  128 

Drives 16 

Dry  Drains 42 

Drying  Room 136 

Dumb  Waiter 134 

EARTHENWARE 

Pipes.  M.42,  PI.  172, 173 
Electrical  Rules. 

(Standard  Rules,  N. 

E.  L.  A.) 151 

Electrical  Specification  150 

Electric  Lighting 152 

Elevator 134 

Enamel  Finish 166 

Enclosing,  Temporary  100 

Excavation..  M.  10,  PI.  170 

Excavation  for  Piling,  to 

Expansion  of  Iron  Work  72 

Expansion  Tank.  .226,  227 

Exposed  Pipes 176 

Exterior  Painting.  162,  165 

PACE  Brickwork 36 

Fences 140 

Filling  for  Piling 14 

Finials 88 

Finish  of  Walls 48 

Fire  Escape 74 

Fire  or  Mice  Stops, 

M.  38,  C.  102 

Fireplaces 32,  34 

Fireproofing,  Brick.  .  .  20 

Flagging,  Area 54 

Flag  Sidewalk 52 

Flagstone,  Step 52 

Flashing 88 

Flitch  Plates 84 

Floors 102 

Floors,  Brick 20 

Floors,    Loads   of  (N. 

Y.  B.  Law) 65 

Floor,  Waterproof. ...  38 

Flues 32 

Flues,  Ventilating.  .  .  36 

Foot  Baths 195 

Footings 22 

Footings,  Stone 16 

Forms  for  Arches 86 

Formulae: 

Capacity  of  Tanks ..  185 


Page. 
Deflection  of  Wooden 

Beams 81 

Electrical 163 

Heating 215,  219 

Sustaining  Weight  of 

Piles         15 

Transverse  Strength 

of  Wooden  Beams  8 1 

Weight  of  Water.  ..  185 

Wooden  Posts  ....  81 

Foundations 22 

Frames,   Window   and 

Door 98 

Framing 82 

Fresh  Air  Inlet 178 

Fuel  and  Stoves 6 

Furnace,  Bricksetting.  30 

Furnace  Pit 30 

Furnaces,  Hot  Air, 

210,  211,  213 

Furring too,  101 

QABLE  shingles.  ..    90 

Gas  Connections.   202 

Gas  Fitting 202,  203 

Gas  Lighting,  Electric  156 
Gas  Logs.  ..M.  34,  PI.  202 
Gas  Pipes. ...  174,  176,  203 
General  Conditions.  . .  2 

Girders,  Iron 70 

Glazing 106 

Glazing,  Doors 112 

Glossary   of  Electrical 

Terms 161 

Grading 16 

Graining 168 

Grates 34 

Gratings ,     44 

Grease  Trap, 

M.  40,  PI.  192,  193 

Grilles 76 

Grounds 100,101 

Guards  for  Windows. .  44 
Gutters,  Sidewalk  ...  54 
Gutters,  Metal.  .  ..206,  207 

HANGERS  for  Pipes  172 

Hard  Finish  ....     48 
Hardware  Specification  142 

Hardwood  Finish 164 

Hat  Rack 124 

Hearths 34 

Heating  Pipes, 

PI.  174,  H.  220 
Heating  Specification.   208 

Hollow  Walls 20 

Hose  Connection 186 

Hot  Air  Heating 210 

Hot    Air     Pipes     and 

Registers.  212,  214,  215 
Hot  Water  Heaters. 226,  229 
HotWater  Heating,  226,  227 
House  Sewer.M.  42,  PI.  178 
House  Sewer,  Drain 

and  Trap 178 

Hydrant 186,  187 


INSURANCE 5 

Inverted  A  relics.  ..     24 
Iron  Beams  and  Girder     70 

Iron  Fences 140 

Iron  Range  Boilers.  1 88, 189 
Iron  Specification  ...  64 
Iron  Work  M.  44,  I.  64.  C.  84 
Irrigation 42 

JAMBS,  Stone 60 

Joints  in  Pipes.  [  72, 1 74 

KALSOMINING...  168 

King's    Windsor 

Cement 48 

Kitchen  Fireplace  ....     34 

Hearth 34 

Range  ...188,  189 
"         Sink, 

C.  132,  PI.  190,  191 

LAC  ING  Bars,  Size  of  71 

Lathing 46 

Lattice  Work . 94 

Lavatory C.  132 

Lavatory  Apparatus  .  .  196 

Lawns 16 

Leader  Drains, 

M.  42,  PI.  178,  182 

Leaders 1 82.  206,  207 

Lead  Pipes 174,  1 75 

Lime,  Cement  and  Sand  1 8 

Linen  Closet 128 

Linings  for  Fireplaces.  34 
Lintels.. S.  60,  I.  68.  C.  86 
Lintels,  Iron  (N.  Y.  B. 

Law) 69 

Loads,  Snow  and  Wind  65 

Location  of  Building..  10 

Loose  Cesspool 40 

Louvre  Boarding 96 

Stairs 120 

Mantels 124 

Mason's  Specification.  6 

Material  2,  5 

Metal  Work  . 204 

Mice  or  Fire  Stops, 

M.  38,  C.  102 

Mirrors 124 

Mortar  for  Foundations  22 

Mosquito  Frames 108 

Moulded  Brick 36 

Mullions,  Stone 60 

NATURAL     wood 

Finish 164 

New     York     Building 

Law  References: 
Anchor     Strips     for 

Wooden  Beams. .  .      85 
Bonds  for  Stonework     23 

Cement  Mortar 19 

Concrete 19 


Page. 

Constants  and   Fac- 
tor of   Safety   for 
Wooden  Beams. . .     81 
Cramps  for    Hollow 

Walls 21 

Dumb  Waiter  Shafts  135 
Factor  of  Safety  for 

Wood  Posts 81 

Fire   Cut    of   Wood 

Beams 85 

Flitch  Plates 85 

Floor  Loads 65 

Furnace  Pipes 213 

Furnaces 209 

Hot  Air  Heating. 

209,  210,  213 

Iron  Beams 71 

Lime  Mortar 19 

Lintels 69 

Mortar 19 

Registers 213 

Smoke  Pipe 210 

Stirrup  Irons 85 

Thickness  of  Wood 

Beams 81 

Tie   Rods   for    Iron 

Beams  ...    71 

Wrought   Iron   Col- 
umns       71 

Novelty  Siding,  Grades, 
etc 91 

OBSTRUCTIONS..       4 

Old  Buildings, 

Demolition  of, 

M.  8.  C.  78 

Open  Cornice,  Wood..     92 
Open  Timber.  Wood. .     92 

Outside  Blinds 108 

Outside    Finish,    Car- 
penter      92 

Outside  Plastering. 

M.  50,  C.  92 
Overflow  for  Tank....  184 

PAINTER'S  Specifi- 

.tion 160 

Painting  of  Iron  Work, 

I.  70,  71,  Pa.  164 
Painting  of  Tin.  .164,  204 

Pantries 126 

Pantry  Sink 190,  191 

Partitions 86 

Patching  of  Plaster.  . .      50 

Paths 16 

Paving,  Brick 38 

Payments 3 

Piazza 94 

Piazza  and  Porch  Tim- 
bers       82 

Picket  Fence 140 

Picture  Mould 116 

Pier  Caps  and  Bonds.  .      52 

Piers 24 

Piling 14 

Piling  Notes  and   For- 
mulae      .      15 


Page. 

Pine  Finish 166,  167 

Pipe  Casing.. C.  132,  PI.  176 
Pipe  Coverings, 

212,  2H,  222,  224 

Pipes 172,  212,  220 

Pits  around  Trees  ...       16 

Plaster  Centres 50 

Plaster  Cornices 50 

Plaster  Coves 50 

Plastering 44,  46,  48 

Plastering  Chimneys. .  32 
Plastering  Foundation.  24 
Plastering  Outside, 

M.  50,  C.  92 
Plastering,     Thickness 

of  Outside 93 

Plate  Girders 70 

Platform  and  Bridge . .        8 

Platforms,  Stone   62 

Plumber's  Specification  170 
Porcelain  Baths. . .  192,  193 
Porches,  see  Piazza ...  94 
Portland  Cement  . . .  18,  19 
Posts,  Formula  for 

Wooden 81 

Preparation  for  Tiling, 

M.  38,  C.  102 

Privy 138 

Privy  Vaults 40 

Protection     of     Stone- 
work      58 

Pump 184,  190 

Pumping 16 

Punching  of  Iron  Work     68 

Purlins,  Iron 72 

Purlins,  Spacing  of  Iron     73 

QUALITYof  Outside 

Lumber 92,  93 

Quantity  of  Brickwork  21 
Quoins 60 

DADIATION, 

2l8,  219,  221,  223,   227 

Radiators, 

218,  219,  221,  223,  227 

Range 188,  189 

Range  Boilers 188,  189 

Raking  Cornices 92 

Refrigerator 136 

Register  for  Range  ...  1 88 
Registers,  Sizes,  etc.2[  4,215 

Repair 4 

Ridge  Roll 88,  206 

Riveting  for  Iron  Work  66 
Rolling  Partitions  ....  no 
Roof,  Corrugated  Iron  74 
Roof  Gutter,  Wood. .  .  92 
Roof  Joints  for  Pipes.  180 

Roofs,   Iron 72 

Roofs,    Shingle,    Slate 

and  Flashing  for. ...     88 
Rosendale  Cement  . .  18,  19 

CAFES 182 

Sand 18 

Sand  Finish 48 


Page. 

Sash 104 

Screens,  Window 108 

Screen  Doors 108,  1 14 

Scuttle 90 

Seat  Baths 194,  195 

Seats 124 

Setting  of  Iron  Work..  66 
Setting  of  Stonework . .  58 
Sewers,  House, 

M.  42,  PI.  178 

Sheathing 86 

Sheet  Piling 12 

Shingle  on  Sides.    .     .     90 

Shingle  Roofs 88 

Shoring 12 

Shower  Bath 194,  195 

Shutters no 

Shutters,  Iron 76 

Sidewalk,  Cement ....  54 
Sidewalk  Doors,  Iron.  74 

Sidewalk,  Stone 52 

Siding 90,  91 

Sill,  Stone 60 

Sink,  Kitcken, 

C.  132,  PI.  190,  191 
Sizes  of  Steam  and  Hot 
Water  Pipes.  220,  222,  223 

Skylights 90 

Slate  Roofs. ..      88 

Slate,  Sizes,  etc. ,  of  . .  89 
Sleepers  for  Floors, 

80,  81,  102 

Slop  Hoppers 198,  199 

Snow  Loads 65 

Sodding. .    .    16 

Soil  and  Waste  Lines..  180 
Speaking  Tubes. .  158,  206 

Staining 168,  169 

Stairs 120 

Stairs,  Iron 76 

Standing     Soils      and 

Wastes 180 

Steam     Escape     for 
Range  Boilers.  .188,  189 

Steam  Heaters 217 

Steam  Heating  Specifi- 
cation    216 

Steel 66 

Steel  Clad  Bath 193 

Steel  Columns 68 

Step  Flags 52 

Steps,  Stone 62 

Steps,  Terrace. S.  52,  C.  140 

Stirrup  Irons 84 

Stone  Carving 56 

Stone  Cutting 56 

Stone  Footings 16,  22 

Stone  Foundations. ...     22 

Stone  Sidewalk 52 

Stonework,  Weight  of.     65 

Stoops,  Stone 62 

Stops  for  Mice  or  Fire, 

M.  38,  C.  102 

Stored  Material 5 

Store  Front 118 

Storm  House 138 

Stoves  and  Fuel   6 


Page. 

Straps,  Iron  for  Roofs  84 
Strength  of  Brickwork  21 
Structural  Iron  Work.  64 

Survey 10 

Swing  Shelves 138 

Switches,       Electric 
Lighting 1 54 


TABLES  : 

Bath  Tubs,  Sizes  of  193 
Brass  Pipes,  Weights 

of 175 

Brick  Quantities ....  21 
Cast  Iron  Pipes, 

Weight  of 173 

Cement  Tests 19 

Corrugated  Iron ....  73 
Earthenware  Pipes, 

Thickness  of 173 

Furnace  Heating,2i4,2i5 

Furnaces 21 1,  213 

Gas  Pipes,  Sizes  of..  203 

Hardware 143,  147 

Hot  Water  Heaters.  229 
Indirect  Radiation . .  223 
Lacing  Bars,  Sizes  of  71 
Lead  Pipes,  Weight 

of 175 

Radiators 221 

Range  Boilers,   Size 

of 189 

Ranges 211,  213 

Registers,  Size  of ..     215 

Sinks,  Size  of 191 

Slate,  Sizes  of 89 

Snow  Loads 65 

Steam  Heaters 217 

Steam  Heating 219 

Steam  Pipe,  Sizes  of  223 
Weight  of  Material..  65 

Wind  Loads 65 

Wire  Sizes 157 

Wrought  Iron  Pipes  175 

Tack  Boards 132 

Tank..     ..C.  134,  PI.  184 

Tell  Tale  Pipe 184 

Templates 52 

Templates,  Wood,  un- 
der Lintels 86 

Temporary  Enclosing.   100 
Terrace  Steps,  S.  52,  C.  140 

Terraces 16 

Terra  Cotta 36 

Testing  of  Iron 64 

Testing  of  Pipes.  .176,  177 

Tight  Cesspool 40 

Tiling,  Hearths 34 

Tiling,  Preparation  for 

M.  38,  C.  102 

Timber 80 

Time  of  Completion  . .       3 

Tin 204 

Tin  Roofs 204,  205 

Transverse  Strength ..     81 
Trap,  Grease, 

M.  40,  PI.  192,  193 


Page. 

Trap  Pits 30 

Traps 178,  182 

Trench  for  Drain  Pipe     30 

Trim ..   114 

Trusses I.  72,  C.  82 

UNDERPINNING..    12 

Urinal. . .    198 

\TALLEY,  Lining,  206,207 

Vault,  Privy 40 

Vaults 26 

Venetian  Blinds no 

Ventilating  Flues  ....  36 

Ventilation  of  Closets.  130 

Vent  Pipes 180 

\YAINSCOTING  . .  116 

Walk,  Board  ...    140 

Walk,  Cement $4 

Walk  Lights,  Iron 76 

Walk,  Stone 52 

Wall,  Finish  of 48 

Wall,  Hollow 20 

Wall,  Retaining 20 

Wardrobes 128 

Wash  Basins.. C.  132,  PI. 196 
Wash  Trays, 

C.   132,   PI.   2OO,  2OI 

Waste  Pipe. .  172,  174,  176 

Wastes  for  Safes 182 

Water  Closet, 

C.  130,  136,  PI.  196,  197 

Waterproof  Floor 38 

Water  Proofing 28 

Water  Supply, 

M.  6,  PI.  186,  187 
Water  Table. .  .S.  60,  C.  92 
Weight  of  Brickwork ..  21 
Weight  of  Material ...  65 
Weight  of  Pipes, 

172,  173,  174,  175 

Weight  of  Water 185 

Well  Supply  to  Tank. .  184 

Whitewashing 44 

Wind  Loads 65 

Window  Frames 98 

Window  Guards 44 

Wine  Cellar 138 

Winter  Steps 122 

Wiring     for     Electric 

Lighting 1 52 

Wood  Beams,  Formula 
for       Transverse 

Strength  of 81 

Wood  Carving 94 

Wood  Ceilings 118 

Wrought  Iron 66 

Wrought  Iron  Columns  68 
Wrought  Iron  Pipes, 

172,  175 

VARD  Catch  Basins, 

M.  42,  PI  178 

Yard  Drains 178 

Yard  House 138 


11 


STEEL  CEILINGS  m  WALL  DECORATIONS 


PERMANENT,  DURABLE,  FIRE  PROOF,  ORNAMENTAL. 


Suitable  for  all  classes  of  Buildings.  Can  be  applied 
over  old  plaster  without  removing  the  same.  Just 
what  is  wanted  in  even7  Store,  Hospital,  School  and 
Private  Dwelling. 


MANUFACTURED  BY 


NEW  YORK  METAL  CEILING  CO., 


614  WEST  TWENTY-FIRST  STREET, 


NEW  YORK,  N.  Y 


SEND  FOR  CATALOGUE. 


GIVE  MEASURES  FOR  ESTIMATE. 


STANDS  EVERY  HIGH  TEST 

ADAPTED   FOR 
HEAVY 

MASONR 


BEST_ROCK 
ALWAYS  RELIABLE 


UNIFORM  IN  QUALITY 


STRONGEST"  AMERICAN 
CEMENTS 


The  Perfect  Automatic  Fire  Hose  Reel 


T 


HE  STRONGEST, 

THE  MOST  EFFECTIVE, 
THE  MOST  COMPACT, 
THE  MOST  ORNAMENTAL 
AND  THE  CHEAPEST 


Device  made  for  Holding-  Hose  for  Interior  Fire  Protection. 


SPECIFY  IT  WITH  UNDERWRITERS'  LINEN  HOSE  AND 
CONTROLLING  NOZZLES. 


Manufactured  Exclusively  by 


Estate  of  Jno.  C.  N.  Guibert, 


No.  39  CORTLANDT  STREET, 


CITY 


SETTING,    pointing    and    backing    Lime    Stone,    Granite    and    Marble    with 
"LaFarge"  Cement  will  prevent  discoloration.    It  is  the  finest  ground  and 
strongest  Portland  Cement  manufactured.    It  has  been  used  with  success  for 
preventing  discoloration  in  brick  construction.     "  LaFarge  "is  the  best  cement  to  use 
for  all  purposes,  and  especially  for  the  finer  uses,  ornamental  work,  artificial  stone, 
statuary,  mouldings,  interior  and  exterior  stucco  work,  etc.     Pamphletonapplication. 


IF  YOU  SPECIFY 


Trade  Mark 


SAMSON 
SPOT -CORD 


You  can  tell  at  a  glance  that  no  other 
cord  is  substituted.  It  is  warranted  made 
of  pure  cotton,  to  have  smooth  finish  and 
perfect  braid. 

Send  to  us  for  tests  of  comparative 
durability  of  Sash  Cords,  Sash  Chains,  etc. 

SAMSON  CORDAGE  WORKS, 

BOSTON,  MASS. 


SAMSON   SPOT   CORD. 


FfcEXTBt E  ftoOff  $ SttOTER eOWPAM^     Flexifold  Doors 

and  Partitions 


NEW  YORK, 


Are  in  the  line  of  utility. 
There  are  few  building  plans 
drawn  wherein  one  or  more 
Flexifold  Closures  cannot  be 
made  to  the  great  benefit  of 
both  architect  and  owner  as  to 
cost,  economy  of  space,  and 
convenience. 


IMPROVED  FLEXIFOLD  MANUFACTURES. 


VERTICAL  FLEXIFOLD  PARTITIONS  with  ball  bearings  are  in  successful  use  in  hundreds  of  modern 
CHUKCHES,  SCHOOLS  AND  INSTITUTIONS. 

FLEXIFOLD    CLOSET    DOORS,    for    Wardrobes,    Trunk    Closets,    Book-Cases,   etc.,   allow   wide  openings 
and  save  the  space  occupied  and  annoyance  caused  by  swinging  doors. 

FLEXIFOLD  PANELED  PARTITIONS,   for  sub-divisions  of  large   parlors,    offices,    etc.,    are   handsome, 
durable,  and  save  half  the  usual  pocket  space. 

FIREPROOFED   PARTITIONS   (steel-clad,   flexifold),   for   FIRE-WALL  openings  and   SHUT-OFFS,  equal  the 
standard  fire-door  in  fire-resisting  qualities. 

HYGIENIC  SCHOOL  WARDROBES  combine  saving  of  floor  areas  with  most  approved  sanitation. 
ROLLING  WOOD  PARTITIONS  with  non-friction  joints  to  compete  with  any  manufacturer. 


Floor  Plan  of  Wardrobe  Showing-  Pocket  Space  Required  for  both  Sliding  and  Double  Fold  Doors.  - 

The  mouldings  are  1}4'  and  2"  hinged  together  with  continuous  and  wholly  concealed 
interlocking  '4 "  steel  connections,  allowing  the  same  finished  surfaces  on  both  sides  of 
the  partition. 

The  partition  or  door  is  vertically  rigid,  and  can  be  used  to  slide  on  any  angle  or 
curves  required. 

Arranged  for  shieves  and  overhead  trollevs. 


Steel=Clad  Fireproof  Flexifold  Partitions. 


Flexifold  Door  &  Shutter  Company 

74  FIFTH  AVENUE,  NEW  YORK. 


Flexible  Coilinir  Partition  in  Pocket. 

Made  Paneled  or  for  Lath  and.  Plaster.     No  charge  made  for 
plain  box.  nor  for  the  space  it  occupies. 


THATCHER 


Furnaces,  Ranges, 

Steam «  Hot  Water 

Heaters 


ARE  RECOGNIZED  BY  ARCHITECTS  AND 


THATCHER   TUBULAR    FURNACE. 


THE   PUBLIC  AS 


THATCHER   SECTIONAL  STEAM 
HEATER. 


HIGH-GRADE   AND  RELIABLE  GOODS. 


iuaranteed.< 


Send  for  Catalogue. 


Thatcher  Furnace  Co 


240  WATER  STREET, 


NEW   YORK. 


Works,  Newark,  N.  J. 


THATCHER    RANGE. 


EMPIRE   STEAM    HEATER. 


^C°J°r  i 


s  a 


IT  catches  the  eye.     It  rivets  the  mind.     Inhar- 
moniously   employed   it   offends   correct    taste. 
Harmoniously  treated  it  beautifies  and  elevates. 

Residents  are  seldom  aware  of  the  loud  and  glar- 
ing effects,  or  on  the  other  hand,  of  the  dullness 
and  lack  of  harmonious  contrasts  that  are  shown 
in  the  color  combinations  of  their  stores  and 
homes,  for  "  true  color  feeling  is  a  rare  thing." 
Glance  around  you  and  you  will  admit  that  the 
percentage  of  attractively  painted  buildings  is 
small ;  picture  to  yourself,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
impression  that  would  be  created  by  a  village  or 
city  in  which  every  store  and  dwelling  was  har- 
moniously and  artistically  painted. 


HARMONY  js  OUR 


We  have  been  students  of  the  subject  for 
half  a  century,  and  are  confident  of  our  ability 
to  help  you  not  only  to  preserve  but  to  beautify 
your  home. 

Send  for  our  sample  cards  ;  they  are  unique,  they 
show  harmonious  combinations  of  the  most  dur- 
able and  beautiful  colors  and  tints,  they  tell  where 
and  how  to  use  our  many  "helps"  to  scatter 
beauty  about  the  home.  They  include  pure 
linseed  oil  paints,  beautiful  decorative  enamels, 
perfect  wood  stains,  duraHe  bath  enamels,  prac 
tical  prepared  paints,  brilliant  gold  paints,  and 
many  others. 


We  make  ugly  homes  impossible 


PHILADELPHIA 

326   RACE   STREET 

CHICAGO 
57  N.  JEFFERSON  STREET 


JOHN    LUCAS   &    CO. 

PRACTICAL 

MANUFACTURERS 


NEW  YORK 

2  GOLD  STREET 

GlBBSBORO,   N.  J. 
PAINT  AND  VAHMSH  WORKS 


N.  &  G.  TAyisOR  CO.'S  Special 
High  Grade,  GUARANTEED 
Roofing  Plates— 

The  Taylor  "Old  Style"  Brand 

Heaviest  Coated  Tin  made  by  the 
pure  palm  oil  process.  Each  sheet 
Hand-dipped. 

"The  Taylor  Roofing  Tin' 

A  heavy,  evenly-coated  plate.  In 
appearance  similar  to  old  method. 

"  Columbia" 

A  clean,  high-grade,  heavy  coated 
terne.  Sheets  bear  a  beautiful  mottle. 

"  Knoxall " 

An  oil- finished  plate  with  a  dull  ap- 
pearance. 

ALL  OF  THE  ABOVE  ARE  FULL  WEIGHT,  FULL  COUNT,  AND 
NO  WASTERS. 


.alii iiliniiiiiiiliiiii,.iiiti 


M'ltlllllllltlill'IILIlUllllllllllllllllU 


All  of  our  high  grade  tin  plates  are 
of  the  finest  manufacture,  being 
made  from  the  best  quality  of  Black 
plate,  pure  palm  oil  only  being  used — 
no  acid  flux— and  plates  are  made  to 
wear.  The  Taylor  'Old  Style" 
Brand  is  made  exactly  the  same  as 
roofing  plates  were  first  made  in  Phil- 
adelphia in  1830 — 68  years  ago — and 
then  sold  by  us. 


ESTABLISHED    1810. 


N.  6-  G.  TAYLOR  GO. 


Manufacturers  of  Tin  Plates 


ESTABLISHED   1810 
89TH  YEAR 


PHILADELPHIA 


Warren  Chemical  &  Mfg.  Co. 


Importers  and   Refiners  of  Tpinidad  flsphalt, 


Established  J855.          Distillers  of  Coal  Tat*, 

Incorporated  I85o 


of  Roofing  and  Paving  materials, 


ALSO  CONTRACTORS  FOR... 


ASPHALT   ROOFING   AND    FLOORING 
PITCH   AND    GRAVEL   ROOFING 
BRICK   AND   TILE    ROOFING 


BRANCH  OFFICES 

BOSTON,  MASS.:    12  Pearl  Street. 
UTICA,  N.  Y.:    55  Mann  Building. 
ROCHESTER,  N.  Y.:   343  Powers  Building. 
BUFFALO,  N.  Y. :  35  to  45  Washington  Street. 
CLEVELAND,   O.;   325   Cuyahoga   Building. 
DETROIT,  MICH.:  Sullivan  Ave.  and  M.  C.  R.R. 
TOLEDO,  O.:    103  The  Nasby. 
CINCINNATI,  O.:    64  Blymyer  BuiUing. 
TORONTO,  ONT.:    157  Bay  Street. 


81  and  83  Fulton  Street 


New  York,  U.  S.  A. 


IiRUTE  &  DAX 


-MANUFACTURERS    OF- 


Varnishes  22  Japans 


84,  86,  88,  90  AND  92  VESEY  ST. 


NEWARK 
*     ' 

Superior 
Star 
Carriage 
Varnishes 

THE  ONLY  VARNISH 

EQUAL  TO 
ENGLISH  VARNISHES 


Elastic  Gear 
Heavy  Gear 
Quick  Rubbing 
Enamel  Top  Dressing 
"Wearing  Body 
Coach  Japan 

Owing  to  great  improvements  in  the  manufacture 
of  our  Coach  Varnishes,  we  are  in  the  position  of 
making  good  inducements  to  the  tiade. 


NEW  JERSEY 


A 


rchitectural 
)arnishes 


DON'T  BE 
DECEIVED 

If  you  want  the  Best 
Goods  at  the  Lowest 
Prices,  use  our 


Interior  Star  Finish. 
Exterior  Star  Finish. 
Star  Floor  Finish 
Light  Hard  Oil  Finish 
Liquid  Drier  &  Liquid  Filler 
\\Thite  Enamel  &  Spar  \Tarnish 

The  above  specialties  are  to  fill  demands  for  super- 
ior inside  and  outside  finishing  at  reasonable  prices, 
and  have  no  equal. 


WHY  DO  ARCHITECTS  ALL  SPECIFY  OUR  VARNISHES  ? 
BECAUSE  THEY  KNOW  THEM  TO  BE  THE  MOST  DURABLE. 


Our  Varnishes  are  sold  by  all  the  principal  Dealers  all  over  the  country. 
If  you  can  not  get  the  kind  you  want  from  any  Dealer,  write  to  us  direct 


"Perfect" 
Cooking 

Ranges 


--•--"•  -"-..-.  ^^" 

"PERFECT''   FRENCH    KAKGE  AND,  HIGH   CLOSET. 


Always  pleases  the  cook. 
Give  quick  meals. 
Durable,  Efficient  and 
Very  Economical. 
Thousands  in  Use. 


'  PERFECT"   DOUBLE  OVEN, RANGE. 


\    Specified  by  all  Architects  Because  of  Giving  Best  Satisfaction. 


"PERFECT" 


FURNACES 


HEAT  WHERE  OTHERS  FAIL. 

HAVE  IMMENSE  RADIATING  SURFACES. 

PRODUCING  GREATEST  RESULTS  FROM  ECONOMICAL  USE  OF  FUEL. 


More  Homes  are  Heated  with 
These  Popular  Furnaces. 
They  Please  Everybody. 
Durable  and  Powerful. 


"PERFECT"  PORTABLE  HKATING  FURNACE. 


Richardson 
&  Boynton  Co. 


MANUFACTURERS, 


232-234  Water  St.,    N.  Y. 


"PERFECT"  CAST  IRON  HEATING  FURNACE. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 

CHCtNEERING  LIBRARY 


JUN  7  -  1 


LD  2a-100m-7,'52(A2528sl6)476 


502^, . 


Engineering 
Library 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


